2014 Sierra1500 PDF

GMC Sierra Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.
/Canada/Mexico- Black plate (1,1)

5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2014 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-4 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Performance and Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-23
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-34
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-44 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-47 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-56
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-62
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Conversions and
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Trademarks and License
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
GMC Sierra Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico- Black plate (2,1)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2014 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-94 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 OnStar Additional
Special Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of Propriétaires Canadiens
the features found on your vehicle. A French language manual can be
For vehicles first sold in Canada, obtained from your dealer, at
substitute the name “General www.helminc.com, or from:
Motors of Canada Limited” for GMC
The names, logos, emblems, Division wherever it appears in this On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and manual. ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited If the vehicle has the Duramax® savant:
to, GM, the GM logo, GMC, the diesel engine, see the Duramax
GMC Truck Emblem, and SIERRA diesel supplement for additional and Helm, Incorporated
are trademarks and/or service specific information on this engine. Attention: Customer Service
marks of General Motors LLC, its 47911 Halyard Drive
Keep this manual in the vehicle for Plymouth, MI 48170
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. quick reference.
This manual describes features that Using this Manual
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are To quickly locate information about
options that you did not purchase or the vehicle, use the Index in the
due to changes subsequent to the back of the manual. It is an
printing of this owner manual. alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 22774303 A First Printing 2013 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
iv Introduction
Danger, Warnings, and Symbols

Cautions
{ Caution
The vehicle has components and
Text marked { Caution provides labels that use symbols instead of
{ Danger information that may indicate a text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
hazard that could result in injury
Text marked { Danger provides or death. It could also result in information relating to a specific
information on risk of fatal injury. possible damage to the vehicle. component, control, message,
Disregarding this information may gauge, or indicator.
endanger life. M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
{ Warning * : This symbol is shown when
Text marked { Warning provides you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information on risk of accident or A circle with a slash through it is a information.
injury. Disregarding this safety symbol which means “Do
information may lead to injury. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart j : LATCH System Child

Here are some additional symbols Restraints
that may be found on the vehicle * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to : : Oil Pressure
the Index. g : Outside Power Foldaway
0 : Adjustable Pedals Mirrors
9 : Airbag Readiness Light O : Power
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) / : Remote Vehicle Start
g : Audio®Steering Wheel Controls > : Safety Belt Reminders
or OnStar 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
$ : Brake System Warning Light _ : Tow/Haul Mode
" : Charging System d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
I : Cruise Control M : Windshield Washer Fluid
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
(: Heated Steering Wheel
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)

Steering Wheel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Lane Departure
Instrument Panel Throttle and Brake Pedal Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Rear Vision
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-25
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-16 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Universal Remote System . . . 1-26
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Performance and Maintenance
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Vehicle Features Traction Control/Electronic
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-28
Heated and Cooled Front Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-22 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-28
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Head Restraint Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-23 Driving for Better Fuel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Roadside Assistance
Passenger Sensing Driver Information Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Uplevel Shown, Base similar

5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-3
1. Instrument Panel Illumination 8. Shift Lever. See Automatic 15. Cruise Control on page 9-59.
Control on page 6-6. Transmission on page 9-34. Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
2. Integrated Trailer Brake Control Tow/Haul Selector Button System on page 9-65.
(ITBC) System (If Equipped). (If Equipped). See Tow/Haul 16. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
See Towing Equipment on Mode on page 9-38. page 5-2.
page 9-92. Range Selection Mode (Allison 17. Horn on page 5-4.
3. Exterior Lamp Controls on Transmission® and Hydra-Matic®
page 6-1. 6-Speed Button) (If Equipped). 18. Hood Release. See Hood on
See Manual Mode on page 9-37. page 10-4.
Fog Lamps on page 6-5
(If Equipped). 9. Infotainment Display. See 19. Steering Wheel Controls on
Infotainment on page 7-1 page 5-3 (If Equipped).
4. Air Vents on page 8-8.
(If Equipped). Driver Information Center (DIC)
5. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and Controls (If Equipped). See
Lane-Change Signals on 10. Light Sensor. See Automatic
Headlamp System on Driver Information Center (DIC)
page 6-4. (Base Level) on page 5-29 or
page 6-3.
Windshield Wiper/Washer on Driver Information Center (DIC)
page 5-4. 11. Infotainment on page 7-1. (Uplevel) on page 5-31.
6. Instrument Cluster on page 5-9. 12. Electronic Transfer Case 20. Heated and Cooled Front
Control (If Equipped). See Seats on page 3-8
7. Hazard Warning Flashers on Four-Wheel Drive on
page 6-4. (If Equipped).
page 9-39.
13. Data Link Connector (DLC)
(Out of View). See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5-20.
14. Parking Brake on page 9-54.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-4 In Brief
21. Climate Control Systems (with Hill Descent Control Button Initial Drive
Heater Only) on page 8-1 or (If Equipped). See Hill Descent
Climate Control Systems (with Control (HDC) on page 9-58. Information
Air Conditioning) on page 8-3 Exhaust Brake (If Equipped). This section provides a brief
(If Equipped). See “Exhaust Brake” in the overview about some of the
Dual Automatic Climate Control Duramax diesel supplement. important features that may or may
System on page 8-5 Power Take Off (PTO) Button not be on your specific vehicle.
(If Equipped). (If Equipped). See the For more detailed information, refer
22. Traction Control/Electronic Duramax diesel supplement. to each of the features which can be
Stability Control on page 9-56. Auxiliary Button (If Equipped). found later in this owner manual.
Pedal Adjust Button See Add-On Electrical
(If Equipped). See Adjustable Equipment on page 9-102. Remote Keyless Entry
Throttle and Brake Pedal on 23. Power Outlets on page 5-5. (RKE) System
page 9-24.
24. Power Outlet 110 or 220 Volt The RKE transmitter functions may
Cargo Lamp on page 6-6. Alternating Current work from up to 60 m (197 ft) away
Parking Assist Button (If Equipped). See Power from the vehicle.
(If Equipped). See Assistance Outlets on page 5-5.
Systems for Parking or Backing 25. Passenger Airbag On-Off
on page 9-63. Switch (If Equipped) (Out of
Lane Departure Warning View). See Airbag On-Off
(LDW) on page 9-68 Switch on page 3-28.
(If Equipped).
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-5
See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote Canceling a Remote Start

Keyless Entry (RKE) System
To cancel a remote start, do one of
Operation on page 2-3.
the following:
Remote Vehicle Start . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
If equipped, the engine can be
started from outside of the vehicle. until the parking lamps turn off.
. Turn on the hazard warning
Starting the Vehicle flashers.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the . Turn the vehicle on and then
vehicle. back off.
2. Press and release Q. See Remote Vehicle Start on
K: Press to unlock the driver door. page 2-6.
Press K again within three seconds 3. Immediately, press and hold /
to unlock all remaining doors. for at least four seconds or until
the turn signal lamps flash.
Q: Press to lock all doors. Lock
When the vehicle starts, the parking
and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle lamps will turn on and remain on as
Personalization on page 5-44. long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
7 : Press and release one time to control system may come on.
initiate vehicle locator. Press 7 and The engine will continue to run for
hold for at least three seconds to 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
sound the panic alarm. Press 7 10-minute time extension. Remote
again to cancel the panic alarm. start can be extended only once.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-6 In Brief
Door Locks Power Door Locks

There are several ways to lock and
unlock the vehicle.
From outside, if equipped, use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the key in the
driver door.
From inside, use the power door
locks.
From inside, pull the door handle
once to unlock the door. Pull again Base Trim
to open the door.
Crew/Extended Cab Premium, If equipped with power door locks:
Other Models Similar Q: Press to lock the doors.
K: Press to unlock the doors.
See Door Locks on page 2-7 and
Power Door Locks on page 2-8.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-7
Windows ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, Power Sliding Rear Window

or when Retained Accessory Power
Manual Windows (RAP) is active. See Retained
If equipped, turn the hand crank on Accessory Power (RAP) on
each door to manually raise or lower page 9-29.
the windows. Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to raise
Power Windows it. See Windows on page 2-18 and
Power Windows on page 2-19.
Express Windows
If equipped, the express window
feature allows the windows to be
raised or lowered without holding
the switch. If equipped, the power sliding rear
To activate express-down, press the window works when the ignition has
switch down fully and release. been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN, or when Retained
The driver window may have the Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
express-up feature. Pull the switch See Retained Accessory Power
Crew/Extended Cab Premium up fully and release to activate. (RAP) on page 9-29.
Shown, Other Models Similar . Press the switch to open the
If equipped, the driver door has a window.
switch to control all windows. Each . Pull down on the switch to close
passenger door has a switch to the window.
control that window. The power
windows work when the ignition is in The power sliding rear window
cannot be operated manually.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-8 In Brief
Seat Adjustment Power Seats Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Seats Manual Lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
To adjust a manual seat:

. Move the seat forward or If equipped, move the lever up or
rearward by sliding the control down repeatedly to increase or
1. Pull the handle at the front of forward or rearward. decrease lumbar support.
the seat. . Raise or lower the front part of See Lumbar Adjustment on
2. Slide the seat to the desired the seat cushion by moving the page 3-4.
position and release the handle. front of the control up or down.
3. Try to move the seat back and . Raise or lower the seat by
forth to be sure it is locked in moving the rear of the control up
place. or down.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3-4.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-9
Power Lumbar
. If equipped, press and hold the To adjust a manual seatback:
control up to increase upper
lumbar support and decrease 1. Lift the lever.
lower lumbar support. The seatback will automatically
Press and hold the control down fold forward.
to increase lower lumbar support 2. To recline, move the seatback
and decrease upper lumbar rearward to the desired position,
support. then release the lever to lock the
See Lumbar Adjustment on seatback in place.
page 3-4. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Reclining Seatbacks
To return the seatback to the upright
Manual Reclining Seatbacks position:
To adjust the power lumbar support, 1. Lift the lever fully without
if equipped: applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
. Press and hold the control
return to the upright position.
forward to increase or rearward
to decrease upper and lower 2. Push and pull on the seatback to
lumbar support at the same time. make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3-5.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-10 In Brief
Power Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features Heated and Cooled Front

Seats
Crew/Extended Cab Shown, Other

To recline a power seatback,
Models Similar Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
if equipped:
If equipped, the SET, "1," "2," and Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
. Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
B (Exit) buttons on the driver door Similar
are used to manually save and If equipped, the buttons are on the
. Tilt the top of the control forward recall memory settings for the driver center stack. To operate, the engine
to raise. seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable must be running.
See Reclining Seatbacks on pedals (if equipped).
page 3-5. See Memory Seats on page 3-6 and Press I to heat the driver or
Vehicle Personalization on passenger seatback only.
page 5-44. Press J to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-11
Press A to cool the driver or Safety Belts Passenger Sensing

passenger seat. System
See Heated and Cooled Front Seats The passenger sensing system,
on page 3-8. if equipped, turns off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
Head Restraint under certain conditions. No other
Adjustment airbag is affected by the passenger
sensing system.
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and If the vehicle has one of the
adjusted properly. indicators pictured in the following
illustrations, then the vehicle has a
To achieve a comfortable seating passenger sensing system for the
position, change the seatback front outboard passenger position
recline angle as little as necessary unless there is an airbag off switch
while keeping the seat and the head Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use on the instrument panel endcap.
restraint height in the proper
position. safety belts properly. If there is an airbag off switch, the
. Safety Belts on page 3-12. vehicle does not have a passenger
See Head Restraints on page 3-2 sensing system. See Airbag On-Off
and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. . How to Wear Safety Belts Switch on page 3-28 for more
Properly on page 3-13. information.
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-14. The passenger airbag status
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for indicator will be visible on the
Children (LATCH System) on overhead console when the vehicle
page 3-45. is started.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-12 In Brief
Exterior Mirrors 2. Press one of the four arrows on

the control pad to move the
Manual Mirrors mirror up, down, right or left.
If equipped, adjust the manual 3. Adjust each outside mirror so
mirror by moving it up and down or that a little of the vehicle and the
left to right to see a little of the side area behind it can be seen.
United States of the vehicle and to have a clear
view behind the vehicle. 4. Keep the selector switch in the
center position when not
See Manual Mirrors on page 2-14. adjusting either outside mirror.
Power Mirrors
Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-30 for important information.
Mirror Adjustment
Using hood-mounted air deflectors
and add-on convex mirror
attachments could decrease mirror Uplevel with Power Folding
performance. Mirrors
Base Power Mirrors
If equipped with power mirrors: 1. Press (1) or (3) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
1. Press (1) or (2) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-13
2. Press the arrows on the control Interior Mirror Steering Wheel

pad while the indicator light on
the (1) or (3) button is Adjustment Adjustment
illuminated, to move the mirror Adjust the mirror for a clear view of
up, down, right, or left. the area behind the vehicle.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so Manual Dimming Rearview Mirror
that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen. If equipped, push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
4. Press either (1) or (3) again to use to avoid glare from the
deselect the mirror. headlamps from behind. See
See Power Mirrors on page 2-14. Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2-18.
If equipped with power folding
mirrors: Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror
1. Press (2) to fold the mirrors out
to the driving position. If equipped, the mirror will To adjust the steering wheel:
automatically reduce the glare of the
2. Press (2) again to fold the 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
headlamps from behind. The
mirrors in to the folded position. the lever.
dimming feature comes on when the
See Folding Mirrors on page 2-15. vehicle is started. 2. Move the steering wheel up
The mirrors may also include a See Automatic Dimming Rearview or down.
memory function that works with the Mirror on page 2-18. 3. Release the lever to lock the
memory seats. See Memory Seats wheel in place.
on page 3-6.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-14 In Brief
Tilt and Telescope Steering Wheel 2. Pull the lever (2) toward you and Lift the switch up to move the
release, to move the steering pedals closer to your body. Press
wheel up or down. the switch down to move the
Do not adjust the steering wheel pedals away.
while driving. See Adjustable Throttle and Brake
Pedal on page 9-24.
Throttle and Brake Pedal
Adjustment Interior Lighting
If equipped, the position of the Dome Lamps
throttle and brake pedals can be
changed.
To adjust the tilt and telescope

steering wheel, if equipped:
1. Push the lever (1) down to move
the steering wheel forward or
rearward. Lift the lever up to lock
the wheel in place.
The ignition may need to be set
to the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
RUN position to disengage the There are dome lamps in the
tilt and telescope steering overhead console and the headliner,
column and allow easier if equipped.
The switch used to adjust the
adjustment.
pedals is on the center stack, below
the climate controls.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-15
To change the dome lamp settings, Exterior Lighting

press the following:
OFF: Turns the lamps off, even
when a door is open.
DOOR: The lamps come on
automatically when a door is
opened.
ON: Turns all dome lamps on.
Reading Lamps
There are reading lamps in the The exterior lamp control is on the
overhead console and the headliner, instrument panel to the left of the
if equipped. To operate, the ignition Press m or n next to each reading
lamp to turn it on or off. steering wheel.
must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position or using O : Turns off the automatic
Retained Accessory Power (RAP). headlamps and Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to
turn the automatic headlamps or
DRL back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, off
will only work when the vehicle is in
P (Park).
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-16 In Brief
AUTO: Automatically turns on the Windshield Wiper/Washer 3 INT: Turn the band up for more
headlamps at normal brightness, frequent wipes or down for less
together with the following: frequent wipes.
. Parking Lamps w : Slow wipes.
. Instrument Panel Lights 1 : Fast wipes.
. Taillamps L m : Push the paddle at the top of
. License Plate Lamps the lever to spray washer fluid on
The windshield wiper control is on the windshield.
. Roof Marker Lamps
(If Equipped) the turn signal lever. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
The windshield wipers are controlled page 5-4.
. Front/Rear Sidemarker Lamps
; : Turns on the parking lamps by turning the band with z on it.
including all lamps, except the 8: For a single wipe, turn to 8 ,
headlamps. then release. For several wipes,
5 : Turns on the headlamps hold the band on 8 longer.
together with the parking lamps and OFF: Turns the windshield
instrument panel lights. wipers off.
See:
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6-1.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6-3.
. Fog Lamps on page 6-5.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-17
Climate Controls
These systems control the heating, cooling, and ventilation.
Climate Control System (with Heater Only)
1. Fan Control 4. Defrost

2. Air Recirculation 5. TEMP (Temperature Control)
3. Air Delivery Mode Control
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-18 In Brief
Climate Control System (with Air Conditioning)
1. Fan Control 5. TEMP (Temperature Control)

2. A/C (Air Conditioning) 6. Air Recirculation
3. Air Delivery Mode Control 7. Rear Window Defogger
4. Defrost
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-19
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Range Selection Mode
The Range Selection Mode switch,

if equipped, is on the shift lever.
To enable:
1. Driver Temperature Control 9. Power Button 1. Move the shift lever to the
M (Manual Mode) position. The
2. A/C (Air Conditioning) 10. Rear Window Defogger current range will display next to
3. Air Delivery Mode Controls 11. SYNC (Synchronized the M. This is the highest
Temperature) attainable range with all lower
4. Fan Control
gears accessible. As an
5. Defrost See Climate Control Systems (with
example, when 5 (Fifth) gear is
Heater Only) on page 8-1 or Climate
6. Passenger Temperature Control selected, 1 (First) through
Control Systems (with Air
5 (Fifth) gears are available.
7. AUTO (Automatic Operation) Conditioning) on page 8-3 or Dual
Automatic Climate Control System 2. Press the plus/minus buttons on
8. Air Recirculation on page 8-5 (If Equipped). the shift lever to select the
desired range of gears for
current driving conditions. See
Manual Mode on page 9-37.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-20 In Brief
While using Range Selection Mode, Manual Transfer Case Electronic Transfer Case
cruise control and the Tow/Haul
Mode can be used.
Grade Braking is not available when
Range Selection Mode is active.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-38.
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive,
the engine's driving power can be
sent to all four wheels for extra
traction.
Transfer Case Controls
This transfer case shift lever is on This transfer case knob is to the left
The vehicle will have one of these the floor to the right of the driver. of the steering column.
three styles of transfer case
controls. Use these controls to shift
into and out of the different
four-wheel drive modes.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-21
Automatic Transfer Case 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use Vehicle Features

this setting when extra traction is
needed, such as on snowy or icy Radio(s)
roads or in most off-road situations.
N (Neutral): Shift to this setting
O : Press to turn the system on.
Press and hold to turn it off. When
only when towing the vehicle. See on, press to mute; press again to
Recreational Vehicle Towing on unmute. Turn to increase or
page 10-95 or Trailer Towing on decrease the volume.
page 9-78.
RADIO: Press to choose between
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This FM, AM, and SiriusXM®,
setting sends maximum power to all if equipped.
four wheels. Choose Four-Wheel
Drive Low when driving in deep MEDIA: Press to change the audio
This transfer case knob is to the left sand, mud, or snow, and while source between CD, USB, SD card,
of the steering column. climbing or descending steep hills. AUX, and Bluetooth® Audio,
if equipped.
The different drive options that may See Four-Wheel Drive on
be available are described following. page 9-39. {: Press to go to the Home Page.
MENU: Press to select a menu.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
setting is used for driving in most g : Press to seek the previous
street and highway situations. station or track.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel l : Press to seek the next station
Drive): This setting is ideal for use or track.
when road surface traction See Overview on page 7-3 about
conditions are variable. these and other radio features.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-22 In Brief
Storing Radio Station Presets SiriusXM Satellite Radio USB storage devices may be
Service connected, depending on the audio
Up to 25 preset stations from all
system.
bands can be stored in the favorite SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
lists in any order. Up to five stations based in the 48 contiguous United See USB Port on page 7-18, SD
can be stored in each favorite page States and 10 Canadian provinces. Card Reader on page 7-20,
and the number of favorite pages SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide Auxiliary Jack on page 7-21.
can be set. variety of programming and
To store the station to a position in commercial-free music, coast to Bluetooth®
the list, while on the active source coast, and in digital-quality sound. The Bluetooth® system allows users
main page, such as AM, FM, A fee is required to receive the with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
or SiriusXM (If Equipped), press and SiriusXM service. to make and receive hands-free
hold a Favorites/Soft Key button on For more information refer to: calls using the vehicle audio system
the faceplate. . and controls.
www.siriusxm.com or call
See “Storing Radio Station Presets” 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.). The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
under AM-FM Radio on page 7-8. must be paired with the in-vehicle
. www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-209-0079 (Canada). Bluetooth system before it can be
Setting the Clock used in the vehicle. Not all phones
See Clock on page 5-5. See Satellite Radio on page 7-10. will support all functions.
Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices

® This vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite
radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM auxiliary input jack, SD card reader,
satellite radio subscription can and either two or five USB ports in
receive SiriusXM programming. the center console. External devices
such as iPods®, laptop computers,
MP3 players, CD changers, and
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-23
See Bluetooth (Infotainment Steering Wheel Controls

Controls - Base Radio) on
page 7-31 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition - Base Radio) on
Recognition - Base Connected
Radio) on page 7-45 or Bluetooth
(Overview) on page 7-29 or
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
Base Connected Radio) on
page 7-40.
The favorite and volume switches

are on the back of the steering
If equipped, some audio controls wheel.
can be adjusted at the steering 1. Favorite: When on a radio
wheel. source, press to select the next
g: For vehicles with OnStar® or a or previous favorite. When on a
Bluetooth® system, press to interact media source, press to select
with those systems. See OnStar the next or previous track.
Overview on page 14-1 or 2. Volume: Press to increase or
“Bluetooth (Overview)” in the decrease the volume.
infotainment manual.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
c: Press to reject an incoming page 5-3.
call, or end a current call. Press to
mute or unmute the infotainment
system when not on a call.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-24 In Brief
Cruise Control SET −: Press briefly to set the If the vehicle has the base level
speed and activate cruise control. instrument cluster, the trip odometer
If cruise control is already active, reset stem is used to operate
use to decrease vehicle speed. the DIC.
*: Press to disengage cruise If the vehicle has the uplevel
control without erasing the set instrument cluster, the right steering
speed from memory. wheel controls are used to operate
See Cruise Control on page 9-59. the DIC.
Infotainment System
The base radio and base radio with
connectivity information is included
in this manual. See the infotainment
manual for information on the
5 : Press to turn the system on or uplevel radios, audio players,
off. The indicator light is on when phone, navigation system, Rear
cruise control is on and turns off Seat Entertainment (RSE), and
when cruise control is off. voice or speech recognition,
if equipped.
+ RES: Press briefly to make the
vehicle resume to a previously set
speed, or press and hold to Driver Information
accelerate. If cruise control is Center (DIC) w or x : Press to move up or
already active, use to increase down in a list.
The DIC display is in the instrument
vehicle speed. cluster. It shows the status of many o or p : Press to move between
vehicle systems. the interactive display zones in the
cluster.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-25
V : Press to open a menu or select Lane Departure Ultrasonic Parking Assist

a menu item. Press and hold to Warning (LDW) If equipped, Ultrasonic Rear Parking
reset values on certain screens.
If equipped, LDW is intended to help Assist (URPA) uses sensors on the
See Driver Information Center (DIC) avoid unintentional lane departures rear bumper to assist with parking
(Base Level) on page 5-29 or Driver at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or and avoiding objects while in
Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) greater. LDW uses a camera sensor R (Reverse). It operates at speeds
on page 5-31. to detect the lane markings. The less than 8 km/h (5 mph). URPA
may display a warning triangle on
LDW indicator, @, appears green if
Forward Collision Alert a lane marking is detected. If the
the Rear Vision Camera screen and
(FCA) System a graphic on the instrument cluster
vehicle departs the lane, the to provide the object distance. In
If equipped, FCA is intended to help indicator will change to amber and addition, multiple beeps or seat
avoid or reduce the harm caused by flash. In addition, the driver seat will pulses may occur if very close to an
front-end crashes. FCA provides a pulse or beeps will sound. object.
green indicator when a vehicle is See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) The vehicle may also have the Front
detected directly ahead. It provides on page 9-68. Parking Assist system.
a flashing visual alert and pulses
the driver seat, or beeps, when Rear Vision See Assistance Systems for Parking
approaching a vehicle directly or Backing on page 9-63.
ahead too quickly. FCA also Camera (RVC)
provides a visual alert if following If equipped, the RVC displays a Power Outlets
another vehicle much too closely. view of the area behind the vehicle,
Accessory power outlets can be
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) on the center stack display, when
used to plug in electrical equipment,
System on page 9-65. the vehicle is shifted into
such as a cell phone, MP3
R (Reverse).
player, etc.
See Assistance Systems for Parking
or Backing on page 9-63.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-26 In Brief
The vehicle may be equipped with This system provides a way to Sunroof
four accessory power outlets: replace up to three remote control
. One or two on the center stack transmitters used to activate
below the climate control devices such as garage door
system. openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
. One inside the center console.
Read the instructions completely
. One on the rear of the center before attempting to program the
console, if equipped. transmitter. Because of the steps
Remove the cover to access and involved, it may be helpful to have
replace when not in use. another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
See Power Outlets on page 5-5.
See Universal Remote System on
Universal Remote System page 5-47.
If equipped, the sunroof only
operates when the ignition is in
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9-29.
Vent: From the closed position,
If equipped with the Universal press the rear of the TILT switch to
Remote System, these buttons will vent the sunroof.
be in the front overhead console.
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To
open the sunroof, press and hold
the rear of the SLIDE switch until
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-27
the sunroof reaches the desired

. To turn off both traction control
position. Press and hold the front of
Performance and and StabiliTrak, press and hold
the SLIDE switch to close it. Maintenance g until i and g illuminate in the
instrument cluster and the
Express-Open/Express-Close: To appropriate DIC message
express-open the sunroof, fully Traction Control/ displays. See Ride Control
press and release the rear of the Electronic Stability System Messages on page 5-38.
SLIDE switch until the sunroof Control
reaches the desired position. To . Press and release g again to
express-close the sunroof, fully The vehicle has a traction control turn on both systems.
press and release the front of the system that limits wheel spin and
the StabiliTrak system that assists
. StabiliTrak will automatically turn
SLIDE switch. Press the switch
with directional control of the vehicle on if the vehicle exceeds
again to stop it.
in difficult driving conditions. Both 56 km/h (35 mph). Traction
When the sunroof is opened, an air control will remain off.
systems come on automatically
deflector will automatically raise.
when the vehicle is started and See Traction Control/Electronic
The air deflector will retract when
begins to move. Stability Control on page 9-56.
the sunroof is closed.
. To turn off traction control, press
The sunroof also has a sunshade
that can be pulled forward to block and release g on the center
the rays of the sun. Open and close stack. The traction off light i
the sunshade manually. displays in the instrument
If an object is in the path of the cluster. The appropriate DIC
sunroof while it is closing, the message displays. See Ride
anti-pinch feature will detect the Control System Messages on
object and stop the sunroof. page 5-38.
See Sunroof on page 2-22.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-28 In Brief
Tire Pressure Monitor tire pressures are getting low and 2. Press and hold the V button on
the tires need to be inflated to the the DIC for more than
This vehicle may have a Tire proper pressure.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). five seconds. The oil life will
The TPMS does not replace normal change to 100%.
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain The oil life system can also be reset
the correct tire pressures. as follows:
See Tire Pressure Monitor System 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
on page 10-63. the engine off.
Engine Oil Life System 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal

slowly three times within
The low tire pressure warning light The engine oil life system calculates five seconds.
alerts to a significant loss in engine oil life based on vehicle use
pressure of one of the vehicle's 3. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
and, on most vehicles, displays a
tires. If the warning light comes on, on the DIC. If the display shows
DIC message when it is necessary
stop as soon as possible and inflate 100%, the system is reset.
to change the engine oil and filter.
the tires to the recommended The oil life system should be reset See Engine Oil Life System on
pressure shown on the Tire and to 100% only following an oil page 10-13.
Loading Information label. See change.
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-15.
The warning light will remain on until Resetting the Oil Life System
the tire pressure is corrected. To reset the Engine Oil Life System:
The low tire pressure warning light 1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
may come on in cool weather when on the DIC. See Driver
the vehicle is first started, and then Information Center (DIC) (Base
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This Level) on page 5-29 or Driver
may be an early indicator that the Information Center (DIC)
(Uplevel) on page 5-31.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In Brief 1-29
. Always follow posted speed
E85 or FlexFuel limits or drive more slowly when
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13-5.
Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can conditions require.
use either unleaded gasoline or
ethanol fuel containing up to 85%
. Keep vehicle tires properly OnStar®
inflated.
ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuel If equipped, this vehicle has a
on page 9-72. For all other vehicles, . Combine several trips into a comprehensive, in-vehicle system
use only the unleaded gasoline single trip. that can connect to a live Advisor
described under Recommended . Replace the vehicle's tires with for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Fuel on page 9-70. the same TPC Spec number Connection, and Diagnostic
molded into the tire's sidewall Services when activated. See
Driving for Better Fuel near the size. OnStar Overview on page 14-1.
Economy . Follow recommended scheduled
Driving habits can affect fuel maintenance.
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy Roadside Assistance
possible. Program
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate U.S.: 1-888-881-3302
smoothly.
.
TTY Users (U.S. Only):
Brake gradually and avoid 1-888-889-2438
abrupt stops.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
. Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time. New GMC owners are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance
. When road and weather Program.
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1-30 In Brief
2 NOTES
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keys and Locks
Windows Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
2-14 Keys
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keys and Locks Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 { Warning
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-16 Leaving children in a vehicle with
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 the ignition key is dangerous and
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 children or others could be
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 seriously injured or killed. They
Interior Mirrors could operate the power windows
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-18 or other controls or make the
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-18
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 vehicle move. The windows will
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 function with the keys in the
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-9 ignition, and children or others
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Windows could be caught in the path of a
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 closing window. Do not leave
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 children in a vehicle with the
Doors Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 ignition key.
Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Vehicle Security Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Roof
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . 2-11 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-13
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Programming Keys Programming without a

Recognized Key
Follow these procedures to program
up to eight keys to the vehicle. Program a new key to the vehicle
when a recognized key is not
Programming with a available. Canadian regulations
Recognized Key require that owners see their dealer.
To program a new key: If there are no currently recognized
1. Insert the original, already keys available, follow this procedure
programmed key in the ignition to program the first key.
and turn to the key to the ON/ This procedure will take
RUN position. approximately 30 minutes to
2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and complete for the first key. The
remove the key. vehicle must be off and all of the
keys you wish to program must be
3. Insert the new key to be
with you.
programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within 1. Insert the new vehicle key into
five seconds. the ignition.
The security light will turn off 2. Turn to ON/RUN. The security
once the key has been light will come on.
programmed. 3. Wait 10 minutes until the
4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additional security light turns off.
keys are to be programmed. 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
The key is used for the ignition and If a key is lost or damaged, see your
all door locks. dealer to have a new key made.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two more Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry
times. After the third time, turn to
ON/RUN; the key is learned and
(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation
all previously known keys will no See Radio Frequency Statement on The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
longer work with the vehicle. page 13-15. transmitter functions may work up to
Remaining keys can be learned by If there is a decrease in the RKE 60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.
following the procedure in operating range: Other conditions can affect the
“Programming with a performance of the transmitter. See
. Check the distance. The
Recognized Key.” Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter may be too far from
The key has a bar-coded key tag the vehicle. System on page 2-3.
that the dealer or qualified locksmith . Check the location. Other
can use to make new keys. Store
vehicles or objects may be
this information in a safe place, not
blocking the signal.
in the vehicle.
. Check the transmitter's battery.
See your dealer if a replacement
See “Battery Replacement” later
key or additional key is needed.
in this section.
If it becomes difficult to turn a key, . If the transmitter is still not
inspect the key blade for debris.
working correctly, see your
Periodically clean with a brush
dealer or a qualified technician
or pick.
for service.
With an active OnStar subscription,
an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
Overview on page 14-1.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
when Q is pressed again within exterior lamps may turn on. See
three seconds. See Vehicle Vehicle Personalization on
Personalization on page 5-44. page 5-44.
Pressing Q arms the content Pressing K on the RKE transmitter

theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle disarms the content theft-deterrent
Alarm System on page 2-11. system. See Vehicle Alarm System
on page 2-11.
If equipped with auto mirror folding,
If equipped with auto mirror folding,
pressing and holding Q for
one second will fold mirrors. The pressing and holding K for
auto mirror folding feature will not one second will unfold mirrors. The
operate unless it is enabled. See auto mirror folding feature will not
With Remote Start (without Vehicle Personalization on operate unless it is enabled. See
Remote Start Similar) page 5-44. Vehicle Personalization on
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): page 5-44.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
If equipped, / is used to start the only the driver door. If K is pressed
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic
engine from outside the vehicle Alarm): Press and release one
again within three seconds, all time to initiate vehicle locator. The
using the RKE transmitter. See remaining doors unlock. The interior
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-6. turn signal lamps flash and the horn
lamps may come on and stay on for sounds three times.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. 20 seconds or until the ignition is
turned on. Press and hold 7 for more than
If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the turn If enabled through the DIC, the turn three seconds to sound the panic
signal lamps flash once to indicate signal lamps flash twice to indicate alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
locking has occurred. If enabled unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle and the horn sounds repeatedly for
through the DIC, the horn chirps Personalization on page 5-44. 30 seconds. The alarm turns off
If enabled through the DIC, the when the ignition is moved to ON/
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
RUN or 7 is pressed again. The

ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
{ Caution
the panic alarm to work. When replacing the battery, do
Programming Transmitters to not touch any of the circuitry on
the Vehicle the transmitter. Static from your
body could damage the
Only RKE transmitters programmed transmitter.
to this vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and To replace the battery:
programmed through your dealer.
Each vehicle can have up to
eight transmitters programmed to it. 2. Press and slide the battery down
See your dealer for transmitter toward the pocket of the
programming. transmitter in the direction of the
key ring. Do not use a metal
Battery Replacement object
Replace the battery in the 3. Remove the battery.
transmitter soon if the REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY 4. Insert the new battery, positive
message displays in the DIC. side facing up. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
5. Push together the transmitter
1. Separate and remove the back back cover top side first, and
cover of the transmitter with a then the bottom towards the
flat, thin object, such as a coin. key ring.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Remote Vehicle Start when doing so. Check local 2. Immediately press and hold /
regulations for any requirements on until the turn signal lamps flash
If equipped, this feature starts the remote starting of vehicles.
engine from outside of the vehicle. or for at least four seconds.
It may also start up the vehicle's Do not use the remote start feature When the vehicle starts, the
heating or air conditioning systems if the vehicle is low on fuel. The parking lamps will turn on. The
and rear window defogger. Normal vehicle may run out of fuel. doors will be locked and the
operation of the system will return The RKE transmitter range may be climate control system may
after the key is turned to the ON/ less while the vehicle is running. come on.
RUN position. The engine will continue to run
Other conditions can affect the
The climate control system will use performance of the transmitter. See for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps
the previous settings during a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) for a 10-minute time extension.
remote start. The rear defog may System on page 2-3. Remote start can be extended
come on during remote start based only once.
on cold ambient conditions. The
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This
button will be on the RKE After entering the vehicle during a
rear fog indicator light does not remote start, insert and turn the key
come on during remote start. transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start. to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
If the vehicle has heated seats, the
heated seats will turn on during Starting the Engine Using Remote Extending Engine Run Time
colder outside temperatures and will Start The engine run time can be
shut off when the key is turned to 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the extended by another 10 minutes,
ON/RUN. See Heated and Cooled vehicle and press and if during the first 10 minutes
Front Seats on page 3-8. release Q. Steps 1–2 are repeated while the
Laws in some communities may engine is still running. This provides
restrict the use of remote starters. a total of 20 minutes.
For example, some laws may The remote start can only be
require a person using the remote extended once.
start to have the vehicle in view
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
When the remote start is extended, The vehicle can be remote started Door Locks
the second 10 minute period is two separate times between driving
added on to the first 10 minutes for sequences. The engine will run for
a total of 20 minutes. 10 minutes after each remote start. { Warning
A maximum of two remote starts, Once two remote starts, or a single Unlocked doors can be
or a remote start with an extension, remote start with one time extension dangerous.
are allowed between ignition cycles. has been done, the vehicle must be . Passengers, especially
The vehicle's ignition must be started with the key. After the key is
children, can easily open the
changed to ON/RUN/START and removed from the ignition, the
doors and fall out of a moving
then back to OFF before the remote vehicle can be remote started again.
vehicle. When a door is
start procedure can be used again. The vehicle cannot be remote locked, the handle will not
started if the key is in the ignition, open it. The chance of being
Canceling a Remote Start if the hood is not closed, or if there thrown out of the vehicle in a
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the is an emission control system crash is increased if the
vehicle and press and hold / malfunction and the malfunction doors are not locked. So, all
until the parking lamps turn off. indicator lamp is on. passengers should wear
. Also, the engine will turn off during a safety belts properly and the
Turn on the hazard warning doors should be locked
flashers. remote vehicle start if the coolant
temperature gets too high or if the whenever the vehicle is
. Turn the ignition on and then oil pressure gets low. driven.
back off. (Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Warning (Continued)
There are several ways to lock and Power Door Locks
unlock the vehicle.
. Young children who get into From outside, use the Remote
unlocked vehicles may be Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
unable to get out. A child can the key in the driver door.
be overcome by extreme heat From inside, use the power door
and can suffer permanent locks. See Power Door Locks on
injuries or even death from page 2-8.
heat stroke. Always lock the From inside, pull the door handle
vehicle whenever leaving it. once to unlock the door. Pull the
. Outsiders can easily enter handle again to open the door.
through an unlocked door See Vehicle Alarm System on
when you slow down or stop page 2-11.
the vehicle. Locking the doors Crew/Extended Cab Premium
can help prevent this from Shown, Other Models Similar
happening.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Pressing the power lock switch Lockout Protection

twice overrides the delayed locking
feature and immediately locks all If the driver side power door lock
doors. switch is pressed when the driver
door is open and the key is in the
This feature will not operate if the ignition, all of the doors will lock and
key is in the ignition. then the driver door will unlock.
Turn delayed locking on or off using This feature may be turned off and
vehicle personalization. See Vehicle on through Vehicle Personalization.
Personalization on page 5-44. See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-44.
Automatic Door Locks
Base Trim The doors will lock automatically
Q: Press to lock the doors. when all doors are closed, the
ignition is on, and the shift lever is
K: Press to unlock the doors. moved out of P (Park).
Delayed Locking To unlock the doors:
If equipped, when locking the doors

. Press K on a door.
with the power lock switch and a . Shift the transmission into
door open, the doors will lock P (Park).
five seconds after the last door is
closed. Three chimes signal that
delayed locking is in use.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Safety Locks Doors To shut the tailgate, firmly push it

upward until it latches.
The rear door safety locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear Tailgate After closing the tailgate, pull it back
doors from inside the vehicle. to be sure it latches securely.
{ Warning Tailgate Removal
It is extremely dangerous to ride The tailgate can be removed to
on the tailgate, even when the allow for different loading situations.
vehicle is operated at low speeds. Assistance may be needed with the
People riding on the tailgate can removal to avoid damage to the
vehicle.
easily lose their balance and fall
in response to vehicle On vehicles with a Rear Vision
maneuvers. Falling from a moving Camera, it must be disconnected
vehicle may result in serious before removing the tailgate. See
injuries or death. Do not allow Driver Assistance Systems on
people to ride on the tailgate. Be page 9-62.
Crew/Extended Cab Premium sure everyone in your vehicle is in
Shown, Others Similar a seat and using a safety belt
properly.
Press { to activate the safety locks
on the rear doors. The indicator light On vehicles with a lock on the
comes on when activated. tailgate, use the key to lock or
If the indicator light flashes, the unlock the tailgate.
feature may not be working properly. Open the tailgate by lifting up on its
handle while pulling the
tailgate down.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To remove the tailgate: 2. With the tailgate about halfway Vehicle Security
open, lift the right edge of the
tailgate from the lower pivot. This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
On vehicles with the tailgate
the vehicle impossible to steal.
assist feature, raise the tailgate
nearly all the way to the closed
position prior to removing the Vehicle Alarm System
left edge.
3. Move the tailgate to the right and
away to release the left edge.
Reverse this procedure to reinstall
the tailgate. Make sure the tailgate
is secure.
1. Raise the tailgate and support it
firmly. Pull out and hold the
cable retaining clip (1). Push the
cable (3) up and off of the If equipped with the anti-theft alarm
bolt (2). Repeat on the system, the indicator light, on the
other side. instrument panel near the
windshield, indicates the status of
the system.
Off: Disarmed.
On Solid: Vehicle is secured
during the delay to arm the system.
Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.
A door, or the hood is open.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Slow Flash: Alarm system is If the driver door is opened without To avoid setting off the alarm by
armed. first unlocking the RKE transmitter, accident:
the horn will chirp and the lights will . Lock the vehicle after all
Arming the Alarm System flash to indicate pre-alarm. If the occupants have left the vehicle
1. Turn off the vehicle. vehicle is not started, or the door is and all doors are closed.
2. Lock the vehicle with one of the not unlocked by pressing K on the
RKE transmitter during the
. Always unlock a door with the
following: RKE transmitter.
.
10-second pre-alarm , the alarm will
Use the RKE transmitter. be activated. Unlocking the driver door with the
. With a door open, press Q If a door, the hood, is opened key will not disarm the system or
on the interior of the door. without first disarming the system, turn off the alarm.
3. After 30 seconds the alarm the turn signals will flash and the How to Detect a Tamper
system will arm, and the horn will sound for about Condition
indicator light will begin to slowly 30 seconds. The alarm system will
flash indicating the alarm system then re-arm to monitor for the next If K is pressed on the RKE
unauthorized event. transmitter and the horn chirps three
is operating. Pressing Q on the times, an alarm occurred previously
RKE transmitter a second time Disarming the Alarm System while the alarm system was armed.
will bypass the 30-second delay To disarm the alarm system or turn
and immediately arm the alarm off the alarm if it has been activated:
system.
The theft-deterrent alarm system will
. Press K on the RKE transmitter.
not arm if the doors are locked with . Start the vehicle.
the key.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Immobilizer The security light, in the instrument It is possible for the immobilizer
cluster, comes on if there is a system to learn new or replacement
See Radio Frequency Statement on problem with arming or disarming keys. Up to eight keys can be
page 13-15. the theft-deterrent system. programmed for the vehicle. To
When trying to start the vehicle, the program additional keys, see Keys
Immobilizer Operation security light comes on briefly when on page 2-1. To program additional
the ignition is turned on. transmitters, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
If the engine does not start and the page 2-3.
security light stays on, there is a
problem with the system. Turn the Do not leave the key or device that
ignition off and try again. disarms or deactivates the vehicle
alarm system in the vehicle.
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged, See your dealer to get a new key
This vehicle has a passive
try another ignition key. It may be blank cut exactly as the ignition key
theft-deterrent system.
necessary to check the fuse. See that operates the system.
The system does not have to be
Fuses on page 10-42. If the engine
manually armed or disarmed.
still does not start with the other key,
The vehicle is automatically the vehicle needs service. If the
immobilized when the vehicle is vehicle does start, the first key may
turned off. be faulty. See your dealer.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the key is turned to
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
or START from the LOCK/OFF
position.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Exterior Mirrors Using hood-mounted air deflectors

and add-on convex mirror
seat. The convex mirror can be
adjusted manually to the driver
attachments could decrease mirror preferred position for better vision.
Convex Mirrors performance. The mirror may have a turn signal
arrow that flashes in the direction of
{ Warning Trailer-Tow Mirrors the turn or lane change.
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther Power Mirrors
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex

shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat. If equipped, adjust trailer-tow
mirrors for a clearer view of the
Base Power Mirrors
Manual Mirrors objects behind you. Manually pull
out the mirror head to extend it for If equipped with power mirrors:
If equipped, adjust manual mirrors
better visibility when towing a trailer.
by moving the mirror up and down 1. Press (1) or (2) to select the
or left to right to see a little of the The lower portion of the mirror is driver or passenger side mirror.
side of the vehicle and to have a convex. A convex mirror's surface is
clear view behind the vehicle. curved to see more from the driver
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2. Press one of the four arrows on 2. Press one of the four arrows on Folding Mirrors
the control pad to move the the control pad while the
mirror in the desired direction. indicator light on button (1) or (2)
3. Adjust each outside mirror so is illuminated, to move the mirror
that a little of the vehicle and the in the desired direction.
area behind it can be seen. 3. Adjust each outside mirror so
4. Move the selector switch to the that a little of the vehicle and the
center position when not area behind it can be seen.
adjusting either outside mirror. 4. Press either (1) or (2) again to
deselect the mirror.
If you do not deselect the mirror, the
feature will deactivate automatically
after one minute.
If equipped, the mirrors may include Power Folding
a memory function that works with
the memory seats. See Memory If equipped with power folding
Seats on page 3-6. mirrors:
1. Press g (2) to fold the mirrors
out to the driving position.
2. Press g (2) again to fold the
Crew/Extended Cab Premium mirrors in to the folded position.
Shown, Other Models Similar
The mirrors may also include a
1. Press (1) or (2) to select the memory function that works with the
driver or passenger side mirror. memory seats. See Memory Seats
on page 3-6.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Resetting the Power Folding Manually fold the mirrors inward to mirrors. If the vehicle has trailer-tow
Mirrors prevent damage when going mirrors, only the upper glass of the
Reset the power folding mirrors if: through an automatic car wash. mirror is heated. The lower convex
part of the towing mirrors is not
. The mirrors are accidentally Auto Folding Mirrors heated.
obstructed while folding. If equipped, with the ignition off, See “Rear Window Defogger” under
. They are accidentally manually press and hold Q on the RKE Climate Control Systems (with
folded/unfolded. transmitter for approximately Heater Only) on page 8-1 or Climate
. The mirrors will not stay in the one second to fold the mirrors. Control Systems (with Air
unfolded position. Press and hold K on the RKE Conditioning) on page 8-3 or Dual
transmitter to unfold the mirrors. Automatic Climate Control System
. The mirrors vibrate at normal on page 8-5.
driving speeds. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2-3.
Fold and unfold the mirrors three
This feature is turned on and off
Automatic Dimming
times using the mirror controls to Mirror
reset them to their normal position. through Vehicle Personalization.
A popping noise may be heard. This See Vehicle Personalization on If equipped, the driver outside mirror
sound is normal after a manual page 5-44. automatically adjusts for the glare of
folding operation. Turn Signal Indicator the headlamps from behind. This
feature comes on when the vehicle
Manual Folding If equipped, LED lights on the mirror is started.
If equipped, push the mirror toward flash in the direction of the turn or
the vehicle to fold. Push the mirror lane change. Blind Spot Mirrors
outward to return to its original If equipped, there is a small convex
position. Heated Mirrors
mirror built into the upper and outer
1 (Rear Window Defogger): corner of the driver outside rearview
If equipped, the Rear Window mirror. It can show objects that may
Defogger also heats the side be in the vehicle's blind zone.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Driving with the Blind Spot 1. When the approaching vehicle is vehicle. Check the blind spot
Mirror a long distance away, the image mirror for a vehicle in the blind
in the main mirror is small and zone. Then, glance over your
near the inboard edge of the shoulder to double check before
mirror. moving slowly into the
2. As the vehicle gets closer, the adjacent lane.
image in the main mirror gets
larger and moves outboard. Park Tilt Mirrors
3. As the vehicle enters the blind If equipped with the memory
zone, the image transitions from package, the passenger and/or
the main mirror to the blind spot driver mirror tilts to a preselected
mirror. position when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse). This feature allows the
4. When the vehicle is in the blind driver to view the curb when parallel
zone, the image only appears in parking. The mirror(s) return to the
the blind spot mirror. original position when the vehicle is
Using the Outside Mirror with shifted out of R (Reverse), the
the Blind Spot Mirror ignition is turned off or to OFF/
LOCK, or if the vehicle is driven in
1. Set the main mirror so that the reverse above a predetermined
side of the vehicle can just be speed.
seen and the blind spot mirror
has an unobstructed view. Turn this feature on or off through
vehicle personalization. See Vehicle
2. When checking for traffic or Personalization on page 5-44.
before changing a lane, look at
the main driver/passenger side
Actual Mirror View mirror to observe traffic in the
adjacent lane, behind your
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Interior Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Windows

If equipped, push the tab forward for
Interior Rearview Mirrors daytime use and pull it rearward for { Warning
Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear nighttime use to avoid glare from
the headlamps from behind. Never leave a child, a helpless
view of the area behind your
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
vehicle.
Automatic Dimming especially with the windows
If equipped with OnStar, the vehicle closed in warm or hot weather.
may have three control buttons at Rearview Mirror
They can be overcome by the
the bottom of the mirror. See your If equipped, the mirror will extreme heat and suffer
dealer for more information about automatically reduce the glare of the permanent injuries or even death
OnStar and how to subscribe to it. headlamps from behind. The from heat stroke.
See OnStar Overview on page 14-1. dimming feature comes on each
Do not spray glass cleaner directly time the vehicle is started.
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The vehicle aerodynamics are

designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof, if equipped.
Manual Windows
If equipped, turn the hand crank on
each door to manually raise or lower
the manual windows. Crew/Extended Cab Premium Regular Cab Uplevel Shown, Other
Shown, Other Models Similar Models Similar
Power Windows If equipped, the driver door has a
switch to control all windows. Each
{ Warning passenger door has a switch to
control that window.
Children could be seriously The power windows:
injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Never
. Can be operated with the
leave keys in a vehicle with ignition in ON/RUN or ACC/
children. When there are children ACCESSORY.
in the rear seat, use the window . Can be operated in Retained
lockout button to prevent Accessory Power (RAP). See
operation of the windows. See Retained Accessory Power
Keys on page 2-1. (RAP) on page 9-29.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. Will stop operation when any Programming the Power Express Window Anti-Pinch
door is opened. Windows Feature
Press the switch down to lower the If the battery on the vehicle has If any object is in the path of the
window, and pull up the front of the been recharged or disconnected, window when express-up is active,
switch to raise the window. or is not working, the driver power the window stops at the obstacle
Express-Down Windows window will need to be and auto-reverses to a preset
reprogrammed for the express-up factory position. Weather conditions
If equipped, the express-down feature to work. such as severe icing also cause the
feature allows the window to be window to auto-reverse. The
lowered without holding the switch. To reprogram the power windows:
window returns to normal operation
Press the window switch fully and 1. Close all doors. once the obstacle or condition is
release it to activate the removed.
express-down feature. The 2. Place the ignition in ACC/
express-down feature can be ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/ Express Window Anti-Pinch
canceled at any time by briefly START.
Override
pressing the switch. 3. From any open position, pull the
Express-Up Window
power window switch up until the
window is fully closed.
{ Warning
If equipped, the driver window 4. Hold the switch up for If express override is activated,
express-up feature allows the approximately two seconds after the window will not reverse
window to be raised without holding the window is fully closed. automatically. You or others could
the switch. Pull the window switch be injured and the window could
up fully and release it to activate the The window is now reprogrammed.
be damaged. Before you use
express-up feature. The express-up express override, make sure that
feature can be canceled at any time all people and obstructions are
by briefly pulling the switch.
clear of the window path.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The anti-pinch feature can be Window Lockout Rear Windows

overridden in a supervised mode.
Hold the window switch in the Power Sliding Rear Window
partially or fully pulled up position.
The window rises for as long as the
switch is held. Once the switch is
released, the express mode is
reactivated.
In this mode, the window can still
close on an object in its path. Use
care when using the override mode.
Crew/Extended Cab Premium

Shown, Other Models Similar
o (Window Lockout): The driver If equipped, the power sliding rear
door power window switch has a window works when the ignition has
lockout feature. This feature been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY
prevents the rear windows from or ON/RUN, or when Retained
operating, except from the driver Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
position. Press the switch to engage See Retained Accessory Power
or disengage the lockout feature. An (RAP) on page 9-29.
indicator light on the switch will
come on when the lockout feature is
. Press the switch to open the
engaged, and will go off when window.
disengaged. . Pull the switch to close the
window.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The power sliding rear window Roof Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To

cannot be operated manually. open the sunroof, press and hold
the rear of the SLIDE switch until
Sun Visors Sunroof the sunroof reaches the desired
position. Press and hold the front of
the SLIDE switch to close it
Express-Open/Express-Close: To
express-open the sunroof, fully
press and release the rear of the
SLIDE switch until the sunroof
reaches the desired position. To
express-close the sunroof, fully
press and release the front of the
SLIDE switch. Press the switch
Pull the sun visor down to block again to stop it.
glare. If equipped, detach the sun When the sunroof is opened, an air
visor from the center mount to pivot deflector will automatically raise.
to the side window or to extend If equipped, the sunroof operates
The air deflector will retract when
along the rod. when the ignition is in ACC/
the sunroof is closed.
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is The sunroof also has a sunshade,
active. See Retained Accessory which can be pulled forward to block
Power (RAP) on page 9-29. sun rays. The sunshade must be
opened and closed manually.
Vent: From the closed position,
press the rear of the TILT switch to If an object is in the path of the
vent the sunroof. sunroof while it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Dirt and debris may collect on the

sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation or noise. It could also plug
the water drainage system.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof
tracks.
If water is seen dripping into the
water drainage system, this is
normal.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2 NOTES
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Adding Equipment to the

Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-35
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-36
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Head Restraints Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-20
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Child Restraints
Replacing Safety Belt System Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Front Seats Infants and Young
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-41
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-43
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-23 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 When Should an Airbag for Children (LATCH
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Heated and Cooled Front What Makes an Airbag Replacing LATCH System
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-55
How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 (Center Front Seat) . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Rear Seats (Extended Cab
What Will You See after an Securing Child Restraints
Full Bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 (Front Outboard
Rear Seats (Split Bench) . . . . . 3-11
Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-28 Passenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
Front Seats
The vehicle’s front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/ Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
spinal injury in a crash. Do not top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
drive until the head restraints for height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
all occupants are installed and head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
adjusted properly.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint
down. Try to move the head
restraint after the button is released
to make sure that it is locked in
place.
On some models, the head
restraints adjust forward and
rearward. To adjust the head
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
restraint forward, grasp the head Front Seats To adjust a manual seat:
restraint and pull forward to the 1. Pull the handle at the front of
desired locking position. To adjust
the head restraint rearward, grasp Seat Adjustment the seat.
the head restraint and pull forward 2. Slide the seat to the desired
fully until the mechanism releases { Warning position and release the handle.
and allows the head restraint to 3. Try to move the seat back and
return to the full rear position. You can lose control of the
forth to be sure it is locked in
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver place.
The front seat outboard head
seat while the vehicle is moving.
restraints are not designed to be To adjust the seatback, see
Adjust the driver seat only when
removed. Reclining Seatbacks on page 3-5.
the vehicle is not moving.
Rear Seats To adjust the lumbar support, see
The rear seat has adjustable Lumbar Adjustment on page 3-4.
headrests in the outboard seating
positions. Center Seat
The height of the headrest can be If equipped, the center front
adjusted. Pull the headrest up to seatback doubles as an armrest and
raise it. To lower the headrest, push cupholder/storage area for the driver
the headrest down. and passenger when the center
front seat is not used. Do not use it
If you are installing a child restraint as a seating position when the
in the rear seat, see “Securing a seatback is folded down.
Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3-45.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Power Seat Adjustment To adjust the lumbar support, see Power Lumbar
Lumbar Adjustment on page 3-4.
Some vehicles are equipped with a
feature that activates a vibrating
pulse alert in the driver seat to help
the driver avoid crashes. See Driver
Assistance Systems on page 9-62.
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: To adjust the power lumbar support,

if equipped:
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control . Press and hold the control
forward or rearward. forward to increase or rearward
to decrease upper and lower
. Raise or lower the front part of lumbar support at the same time.
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
. Raise or lower the seat by
moving the rear of the control up
or down. If equipped, move the lever up or
down repeatedly to increase or
To adjust the seatback, see decrease lumbar support.
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3-5.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. If equipped, press and hold the
control up to increase upper Warning (Continued)
lumbar support and decrease
lower lumbar support. The lap belt could go up over
your abdomen. The belt forces
Press and hold the control down
would be there, not at your pelvic
to increase lower lumbar support
and decrease upper lumbar bones. This could cause serious
support. internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
Reclining Seatbacks vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
{ Warning back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly. Do not have a seatback reclined if
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is moving.
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled Manual Reclining Seatbacks
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job. { Warning
The shoulder belt will not be If either seatback is not locked, it
against your body. Instead, it will could move forward in a sudden
be in front of you. In a crash, you stop or crash. That could cause
could go into it, receiving neck or injury to the person sitting there.
other injuries. Always push and pull on the
(Continued) seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To return the seatback to the upright

. Tilt the top of the control forward
position: to raise.
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
Memory Seats
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To adjust a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
The seatback will automatically
fold forward. Crew/Extended Cab Shown, Other
2. To recline, move the seatback Models Similar
rearward to the desired position, If equipped, the SET, "1," "2," and
then release the lever to lock the B (Exit) buttons on the driver door
seatback in place. are used to manually save and
3. Push and pull on the seatback to recall memory settings for the driver
make sure it is locked. seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable
To recline a power seatback, pedals (if equipped).
if equipped:
. Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Storing Memory Positions Manually Recalling Memory If the memory position is still not
To save positions to the “1” and “2” Positions recalling, see your dealer for
buttons: If the vehicle is off, or in ON/RUN/ service.
1. Adjust the driver seat, outside START but not in P (Park), press Automatically Recalling Memory
mirrors, and adjustable pedals and hold "1," "2," or B to manually Positions (Auto Memory Recall)
(if equipped) to the desired recall the previously stored memory The Auto (Automatic) Memory
driving positions. positions. Releasing "1,” "2," or B Recall feature automatically recalls
2. Press and hold SET and “1” at before the stored positions are the current driver’s previously stored
the same time until a beep reached stops the recall. “1” or “2” position when entering the
sounds. vehicle.
If the vehicle is in ON/RUN/START
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a and in P (Park), press and release If the Auto Memory Recall feature is
second driver using “2.” “1,” “2,” or B to manually recall the enabled in the vehicle
previously stored memory positions. personalization menu, memory “1”
To save positions to the B (Exit) Placing the ignition in OFF/LOCK or “2” positions are recalled in the
button and easy exit features: before the stored positions are following ways:
1. Adjust the driver seat, adjustable reached stops the recall. . Press K on the RKE transmitter
pedals (if equipped), and the If something has blocked the driver and open the driver door.
outside mirrors on some vehicles seat and/or adjustable pedals while
to the desired positions for recalling a memory position, the
. Press K on the RKE transmitter
getting out of the vehicle. recall may stop. Remove the when the driver door is
obstruction; then press and hold the already open.
2. Press and hold SET and B at
the same time until a beep appropriate manual control for the See Vehicle Personalization on
sounds. memory item that is not recalling for page 5-44.
two seconds. Try recalling the
memory position again by pressing
the appropriate memory button.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To stop recall movement, press one button. See “Storing Memory Heated and Cooled Front
of the memory, power mirror or Positions” listed previously. See
power seat controls; or press the also Vehicle Personalization on
Seats
adjustable pedal control page 5-44.
(if equipped). Easy exit recall automatically
{ Warning
If something has blocked the driver activates when one of the following If you cannot feel temperature
seat and/or the adjustable pedals occurs: change or pain to the skin, the
(if equipped) while recalling a . The vehicle is turned off and the seat heater may cause burns. To
memory position, the recall may driver door is opened within a reduce the risk of burns, people
stop. Remove the obstruction; then short time. with such a condition should use
press and hold the appropriate
. The vehicle is turned off with the care when using the seat heater,
manual control for the memory item
that is not recalling for two seconds. driver door open. especially for long periods of
Try recalling the memory position time. Do not place anything on
If something has blocked the driver the seat that insulates against
again by opening the driver door seat and/or adjustable pedals
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
and pressing K on the RKE (if equipped) while recalling the exit
cover, or similar item. This may
transmitter. If the memory position is position, the recall may stop.
Remove the obstruction; then press cause the seat heater to
still not recalling, see your dealer for
service. and hold the appropriate manual overheat. An overheated seat
control for the exit feature not heater may cause a burn or may
Easy Exit Recall recalling for two seconds. Try damage the seat.
If programmed on in the vehicle recalling the exit position again.
personalization menu, the easy exit If the exit position is still not
feature automatically moves the recalling, see your dealer for
driver seat, adjustable pedals service.
(if equipped), and outside mirrors on
some vehicles to the memory
positions saved to the B (Exit)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The indicator light on the button The heated or cooled seat indicator
comes on when this feature is on. lights do not turn on during a remote
Press the button once for the start.
highest setting. With each press of The temperature performance of an
the button, the seat will change to unoccupied seat may be reduced.
the next lower setting, and then to This is normal.
the off setting. The indicator lights The heated or cooled seats will not
next to the buttons indicate three for turn on during a remote start unless
the highest setting and one for the they are enabled in the vehicle
lowest. If the heated seats are on personalization menu. See Remote
high, their level may automatically Vehicle Start on page 2-6 and
be lowered. Vehicle Personalization on
Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
Remote Start Heated and Cooled page 5-44.
Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
Seats
Similar
During a remote start, the heated or
If equipped, the buttons are on the cooled seats can be turned on
center stack. To operate, the engine automatically. When it is cold
must be running. outside, the heated seats turn on,
Press I to heat the driver or and when it is hot outside the
passenger seatback only. cooled seats turn on. The heated or
cooled seats are canceled when the
Press J to heat the driver or ignition is turned on. Press the
passenger seat cushion and heated or cooled seat button to use
seatback. the heated or cooled seats after the
vehicle is started.
Press A to cool the driver or
passenger seat.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Rear Seats To unfold the seat:

1. Push the seat cushion rearward
Rear Seats (Extended while pulling the release strap
loop under the seat cushion. Pull
Cab Full Bench) the seat cushion down until it
Folding the Rear Seat latches.
2. Pull up on the seat cushion to
{ Caution make sure it is locked in place.
Make sure the safety belts are
Folding a rear seat with the safety
not twisted or caught in the seat
belts still fastened may cause cushion.
damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety To fold the seat:
belts and return them to their 1. Pull up on the front of the seat { Warning
normal stowed position before cushion while pulling down on A safety belt that is improperly
folding a rear seat. the release strap loop under the routed, not properly attached,
seat cushion.
or twisted will not provide the
2. Pull the seat cushion up until it protection needed in a crash. The
latches with the seatback. person wearing the belt could be
3. Pull forward on the seat cushion seriously injured. After raising the
to make sure it is locked in rear seatback, always check to be
place. sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Rear Seats (Split Bench)

{ Warning
Folding Rear Seat
A safety belt that is improperly
Either side of the rear seat can be routed, not properly attached,
folded for added cargo space. or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
{ Caution person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
Folding a rear seat with the safety rear seatback, always check to be
belts still fastened may cause sure that the safety belts are
damage to the seat or the safety properly routed and attached, and
belts. Always unbuckle the safety are not twisted.
belts and return them to their To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat
normal stowed position before cushion up.
folding a rear seat. To return the seat to the normal
seating position, slowly pull the seat
Make sure that nothing is on the cushion down.
seat cushion. Make sure the safety belts are not
twisted or caught in the seat
cushion.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Safety Belts Why Safety Belts Work

Warning (Continued)
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts are more likely to be seriously
properly. It also describes some injured or killed. Do not allow
things not to do with safety belts. passengers to ride in any area of
the vehicle that is not equipped
{ Warning with seats and safety belts.
Always wear a safety belt, and
Do not let anyone ride where a check that all passenger(s) are
safety belt cannot be worn restrained properly too.
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, injuries can be much This vehicle has indicators as a
worse than if you are wearing reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on When riding in a vehicle, you travel
safety belts. You can be seriously as fast as the vehicle does. If the
page 5-16.
injured or killed by hitting things vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
inside the vehicle harder or by going until something stops you.
being ejected from the vehicle. In It could be the windshield, the
addition, anyone who is not instrument panel, or the safety belts!
buckled up can strike other
When you wear a safety belt, you
passengers in the vehicle.
and the vehicle slow down together.
It is extremely dangerous to ride There is more time to stop because
in a cargo area, inside or outside you stop over a longer distance and,
of a vehicle. In a collision, when worn properly, your strongest
passengers riding in these areas bones take the forces from the
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts makes such good all Canadian provinces, the law
sense. requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a This section is only for people of
safety belt? adult size.
A: You could be — whether you are There are special things to know
wearing a safety belt or not. about safety belts and children. And
Your chance of being conscious there are different rules for smaller
during and after a crash, so you children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep
can unbuckle and get out, is riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front
much greater if you are belted. Children on page 3-37 or Infants of you.
and Young Children on page 3-39. . Always use the correct buckle
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Follow those rules for everyone's
should I have to wear safety for your seating position.
protection.
belts? . Wear the lap part of the belt low
It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just
A: Airbags are supplemental to buckle up. Statistics show that
systems only; so they work with touching the thighs. In a crash,
unbelted people are hurt more often this applies force to the strong
safety belts — not instead of in crashes than those who are
them. Whether or not an airbag pelvic bones and you would be
wearing safety belts. less likely to slide under the lap
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
most protection. about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
These parts of the body are best If the vehicle is a regular cab, then get twisted.
able to take belt restraining all seating positions in the vehicle
forces. The shoulder belt locks if have a lap-shoulder belt. If the The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
there is a sudden stop or crash. vehicle is a crew or extended cab, you pull the belt across you very
then all seating positions in the quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
{ Warning vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt
except for the center front Then pull the belt across you
You can be seriously injured, passenger position (if equipped), more slowly.
or even killed, by not wearing which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt If the shoulder portion of a
your safety belt properly. on page 3-19 for more information. passenger belt is pulled out all
The following instructions explain the way, the child restraint
. Never allow the lap or locking feature may be engaged.
shoulder belt to become how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly. If this happens, let the belt go
loose or twisted.
back all the way and start again.
. Never wear the shoulder belt 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up Engaging the child restraint
under both arms or behind locking feature may affect the
your back. straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index. passenger sensing system,
. Never route the lap or if equipped. See Passenger
shoulder belt over an Sensing System on page 3-30
armrest. for more information.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt

height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
later in this section.
If the belt stops before it reaches 3. Push the latch plate into the
the buckle, when using the buckle until it clicks.
lap-shoulder belt in a rear center Pull up on the latch plate to
seating position of a crew cab, make sure it is secure. If the belt
tilt the latch plate and keep is not long enough, see Safety
pulling the safety belt until it can Belt Extender on page 3-20.
be buckled. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull
If the latch plate will not go fully up on the shoulder belt.
into the buckle, check if the
correct buckle is being used. It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
Position the release button on through the latch plate to fully
the buckle so that the safety belt tighten the lap belt on smaller
could be quickly unbuckled if occupants.
necessary.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Adjust the height so the shoulder After the adjuster is set to the
portion of the belt is on the shoulder desired position, try to move it down
and not falling off of it. The belt without pushing the release button
should be close to, but not to make sure it has locked into
contacting, the neck. Improper position.
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of Safety Belt Pretensioners
the safety belt in a crash. See How This vehicle has safety belt
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on pretensioners for front outboard
page 3-13. occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
To unlatch the belt, push the button
belts during the early stages of a
on the buckle. The belt should
moderate to severe frontal, near
return to its stowed position.
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
Before a door is closed, be sure the conditions for pretensioner
safety belt is out of the way. If a activation are met. And, if your
door is slammed against a safety vehicle has side impact airbags,
belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt pretensioners can help
safety belt and the vehicle. tighten the safety belts in a side
crash. If the vehicle has rollover
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster roof-rail airbags, safety belt
The vehicle has a shoulder belt pretensioners can help tighten the
Push down on the release button to
height adjuster for the driver and safety belts in a rollover event.
move the height adjuster to the
front outboard passenger. Pretensioners work only once. If the
desired position.
pretensioners activate in a crash,
Move the adjuster up by pushing up
they will need to be replaced, and
on the shoulder belt guide.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
the vehicle's safety belt system will 2. Attach the adjustable comfort
probably need other new parts. See guide to the anchor loop by
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts threading the hook through
after a Crash on page 3-21. the loop.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
Rear safety belt comfort guides may
provide added safety belt comfort
for older children who have To install the adjustable comfort
outgrown booster seats and for guide to the seatback and the
some adults. When installed on a safety belt:
shoulder belt, the comfort guide
positions the shoulder belt away
from the neck and head.
This vehicle may have an adjustable
comfort guide. Additional comfort
guides are available through your 3. Place the guide over the belt,
dealer. and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Locate the anchorage loop on

the rear outboard seatback, near
the top.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
6. Adjust the guide so the shoulder

portion of the belt is on the
shoulder and not falling off of it.
The belt should be close to, but
not contacting, the neck.
Improper comfort guide
adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash.
{ Warning
A safety belt that is not properly
4. Be sure that the belt is not 7. Buckle and position the safety
worn may not provide the
twisted and it lies flat. The belt as described previously in
elastic cord must be under the protection needed in a crash. The this section. Make sure that the
belt and the guide on top. person wearing the belt could be shoulder belt crosses the
seriously injured. The shoulder shoulder.
5. The elastic cord on the comfort belt should go over the shoulder
guide is adjustable. Make it and across the chest. These parts To remove and store the comfort
longer or shorter by squeezing of the body are best able to take guide, squeeze the belt edges
both ends of the plastic adjuster together so that the safety belt can
belt restraining forces.
and pulling on the elastic cord or be removed from the guide. Unhook
the guide. the guide from the loop on the seat.
Store the guide in a convenient
place like the glove box for the next
time it is needed.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Lap Belt
This section is only for the lap belt.
To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder
belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on To make the belt longer, tilt the latch
page 3-14. plate and pull it along the belt.
The vehicle may have a center Buckle, position, and release it the
seating position with a lap safety same way as the lap part of a
belt. The lap safety belt does not lap-shoulder belt.
have a retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a

lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
But if a safety belt is not long crash. They can rip apart under
enough, your dealer will order you impact forces. If a belt is torn or
an extender. When you go in to frayed, get a new one right away.
order it, take the heaviest coat you Make sure the safety belt reminder
will wear, so the extender will be light is working. See Safety Belt
long enough for you. To help avoid Reminders on page 5-16.
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the Keep safety belts clean and dry.
seat it is made to fit. The extender See Safety Belt Care on page 3-20.
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To Safety Belt Care
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
Keep belts clean and dry.
belt. See the instruction sheet that
To make the belt shorter, pull its free comes with the extender.
end as shown until the belt is snug. { Warning
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety System Check Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
Safety Belt Extender on page 3-20.
Now and then, check that the safety It may severely weaken them. In
Make sure the release button on the belt reminder light, safety belts, a crash, they might not be able to
buckle is positioned so you would buckles, latch plates, retractors, and provide adequate protection.
be able to unbuckle the safety belt anchorages are all working properly. Clean safety belts only with mild
quickly if necessary. Look for any other loose or soap and lukewarm water.
damaged safety belt system parts
Safety Belt Extender that might keep a safety belt system
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten from doing its job. See your dealer
around you, you should use it. to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer to have the safety Airbag System
belt assemblies inspected or
System Parts after a replaced. The vehicle has the following
Crash New parts and repairs may be
airbags:
necessary even if the safety belt . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ Warning system was not being used at the . A frontal airbag for the front
time of the crash. outboard passenger.
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle. Have the safety belt pretensioners The vehicle may have the following
A damaged safety belt system checked if the vehicle has been in a airbags:
may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle . A seat-mounted side impact
person using it, resulting in airbag for the driver.
serious injury or even death in a or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5-17. . A seat-mounted side impact
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working airbag for the front outboard
properly after a crash, have them passenger.
inspected and any necessary . A roof-rail airbag for the driver
replacements made as soon as and the passenger seated
possible. directly behind the driver.
. A roof-rail airbag for the front
After a minor crash, replacement of outboard passenger and the
safety belts may not be necessary. person seated directly behind
But the safety belt assemblies that the front outboard passenger.
were used during any crash may All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have been stressed or damaged. have the word AIRBAG on the trim
or on a label near the deployment
opening.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
For frontal airbags, the word Here are the most important things
AIRBAG is on the center of the to know about the airbag system: { Warning
steering wheel for the driver and on
Because airbags inflate with great
the instrument panel for the front
outboard passenger.
{ Warning force and faster than the blink of
You can be severely injured or an eye, anyone who is up
For seat-mounted side impact against, or very close to any
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt, even airbag when it inflates can be
seatback closest to the door. seriously injured or killed. Do not
with airbags. Airbags are
For roof-rail airbags, the word designed to work with safety sit unnecessarily close to any
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim. airbag, as you would be if sitting
belts, not replace them. Also,
Airbags are designed to supplement airbags are not designed to inflate on the edge of the seat or leaning
the protection provided by safety in every crash. In some crashes forward. Safety belts help keep
belts. Even though today's airbags safety belts are the only restraint. you in position before and during
are also designed to help reduce See When Should an Airbag a crash. Always wear a safety
the risk of injury from the force of an Inflate? on page 3-25. belt, even with airbags. The driver
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate should sit as far back as possible
very quickly to do their job. Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of
crash helps reduce the chance of the vehicle.
hitting things inside the vehicle or
being ejected from it. Airbags are Occupants should not lean on or
“supplemental restraints” to the sleep against the door or side
safety belts. Everyone in the windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags
properly, whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Where Are the Airbags?

{ Warning
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Always secure children
properly in the vehicle. To read
how, see Older Children on
page 3-37 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3-39.
The front outboard passenger

frontal airbag is in the passenger
The driver frontal airbag is in the side instrument panel.
center of the steering wheel.
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument cluster, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5-17 for
more information.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Warning (Continued)
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Crew Cab Shown, airbag covering.
Side Similar Passenger Side Extended and Do not use seat accessories that
If the vehicle has seat-mounted side Regular Cabs Similar block the inflation path of a
impact airbags for the driver and If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags seat-mounted side impact airbag.
front outboard passenger, they are for the driver, front outboard Never secure anything to the roof
in the side of the seatbacks closest passenger, and second row of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
to the door. outboard passengers, they are in by routing a rope or tie‐down
the ceiling above the side windows. through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
{ Warning inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
When Should an Airbag It depends on what is hit, the have a seat position sensor that
direction of the impact, and how enables the sensing system to
Inflate? quickly the vehicle slows down. monitor the position of the driver
This vehicle is equipped with Frontal airbags may inflate at seat. The seat position sensor
airbags. See Airbag System on different crash speeds depending on provides information that is used to
page 3-21. Airbags are designed to whether the vehicle hits an object adjust the deployment of the driver
inflate if the impact exceeds the straight on or at an angle, and frontal airbag.
specific airbag system's deployment whether the object is fixed or If the GVWR is at or below 4 536 kg
threshold. Deployment thresholds moving, rigid or deformable, narrow (10,000 lb) the vehicle has
are used to predict how severe a or wide. seat-mounted side impact airbags.
crash is likely to be in time for the Vehicles with a GVWR above
airbags to inflate and help restrain Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, in 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) may or may not
the occupants. The vehicle has have seat-mounted side impact
electronic sensors which help the rear impacts, or in many side
impacts. airbags. Seat-mounted side impact
airbag system determine the airbags, if equipped, are designed
severity of the impact. Deployment In addition, if the GVWR (Gross to inflate in moderate to severe side
thresholds can vary with specific Vehicle Weight Rating) is at or crashes depending on the location
vehicle design. below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) the vehicle of the impact. Seat-mounted side
Frontal airbags are designed to has advanced technology frontal impact airbags are not designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal airbags. You can find the GVWR on inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal
or near frontal crashes to help the Certification/Tire label on the impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
reduce the potential for severe center pillar of the vehicle. See A seat-mounted side impact airbag
injuries, mainly to the driver's or Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-15 is designed to inflate on the side of
front outboard passenger's head for more information. the vehicle that is struck.
and chest. Advanced technology frontal airbags Vehicles with a GVWR at or below
Whether the frontal airbags will or adjust the restraint according to 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) have roof-rail
should inflate is not based primarily crash severity. Vehicles with airbags. These roof-rail airbags are
on how fast the vehicle is traveling. advanced technology frontal airbags designed to inflate in moderate to
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
severe side crashes depending on sensing system predicts that the roll over on its side. The roof-rail
the location of the impact. In vehicle is about to roll over on its airbags are not designed to inflate in
addition, these roof-rail airbags are side. The roof-rail airbags are not frontal, near-frontal, or rear impacts.
designed to inflate during a rollover designed to inflate in frontal, In any particular crash, no one can
or in a severe frontal impact. The near-frontal, or rear impacts. say whether an airbag should have
roof-rail airbags are not designed to Vehicles with a GVWR above inflated simply because of the
inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-rail 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) may or may not vehicle damage or repair costs.
airbags will inflate when either side be equipped with roof-rail airbags.
of the vehicle is struck or if the
sensing system predicts that the
These roof-rail airbags, if equipped, What Makes an Airbag
are designed to inflate in moderate
vehicle is about to roll over on its to severe side crashes depending
Inflate?
side, or in a severe frontal impact. on the location of the impact. Both In a deployment event, the sensing
Vehicles with a GVWR above roof-rail airbags will inflate when system sends an electrical signal
3 855 kg (8,500 lb) up to and either side of the vehicle is struck. triggering a release of gas from the
including 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) also In addition, if the vehicle has single inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
have roof-rail airbags. These rear wheels and has a airbag causing the bag to break out
roof-rail airbags are designed to factory-installed pickup box and of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
inflate in moderate to severe side roof-rail airbags, the roof-rail airbags and related hardware are all part of
crashes depending on the location are rollover capable. If the vehicle the airbag module.
of the impact. Both roof-rail airbags has dual rear wheels, or is sold as For airbag locations, see Where Are
will inflate when either side of the an incomplete vehicle, as a chassis the Airbags? on page 3-23.
vehicle is struck. In addition, the cab, or with the pickup box
roof-rail airbags are rollover capable removed, and has roof-rail airbags,
except on models sold as an the roof-rail airbags are not rollover
incomplete vehicle with the pickup capable. If the airbags are rollover
box removed. If the roof-rail airbags capable, both roof-rail airbags will
are rollover capable, both roof-rail also inflate if the sensing system
airbags will also inflate if the predicts that the vehicle is about to
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
How Does an Airbag But airbags would not help in many be some smoke and dust coming
types of collisions, primarily from the vents in the deflated
Restrain? because the occupant's motion is airbags. Airbag inflation does not
In moderate to severe frontal or not toward those airbags. See When prevent the driver from seeing out of
near frontal collisions, even belted Should an Airbag Inflate? on the windshield or being able to steer
occupants can contact the steering page 3-25. the vehicle, nor does it prevent
wheel or the instrument panel. In Airbags should never be regarded people from leaving the vehicle.
moderate to severe side collisions, as anything more than a supplement
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
to safety belts. { Warning
When an airbag inflates, there
Airbags supplement the protection What Will You See after may be dust in the air. This dust
provided by safety belts by an Airbag Inflates?
distributing the force of the impact could cause breathing problems
more evenly over the After the frontal airbags and for people with a history of
occupant's body. seat-mounted side impact airbags asthma or other breathing trouble.
inflate, they quickly deflate, so To avoid this, everyone in the
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
quickly that some people may not vehicle should get out as soon as
are designed to help contain the
even realize an airbag inflated. it is safe to do so. If you have
head and chest of occupants in the
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least breathing problems but cannot
outboard seating positions in the
partially inflated for some time after get out of the vehicle after an
first and second rows. The rollover
they inflate. Some components of airbag inflates, then get fresh air
capable roof-rail airbags are
the airbag module may be hot for by opening a window or a door.
designed to help reduce the risk of
several minutes. For location of the If you experience breathing
full or partial ejection in rollover
airbags, see Where Are the problems following an airbag
events, although no system can
Airbags? on page 3-23. deployment, you should seek
prevent all such ejections.
The parts of the airbag that come medical attention.
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The vehicle has a feature that may In many crashes severe enough to
. Let only qualified technicians
automatically unlock the doors, turn inflate the airbag, windshields are work on the airbag systems.
on the interior lamps, turn on the broken by vehicle deformation. Improper service can mean that
hazard warning flashers, and shut Additional windshield breakage may an airbag system will not work
off the fuel system after the airbags also occur from the front outboard properly. See your dealer for
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn passenger airbag. service.
off the interior lamps, and turn off . Airbags are designed to inflate
the hazard warning flashers by only once. After an airbag
Airbag On-Off Switch
using the controls for those inflates, you will need some new If the passenger side instrument
features. parts for the airbag system. panel endcap has the switch
If you do not get them, the pictured in the following illustration,
{ Warning airbag system will not be there the vehicle has an airbag on-off
to help protect you in another switch that you can use to manually
A crash severe enough to inflate crash. A new system will include turn on or off the front outboard
the airbags may have also airbag modules and possibly passenger frontal airbag. See
damaged important functions in other parts. The service manual Instrument Panel on page 1-2.
the vehicle, such as the fuel for the vehicle covers the need
system, brake and steering to replace other parts.
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle . The vehicle has a crash sensing
appears to be drivable after a
and diagnostic module which
moderate crash, there may be records information after a
concealed damage that could crash. See Vehicle Data
make it difficult to safely operate Recording and Privacy on
the vehicle. page 13-14 and Event Data
Use caution if you should attempt Recorders on page 13-14.
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the vehicle does not have an Child age 1 to 12. A child from turning off the airbag and
airbag on-off switch, it may have a age 1 to 12 must ride in the front allowing the passenger, even if
passenger sensing system. See seat because: belted, to hit the instrument
Passenger Sensing System on . My vehicle has no rear seat; panel or windshield in a crash.
page 3-30.
This switch should only be turned to
. Although children ages 1 to 12
ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
{ Warning
the off position if the person in the possible, children ages 1 to 12
front outboard passenger position is If the right front passenger airbag
sometimes must ride in the front is turned off for a person who is
a member of a passenger risk group because no space is available in
identified by the national not in a risk group identified by
the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or the national government, that
government as follows:
. The child has a medical person will not have the extra
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year condition which, according to the protection of an airbag. In a
old) must ride in the front seat child's physician, makes it crash, the airbag will not be able
because: necessary for the child to ride in to inflate and help protect the
. My vehicle has no rear seat; the front seat so that the driver person sitting there. Do not turn
can constantly monitor the off the passenger airbag unless
. My vehicle has a rear seat too child's condition.
small to accommodate a the person sitting there is in a risk
rear-facing infant seat; or Medical Condition. A passenger group.
. The infant has a medical has a medical condition which,
condition which, according to the according to his or her physician:
infant's physician, makes it . Causes the passenger airbag to
necessary for the infant to ride in pose a special risk for the
the front seat so that the driver passenger; and
can constantly monitor the . Makes the potential harm from
child's condition. the passenger airbag in a crash
greater than the potential harm
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To turn the front outboard passenger

{ Warning frontal airbag on again, insert the
ignition key into the switch, push in,
If the airbag readiness light ever and move the switch to the on
comes on and stays on, it means position.
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For The front outboard passenger
example, the right front frontal airbag is now enabled
passenger airbag could inflate (may inflate). See Airbag On-Off
Light on page 5-17.
To turn off the front outboard even though the airbag on-off
passenger frontal airbag, insert the switch is turned off.
Passenger Sensing
ignition key into the switch, push in, To help avoid injury to yourself or
and move the switch to the off others, have the vehicle serviced
System
position. right away. See Airbag Readiness If the vehicle has one of the
The word OFF or the off symbol will Light on page 5-17 for more following indicators, then the vehicle
come on in the passenger airbag information, including important has a passenger sensing system for
status indicator located in the safety information. the front outboard passenger
overhead console to let you know position, unless there is an airbag
that the front outboard passenger on-off switch on the instrument
frontal airbag is off, after the system panel endcap. If there is an airbag
check is completed. The airbag off on-off switch, the vehicle does not
light will come on and stay on to let have a passenger sensing system.
you know that the front outboard See Airbag On-Off Switch on
passenger frontal airbag is off. See page 3-28 for more information.
Airbag On-Off Light on page 5-17. The passenger airbag status
indicator will light on the overhead
console when the vehicle is started.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
certain conditions. No other airbag

is affected by the passenger { Warning
sensing system.
A child in a rear-facing child
The passenger sensing system restraint can be seriously injured
works with sensors that are part of or killed if the passenger frontal
the front outboard passenger seat airbag inflates. This is because
United States and safety belt. The sensors are the back of the rear-facing child
designed to detect the presence of restraint would be very close to
a properly seated occupant and
the inflating airbag. A child in a
determine if the front outboard
forward-facing child restraint can
passenger frontal airbag should be
allowed to inflate or not. be seriously injured or killed if the
passenger frontal airbag inflates
According to accident statistics, and the passenger seat is in a
Canada and Mexico children are safer when properly forward position.
secured in a rear seat in the correct
The words ON and OFF, or the child restraint for their weight Even if the passenger sensing
symbol for on and off, will be visible and size. system has turned off the
during the system check. If you use passenger frontal airbag, no
remote start, if equipped, to start the Whenever possible, children age
system is fail-safe. No one can
vehicle you may not see the system 12 and under should be secured in
a rear seating position. guarantee that an airbag will not
check. When the system check is inflate under some unusual
complete, either the word ON or Never put a rear-facing child seat in circumstance, even though the
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will the front. This is because the risk to airbag is off.
be visible. See Passenger Airbag the rear-facing child is so great,
Status Indicator on page 5-19. if the airbag deploys. (Continued)
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag under
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. A front outboard passenger For some children, including
Warning (Continued) takes his/her weight off of the children in child restraints, and for
seat for a period of time. very small adults, the passenger
Secure rear-facing child restraints sensing system may or may not turn
. There is a critical problem with
in a rear seat, even if the airbag off the front outboard passenger
the airbag system or the
is off. If you secure a frontal airbag, depending upon the
passenger sensing system.
forward-facing child restraint in person's seating posture and body
the front outboard passenger When the passenger sensing build. Everyone in the vehicle who
seat, always move the seat as far system has turned off the front has outgrown child restraints should
back as it will go. It is better to outboard passenger frontal airbag, wear a safety belt
secure the child restraint in a the off indicator will light and stay lit properly — whether or not there is
rear seat. as a reminder that the airbag is off. an airbag for that person.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5-19.
If the vehicle does not have a rear
The passenger sensing system is
{ Warning
seat that will accommodate a
designed to turn on the front If the airbag readiness light ever
rear-facing child restraint, a
outboard passenger frontal airbag comes on and stays on, it means
rear-facing child restraint should not
anytime the system senses that a that something may be wrong
be installed in the vehicle, even if
person of adult size is sitting with the airbag system. To help
the airbag is off.
properly in the front outboard avoid injury to yourself or others,
The passenger sensing system is passenger seat. have the vehicle serviced right
designed to turn off the front
When the passenger sensing away. See Airbag Readiness
outboard passenger frontal airbag if:
system has allowed the airbag to be Light on page 5-17 for more
. The front outboard passenger enabled, the on indicator will light information, including important
seat is unoccupied. and stay lit as a reminder that the safety information.
. The system determines an infant airbag is active.
is present in a child restraint.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a (Rear Seat) on page 3-64. Make The passenger sensing system may
Child Restraint sure the child restraint locking or may not turn off the airbag for a
feature is set by pulling the child in a child restraint depending
The passenger sensing system is shoulder belt all the way out of upon the child’s size. It is better to
designed to turn off the front the retractor before tightening secure the child restraint in a
outboard passenger airbag if the the belt around the child seat. rear seat.
system determines that an infant is
present in a child restraint. If a child 5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
restraint has been installed and the restraint and restarting the Adult-Sized Occupant
on indicator is lit: vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
1. Turn the vehicle off. recline the vehicle seatback and
2. Remove the child restraint from adjust the seat cushion,
the vehicle. if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
3. Remove any additional items
pushing the child restraint into
from the seat such as blankets,
the seat cushion.
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the
4. Reinstall the child restraint
vehicle head restraint. If this
following the directions provided
happens, adjust the head
by the child restraint
restraint. See Head Restraints
manufacturer and refer to
on page 3-2.
Securing Child Restraints If a person of adult size is sitting in
(Center Front Seat) on 6. Restart the vehicle. the front outboard passenger seat,
page 3-55 or Securing Child but the off indicator is lit, it could be
Restraints (Front Outboard because that person is not sitting
Passenger Seat) on page 3-55 properly in the seat or that the child
or Securing Child Restraints restraint locking feature is engaged.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If this happens, use the following then buckle the belt again Additional Factors Affecting
steps to allow the system to detect without pulling the belt out all System Operation
that person and enable the front the way.
outboard passenger frontal airbag: Safety belts help keep the
6. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger in position on the seat
1. Turn the vehicle off. person remain in this position for during vehicle maneuvers and
2. Remove any additional material two to three minutes after the on braking, which helps the passenger
from the seat, such as blankets, indicator is lit. sensing system maintain the
cushions, seat covers, seat passenger airbag status. See
heaters, or seat massagers. { Warning “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional
3. Place the seatback in the fully If the front outboard passenger information about the importance of
upright position. airbag is turned off for an proper restraint use.
4. Have the person sit upright in adult-sized occupant, the airbag A thick layer of additional material,
the seat, centered on the seat will not be able to inflate and help such as a blanket or cushion,
cushion, with legs comfortably protect that person in a crash, or aftermarket equipment such as
extended. resulting in an increased risk of seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
5. If the shoulder portion of the belt serious injury or even death. An massagers can affect how well the
is pulled out all the way, the adult-sized occupant should not passenger sensing system
child restraint locking feature will ride in the front outboard operates. We recommend that you
be engaged. This may passenger seat, if the passenger not use seat covers or other
unintentionally cause the airbag off indicator is lit. aftermarket equipment except when
passenger sensing system to approved by GM for your specific
turn the airbag off for some vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
adult-sized occupants. If this the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
happens, unbuckle the belt, let page 3-35 for more information
the belt go back all the way, and about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The on indicator may be lit if an To purchase a service manual, see operation of the airbag system can
object, such as a briefcase, Service Publications Ordering also be affected by changing or
handbag, grocery bag, laptop, Information on page 13-11. moving any parts of the front seats,
or other electronic device, is put on safety belts, the airbag sensing and
an unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired, remove the object from
{ Warning diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, roof-rail airbag
the seat. For up to 10 seconds after the modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
vehicle is turned off and the garnish trim, overhead console,
{ Warning battery is disconnected, an airbag front sensors, side impact sensors,
or airbag wiring.
can still inflate during improper
Stowing of articles under the service. You can be injured if you Your dealer and the service manual
passenger seat or between the are close to an airbag when it have information about the location
passenger seat cushion and inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. of the airbag sensors, sensing and
seatback may interfere with the They are probably part of the diagnostic module, and airbag
proper operation of the passenger airbag system. Be sure to follow wiring.
sensing system. proper service procedures, and In addition, the vehicle may have a
make sure the person performing passenger sensing system for the
Servicing the work for you is qualified to do so. front outboard passenger position,
which includes sensors that are part
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle of the passenger seat. The
Airbags affect how the vehicle
Adding Equipment to the passenger sensing system may not
should be serviced. There are parts Airbag-Equipped Vehicle operate properly if the original seat
of the airbag system in several Adding accessories that change the trim is replaced with non-GM
places around the vehicle. Your vehicle's frame, bumper system, covers, upholstery, or trim; or with
dealer and the service manual have height, front end, or side sheet GM covers, upholstery, or trim
information about servicing the metal, may keep the airbag system designed for a different vehicle. Any
vehicle and the airbag system. from working properly. The object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
or device, installed under or on top If you have to modify your vehicle

of the seat fabric, could also because you have a disability and Caution (Continued)
interfere with the operation of the you have questions about whether
passenger sensing system. This the modifications will affect the coverings. If there are any
could either prevent proper vehicle's airbag system, or if you opened or broken airbag
deployment of the passenger have questions about whether the coverings, have the airbag
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger airbag system will be affected if the covering and/or airbag module
sensing system from properly vehicle is modified for any other replaced. For the location of the
turning off the passenger airbag(s). reason, call Customer Assistance. airbags, see Where Are the
See Passenger Sensing System on See Customer Assistance Offices Airbags? on page 3-23. See your
page 3-30. on page 13-3. dealer for service.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail
airbags, see Different Size Tires Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System
and Wheels on page 10-73 for The airbag system does not need
additional important information. Parts after a Crash
regularly scheduled maintenance or
If a snow plow is added to the replacement. Make sure the airbag
vehicle, the airbags should still work readiness light is working. See { Warning
properly. The airbag systems were Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5-17. A crash can damage the airbag
designed to work properly under a systems in the vehicle.
wide range of conditions, including A damaged airbag system may
snow plowing with vehicles that { Caution not work properly and may not
have the optional snow plow prep
If an airbag covering is damaged, protect you and your
package (RPO VYU). Do not
change or defeat the snow plow's opened, or broken, the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
“tripping mechanism.” If you do, it may not work properly. Do not in serious injury or even death. To
can damage the snow plow and the open or break the airbag help make sure the airbag
vehicle, and may cause an airbag (Continued) (Continued)
deployment.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Warning (Continued) Child Restraints The manufacturer instructions that

come with the booster seat state the
weight and height limitations for that
systems are working properly Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a
after a crash, have them lap-shoulder belt until the child
inspected and any necessary passes the fit test below:
replacements made as soon as
possible.
. Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
If an airbag inflates, you will need to return to the booster seat.
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer for service.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
If the airbag readiness light stays on the shoulder? If yes, continue.
after the vehicle is started or comes If no, try using the rear safety
on when you are driving, the airbag belt comfort guide. See “Rear
system may not work properly. Have Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
the vehicle serviced right away. See under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
Airbag Readiness Light on Older children who have outgrown
page 3-14. If the shoulder belt
page 5-17. booster seats should wear the
still does not rest on the
vehicle safety belts.
shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
. Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. Can proper safety belt fit be In a crash, children who are not
maintained for the length of the buckled up can strike other people
trip? If yes, continue. If no, who are buckled up, or can be
return to the booster seat. thrown out of the vehicle. Older
Q: What is the proper way to children need to use safety belts
wear safety belts? properly.
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the { Warning
additional restraint a shoulder
Never allow more than one child
belt can provide. The shoulder
to wear the same safety belt. The
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit safety belt cannot properly spread
snugly below the hips, just the impact forces. In a crash, they
touching the top of the thighs. can be crushed together and { Warning
This applies belt force to the seriously injured. A safety belt
must be used by only one person Never allow a child to wear the
child's pelvic bones in a crash. safety belt with the shoulder belt
It should never be worn over the at a time.
behind their back. A child can be
abdomen, which could cause
seriously injured by not wearing
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash. the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort restrained by the shoulder belt.
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on The child could move too far
page 3-14. forward increasing the chance of
According to accident statistics, head and neck injury. The child
children are safer when properly might also slide under the lap
restrained in a rear seating position. (Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Warning (Continued)
Infants and Young Every time infants and young
children ride in vehicles, they should
Children have the protection provided by
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs appropriate child restraints. Neither
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and the vehicle's safety belt system nor
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the its airbag system is designed
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and for them.
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the
the chest. Children who are not restrained
need, for everyone, to use safety properly can strike other people,
restraints. In fact, the law in every or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be { Warning
restrained while in a vehicle.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
{ Warning crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
Children can be seriously injured
possible to hold it during a crash.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
For example, in a crash at only
wrapped around their neck and
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
the safety belt continues to
infant will suddenly become a
tighten. Never leave children
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
unattended in a vehicle and never
arms. An infant should be
allow children to play with the
secured in an appropriate
safety belts.
restraint.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
weight, height, and age but also

Warning (Continued) whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
seat, always move the front vehicle in which it will be used.
passenger seat as far back as it
will go. For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
{ Warning The restraint manufacturer
Children who are up against, instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
or very close to, any airbag when
height limitations for a particular
it inflates can be seriously injured
child restraint. In addition, there
or killed. Never put a rear-facing are many kinds of restraints
child restraint in the right front available for children with
seat. Secure a rear-facing child Q: What are the different types of
special needs.
restraint in a rear seat. It is also add-on child restraints?
better to secure a forward-facing A: Add-on child restraints, which
child restraint in a rear seat. If you are purchased by the vehicle
must secure a forward-facing owner, are available in four basic
child restraint in the right front types. Selection of a particular
(Continued) restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Child Restraint Systems

{ Warning { Warning
To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. In a safety belt may not remain low on
crash, if an infant is in a the hip bones, as it should.
rear-facing child restraint, the Instead, it may settle up around
crash forces can be distributed the child's abdomen. In a crash,
across the strongest part of an the belt would apply force on a
infant's body, the back and body area that is unprotected by
shoulders. Infants should always any bony structure. This alone
be secured in rear-facing child could cause serious or fatal
restraints. injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a Rear-Facing Infant Seat
crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat provides
always be secured in appropriate restraint with the seating surface
child restraints. against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury,
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3-45.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Children can be endangered in a Administration (NHTSA) website to Whenever possible, children age
crash if the child restraint is not locate the nearest child safety seat 12 and under should be secured in
properly secured in the vehicle. inspection station. For CPST a rear seating position.
When securing an add-on child availability in Canada, check with If a child restraint is secured in the
restraint, refer to the instructions Transport Canada or the Provincial front outboard passenger seat, and
that come with the restraint which Ministry of Transportation office. the vehicle has a switch on the
may be on the restraint itself or in a Securing the Child Within the passenger side instrument panel
booklet, or both, and to this manual. Child Restraint endcap to manually turn off the front
The child restraint instructions are outboard passenger airbag, see
important, so if they are not Airbag On-Off Switch on page 3-28
available, obtain a replacement { Warning and Securing Child Restraints
copy from the manufacturer. A child can be seriously injured or (Center Front Seat) on page 3-55 or
Keep in mind that an unsecured Securing Child Restraints (Front
killed in a crash if the child is not
child restraint can move around in a Outboard Passenger Seat) on
properly secured in the child
collision or sudden stop and injure page 3-55 or Securing Child
restraint. Secure the child Restraints (Rear Seat) on page 3-64
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly following the instructions
properly secure any child restraint in for more information, including
that came with that child restraint. important safety information.
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it. Never put a rear-facing child seat in
In some areas of the United States Where to Put the the front. This is because the risk to
and Canada, Certified Child Restraint the rear-facing child is so great,
Passenger Safety Technicians if the airbag deploys.
According to accident statistics,
(CPSTs) are available to inspect children and infants are safer when
and demonstrate how to correctly properly restrained in a child
use and install child restraints. In restraint system or infant restraint
the U.S., refer to the National system secured in a rear seating
Highway Traffic Safety position.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
When securing a child restraint in a

{ Warning Warning (Continued) rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints child restraint to make sure it is
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag compatible with this vehicle.
or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a
passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in Child restraints and booster seats
because the back of the the right front seat, always move vary considerably in size, and some
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
sure the child restraint is properly
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
secured.
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
injured or killed if the right front Depending on where you place the
passenger airbag inflates and the child restraint and the size of the
passenger seat is in a forward child restraint, you may not be able
position. { Warning to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
Even if the passenger sensing A child in a child restraint in the additional passengers or child
system or airbag switch has center front seat can be badly restraints. Adjacent seating
turned off the right front injured or killed by the frontal positions should not be used if the
passenger frontal airbag, no airbags if they inflate. Never child restraint prevents access to or
system is fail-safe. No one can secure a child restraint in the interferes with the routing of the
guarantee that an airbag will not center front seat. It is always safety belt.
deploy under some unusual better to secure a child restraint in If the vehicle does not have a rear
circumstance, even though it is a rear seat. seat that will accommodate a
turned off. rear-facing child restraint, a
(Continued) Do not use child restraints in the
center front seat position.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
rear-facing child restraint should not In order to use the LATCH system in When installing a child restraint with
be installed in the vehicle, even if your vehicle, you need a child a top tether, you must also use
the airbag is off. restraint that has LATCH either the lower anchors or the
Wherever a child restraint is attachments. LATCH-compatible safety belts to properly secure the
installed, be sure to secure the child rear-facing and forward-facing child child restraint. A child restraint must
restraint properly. seats can be properly installed never be installed using only the top
using either the LATCH anchors or tether and anchor.
Keep in mind that an unsecured the vehicle’s safety belts. Do not
child restraint can move around in a The LATCH anchorage system can
use both the safety belts and the be used until the combined weight
collision or sudden stop and injure LATCH anchorage system to secure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to of the child plus the child restraint is
a rear-facing or forward-facing 29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt
properly secure any child restraint in child seat.
your vehicle — even when no child alone instead of the LATCH
is in it. Booster seats use the vehicle’s anchorage system once the
safety belts to secure the child in combined weight is more than
the booster seat. If the manufacturer 29.5 kg (65 lbs).
Lower Anchors and recommends that the booster seat The following explains how to attach
Tethers for Children be secured with the LATCH system, a child restraint with these
(LATCH System) this can be done as long as the attachments in the vehicle.
booster seat can be positioned
The LATCH system secures a child properly and there is no interference Not all vehicle seating positions or
restraint during driving or in a crash. with the proper positioning of the child restraints have lower anchors
LATCH attachments on the child lap-shoulder belt on the child. and attachments or top tether
restraint are used to attach the child anchors and attachments.
restraint to the anchors in the Make sure to follow the instructions
vehicle. This system is designed to that came with the child restraint,
make installation of a child restraint and also the instructions in this
easier. manual.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4).
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of the instructions for your child
built into the vehicle. There are two the child restraint to the vehicle. restraint.
lower anchors for each LATCH A top tether anchor is built into the
seating position that will vehicle. The top tether
accommodate a child restraint with attachment (2) on the child restraint
lower attachments (2). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Lower Anchor and Top Tether

Anchor Locations
Regular Cab — Three-Passenger Crew and Extended Cab Rear Seat

Front Seat i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
Regular Cab — Two-Passenger i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors.
Front Seat positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating
Do not install a child restraint in the positions with two lower anchors.
center front seating position. See
Securing Child Restraints (Center
Front Seat) on page 3-55 or
Securing Child Restraints (Front
Outboard Passenger Seat) on
page 3-55 or Securing Child
Restraints (Rear Seat) on page 3-64
for more information.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To assist in locating the lower For regular cab models, there is an

anchors on crew cab models, each anchor symbol on the cover to
seating position with lower anchors assist you in locating the top tether
has two labels near the crease anchors.
between the seatback and the seat Do not install a child restraint in the
cushion. center seating position. See
For extended cab models, the rear Securing Child Restraints (Center Regular Cab
outboard seating positions have Front Seat) on page 3-55 or For regular cab models, the top
exposed metal lower anchors in the Securing Child Restraints (Front tether anchors are under covers on
crease between the seatback and Outboard Passenger Seat) on the back panel behind the
the seat cushion. page 3-55 or Securing Child passenger seat. Remove the trim
Restraints (Rear Seat) on page 3-64 plug to access the anchor. Be sure
for more information. to use an anchor on the same side
of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will
be placed.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Be sure to read the following Securing a Child Restraint

instructions to properly install a child Designed for the LATCH
restraint using these loops. System
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
{ Warning
that the top tether be attached, or if If a LATCH-type child restraint is
the instructions that come with the not attached to anchors, the child
child restraint say that the top tether restraint will not be able to protect
must be attached. the child correctly. In a crash, the
According to accident statistics, child could be seriously injured or
children and infants are safer when killed. Install a LATCH-type child
Crew Cab Shown, Extended Cab restraint properly using the
properly restrained in a child
Similar restraint system or infant restraint anchors, or use the vehicle safety
For crew and extended cab models, system secured in a rear seating belts to secure the restraint,
the top tether anchors are the loops position. See Where to Put the following the instructions that
near the top of the seatback for Restraint on page 3-43 for came with the child restraint and
each rear seating position. These additional information. the instructions in this manual.
loops will be used to route the top
tether through, as well as, to secure
the top tether to the vehicle. Be sure
to use the anchor (loop) on the
same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If you need to secure more than one

{ Warning Warning (Continued) child restraint in the rear seat, see
Where to Put the Restraint on
Do not attach more than one child children cannot reach them. Pull page 3-43.
restraint to a single anchor, the shoulder belt all the way out
except for the center top tether of the retractor to set the lock, This system is designed to make
anchors in the crew and extended if the vehicle has one, after the installation of child restraints easier.
cabs. Attaching more than one child restraint has been installed. When using lower anchors, do not
child restraint to a single anchor use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
could cause the anchor or
and child restraint attachments to
attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or { Caution secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle
others could be injured. To reduce Do not let the LATCH anchor to secure a top tether.
the risk of serious or fatal injuries attachments rub against the
during a crash, attach only one vehicle’s safety belts. This may
child restraint per anchor. damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
{ Warning attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
Children can be seriously injured with a safety belt buckled. This
or strangled if a shoulder belt is could damage the safety belt or
wrapped around their neck and the seat. Unbuckle and return the
the safety belt continues to safety belt to its stowed position,
tighten. Buckle any unused safety before folding the seat.
belts behind the child restraint so
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Regular Cab Models 1.3. Remove the cover to

1. For models without a rear seat, expose the anchor.
forward-facing child restraints 1.4. Route, attach, and tighten
should only be installed in the the top tether according to
right front seating position with your child restraint
safety belts and a top tether. instructions and the
See Securing Child Restraints following instructions:
(Center Front Seat) on
page 3-55 or Securing Child
Restraints (Front Outboard If the position you are using
Passenger Seat) on page 3-55 has an adjustable head
or Securing Child Restraints restraint and you are using
(Rear Seat) on page 3-64. a single tether, raise the
head restraint and route the
If the child restraint manufacturer tether under the head
recommends that the top tether restraint and in between the
be attached, attach and tighten head restraint posts.
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if your vehicle has one. If the position you are using 2. Secure the child restraint in the
Refer to the child restraint has an adjustable head right front seating position with
instructions and the following restraint and you are using the vehicle safety belts. See
steps: a dual tether, route the Securing Child Restraints
tether around the head (Center Front Seat) on
1.1. Fold the passenger restraint. page 3-55 or Securing Child
seatback forward to access Restraints (Front Outboard
the top tether anchor. See Passenger Seat) on page 3-55
Reclining Seatbacks on or Securing Child Restraints
page 3-5. (Rear Seat) on page 3-64.
1.2. Find the top tether anchor.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
3. Before placing a child in the 1.1. Find the lower anchors for 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
child restraint, make sure it is the desired seating recommends that the top tether
securely held in place. To check, position. be attached, attach and tighten
grasp the child restraint at the 1.2. Put the child restraint on the top tether to the top tether
safety belt path and attempt to the seat. anchor (loop), if your vehicle has
move it side to side and back one. Refer to the child restraint
and forth. There should be no 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower instructions and the following
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of attachments on the child steps:
movement for proper installation. restraint to the lower
anchors.
Crew and Extended Cab Models
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions Example — Rear Driver Side
in this manual. Position
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
C. Attach the top B. Route the top

tether (4) to the top tether (4) between
tether the headrest posts,
anchor (loop) (1) at through the loop on
the center rear the passenger side
seating position. and behind the
2.2. When using a child restraint inboard
with a top tether in the rear headrest post.
center position: C. Attach the top
A. Route the top tether (4) to the top
tether (4) through the tether
center loop (1), and anchor (loop) (1) at
Example — Rear Driver Side the center rear
behind the
Position passenger side seating position.
2.1. When using a child restraint headrest post. 2.4. Tighten the top tether per
with a top tether in the rear B. Attach the top the child restraint
driver side position: tether (4) to the top manufacturer's instructions.
A. Raise the headrest. tether anchor (loop) When the top tether is
at the rear properly tightened, the
B. Route the top
passenger side anchor (loop) may bend.
tether (4) between
seating position. This is normal and will not
the headrest posts,
2.3. When using a child restraint damage the vehicle.
through the loop (3),
behind the inboard with a top tether in the rear
headrest post, and passenger position:
under the center A. Raise the headrest.
shoulder belt (2).
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
3. Before placing a child in the Reinstalling Rear Head Rests

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
{ Warning
LATCH path and attempt to With head restraints that are not
move it side to side and back installed and adjusted properly,
and forth. There should be no there is a greater chance that
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of occupants will suffer a neck/
movement for proper installation. spinal injury in a crash. Do not
Removing and Reinstalling drive until the head restraints for
Head Rests all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Removing Rear Head Rests To reinstall the head rest:
For outboard rear seating positions, 1. Insert the head rest posts into
if the child restraint cannot be the holes in the top of the
installed properly with the head rest seatback with the longer chrome
in place, the head rest may be plated post toward the driver
removed. See your dealer for side of the vehicle.
assistance with removal and store
the removed head rests in a secure 2. Push the head rest all the way
place. When the child restraint is down until it contacts the top of
removed, reinstall the head rest the seatback.
before the seating position is used.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints Securing Child Restraints

Parts After a Crash (Center Front Seat) (Front Outboard
Passenger Seat)
{ Warning { Warning With Passenger Sensing
A crash can damage the LATCH A child in a child restraint in the System
system in the vehicle. A damaged center front seat can be badly This vehicle has airbags. A rear
LATCH system may not properly injured or killed by the frontal seat is a safer place to secure a
secure the child restraint, airbags if they inflate. Never forward-facing child restraint. See
resulting in serious injury or even secure a child restraint in the Where to Put the Restraint on
death in a crash. To help make center front seat. It is always page 3-43.
sure the LATCH system is better to secure a child restraint in
In addition, the vehicle may have a
working properly after a crash, a rear seat.
passenger sensing system which is
see your dealer to have the
designed to turn off the front
system inspected and any Do not use child restraints in the outboard passenger frontal airbag
necessary replacements made as center front seat position. under certain conditions. See
soon as possible. Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-30 and Passenger Airbag
If the vehicle has the LATCH system Status Indicator on page 5-19 for
and it was being used during a more information on this, including
crash, new LATCH system parts important safety information.
may be needed. Never put a rear-facing child seat in
New parts and repairs may be the front. This is because the risk to
necessary even if the LATCH the rear-facing child is so great,
system was not being used at the if the airbag deploys.
time of the crash.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the child restraint has the LATCH

{ Warning Warning (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
A child in a rear-facing child fail-safe. No one can guarantee System) on page 3-45 for how and
restraint can be seriously injured that an airbag will not deploy where to install the child restraint
or killed if the right front under some unusual using LATCH. If you secure a child
passenger airbag inflates. This is circumstance, even though it is restraint using a safety belt and it
because the back of the turned off. uses a top tether, see Lower
rear-facing child restraint would Secure rear-facing child restraints Anchors and Tethers for Children
be very close to the inflating in a rear seat, even if the airbag (LATCH System) on page 3-45 for
airbag. A child in a forward-facing is off. If you secure a top tether anchor locations.
child restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in Do not secure a child seat in a
injured or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move position without a top tether anchor
passenger airbag inflates and the the front passenger seat as far if a national or local law requires
passenger seat is in a forward back as it will go. It is better to that the top tether be anchored, or if
position. secure the child restraint in a the instructions that come with the
The vehicle may have a rear seat. child restraint say that the top strap
passenger sensing system which must be anchored.
See Passenger Sensing System
is designed to turn off the right on page 3-30 for additional In Canada, the law requires that
front passenger frontal airbag information. forward-facing child restraints have
under certain conditions. a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Even if the passenger sensing If the vehicle does not have a rear
system, if equipped, has turned seat that will accommodate a
off the right front passenger rear-facing child restraint, a
frontal airbag, no system is rear-facing child restraint should not
(Continued) be installed in the vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
You will be using the lap-shoulder

belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system, if equipped, has turned
off the front outboard passenger
frontal airbag, the off indicator in
the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
when you start the vehicle. See buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
Passenger Airbag Status Position the release button so lock. When the retractor lock is
Indicator on page 5-19. that the safety belt could be set, the belt can be tightened but
quickly unbuckled if necessary. not pulled out of the retractor.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
7. If the vehicle does not have a If a child restraint has been installed
rear seat and the child restraint and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
has a top tether, follow the child On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
restraint manufacturer's Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
instructions regarding the use of System on page 3-30 for more
the top tether. See Lower information.
Anchors and Tethers for To remove the child restraint,
Children (LATCH System) on unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
page 3-45 for more information let it return to the stowed position.
on using the top tether anchors. If the top tether is attached to a top
8. Before placing a child in the tether anchor, disconnect it.
securely held in place. To check, With Airbag Off Switch
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the grasp the child restraint at the This vehicle has airbags. A rear
shoulder portion of the belt to safety belt path and attempt to seat is a safer place to secure a
tighten the lap portion of the belt, move it side to side and back forward-facing child restraint. See
and feed the shoulder belt back and forth. When the child Where to Put the Restraint on
into the retractor. When installing restraint is properly installed, page 3-43.
a forward-facing child restraint, it there should be no more than
There may be a switch on the
may be helpful to use your knee 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
instrument panel endcap that you
to push down on the child If the vehicle is equipped with a can use to turn off the front
restraint as you tighten the belt. passenger sensing system, and outboard passenger frontal airbag.
Try to pull the belt out of the when the passenger sensing system See Airbag On-Off Switch on
retractor to make sure the has turned off the front outboard page 3-28 for more information,
retractor is locked. If the passenger frontal airbag, the off including important safety
retractor is not locked, repeat indicator in the passenger airbag information.
Steps 5 and 6. status indicator should light and stay
lit when you start the vehicle.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Never put a rear-facing child seat in

the front unless airbag is off. This is Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great, if the airbag deploy under some unusual passenger airbag could inflate
deploys. circumstance, even though it is even though the airbag on-off
turned off. switch is turned off.
{ Warning Secure rear-facing child restraints To help avoid injury to yourself or
in a rear seat, even if the airbag others, have the vehicle serviced
A child in a rear-facing child is off. If you secure a right away. See Airbag Readiness
restraint can be seriously injured forward-facing child restraint in Light on page 5-17 for more
or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move information, including important
passenger airbag inflates. This is the front passenger seat as far safety information.
because the back of the back as it will go. It is better to
rear-facing child restraint would secure the child restraint in a If the vehicle does not have a rear
be very close to the inflating rear seat. seat that will accommodate a
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
rear-facing child restraint, a
child restraint can be seriously rear-facing child restraint should not
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the { Warning be installed in the vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
passenger seat is in a forward
If the airbag readiness light ever If the child restraint has the LATCH
position.
comes on and stays on, it means system, see Lower Anchors and
Even if the airbag switch has that something may be wrong Tethers for Children (LATCH
turned off the right front with the airbag system. For System) on page 3-45 for how and
passenger frontal airbag, no example, the right front where to install the child restraint
system is fail-safe. No one can (Continued) using LATCH. If a child restraint is
guarantee that an airbag will not secured using a safety belt and it
(Continued) uses a top tether, see Lower
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Anchors and Tethers for Children When the airbag off switch has
(LATCH System) on page 3-45 for turned off the front outboard
top tether anchor locations. passenger frontal airbag, the off
Do not secure a child restraint in a indicator in the airbag off light
position without a top tether anchor should light and stay lit when
if a national or local law requires you start the vehicle. See Airbag
that the top tether be anchored, or if On-Off Light on page 5-17.
the instructions that come with the 2. Put the child restraint on
child restraint say that the top strap the seat.
must be anchored. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
In Canada, the law requires that the lap and shoulder portions of
forward-facing child restraints have the vehicle's safety belt through
a top tether, and that the tether be or around the restraint. The child 4. Push the latch plate into the
attached. restraint instructions will show buckle until it clicks.
You will be using the lap-shoulder you how. Position the release button so
belt to secure the child restraint in that the safety belt could be
this position. Follow the instructions quickly unbuckled if necessary.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
If you have no other choice but
to install a rear-facing child
restraint in this seat, make sure
the airbag is off once the child
restraint has been installed.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
7. If your vehicle does not have a

rear seat and your child restraint
has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer's
instructions regarding the use of
the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3-45.
8. Before placing a child in the
securely held in place. To check,
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down grasp the child restraint at the
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, and forth. When the child
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed,
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than
a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
may be helpful to use your knee To remove the child restraint,
to push down on the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
restraint as you tighten the belt. let it return to the stowed position.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the top tether is attached to a top
retractor to make sure the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor is locked. If the If you turned the airbag off with the
retractor is not locked, repeat switch, turn on the right front
Steps 5 and 6. passenger airbag when you remove
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
the child restraint from the vehicle Do not secure a child seat in a
unless the person who will be sitting Warning (Continued) position without a top tether anchor
there is a member of a passenger if a national or local law requires
airbag risk group. See Airbag rear-facing child restraint would that the top tether be anchored, or if
On-Off Switch on page 3-28 for be very close to the inflating the instructions that come with the
more information, including airbag. Always secure a child restraint say that the top strap
important safety information. rear-facing child restraint in a must be anchored.
rear seat.
Heavy-Duty Crew Cab Only In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
This vehicle has airbags. A rear If the vehicle does not have a rear a top tether, and that the tether be
seat is a safer place to secure a seat that will accommodate a attached.
forward-facing child restraint. See rear-facing child restraint, a
Where to Put the Restraint on You will be using the lap-shoulder
rear-facing child restraint should not
page 3-43. belt to secure the child restraint in
be installed in the vehicle, even if
this position. Follow the instructions
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the airbag is off.
the front. This is because the risk to If the child restraint has the LATCH
the rear-facing child is so great, 1. Move the seat as far back as it
system, see Lower Anchors and
if the airbag deploys. will go before securing the
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-45 for how and
{ Warning where to install the child restraint 2. Put the child restraint on
using LATCH. If you secure a child the seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint using a safety belt and it 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
restraint can be seriously injured uses a top tether, see Lower the lap and shoulder portions of
or killed if the right front Anchors and Tethers for Children the vehicle's safety belt through
passenger's airbag inflates. This (LATCH System) on page 3-45 for or around the restraint. The child
is because the back of the top tether anchor locations. restraint instructions will show
(Continued) you how.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Make sure the release button is lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
positioned so you would be able set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
to unbuckle the safety belt not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
quickly if necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
7. If your child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that
tether, follow the child restraint forward-facing child restraints have
manufacturer's instructions
(Rear Seat) a top tether, and that the tether be
regarding the use of the top When securing a child restraint in a attached.
tether. See Lower Anchors and rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
Tethers for Children (LATCH instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
System) on page 3-45 for more restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
information on using the top compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
tether anchors. sure to follow the instructions that
If the child restraint has the LATCH
8. Before placing a child in the system, see Lower Anchors and came with the child restraint. Secure
child restraint, make sure it is Tethers for Children (LATCH the child in the child restraint when
securely held in place. To check, System) on page 3-45 for how and and as the instructions say.
grasp the child restraint at the where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint
safety belt path and attempt to using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear
move it side to side and back secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put
and forth. When the child safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3-43.
restraint is properly installed, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
there should be no more than Children (LATCH System) on 1. Put the child restraint on
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. page 3-45 for top tether anchor the seat.
To remove the child restraint, locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of
let it return to the stowed position. position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through
If the top tether is attached to a top if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child
tether anchor, disconnect it. that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
the instructions that come with the you how.
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
6. If the child restraint has a top in place, the headrest may be

tether, follow the child restraint removed. See your dealer for
manufacturer's instructions assistance with removal, and store
regarding the use of the top the removed headrest in a secure
tether. See Lower Anchors and place. When the child restraint is
Tethers for Children (LATCH removed, reinstall the headrest
System) on page 3-45 for more before the seating position is used.
information on using the top For reinstallation instructions, see
tether anchors. “Removing and Reinstalling Head
7. Before placing a child in the Rests” under Lower Anchors and
child restraint, make sure it is Tethers for Children (LATCH
securely held in place. To check, System) on page 3-45.
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to { Warning
move it side-to-side and
back-and-forth. When the child With head restraints that are not
restraint is properly installed, installed and adjusted properly,
there should be no more than there is a greater chance that
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
To remove the child restraint,
drive until the head restraints for
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
all occupants are installed and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top adjusted properly.
tether anchor, disconnect it.
For outboard rear seating positions,
if the child restraint cannot be
installed properly with the headrest
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Instrument Panel Storage

Compartments If equipped, there is storage under
the climate control system.
Storage Compartments
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1 { Warning
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Do not store heavy or sharp
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 objects in storage compartments.
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 In a crash, these objects may
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3 cause the cover to open and
Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-4 could result in injury.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
To access, pull down on the handle.

5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
4-2 Storage
Glove Box Cupholders Rear

Front
Base
If equipped, there are cupholders on
the center front seat console
armrest.
Uplevel
If equipped, the cupholders in the
center console can be placed over
the mid or front storage
compartment, or between them to
access both storage compartments.
To access the upper glove box, use If equipped, pull the rear seat
Lift the cupholder from the sides to armrest down to access the
the key to open it and pull up on the
remove it. cupholders.
handle.
Insert the cupholder between the
To access the lower glove box, pull guides on the console and push
down on the handle.
down to secure it.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Storage 4-3
Sunglasses Storage Center Console Storage
Uplevel Shown, Other Models

Similar
Base
If equipped, sunglasses storage is If equipped, the uplevel center
If equipped, pull the front center
on the overhead console. Press the console may have the following
seat armrest down to access the
fixed button on the cover and features:
storage area with cupholders.
release to access.
Press the button and lift to open. 1. Tote compartment
There is a removable divider. 2. Accessory power outlets
There is an accessory power outlet, 3. Power cord openings
dual USB ports, an auxiliary jack, 4. Removable cupholders
and an SD card reader inside.
5. Device holder
6. USB ports
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
4-4 Storage
7. High Voltage Power Outlet Floor Console Storage Additional Storage

(HVPO) (if equipped)
8. SD card reader
Features
9. Auxiliary input jack Cargo Tie-Downs
10. Latch
11. Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Press the latch (10) and lift the
armrest to access the main storage
compartment.
There is an open storage
compartment on the rear of the
center console.
See Cupholders on page 4-2, Power If equipped with front seat floor
Outlets on page 5-5, USB Port on console storage, unlock and lift to
page 7-18, Auxiliary Jack on access.
page 7-21, and SD Card Reader on
page 7-20. If equipped with the If equipped, there are nine holes
uplevel radio, see “Audio Players” in inside the truck bed for tie-downs.
the infotainment manual.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Storage 4-5
The maximum load is 113 kg (250lb) 2. Turn the tie-down loop clockwise 3. Push the backing plate against
per tie down. to tighten. The tie-down will be the truck bed wall. This allows
hard to turn until the toggle the toggle nut to spin.
{ Caution moves past the installation point
on the toggle guide.
4. Remove the backing plate,
toggle guide, and toggle nut
The truck bed walls will collapse if 3. Fasten the tie-down firmly by from the truck bed wall
the tie downs are overloaded. hand only. Do not use tools. completely.
To remove: 5. Reinstall the tie-down loop
1. Remove the tie-down loop through the backing plate into
completely by turning the toggle nut for reuse.
counterclockwise while holding
the backing plate against the
truck bed wall.
2. Pull the backing plate away from
the truck bed wall until a click is
heard. This locks the toggle into
position on the toggle guide.
To install:
1. Insert a tie-down loop until it is
flush with the truck bed wall.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
4-6 Storage
2 NOTES
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-28
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Controls Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17
Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Passenger Airbag Status Information Displays

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Driver Information Center
Controls (DIC) (Base Level) . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-20
Malfunction Driver Information Center
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3 (DIC) (Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Brake System Warning Vehicle Messages
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Battery Voltage and Charging
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . 5-24 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-34
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-25 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Hill Descent Control Light . . . . 5-25 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Indicators Lane Departure Warning Engine Cooling System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and (LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-25 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-36
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-37
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-26 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-37
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Traction Control System Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-37
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-26 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Object Detection System
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-27 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Engine Oil Pressure Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Ride Control System
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Engine Coolant Temperature Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-40
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Controls Tilt and Telescope Steering Wheel

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-41
Vehicle Reminder Steering Wheel
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Adjustment
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-43
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-43
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-44
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-47
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Universal Remote System To adjust the tilt and telescope
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 steering wheel, if equipped:
1. Push the lever (1) down to move
the steering wheel forward or
To adjust the steering wheel: rearward. Lift the lever up to lock
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the wheel in place.
the lever. The ignition may need to be set
2. Move the steering wheel up to the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
or down. RUN position to disengage the
tilt and telescope steering
3. Release the lever to lock the
column and allow easier
wheel in place.
adjustment.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2. Pull the lever (2) toward you and See OnStar Overview on page 14-1 1. Favorite: When on a radio
release, to move the steering or “Bluetooth (Overview)” in the source, press to select the next
wheel up or down. infotainment manual. or previous favorite. When on a
Do not adjust the steering wheel c (Phone/Mute): Press to reject media source, press to select
while driving. an incoming call, or end a current the next or previous track.
call. Press to mute or unmute the 2. Volume: Press to increase or
Steering Wheel Controls infotainment system when not on decrease the volume.
a call.
Heated Steering Wheel
If equipped, some audio controls

can be adjusted at the steering The favorite and volume switches
wheel. are on the back of the steering
wheel. ( (Heated Steering Wheel, If
g (Talk): For vehicles with OnStar® Equipped): Press to turn it on or
or a Bluetooth® system, press to off. A light next to the button
interact with those systems. displays when the feature is
turned on.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The steering wheel takes about 3 INT (Adjustable Interval If the ignition is put in OFF while the
three minutes to start heating. Wipes): Turn the band up for more wipers are performing wipes due to
frequent wipes or down for less windshield washing, the wipers
Horn frequent wipes. continue to run until they reach the
base of the windshield.
To sound the horn, press the center w (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
pad on the steering wheel. 1 (High Speed): Fast wipes. Windshield Washer
Windshield Wiper/Washer Clear ice and snow from the wiper

blades before using them. If frozen
{ Warning
to the windshield, carefully loosen or In freezing weather, do not use
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades the washer until the windshield is
should be replaced. See Wiper warmed. Otherwise the washer
Blade Replacement on page 10-37. fluid can form ice on the
Heavy snow or ice can overload the windshield, blocking your vision.
wiper motor. An internal circuit
breaker to the motor will stop the
The windshield wiper control is on motor until it cools down.
L m (Washer Fluid): Push the
the turn signal lever. paddle marked with the windshield
Wiper Parking washer symbol at the top of the turn
The windshield wipers are controlled
If the ignition is put in OFF while the signal lever, to spray washer fluid
by turning the band with z on it. and activate the wipers. The wipers
wipers are on w, 1 or 3 INT,
8 (Mist): For a single wipe, turn they will immediately stop.
will continue until the paddle is
to 8 , then release. For several released or the maximum wash time
If the windshield wiper lever is then is reached. When the paddle is
wipes, hold the band on 8 longer. released, additional wipes may
moved to OFF before the driver
OFF: Turns the windshield door is opened or within 10 minutes, occur depending on how long the
wipers off. the wipers will restart and move to windshield washer had been
the base of the windshield. activated.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
See Washer Fluid on page 10-27 for See Compass Messages on To set the clock display:
information on filling the windshield page 5-35 for the messages that 1. Select Settings from the Home
washer fluid reservoir. may be displayed for the compass. Page, then select Time and Date
Settings.
Compass Clock
2. Select Clock Display.
The vehicle may have a compass Setting the Time and Date
display on the Driver Information 3. Turn the MENU knob to Off
Center (DIC). The compass receives To set the time or date: or On.
its heading and other information 1. Select Settings from the Home 4. Press the MENU knob to select.
from the Global Positioning Page, then select Time and Date
System (GPS) antenna, Settings. Press o BACK to go to the last
StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speed menu and save the changes.
2. Select the desired function.
information.
The compass system is designed to
3. Turn the MENU knob to increase Power Outlets
or decrease the value.
operate for a certain number of Accessory power outlets can be
miles or degrees of turn before 4. Press the MENU knob to go to used to plug in electrical equipment,
needing a signal from the GPS the next value. After the last such as a cell phone, MP3
satellites. When the compass value is selected the system will player, etc.
display shows CAL, drive the update and return to the Settings
The vehicle may be equipped with
vehicle for a short distance in an menu. Press o BACK to go to four accessory power outlets:
open area where it can receive a the last menu and save the
GPS signal. The compass system changes.
. One or two on the center stack
will automatically determine when a below the climate control
GPS signal is restored and provide system.
a heading again. . One inside the center console.
. One on the rear of the center
console, if equipped.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Remove the cover to access and When adding electrical equipment,

replace when not in use. { Caution be sure to follow the proper
The accessory power outlets are installation instructions included with
Leaving electrical equipment the equipment. See Add-On
powered, even when the ignition is plugged in for an extended period
in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use Electrical Equipment on page 9-102.
of time while the vehicle is off will
power outlets while the ignition is in drain the battery. Always unplug
LOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle's electrical equipment when not in
{ Caution
battery to run down. use and do not plug in equipment Hanging heavy equipment from
that exceeds the maximum the power outlet can cause
{ Warning 15 amp rating. damage not covered by the
Power is always supplied to the vehicle warranty. The power
outlets. Do not leave electrical Certain power accessory plugs may outlets are designed for
equipment plugged in when the not be compatible with the accessory power plugs only, such
vehicle is not in use because the accessory power outlet and could as cell phone charge cords.
vehicle could catch fire and cause overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
injury or death. If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Power Outlet 110 Volt An indicator light on the outlet turns The power outlet is not designed for
Alternating Current on to show it is in use. The light the following, and may not work
comes on when the ignition is in properly if they are plugged in:
ON/RUN, equipment requiring less . Equipment with high initial peak
than 150 watts is plugged into the wattage, such as
outlet, and no system fault is compressor-driven refrigerators
detected. and electric power tools.
The indicator light does not come on . Other equipment requiring an
when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or extremely stable power supply,
if the equipment is not fully seated such as
into the outlet. microcomputer-controlled
If equipment is connected using electric blankets and touch
more than 150 watts or a system sensor lamps.
fault is detected, a protection circuit
Base Shown, Uplevel Similar shuts off the power supply and the
indicator light turns off. To reset the
If equipped with this power outlet, it
circuit, unplug the item and plug it
can be used to plug in electrical
back in or turn the Retained
equipment that uses a maximum
Accessory Power (RAP) off and
limit of 150 watts.
then back on. See Retained
The power outlet is below the Accessory Power (RAP) on
climate control system on the page 9-29.
instrument panel.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Instrument Cluster
Base Cluster (English Shown, Metric Similar)

5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Uplevel Cluster (English Shown, Metric Similar)

5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Cluster Menu (Uplevel Cluster)

. Info App. This is where the calls, scroll through contacts, select
selected Driver Information from the favorites, or change the
There is an interactive display area Center (DIC) displays can be phone source. If there is an active
in the center of the instrument viewed. See “Driver Information call, mute the phone or switch to
cluster. Center (DIC) (Uplevel)” in the handset operation.
Index.
Navigation
. Audio
. Phone Press V to select the Navigation
app, then press p to enter the
. Navigation
Navigation menu. If there is no
. Settings active route, you can resume the
Audio last route and turn the voice
prompts on/off. If there is an active
Press V to select the Audio app, route, you can cancel the route.
then press p to enter the Audio Settings
menu. In the Audio menu browse for
music, select from the favorites, Press V to select the Settings app.
Use the right steering wheel control or change the audio source. Use w Use w or x to scroll through items
to open and scroll through the or x to change the station or go to in the Settings menu.
different items and displays.
the next or previous track. Units: Press p while Units is
Press o to access the cluster Phone displayed to enter the Units menu.
applications. Use w or x to scroll Choose English or metric units by
through the list of available Press V to select the Phone app, pressing V while the desired item is
applications. Not all applications will then press p to enter the Phone highlighted. A checkmark will be
be available on all vehicles. menu. In the Phone menu, if there is displayed next to the selected item.
no active phone call, view recent
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Info Pages: Press p while Info Speedometer Trip Odometer

Pages is displayed to enter the Info The speedometer shows the The trip odometer can show how far
Pages menu and select the items to vehicle's speed in either kilometers the vehicle has been driven since
be displayed in the Info app. See per hour (km/h) or miles per the trip odometer was last reset.
“Driver Information Center (DIC) hour (mph).
(Uplevel)” in the Index. The trip odometer is accessed and
reset through the Driver Information
Speed Warning: The Speed Odometer Center (DIC). See Driver
Warning display allows the driver to Information Center (DIC) (Base
set a speed that they do not want to The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either Level) on page 5-29 or Driver
exceed. To set the Speed Warning, Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
kilometers or miles.
press p when Speed Warning is on page 5-31.
displayed, or press V on the main This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
view to set the speed value. Press
new cluster installed, the new
Tachometer
w or x to adjust the value. Press odometer is set to the mileage of The tachometer displays the engine
V to set the speed. Once the speed the old odometer. If this is not speed in revolutions per
is set, this feature can be turned off
possible, it is set at zero and a label minute (rpm).
by pressing V while viewing this is put on the driver door to show the
page. If the selected speed limit is old mileage reading.
exceeded, a pop-up warning is
displayed with a chime.
Software Information: Press p
while Software Information is
highlighted to display open source
software information.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuel Here are four things that some
gauge indicates about how much owners ask about. None of these
fuel is left in the tank. show a problem with the fuel gauge:
There is an arrow near the fuel . At the service station, the fuel
gauge pointing to the side of the pump shuts off before the gauge
vehicle the fuel door is on. reads full.
When the indicator nears empty, the . It takes a little more or less fuel
low fuel light comes on. There still is to fill up than the gauge
a little fuel left, but the vehicle indicated. For example, the
should be refueled soon. gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
Metric the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
. The gauge takes a few seconds
to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and goes back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
English
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Engine Oil Pressure See “OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP

ENGINE” under Engine Oil
Gauge Messages on page 5-36 and Engine
Oil on page 10-10.
{ Caution
Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. Driving with the engine
oil low can also damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
English covered by the vehicle warranty.
The engine oil pressure gauge Check the oil level as soon as
shows the engine oil pressure possible. Add oil if required, but if
Metric the oil level is within the operating
in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (pounds
per square inch) when the engine is range and the oil pressure is still
running. low, have the vehicle serviced.
Always follow the maintenance
Oil pressure can vary with engine
schedule for changing engine oil.
speed, outside temperature and oil
viscosity.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
A reading outside the normal
see the Duramax diesel
operating range can be caused by a
supplement.
dangerously low oil level or some
other problem causing low oil
pressure. Check the vehicle's oil as
soon as possible.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Engine Coolant Voltmeter Gauge

Temperature Gauge
English
This gauge measures the
temperature of the vehicle's engine When the ignition is on, this gauge
Metric
coolant. indicates the battery voltage.
While driving under normal When the engine is running, this
operating conditions, if the needle gauge shows the condition of the
moves into the red warning area, charging system. The gauge can
the engine is too hot. Pull off the transition from a higher to lower or a
road, stop the vehicle, and turn off lower to higher reading. This is
the engine as soon as possible. normal. If the vehicle is operating
outside the normal operating range,
the charging system light comes on.
See Charging System Light on
page 5-20 for more information. The
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
voltmeter gauge may also read Readings outside the normal the driver remains or becomes
lower when in fuel economy mode. operating range indicate a possible unbuckled while the vehicle is
This is normal. problem in the electrical system. moving.
Readings outside the normal Have the vehicle serviced as soon If the driver safety belt is buckled,
operating range can also occur as possible. neither the light nor the chime
when a large number of electrical comes on.
accessories are operating in the Safety Belt Reminders
vehicle and the engine is left idling Passenger Safety Belt
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Reminder Light
for an extended period. This
condition is normal since the
Light
There may be a passenger safety
charging system is not able to There is a driver safety belt belt reminder light near the
provide full power at engine idle. As reminder light on the instrument passenger airbag status indicator.
engine speeds are increased, this cluster. See Passenger Sensing System on
condition should correct itself as page 3-30.
higher engine speeds allow the
charging system to create maximum
power.
The vehicle can only be driven for a
short time with the readings outside
the normal operating range. If the
vehicle must be driven, turn off all When the vehicle is started this light
accessories, such as the radio and flashes and a chime may come on For vehicles equipped with the
air conditioner. to remind the driver to fasten their passenger safety belt warning light,
safety belt. Then the light stays on when the vehicle is started this light
solid until the belt is buckled. This flashes and a chime may come on
cycle may continue several times if to remind passengers to fasten their
safety belt. Then the light stays on
solid until the belt is buckled. This
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
cycle continues several times if the and diagnostic module. For more
passenger remains or becomes information on the airbag system, Warning (Continued)
unbuckled while the vehicle is see Airbag System on page 3-21.
moving. without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
If the passenger safety belt is right away.
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
If there is a problem with the airbag
The front passenger safety belt system, a Driver Information Center
warning light and chime may turn on (DIC) message may also come on.
if an object is put on the seat such See Airbag System Messages on
The airbag readiness light comes on
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery page 5-40.
for several seconds when the
bag, laptop, or other electronic
vehicle is started. If the light does
device. To turn off the warning light
and/or chime, remove the object
not come on then, have it fixed Airbag On-Off Light
immediately.
from the seat or buckle the If the vehicle has an airbag on-off
safety belt. switch, it also has a passenger
{ Warning airbag status indicator located in the
Airbag Readiness Light If the airbag readiness light stays
overhead console.
This light shows if there is an on after the vehicle is started or
electrical problem with the airbag comes on while driving, it means
system. The system check includes the airbag system might not be
the airbag sensor(s), passenger working properly. The airbags in
sensing system (if equipped), the the vehicle might not inflate in a
pretensioners, the airbag modules, crash, or they could even inflate
the wiring, and the crash sensing
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
instrument panel endcap, the OFF

indicator light or the off symbol will Warning (Continued)
come on and stay on as a reminder
that the airbag has been turned off. protection of an airbag. In a
This light will go off when the airbag crash, the airbag will not be able
has been turned on. See Airbag to inflate and help protect the
On-Off Switch on page 3-28 for person sitting there.
United States
more information, including Do not turn off the passenger
important safety information. airbag unless the person sitting
there is in a risk group identified
by the national government. See
Airbag On-Off Switch on
page 3-28 for more on this,
including important safety
Canada and Mexico information.
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, will light for several { Warning
seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the
{ Warning If the airbag readiness light ever
status indicator ON or OFF, or either If the right front passenger airbag comes on and stays on, it means
the on or off symbol, will light to let is turned off for a person who is that something may be wrong
you know the status of the front not in a risk group identified by with the airbag system. For
outboard passenger frontal airbag. the national government, that example, the right front
When the front outboard passenger person will not have the extra (Continued)
frontal airbag is manually turned off (Continued)
using the airbag on-off switch on the
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Warning (Continued)
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
passenger airbag could inflate If the vehicle has one of the
even though the airbag on-off following indicators, then the vehicle
switch is turned off. has a passenger sensing system for
To help avoid injury to yourself or the front outboard passenger United States
others, have the vehicle serviced position unless there is an airbag
right away. See Airbag Readiness on-off switch on the instrument
Light on page 5-17 for more panel endcap. If there is an airbag
information, including important on-off switch, the vehicle does not
safety information. have a passenger sensing system.
See Airbag On-Off Switch on
page 3-28.
If the word ON or the on symbol is Canada and Mexico
The passenger airbag status
lit, it means that the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag is enabled indicator is on the overhead When the vehicle is started, the
console. See Passenger Sensing passenger airbag status indicator
(may inflate). See Airbag On-Off
System on page 3-30 for important will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
Switch on page 3-28 for more
information, including important safety information. for on and off, for several seconds
safety information. as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
If, after several seconds, both status indicator will light either ON or OFF,
indicator lights remain on, or if there or either the on or off symbol to let
are no lights at all, there may be a you know the status of the front
problem with the lights or the airbag outboard passenger frontal airbag.
on-off switch. See your dealer for
service.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the word ON or the on symbol is When this light comes on, or is

lit on the passenger airbag status Warning (Continued) flashing, the Driver Information
indicator, it means that the front Center (DIC) also displays a
outboard passenger frontal airbag is Light on page 5-17 for more message.
enabled (may inflate). information, including important
safety information. See Battery Voltage and Charging
If the word OFF or the off symbol is Messages on page 5-34.
lit on the airbag status indicator, it If a short distance must be driven
means that the passenger sensing Charging System Light with the light on, be sure to turn off
system has turned off the front all accessories, such as the radio
outboard passenger frontal airbag. and air conditioner.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there Malfunction
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
Indicator Lamp
passenger sensing system. See A computer system called OBD II
your dealer for service. The charging system light comes on (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
briefly when the ignition is turned Generation) monitors the operation
{ Warning on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
of the vehicle to ensure emissions
are at acceptable levels, helping to
If the airbag readiness light ever It should go out when the engine is maintain a clean environment. The
comes on and stays on, it means started. malfunction indicator lamp comes
that something may be wrong on when the vehicle is placed in
If the light stays on, or comes on
with the airbag system. To help ON/RUN, as a check to show it is
while driving, there may be a
avoid injury to yourself or others, working. If it does not, have the
problem with the electrical charging
have the vehicle serviced right vehicle serviced by your dealer. See
system. Have it checked by your
away. See Airbag Readiness Ignition Positions on page 9-25.
dealer. Driving while this light is on
(Continued) could drain the battery.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Caution (Continued) Caution (Continued)

the vehicle fuel economy might to pass a required Emission
not be as good, and the engine Inspection/Maintenance test. See
might not run as smoothly. This Accessories and Modifications on
could lead to costly repairs that page 10-3.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
might not be covered by the
comes on while the engine is
vehicle warranty. This light comes on during a
running, this indicates that the OBD
II system has detected a problem malfunction in one of two ways:
and diagnosis and service might be Light Flashing: A misfire condition
required. { Caution has been detected. A misfire
Malfunctions often are indicated by increases vehicle emissions and
the system before any problem is Modifications made to the engine, could damage the emission control
apparent. Being aware of the light transmission, exhaust, intake, system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
can prevent more serious damage or fuel system of the vehicle or and service might be required.
to the vehicle. This system also the replacement of the original
To prevent more serious damage to
assists the service technician in tires with other than those of the
the vehicle:
correctly diagnosing any same Tire Performance Criteria
. Reduce vehicle speed.
malfunction. (TPC) can affect the vehicle's
emission controls and can cause . Avoid hard accelerations.
{ Caution this light to come on. . Avoid steep uphill grades.
Modifications to these systems
If the vehicle is continually driven could lead to costly repairs not . If towing a trailer, reduce the
with this light on, the emission covered by the vehicle warranty. amount of cargo being hauled as
controls might not work as well, This could also result in a failure soon as it is possible.
(Continued) (Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the light continues to flash, find a

. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and
safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at the engine not to run as
least 10 seconds, and restart the efficiently as designed and may Depending on where you live, your
engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up, vehicle may be required to
follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is participate in an emission control
your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring, system inspection and maintenance
possible. hesitation on acceleration, program. For the inspection, the
or stumbling on acceleration. emission system test equipment will
Light On Steady: An emission These conditions might go away likely connect to the vehicle's Data
control system malfunction has once the engine is warmed up. Link Connector (DLC).
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
required. occurs, change the fuel brand used.
It may require at least one full tank
The following may correct an of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
emission control system
malfunction: See Recommended Fuel on
page 9-70.
. Check that the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on If none of the above have made the The DLC is under the instrument
page 9-73. The diagnostic light turn off, your dealer can check panel to the left of the steering
system can determine if the fuel the vehicle. The dealer has the wheel. See your dealer if assistance
cap has been left off or proper test equipment and is needed.
improperly installed. A loose or diagnostic tools to fix any
missing fuel cap allows fuel to mechanical or electrical problems
evaporate into the atmosphere. that might have developed.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The vehicle may not pass system readiness, your dealer This light should come on briefly
inspection if: can prepare the vehicle for when the engine is started. If it does
. The malfunction indicator lamp is inspection. not come on then, have it fixed so it
on with the engine running, or if will be ready to warn if there is a
the light does not come on when Brake System Warning problem.
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN Light When the ignition is on, the brake
while the engine is off. See your system warning light also comes on
The vehicle brake system consists
dealer for assistance in verifying when the parking brake is set. The
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
proper operation of the light stays on if the parking brake
circuit is not working, the remaining
malfunction indicator lamp. does not fully release. If it stays on
circuit can still work to stop the
. The OBD II (On-Board after the parking brake is fully
vehicle. For normal braking
Diagnostics) system determines released, it means the vehicle has a
performance, both circuits need to
that critical emission control brake problem.
be working
systems have not been If the light comes on while driving,
If the warning light comes on, there
completely diagnosed. The pull off the road and stop carefully.
is a brake problem. Have the brake
vehicle would be considered not The pedal might be harder to push,
system inspected right away.
ready for inspection. This can or the pedal can go closer to the
happen if the 12-volt battery has floor. It may take longer to stop.
recently been replaced or run If the light is still on, have the
down. The diagnostic system is vehicle towed for service. See
designed to evaluate critical Towing the Vehicle on page 10-94.
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving. Metric English
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the light does not come on, have it See Brake System Warning Light on
{ Warning fixed so it will be ready to warn if page 5-23 and Brake System
there is a problem. Messages on page 5-34.
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake If the ABS light stays on, turn the
system warning light is on. ignition off. Four-Wheel-Drive Light
Driving with the brake system If the light comes on while driving,
warning light on can lead to a stop as soon as it is safely possible
crash. If the light is still on after and turn off the vehicle. Then start
the vehicle has been pulled off the engine again to reset the
the road and carefully stopped, system. If the ABS light stays on,
have the vehicle towed for or comes on again while driving, the
service. vehicle needs service. A chime may
also sound when the light comes on The four-wheel-drive light comes on
steady. when a vehicle with a manual
Antilock Brake System If the ABS light is the only light on,
transfer case is shifted into
four-wheel drive and the front axle
(ABS) Warning Light the vehicle has regular brakes, but engages.
the antilock brakes are not
functioning. Some delay between the shifting
and the light coming on is normal.
If both the ABS and the brake
system warning light are on, the See Four-Wheel Drive on page 9-39
vehicle's antilock brakes are not for more information.
functioning and there is a problem
with the regular brakes. See your
This light comes on briefly when the dealer for service.
engine is started.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Tow/Haul Mode Light See Hill Descent Control (HDC) on Vehicle Ahead Indicator
page 9-58.
Lane Departure Warning

(LDW) Light
For vehicles with the Tow/Haul If equipped, this light displays green
Mode feature, this light comes on when a vehicle is detected ahead.
when the Tow/Haul Mode has been This light will display amber when
activated. you are following a vehicle ahead
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-38. If available, this light briefly comes much too closely.
on amber while starting the vehicle.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
Hill Descent Control Light If it does not, have the vehicle System on page 9-65.
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally, the
indicator light then turns off.
This light comes on green when the
system is on and ready to operate.
When the system determines that
the vehicle is leaving its lane
If equipped, the Hill Descent Control without using the turn signal, this
light comes on steady when the light will change to amber and flash.
system is ready for use. When the
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
light flashes, the system is active.
on page 9-68.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Traction Off Light StabiliTrak® OFF Light Traction Control System

(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
This light comes on briefly while This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not, starting the engine. If it does not, This light comes on briefly when the
have the vehicle serviced by your have the vehicle serviced by your engine is started.
dealer. If the system is working dealer.
normally, the indicator light then If the light does not come on, have
This light comes on when the the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
turns off. StabiliTrak system is turned off. If the system is working normally,
The traction off light comes on when If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction the indicator light turns off.
the Traction Control System (TCS) Control System (TCS) is also off.
has been turned off by pressing and If the light is on and not flashing, the
If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off, TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak the system does not assist in
button. system have been disabled. A DIC
controlling the vehicle. Turn on the message may display. Check the
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF TCS and the StabiliTrak systems DIC messages to determine which
light come on when StabiliTrak is and the warning light turns off. feature(s) is no longer functioning
turned off. See Traction Control/Electronic and whether the vehicle requires
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not Stability Control on page 9-56. service.
limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
See Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-56.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the indicator/warning light is on A Driver Information Center (DIC) This light is near the fuel gauge and
and flashing, the TCS and/or the tire pressure message may also comes on briefly when the ignition is
StabiliTrak system is actively display. See Tire Messages on turned on as a check to show it is
working. page 5-40. Stop as soon as working.
See Traction Control/Electronic possible, and inflate the tires to the It also comes on when the fuel tank
Stability Control on page 9-56. pressure value shown on the Tire is low on fuel. The light turns off
and Loading Information label. See when fuel is added. If it does not,
Tire Pressure on page 10-61.
Tire Pressure Light have the vehicle serviced.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then Is On Steady Security Light
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle.
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure See Tire Pressure Monitor
Monitor System (TPMS), this light Operation on page 10-64.
comes on briefly when the engine is The security light should come on
started. It provides information Low Fuel Warning Light briefly as the engine is started. If it
about tire pressures and the TPMS. does not come on, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
When the Light Is On Steady system is working normally, the
This indicates that one or more of indicator light turns off.
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the light stays on and the engine For vehicles with fog lamps, this Cruise Control Light
does not start, there could be a light comes on when the fog lamps
problem with the theft-deterrent are on.
system. See Immobilizer Operation The light goes out when the fog
on page 2-13. lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6-5 for more
High-Beam On Light information.
Lamps On Reminder For vehicles with cruise control, the

cruise control light is white when the
cruise control is on and ready, and
turns green when the cruise control
is set and active.
The light turns off when the cruise
This light comes on when the
control is turned off. See Cruise
high-beam headlamps are in use.
Control on page 9-59.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam This light comes on when the
Changer on page 6-2. exterior lamps are in use. See
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.
Front Fog Lamp Light
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. Hourmeter recent driving history and the
Information Displays amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
. Unit
tank. Fuel range cannot be reset.
Driver Information Center Digital Speedometer
(DIC) (Base Level) Average Fuel Economy
The speedometer shows how fast
the vehicle is moving in either The Average Fuel Economy display
The DIC displays are shown in the
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles shows the approximate average
center of the instrument cluster. The
per hour (mph). The speedometer liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
displays show the status of many
cannot be reset. or miles per gallon (mpg). This
vehicle systems. The trip odometer
number is based on the number of
reset stem in the instrument cluster Trip L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
is used to access the DIC menu
Turn the trip odometer reset stem last time this menu item was reset.
items.
until TRIP displays. The current Reset this display by pressing the
DIC Menu Items distance traveled, in either trip odometer reset stem.
Turn the trip odometer reset stem to kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since Tire Pressure
scroll through the following menu the last reset for the trip odometer is
shown. The trip odometer can be Turn the trip odometer reset stem
items: until a vehicle with the approximate
reset to zero by pressing and
. Digital Speedometer holding the trip odometer reset stem pressures of all four tires displays.
while the trip odometer is displayed. Tire pressure is displayed in either
. Trip
kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per
. Fuel Range Fuel Range square inch (psi).
. Average Fuel Economy This display shows the approximate See Tire Pressure Monitor System
distance the vehicle can be driven on page 10-63 and Tire Pressure
. Tire Pressure without refueling. The fuel range Monitor Operation on page 10-64.
. Remaining Oil Life estimate is based on an average of
. Transmission Fluid Temperature the vehicle's fuel economy over
. Trailer Brake
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Remaining Oil Life the next oil change. To reset the Hourmeter
Turn the trip odometer reset stem engine oil life system, see Engine This display shows the total number
until REMAINING OIL LIFE Oil Life System on page 10-13. of hours the engine has run.
displays. An estimate of the oil's Transmission Fluid Temperature
remaining useful life is shown. Unit
REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% means The temperature of the automatic This will change the displays on the
99% of the current oil life remains. transmission fluid displays in either instrument cluster and DIC to either
degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees metric or English (US)
When the remaining oil life is low, Fahrenheit (°F).
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON measurements. To change the units,
message will appear on the display. Trailer Brake press the trip odometer reset stem
See Engine Oil Messages on when UNITS is displayed to enter
On vehicles with the Integrated the Unit menu. Turn the trip
page 5-36. The oil should be Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
changed as soon as possible. See odometer reset stem to switch
turn the trip odometer reset stem between English and metric. Press
Engine Oil on page 10-10. In until TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER
addition to the engine oil life system the trip odometer reset stem when
OUTPUT displays. the desired setting is displayed.
monitoring the oil life, additional
TRAILER GAIN shows the Trailer
maintenance is recommended in the Compass
Gain setting. This setting can be
Maintenance Schedule. See
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either The vehicle may have a compass in
Maintenance Schedule on
a trailer connected or disconnected. the Driver Information Center (DIC).
page 11-3.
TRAILER OUTPUT shows the See Compass on page 5-5.
The Oil Life display must be reset
power output to the trailer any time
after each oil change. It will not
a trailer with electric brakes is
reset itself. Do not to reset the Oil
connected. Output is displayed as a
Life display at any time other than
bar graph. Dashes may appear in
when the oil has just been changed.
the TRAILER OUTPUT display.
It cannot be reset accurately until
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Driver Information Center o or p : Press to move between 6. Press V while an item is

(DIC) (Uplevel) the interactive display zones in the highlighted to select or deselect
cluster. that item. When an item is
The DIC displays are shown in the selected, a checkmark will
center of the instrument cluster in V (Set/Reset): Press to open a
menu or select a menu item. Press appear next to it.
the Info app. See Instrument Cluster
on page 5-9. The displays show the and hold to reset values on certain DIC Info Pages
status of many vehicle systems. The screens.
The following is the list of all
controls for the DIC are on the right DIC Info Page Options possible DIC info page displays.
steering wheel control. Some may not be available for your
The info pages on the DIC can be
turned on or off through the particular vehicle. Some items may
Settings menu. not be turned on by default but can
be turned on through the Settings
1. Press o to access the cluster app. See “DIC Info Page Options”
applications. earlier in this section.
2. Press w or x to scroll to the Speed: Shows the vehicle speed in
Settings application. either kilometers per hour (km/h) or
miles per hour (mph).
3. Press V to enter the Trip A or Trip B: Shows the
Settings menu. current distance traveled, in either
4. Scroll to Info Pages and kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since
press p. the trip odometer was last reset.
Also shows the approximate
w or x : Press to move up or 5. Press w or x to move through average liters per 100 kilometers
down in a list. the list of possible information (L/100 km) or miles per
displays. gallon (mpg). This number is
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
calculated based on the number of Engine Oil on page 10-10. In See Tire Pressure Monitor System
L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the addition to the engine oil life system on page 10-63 and Tire Pressure
last time this menu item was reset. monitoring the oil life, additional Monitor Operation on page 10-64.
maintenance is recommended in the
Press and hold V while this display Maintenance Schedule. See
Fuel Economy: The center
is active to reset the trip odometer displays the instantaneous fuel
Maintenance Schedule on economy as a number and bar
and the average fuel economy. page 11-3. graph. Displayed above the bar
Fuel Range: Shows the The Oil Life display must be reset graph is a running average of fuel
approximate distance the vehicle after each oil change. It will not economy for the most recently
can be driven without refueling. reset itself. Do not to reset the Oil traveled selected distance.
LOW will be displayed when the Life display at any time other than Displayed below the bar graph is
vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel when the oil has just been changed. the best average fuel economy that
range estimate is based on an It cannot be reset accurately until has been achieved for the selected
average of the vehicle's fuel the next oil change. To reset the distance. The selected distance is
economy over recent driving history engine oil life system, press and displayed at the top of the page as
and the amount of fuel remaining in
hold V for several seconds while “last xxx mi/km.” Next to the
the fuel tank. odometer, the Active Fuel
the Oil Life display is active. See
Oil Life: Shows an estimate of the Engine Oil Life System on Management displays the number of
oil's remaining useful life. page 10-13. cylinders the vehicle is running on.
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is See Active Fuel Management® on
displayed, that means 99% of the Tire Pressure: Shows the page 9-32.
current oil life remains. approximate pressures of all four
tires. Tire pressure is displayed in Press p to select the distance or
When the remaining oil life is low, either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds reset best value. Use w and x to
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON per square inch (psi). If the pressure
message will appear on the display. choose the distance and press V.
is low, the value for that tire is
See Engine Oil Messages on shown in amber. Press w and x to select “Reset
page 5-36. The oil should be Best Score.” Press V to reset the
changed as soon as possible. See
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
best average fuel economy. After Speed Limit: Shows sign OUTPUT shows the power output to
reset, the best value displays “- - -” information, which comes from a the trailer any time a trailer with
until the selected distance has been roadway database in the onboard electric brakes is connected. Output
traveled. navigation. is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes
The display provides information on Engine Hours: Shows the total may appear in the OUTPUT display.
how current driving behavior affects number of hours the engine has run. Maintenance: Shows how many
the running average and how well This display may also show idle kilometers (miles) until the next
recent driving compares to the best hours, which show how long the maintenance is needed. This
that has been achieved for the engine has been at idle. display can be reset by pressing
selected distance. Transmission Fluid and holding V, or by pressing p
Timer: This display can be used as Temperature: Shows the and selecting reset.
a timer. To start the timer, press V temperature of the automatic Blank Page: Shows no
while this display is active. The transmission fluid in either degrees information.
display will show the amount of time Celsius (°C) or degrees
that has passed since the timer was Fahrenheit (°F).
last reset. To stop the timer, press V Trailer Brake: On vehicles with the
briefly while this display is active Integrated Trailer Brake Control
and the timer is running. To reset (ITBC) system, the trailer brake
the timer to zero, press and hold V display appears in the DIC.
while this display is active, or press TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer
p and select reset. gain setting. This setting can be
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either
a trailer connected or disconnected.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and battery. Turn off all unnecessary
accessories. Have the electrical
Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages system checked as soon as
indicate the status of the vehicle or BATTERY LOW START possible. See your dealer.
some action may be needed to VEHICLE
correct a condition. Multiple Brake System Messages
messages may appear one after When the vehicle’s battery is
another. severely discharged, this message BRAKE FLUID LOW
will display and four chimes will
The messages that do not require This message is displayed when the
sound. Start the vehicle
immediate action can be brake fluid level is low. See Brake
immediately. If the vehicle is not
acknowledged and cleared by Fluid on page 10-29.
started and the battery continues to
pressing V or the trip odometer discharge, the climate controls, SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
reset stem on the base cluster. heated seats, and audio systems
will shut off and the vehicle may This message may be displayed
The messages that require when there is a problem with the
immediate action cannot be cleared require a jump start. These systems
will function again after the vehicle brake boost assist system. When
until that action is performed. this message is displayed, the brake
is started.
All messages should be taken boost assist motor might be heard
seriously and clearing the message SERVICE BATTERY operating and you might notice
does not correct the problem. CHARGING SYSTEM pulsation in the brake pedal. This is
normal under these conditions. Take
The following are the possible On some vehicles, this message the vehicle to your dealer for
messages and some information displays if there is a problem with service.
about them. the battery charging system. Under
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, certain conditions, the charging
see the Duramax diesel system light may also turn on in the
supplement. instrument cluster. See Charging
System Light on page 5-20. Driving
with this problem could drain the
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE Compass Messages Engine Cooling System

SYSTEM Messages
Dashes may be displayed if the
On vehicles with the Integrated vehicle temporarily loses
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, communication with the Global
AIR CONDITIONING OFF
this message displays and a chime Positioning System (GPS). This message displays when the
may sound when there is a problem engine coolant becomes hotter than
with the ITBC system. Door Ajar Messages the normal operating temperature.
When this message displays, power See Engine Coolant Temperature
is no longer available to the trailer
DOOR OPEN Gauge on page 5-15. To avoid
brakes. This message displays and a chime added strain on a hot engine, the air
may sound if a door is not fully conditioning compressor
As soon as it is safe to do so, automatically turns off. When the
carefully pull your vehicle over to closed. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for coolant temperature returns to
the side of the road and turn the normal, the air conditioning
ignition off. Check the wiring obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message compressor turns back on. You can
connection to the trailer and turn the continue to drive your vehicle.
ignition back on. If this message still still appears on the DIC.
displays, either your vehicle or the If this message continues to appear,
HOOD OPEN have the system repaired by your
trailer needs service. See your
dealer. This message displays and a chime dealer as soon as possible to avoid
may sound if the hood is not fully damage to the engine.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake closed. Stop and turn off the
Control System” under Towing vehicle, check the hood for
Equipment on page 9-92 for more obstructions, and close the hood
information. again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE Engine Oil Messages ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE
ENGINE ENGINE
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too This message displays when the engine oil becomes hotter than the
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to engine oil needs to be changed. normal operating temperature. Stop
idle until it cools down. See Engine When you change the engine oil, be and allow the vehicle to idle until it
Coolant Temperature Gauge on sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE cools down. See Engine Coolant
page 5-15. OIL SOON message. See Engine Temperature Gauge on page 5-15.
Oil Life System on page 10-13 for
See Overheated Engine Protection information on how to reset the OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
Operating Mode (6.0L V8 Engine message. See Engine Oil on ENGINE
Only) on page 10-25 for information page 10-10 and Maintenance
on driving to a safe place in an This message displays if low oil
Schedule on page 11-3. pressure levels occur. Stop the
emergency.
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL vehicle as soon as safely possible
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP and do not operate it until the cause
ENGINE On some vehicles, this message of the low oil pressure has been
displays when the engine oil level corrected. Check the oil as soon as
This message displays and a chime may be too low. Check the oil level
may sound if the engine cooling possible and have the vehicle
before filling to the recommended serviced by your dealer. See Engine
system reaches unsafe level. If the oil is not low and this
temperatures for operation. Stop Oil on page 10-10.
message remains on, take the
and turn off the vehicle as soon as it vehicle to your dealer for service.
is safe to do so to avoid severe See Engine Oil on page 10-10.
damage. This message clears when
the engine has cooled to a safe
operating temperature.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Engine Power Messages Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED FUEL LEVEL LOW REPLACE BATTERY IN
This message displays and a chime This message displays and a chime REMOTE KEY
may sound when the cooling system may sound if the fuel level is low. This message displays if a Remote
temperature gets too hot and the Refuel as soon as possible. See Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
engine further enters the engine Fuel Gauge on page 5-13 and Fuel battery is low. The battery needs to
coolant protection mode. See on page 9-70. be replaced in the transmitter. See
Engine Overheating on page 10-23 “Battery Replacement” under
for more information. TIGHTEN GAS CAP Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
This message also displays when This message may display along System Operation on page 2-3.
the vehicle's engine power is with the malfunction indicator lamp
reduced. Reduced engine power on the instrument cluster if the Lamp Messages
can affect the vehicle's ability to vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened
accelerate. If this message is on, properly. See Malfunction Indicator TURN SIGNAL ON
but there is no reduction in Lamp on page 5-20. Reinstall the This message displays and a chime
performance, proceed to your fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank sounds if a turn signal is left on for
destination. The performance may on page 9-73. The diagnostic 1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turn
be reduced the next time the vehicle system can determine if the fuel cap signal lever to the off position.
is driven. The vehicle may be driven has been left off or improperly
at a reduced speed while this installed. A loose or missing fuel
message is on, but acceleration and cap allows fuel to evaporate into the
speed may be reduced. Anytime atmosphere. A few driving trips with
this message stays on, the vehicle the cap properly installed should
should be taken to your dealer for turn this light and message off.
service as soon as possible.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Object Detection System This message could be due to the Ride Control System
camera being blocked. Cleaning the
Messages outside of the windshield behind the
Messages
FORWARD COLLISION rearview mirror may correct the SERVICE STABILITRAK
ALERT OFF issue.
If this message displays, it means
This message displays when the PARK ASSIST OFF there may be a problem with the
Forward Collision Alert has been This message displays when the StabiliTrak system. If you see this
turned off. Parking Assist system has been message, try to reset the system.
turned off or when there is a Stop; turn off the engine for at least
FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED 15 seconds; then start the engine
temporary condition causing the
CLEAN WINDSHIELD again. If this message still comes
system to be disabled.
This message displays when the on, it means there is a problem. You
camera is blocked. Cleaning the SERVICE FRONT CAMERA should see your dealer for service.
outside of the windshield behind the The vehicle is safe to drive;
If this message remains on after
rearview mirror may correct the however, you do not have the
continued driving, the vehicle needs
issue. The Lane Departure Warning benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
service. Do not use the Lane
system and Forward Collision Alert your speed and drive accordingly.
Departure Warning (LDW) and
(FCA) will not operate. Forward Collision Alert (FCA) SERVICE TRACTION
features. Take the vehicle to your CONTROL
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
dealer.
UNAVAILABLE This message displays when there
This message displays when SERVICE PARKING ASSIST is a problem with the Traction
attempting to activate the Lane This message displays if there is a Control System (TCS). When this
Departure Warning (LDW) system problem with the Parking Assist message displays, the system will
when it is temporarily unavailable. system. Do not use this system to not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
The LDW system does not need help you park. See your dealer for driving accordingly. See your dealer
service. service.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
for service. See Traction Control/ TRACTION CONTROL ON

. If the brake system warning light
Electronic Stability Control on is on. See Brake System
This message displays when the Warning Light on page 5-23.
page 9-56.
traction control is active. See
Traction Control/Electronic Stability
. If the stability system takes
STABILITRAK INITIALIZING
Control on page 9-56. longer than usual to complete its
This message may come on if the diagnostic checks due to driving
StabiliTrak system has not fully STABILITRAK OFF conditions.
initialized because of road
This message displays when the . If an engine or vehicle-related
conditions or the incorrect tire size.
StabiliTrak system has been turned problem has been detected and
When the StabiliTrak system is fully
off. Adjust your driving accordingly. the vehicle needs service. See
initialized, the message will turn off.
To limit wheel spin and realize the your dealer.
See Traction Control/Electronic
full benefits of the stability . If the transfer case is in
Stability Control on page 9-56. If this
enhancement system, you should Four-Wheel Drive Low.
message continues to be displayed
normally leave StabiliTrak on. See
for multiple ignition cycles and on The message turns off as soon as
Traction Control/Electronic Stability
different road surfaces, see your the conditions that caused the
Control on page 9-56.
dealer for service. message to be displayed are no
STABILITRAK OFF may also longer present.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF display when the stability control
This message displays when the has been automatically disabled.
traction control has been turned off. Several conditions can cause this
See Traction Control/Electronic message to appear:
Stability Control on page 9-56. . If the system is overheating,
which could occur if StabiliTrak
activates continuously for an
extended period of time.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Airbag System Messages Tire Messages See Tire Inspection on page 10-67,
Tire Rotation on page 10-68, Tire
SERVICE AIR BAG SERVICE TIRE MONITOR Pressure Monitor System on
This message displays if there is a SYSTEM page 10-63, and Tire Pressure on
problem with the airbag system. page 10-61.
If equipped with the Tire Pressure
Have your dealer inspect the Monitor System (TPMS), this TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD
system for problems. See Airbag message displays if a part on the AIR TO TIRE
Readiness Light on page 5-17 and system is not working properly. The
Airbag System on page 3-21 for tire pressure light also flashes and If equipped with the Tire Pressure
more information. then remains on during the same Monitor System (TPMS), this
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure message displays when the
Security Messages Light on page 5-27. Several pressure in one or more of the
conditions may cause this message vehicle's tires is low. This message
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT to appear. See Tire Pressure also displays with a vehicle picture
SYSTEM Monitor Operation on page 10-64. to indicate the location of the low
If the warning comes on and stays tire. The low tire pressure warning
This message displays when there light will also come on. See Tire
is a problem with the theft-deterrent on, there may be a problem with the
TPMS. See your dealer. Pressure Light on page 5-27. You
system. The vehicle may or may not can receive more than one tire
restart so you may want to take the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE pressure message at a time. If a tire
vehicle to your dealer before turning pressure message appears on the
off the engine. See Immobilizer If equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have
Operation on page 2-13 for more the tire pressures checked and set
information. message displays when the system
is re-learning the tire positions on to those shown on the Tire and
your vehicle. The tire positions must Loading Information label. See Tires
be re-learned after rotating the tires on page 10-52, Vehicle Load Limits
or after replacing a tire or sensor. on page 9-15, and Tire Pressure on
page 10-61. The DIC also shows
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
the tire pressure values. See Driver FOR 4WD LOW SLOW TO XXX GRADE BRAKING ON
Information Center (DIC) (Base
If a four-wheel drive shift into This message displays when grade
Level) on page 5-29 or Driver
Four-Wheel Drive Low is requested, braking has been enabled with the
Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
but the vehicle speed is too high, Tow/Haul Mode button on the end of
on page 5-31.
this message will display until the the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode
correct vehicle speed is reached. on page 9-38, Automatic
Transmission Messages Transmission on page 9-34, and
FOR 4WD LOW SHIFT TO Cruise Control on page 9-59.
4WD OFF NEUTRAL
If equipped with four-wheel drive, GRADE BRAKING ACTIVE
If a four-wheel drive shift into
this message displays when the Four-Wheel Drive Low is requested, This message displays when grade
four-wheel-drive system is and the vehicle speed is correct, but braking has been activated while
temporarily disabled due to an the transmission is not in driving on downhill grades. This
overheated condition. The vehicle N (Neutral), this message will message will only appear the first
will run in two-wheel drive when this display until the transmission is time the feature is activated in an
message is present. Once the shifted to N (Neutral). ignition cycle. See Tow/Haul Mode
four-wheel-drive system cools down, on page 9-38, Automatic
the message turns off and the GRADE BRAKING OFF Transmission on page 9-34, and
four-wheel-drive system returns to Cruise Control on page 9-59.
This message displays when grade
normal operation.
braking has been disabled with the
SERVICE 4WD
4WD SHIFT IN PROGRESS Tow/Haul Mode button on the end of
the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,
This message will display while the on page 9-38, Automatic this message may display if a
four-wheel-drive system is shifting. Transmission on page 9-34, and problem occurs with the
Cruise Control on page 9-59. four-wheel-drive system. If this
message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle.
Make sure the key is in the LOCK/
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
OFF position for at least TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Vehicle Reminder

one minute, then restart the vehicle ENGINE
and check for the message on the
Messages
DIC display. If the message is still This message displays and a chime
may sound if the transmission fluid CHECK TRAILER WIRING
displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with On vehicles with the Integrated
four-wheel-drive system needs the transmission fluid temperature Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
service. See your dealer. high can cause damage to the this message may display and a
vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it chime may sound when one of the
TO EXIT 4WD LOW SLOW idle to allow the transmission to following conditions exists:
TO XXX cool. This message clears and the . A trailer with electric brakes
chime stops when the fluid
If a four-wheel drive shift out of becomes disconnected from the
temperature reaches a safe level.
Four-Wheel Drive Low is requested, vehicle.
but the vehicle speed is too high, VEHICLE IN 4WD LOW ‐ If the disconnect occurs while
this message will display until the the vehicle is stopped, this
This message will display if the
correct vehicle speed is reached. message clears itself after a
vehicle is driven in Four-Wheel
TO EXIT 4WD LOW SHIFT TO Drive Low for about 10 minutes short time.
NEUTRAL above 72 km/h (45 mph). ‐ If the disconnect occurs while
If a four-wheel drive shift out of the vehicle is moving, this
Four-Wheel Drive Low is requested, message stays on until the
and the vehicle speed is correct, but ignition is turned off.
the transmission is not in . There is a short in the wiring to
N (Neutral), this message will the electric trailer brakes.
display until the transmission is
When this message displays, power
shifted to N (Neutral).
is no longer available to the trailer
brakes.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
As soon as it is safe to do so, This message clears itself after Washer Fluid Messages
carefully pull the vehicle over to the several seconds. This message also
side of the road and turn the ignition clears if you acknowledge it. After WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
off. Check the wiring connection to this message clears, the TRAILER FLUID
the trailer and turn the ignition back GAIN and OUTPUT displays appear
This message displays when the
on. This message clears if the trailer in the DIC.
windshield washer fluid is low. Fill
is reconnected. This message also See Driver Information Center (DIC) the windshield washer fluid reservoir
clears if you acknowledge it. If this (Base Level) on page 5-29 or Driver as soon as possible. See Engine
message still displays, either the Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) Compartment Overview on
vehicle or the trailer needs service. on page 5-31 and “Integrated Trailer page 10-5 for the location of the
See your dealer. Brake Control System” under windshield washer fluid reservoir.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Towing Equipment on page 9-92. Also, see Washer Fluid on
Control System” under Towing page 10-27 for more information.
Equipment on page 9-92. Vehicle Speed Messages
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE REDUCE VEHICLE SPEED TO
WITH CARE INITIATE HDC
This message displays when ice This message displays when
conditions are possible. attempting to enable Hill Descent
TRAILER CONNECTED Control (HDC) when the vehicle
speed is too high. See Hill Descent
On vehicles with the Integrated Control (HDC) on page 9-58.
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
this message displays briefly when
a trailer with electric brakes is first
connected to the vehicle.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Personalization Menus Collision/Detection Systems

Personalization The following list of menu items may Select the Collision/Detection
be available: Systems menu and the following
Use the audio system controls to may be displayed:
. Climate and Air Quality
access the personalization menus
. Collision/Detection Systems
. Alert Type
for customizing vehicle features.
. Comfort and Convenience
. Parking Assist
The following are all possible
personalization features. Depending . Lighting Alert Type
on the vehicle, some may not be
. Power Door Locks This feature will set crash alerts to
available.
beeps or seat vibrations. This
Turn the MENU knob to highlight a
. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start setting affects all crash alerts
feature or option. Press the MENU Climate and Air Quality including Forward Collision, Lane
knob to select the feature or option. Departure Warning, and Parking
Select the Climate and Air Quality Assist alerts.
Press o BACK to return to the menu and the following may be
previous menu. displayed: Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.
To access the . Auto Fan Max Speed Parking Assist
personalization menu: If equipped, this feature can assist
Auto Fan Max Speed
1. Select SETTINGS on the Home in backing up and parking the
page on the infotainment system This feature will set the maximum vehicle.
display. auto fan speed.
Select Off, On, or On with Towbar.
2. Select Vehicle Settings. Select Low, Medium, or High.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Comfort and Convenience Reverse Tilt Mirror Lighting

Select the Comfort and When on, the driver and/or Select the Lighting menu and the
Convenience menu and the passenger mirrors will tilt downward following may be displayed:
following may be displayed: when the vehicle is shifted to . Vehicle Locator Lights
R (Reverse) to improve visibility of
. Auto Memory Recall . Exit Lighting
the ground near the rear wheels.
. Easy Exit Options . Daytime Tail Lights
Select Off, On - Driver and
. Chime Volume Passenger, On - Driver, or On -
Vehicle Locator Lights
. Reverse Tilt Mirror Passenger.
This feature will flash the exterior
. Auto Mirror Folding Auto Mirror Folding
lamps when K on the Remote
Auto Memory Recall When on, the outside rearview Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
mirrors will automatically fold or pressed to locate the vehicle.
This allows the feature to be turned unfold when the Remote Keyless
on or off. Entry (RKE) lock or unlock button is Select On or Off.
Select On or Off. pressed and held. Exit Lighting
Easy Exit Options Select Off or On. This allows the selection of how
Language long the exterior lamps stay on
This allows the feature to be turned when leaving the vehicle when it is
on or off. Select the Language menu and the dark outside.
Select On or Off. following may be displayed:
Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60
Chime Volume
. English Seconds, or 120 Seconds.
. Francais
This allows the selection of the
chime volume level. . Espanol
Press + or − to adjust the volume. Select the language.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Daytime Tail Lights Delayed Door Lock Remote Lock Feedback

This feature allows the taillamps to When on, this feature will delay the This allows selection of what type of
be on during the day. locking of the doors. To override the feedback is given when locking the
Select On or Off. delay, press the power door lock vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
switch on the door. Select Off, Lights and Horn, Lights
Power Door Locks Select On or Off. Only, or Horn Only.
Select Power Door Locks and the
Remote Lock, Unlock, Start Remote Door Unlock
following may be displayed:
Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Start This allows selection of which doors
. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
and the following may be displayed: will unlock when pressing K on the
. Auto Door Unlock . Remote Unlock Light Feedback RKE transmitter.
. Delayed Door Lock Select All Doors or Driver
. Remote Lock Feedback
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out Door Only.
. Remote Door Unlock
When on, this feature will keep the . Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
driver door from locking when the If equipped and turned on, this
door is open and the key is in the . Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
feature will turn the cool seats on
ignition. If Off is selected, the Remote Unlock Light Feedback when using remote start on
Delayed Door Lock menu will be warm days.
available. When on, the exterior lamps will
flash when unlocking the vehicle Select Off or On. On some vehicles
Select On or Off. with the RKE transmitter. select Off, On - Driver and
Auto Door Unlock Passenger, or On - Driver.
Select Off or Flash Lights.
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats Universal Remote Do not use the Universal Remote
If equipped and turned on, this system with any garage door opener
feature will turn the heated seats on
System that does not have the stop and
when using remote start on reverse feature. This includes any
See Radio Frequency Statement on
cold days. garage door opener model
page 13-15.
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Select Off or On. On some vehicles
select Off, On - Driver and Universal Remote System Read the instructions completely
before programming the Universal
Passenger, or On - Driver. Programming Remote system. It may help to have
another person assist with
programming process.
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future programming.
Erase the programming when
vehicle ownership is terminated.
If equipped, these buttons are in the See “Erasing Universal Remote
overhead console. System Buttons” later in this
This system can replace up to three section.
remote control transmitters used to To program a garage door opener,
activate devices such as garage park outside directly in line with and
door openers, security systems, and facing the garage door opener
home automation devices. These receiver. Clear all people and
instructions refer to a garage door objects near the garage door.
opener, but can be used for other
devices.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Make sure the hand-held transmitter 2. At the same time, press and programming is complete.
has a new battery for quick and hold both the hand-held There is no need to
accurate transmission of the transmitter button and one of the complete Steps 4–6.
radio-frequency signal. three Universal Remote system . If the indicator light does
buttons to be used to operate not come on or the garage
Programming the Universal the garage door. Do not release
Remote System door does not move, a
either button until the indicator second button press may
For questions or help programming light goes from a slow to a rapid be required. For a second
the Universal Remote system, call flash light. Then release both time, press and hold the
1-800-355-3515 or see buttons. newly programmed button
www.homelink.com. Some garage door openers may for five seconds. If the light
Programming involves require substitution of Step 2 stays on or the garage door
time-sensitive actions, and may time with the procedure under in moves, programming is
out causing the procedure to be “Radio Signals for Canada and complete.
repeated. Some Gate Operators” later in . If the indicator light blinks
this section. rapidly for two seconds,
To program up to three devices:
3. Press and hold the newly then changes to a solid light
1. Hold the end of the hand-held programmed Universal Remote and the garage door does
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to system button for five seconds not move, continue with
3 in) away from the Universal while watching the indicator light programming Steps 4–6.
Remote system buttons with the and garage door activation.
indicator light in view. The
hand-held transmitter was . If the indicator light stays on
supplied by the manufacturer of continuously or the garage
the garage door opener receiver. door moves when the
button is pressed, then
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
receiver does not flash, press enough for the Universal Remote
and hold the same button a system to pick up the signal during
second time for two seconds, programming.
then release it. Again, if the door If the programming did not work,
does not move or the garage replace Step 2 under “Programming
door lamp does not flash, press the Universal Remote System” with
and hold the same button a third the following:
time for two seconds, then
release it. Press and hold the Universal
Learn or Smart Button Remote system button while
The Universal Remote system pressing and releasing the
4. After completing Steps 1–3, should now activate the hand-held transmitter button every
locate the Learn or Smart button garage door. two seconds until the signal has
inside the garage on the garage
Repeat the process for been successfully accepted by the
door opener receiver. The name
programming the two remaining Universal Remote system. The
and color of the button may vary
buttons. Universal Remote system indicator
by manufacturer.
light will flash slowly at first and then
5. Press and release the Learn or Radio Signals for Canada and rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
Smart button. Step 6 must be Some Gate Operators “Programming the Universal Remote
completed within 30 seconds of For questions or programming help System” to complete.
pressing this button. call 1-800-355-3515 or see
6. Inside the vehicle the vehicle, www.homelink.com.
press and hold the newly Canadian radio-frequency laws and
programmed Universal Remote some U.S. gate operators require
system button for two seconds transmitter signals to time out or quit
and then release it. If the garage after several seconds of
door does not move or the lamp transmission. This may not be long
on the garage door opener
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Universal Remote System Reprogramming a Single

Operation Universal Remote System
Button
Using the Universal Remote To reprogram any of the system
System buttons:
Press and hold the appropriate 1. Press and hold any one of the
Universal Remote system button for buttons. Do not release the
at least one-half second. The button.
indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted. 2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
Erasing Universal Remote releasing the button, proceed
System Buttons with Step 1 under “Programming
Erase all programmed buttons when the Universal Remote System.”
vehicle ownership is terminated.
To erase:
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons until the indicator light
begins to flash. This should take
about 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lighting Features
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8
Daytime Running Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
The exterior lamp control is on the
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
instrument panel to the left of the
Turn and Lane-Change
steering wheel.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 O (Off): Turns off the automatic
Auxiliary headlamps and Daytime Running
Roof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to
turn the automatic headlamps or
DRL back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, off
will only work when the vehicle is in
P (Park).
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
6-2 Lighting
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the Headlamp High/

turns on the headlamps at normal headlamps together with the parking
brightness, together with the
Low-Beam Changer
lamps and instrument panel lights.
following:
When the headlamps are turned on
$ : Push the turn signal lever
. Parking Lamps toward the instrument panel to
while the vehicle is on, the change the headlamps from low to
. Instrument Panel Lights headlamps turn off automatically high beam.
10 minutes after the ignition is
. Taillamps turned off. When the headlamps are Pull the turn signal lever toward you
. License Plate Lamps turned on while the vehicle is off, and release it to return to low-beam
the headlamps will stay on for headlamps.
. Roof Marker Lamps (If
10 minutes before turning off to
Equipped)
prevent the battery from being
. Front/Rear Sidemarker Lamps drained. Turn the headlamp control
When the vehicle is turned off and off and then back to the headlamp
the headlamps are in AUTO, the on position to make the headlamps
headlamps turn off. When the key is stay on for an additional 10 minutes.
removed, they automatically turn on # (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped):
for a set time. The time of the delay Turns on the fog lamps. See Fog When the high beams are on, this
can be changed using the DIC. See Lamps on page 6-5. indicator light on the instrument
Driver Information Center (DIC) cluster will also be on.
(Base Level) on page 5-29 or Driver Exterior Lamps Off
Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
on page 5-31. Reminder
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the A reminder chime sounds when the
parking lamps including all lamps, headlamps or parking lamps are
except the headlamps. manually turned on, the ignition is
off, and a door is open. To disable
the chime, turn the lamps off.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Lighting 6-3
Flash-to-Pass The DRL system comes on when Automatic Headlamp

the following conditions are met:
This feature lets you use the System
high-beam headlamps to signal a
. The ignition is on.
When the exterior lamp control is
driver in front of you that you want . The exterior lamp control is set to AUTO and it is dark enough
to pass. It works even if the in AUTO. outside, the headlamps come on
headlamps are in the automatic automatically.
. The transmission is not in
position.
P (Park).
To use it, pull the turn signal lever . The light sensor determines it is
toward you, then release it.
daytime.
If the headlamps are in the
When the DRL system is on, only
automatic position or on low beam,
the DRL are on. The taillamps,
the high-beam headlamps will turn
sidemarker lamps, instrument panel
on. They will stay on as long as you
lights, and other lamps will not
hold the lever toward you. The
be on.
high-beam indicator on the
instrument cluster will come on. When it begins to get dark, the
Release the lever to return to automatic headlamp system There is a light sensor on top of the
normal operation. switches from DRL to the instrument panel. Do not cover the
headlamps. sensor, otherwise the headlamps
will come on when they are not
Daytime Running To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior needed.
Lamps (DRL) lamp control to the off position and
then release. For vehicles first sold The system may also turn on the
DRL can make it easier for others to in Canada, off will only work when headlamps when driving through a
see the front of the vehicle during the vehicle is in P (Park). parking garage or tunnel.
the day. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
6-4 Lighting
When it is bright enough outside, Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change
the headlamps will turn off or may
change to Daytime Running
Signals
Lamps (DRL).
The automatic headlamp system
turns off when the exterior lamp
control is turned to O or the ignition
is off.
Lights On with Wipers
If the windshield wipers are
activated in daylight with the engine
on, and the exterior lamp control is An arrow on the instrument cluster
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking flashes in the direction of the turn or
lamps, and other exterior lamps lane change.
come on. The transition time for the | (Hazard Warning Flashers):
Press this button to make the front Move the turn signal lever all the
lamps coming on varies based on way up or down to signal a turn.
wiper speed. When the wipers are and rear turn signal lamps flash on
not operating, these lamps turn off. and off. Press again to turn the Raise or lower the lever for less
Move the exterior lamp control to P flashers off. than one second until the arrow
When the hazard warning flashers starts to flash to signal a lane
or ; to disable this feature. change. This causes the turn
are on, the vehicle's turn signals will
not work. signals to automatically flash three
times. It will flash six times if Tow/
Haul Mode is active. Holding the
turn signal lever for more than
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Lighting 6-5
one second will cause the turn Fog Lamps When the headlamps are changed
signals to flash until the lever is to high beam, the fog lamps go off.
released. When the high-beam headlamps are
The lever returns to its starting turned off, the fog lamps will come
position whenever it is released. on again.
If after signaling a turn or a lane Some localities have laws that

change the arrows flash rapidly or require the headlamps to be on with
do not come on, a signal bulb could the fog lamps.
be burned out.
Auxiliary
Replace any burned out bulbs. If a
bulb is not burned out, check the Roof-Mounted Lamp
For vehicles with fog lamps, the
fuse. See Fuses on page 10-42. control is on the center of the If equipped, this button includes
Turn Signal On Chime exterior lamp control, to the left of wiring provisions for a dealer or a
the steering column. qualified service center to install an
If the turn signal is left on for more auxiliary roof lamp.
than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
sounds at each flash of the turn position for the fog lamps to
signal. The message TURN come on.
SIGNAL ON will also appear in the # (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the
Driver Information Center (DIC). To fog lamps on or off. A light will come
turn the chime and message off, on in the instrument cluster.
move the turn signal lever to the off
When the fog lamps are turned on,
position.
the parking lamps automatically
turn on.
This button is on the overhead

console.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
6-6 Lighting
When the wiring is connected to an Interior Lighting Cargo Lamp

auxiliary roof-mounted lamp,
pressing the bottom of the button
will activate the lamp and illuminate Instrument Panel
an indicator light at the bottom of Illumination Control
this button. Pressing the top of the
button will turn off the roof-mounted
lamp and indicator.
The emergency roof lamp circuit is
fused at 30 amps, so the total
current draw of the attached lamps
should be less than this value. The
attachment points for the roof lamp
circuits are two blunt cut wires
above the overhead console: a dark
This feature controls the brightness The cargo lamp provides more light
green with blue stripe switched
of the instrument panel lights and is in the cargo area of the vehicle,
power wire and a black ground wire.
next to the exterior lamp control. if needed. The lights inside of the
For more information on pickup box also turn on, if equipped.
roof-mounted emergency lamp D (Instrument Panel
Illumination): Move the Press the switch down to turn the
installation, see the GM Upfitter
thumbwheel up or down to brighten cargo lamp on or off. The shift lever
website at www.gmupfitter.com or
or dim the lights. must be in the P (Park) position to
contact your dealer.
operate the cargo lamp.
If the vehicle has this button, the
vehicle may have the snow plow
prep package. See Adding a Snow
Plow or Similar Equipment on
page 9-102.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Lighting 6-7
Dome Lamps Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in the
overhead console and the headliner,
if equipped. To operate, the ignition
must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position or using
Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
There are dome lamps in the

overhead console and the headliner,
if equipped.
To change the dome lamp settings,
press the following:
OFF: Turns the lamps off, even
when a door is open. Press m or n next to each reading
lamp to turn it on or off.
DOOR: The lamps come on
automatically when a door is
opened.
ON: Turns all dome lamps on.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
6-8 Lighting
Lighting Features Exit Lighting When the battery's state of charge

is low, the voltage is raised slightly
The interior lamps, headlamps, to quickly bring the charge back up.
Entry Lighting parking lamps, back-up lamps, and When the state of charge is high,
The vehicle has an illuminated entry license plate lamps come on when the voltage is lowered slightly to
feature. the key is removed from the ignition. prevent overcharging. The voltmeter
The interior lamps turn off gauge or the voltage display on the
When a door is opened, the dome automatically in 20 seconds. The Driver Information Center (DIC),
lamps and puddle lamps come on if interior lamps do not come on if the if equipped, may show the voltage
the dome lamp control is in the dome lamp control is in the OFF moving up or down. This is normal.
DOOR position. If the dome lamp position. If there is a problem, an alert will be
control is in the OFF position, the displayed.
lamps do not come on. The exterior lamps turn off
immediately by turning the exterior The battery can be discharged at
The headlamps, parking lamps, lamps control off. idle if the electrical loads are very
taillamps, and back-up lamps turn high. This is true for all vehicles.
on briefly at night, or in areas with This feature can be changed. See
Vehicle Personalization on This is because the generator
limited lighting, when K is pressed page 5-44. (alternator) may not be spinning fast
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) enough at idle to produce all the
transmitter. After about 30 seconds Battery Load power that is needed for very high
the exterior lamps turn off. Entry electrical loads.
lighting can be disabled manually by Management
A high electrical load occurs when
changing the ignition out of the OFF The vehicle has Electric Power several of the following are on, such
position, or by pressing the RKE Management (EPM) that estimates as: headlamps, high beams, fog
transmitter Q button. the battery's temperature and state lamps, rear window defogger,
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage climate control fan at high speed,
This feature can be changed. See
for best performance and extended heated seats, engine cooling fans,
“Vehicle Locator Lights” under
life of the battery. trailer loads, and loads plugged into
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-44. accessory power outlets.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Lighting 6-9
EPM works to prevent excessive Battery Power Protection

discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output This feature shuts off the dome and
and the vehicle's electrical needs. reading lamps, if they are left on for
It can increase engine idle speed to more than 10 minutes after the
generate more power, whenever ignition is turned off. The cargo
needed. It can temporarily reduce lamp shuts off after 20 minutes. This
the power demands of some prevents the battery from
accessories. running down.
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed and it is recommended
that the driver reduce the electrical
loads as much as possible. See
Vehicle Messages on page 5-34.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
6-10 Lighting
2 NOTES
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-29
Introduction
System Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls - Base Radio) . . . . . 7-31 Infotainment
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Read the following pages to
Introduction Base Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 become familiar with the
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Bluetooth (Infotainment infotainment system featured in this
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Controls - Base Connected owner manual.
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition -
Base Connected Radio) . . . . 7-45
{ Warning
Trademarks and License Taking your eyes off the road
Radio for too long or too often while
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Agreements
Trademarks and License using any infotainment features
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 can cause a crash resulting in
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-11 injury or death. Do not give
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 extended attention to
Pandora Internet Radio . . . . . . 7-11 infotainment tasks while
driving. Focus your attention
Audio Players on driving and limit glances to
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 the instrument cluster or center
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 stack screens. Use voice
SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 guidance whenever possible.
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Voice Recognition
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
7-2 Infotainment System
The infotainment system has built-in even after the ignition is turned off. Theft-Deterrent Feature
features intended to help with this See Retained Accessory Power
by disabling some functions when (RAP) on page 9-29. TheftLock® is designed to
driving. Some functions may gray discourage theft of the vehicle's
The base radio and base radio with radio by learning a portion of the
out when the vehicle is moving, connectivity information is included
indicating they are unavailable. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
in this manual. See the infotainment The radio does not operate if it is
All functions are available when the manual for information on the stolen or moved to a different
vehicle is parked. Before driving: uplevel radios, audio players, vehicle.
. Become familiar with the phone, navigation system, Rear
infotainment system operation Seat Entertainment (RSE), and
and buttons on the faceplate. voice or speech recognition,
if equipped.
. Set up the audio by presetting
favorite stations, setting the
tone, and adjusting the
speakers.
. Set up phone numbers in
advance so they can be called
easily by pressing a single
button or by using a single voice
command for vehicles equipped
with phone capability.
See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Overview
Infotainment System Overview
The infotainment system is
controlled by using the buttons on
the faceplate and steering wheel
controls. See Steering Wheel
Controls on page 5-3.
Radio with CD
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
5. MEDIA
. Press to change the audio
source between CD, USB,
SD card, and AUX.
6. RADIO
. Press to change the audio
source between AM, FM,
or SiriusXM, if equipped.
Radio with TONE 7. g or l (Seek)

. Press g to seek the
1. q (Favorite Pages) 3. r (Favorite Pages) beginning of the current or
. Press to scroll down . Press to scroll up through previous track. If the track
through the favorite pages the favorite pages for each has played for less than
for each source. source. five seconds, it seeks the
previous track. If longer
2. Favorites/Soft Keys 4. O (Power/Volume) than five seconds, the
. Press to select favorite current track will start from
. Press to turn the audio on. the beginning.
stations.
. Press and hold to turn it off.
. Press and hold to save . Press and hold g to
favorite stations.
. When on, press to mute the quickly reverse through a
system. Press again to track. Release the button to
. Press to select a screen unmute.
button when displayed. return to playing speed.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
. Press l to seek the next 10. o BACK Various functions are disabled when
track. the vehicle is moving.
. Press to return to the
. Press and hold l to fast previous screen in AUDIO: Select the AUDIO screen
forward through a track. a menu. icon to display the active source
Release the button to return page. The sources available are
11. CD Slot AM, FM, SiriusXM® (if equipped),
to playing speed. See CD
Player on page 7-15. 12. MENU CD, USB/iPod, AUX, SD card
reader, and Bluetooth Audio (if
. For AM, FM, or SiriusXM . Press to access the menu equipped). See AM-FM Radio on
(if equipped), press g or for the current audio page 7-8, Satellite Radio on
source.
l to seek to the previous page 7-10, CD Player on page 7-15,
or next strong station. . Press to select the Auxiliary Jack on page 7-21, and
highlighted menu option. Bluetooth Audio on page 7-21.
8. X (Eject) (If Equipped) or
TONE (If Equipped)
. Turn to scroll through PHONE: Select the PHONE screen
a list. icon to display the Phone main
. Press X to eject the CD . Turn to manually select a page. See Bluetooth (Infotainment
(if equipped). station. Controls - Base Radio) on
. Press TONE to open the
Recognition - Base Radio) on
Tone Settings menu Home Page page 7-35 or Bluetooth (Voice
(if equipped).
Home Page Features Recognition - Base Connected
9. { (Home Page) The infotainment system displays a
Radio) on page 7-45 or Bluetooth
(Overview) on page 7-29 or
. Press to go to the Home Home Page that makes it easy to Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
Page from any point in the access all of the applications. Turn Base Connected Radio) on
system. See “Home Page” the MENU knob to highlight feature page 7-40.
following. icons. Press the MENU knob to
access the feature’s options.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
SETTINGS: Select the SETTINGS 2. Press the MENU knob to select Radio Setup
screen icon to display the Settings it. Do this for each one of the From the RADIO/BAND screen icon,
main page. See “Setting Radio four digits. Select Enter to go to the following may be displayed:
Preferences” following. the confirmation screen.
Manage Favorites:
Pandora (If Equipped) 3. Re-enter the four-digit code.
Select LOCK to lock the system. . Turn the MENU knob and press
Select the PANDORA icon to begin to select a favorite.
Pandora. See Pandora Internet 4. Enter the four-digit code to
. To delete a favorite, press
Radio on page 7-11. unlock the system. Select BACK
to go back to the previous menu. the button just below the
Setting Radio Preferences "DELETE" screen button.
Radio: See “Radio Setup” later in
Select the SETTINGS screen icon this section. . To move a favorite, press
to display the Settings menu and the MOVE screen button.
Vehicle: See Vehicle Turn the MENU knob to
the following may display:
Personalization on page 5-44. select a new location, then
Time: See Clock on page 5-5.
Display: Press the MENU knob to press the DROP screen
Language (Current Language): turn the display on or off. button to select the new
This will set the display language in location.
Return to Factory Settings: See
the radio and instrument cluster.
Select to display a list of languages.
“Return to Factory Settings” later in . Select o BACK to go back to
this section. the previous menu.
Select BACK to go back to the
previous menu. Software Information: Press the Number of Favorites Shown: To
MENU knob to select Save Vehicle set the number of favorites for
Valet Mode:
Info to USB. Press the MENU knob display, select Auto to automatically
Using the circular numeric keypad, again to start downloading the adjust the number of favorites pages
enter a four-digit code: vehicle information to the USB. shown as favorites are added or
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
a number.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
removed. Another way to adjust is Rear Camera (If Equipped) Clear All Private Data
to select a number from 5–25 to From the Rear Camera screen (If Equipped): This option clears all
show that selection of favorites. button, the following may be private information from the vehicle.
Audible Touch Feedback (If displayed: Select Clear All Private Data. Select
Equipped): Select Audible Touch Cancel or Continue.
Park Assist Symbols: This feature
Feedback to turn feedback off or on. will display symbols where objects Restore Radio Settings: This
Auto Volume (If Equipped): This are detected by the Rear Parking option will restore factory radio
feature adjusts the volume based on Assist system. Select Park Assist settings. Select Restore Radio
vehicle speed. The options are Off, Symbols, then select Off or On. Settings. A screen displays stating
Low, Medium-Low, Medium, all personalized radio settings will
See Assistance Systems for Parking be restored back to the factory
Medium-High, or High. Select the or Backing on page 9-63.
desired volume. settings. Select Cancel or Continue.
Maximum Startup Volume: This Return to Factory Settings English and Metric Unit
feature sets the maximum startup Select Return to Factory Settings Conversion
volume. If the vehicle is started and and the following list may display: To change the display units between
the volume is greater than this level, Restore Vehicle Settings: This English and metric units, see Driver
the volume is adjusted to this level. option will restore factory vehicle Information Center (DIC) (Base
To set the maximum startup volume, personalization settings. Select Level) on page 5-29 or Driver
Turn the MENU knob to increase or Restore Vehicle Settings. A screen Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
decrease startup volume. displays stating all vehicle on page 5-31.
customization settings will be
restored to the factory settings.
Select Cancel or Continue.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Software Updates Radio Press the RADIO faceplate button

to change the active radio source or
See the websites for more change to the radio from another
information: AM-FM Radio source. Press the MENU knob and
Website Information Playing the Radio the following radio settings may
display:
In the U.S., see www.gmc.com While on the audio main page,
press the RADIO or MEDIA button Tone Settings:
In Canada, see www.gmc.gm.ca
repeatedly to cycle through the . Bass, Midrange, and Treble:
In Mexico, www.gmc.com.mx available sources (AM, FM, and Turn the MENU knob and
SiriusXM® (if equipped), Bluetooth® highlight. Press the MENU knob
Audio (if equipped), CD, USB, SD, to select. Turn the MENU knob
and AUX). to adjust.
The steering wheel controls can . Balance: Turn the MENU knob
also be used to adjust the volume. to highlight. Press the MENU
See Steering Wheel Controls on knob to select. Turn the MENU
page 5-3. knob left for more sound from
the left speakers or right for
AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If Equipped)
more sound from the right
To select AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if speakers. The middle position
equipped), press the RADIO button balances the sound between the
to toggle to the desired broadcast left and right speakers.
source.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. Fade: Turn the MENU knob to EQ (Equalizer) Settings: In certain Tuning a Station
highlight. Press the MENU knob configurations the available choices
to select. Turn the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to manually
are Manual and Talk. find a station.
to the left for more sound from
the front speakers and to the Options for SiriusXM Only
Storing Radio Station Presets
right for more sound from the XM View: XM view allows the
rear speakers. The middle Up to 25 preset stations from all
channel list to be viewed by channel
position balances the sound bands can be stored in the favorite
name, artist playing on channel,
between the front and rear lists in any order. Up to five stations
or song playing on channel. Turn
speakers. can be stored in each favorite page
the MENU knob to highlight and
and the number of favorites can
. EQ (Equalizer): Turn the MENU press the MENU knob to select.
be set.
knob to highlight. Turn the Press o BACK to go to the
MENU knob to scroll through the previous menu. AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If
options. Press the MENU knob Equipped): While on the active
Channel List: Select to display a source main page, such as AM, FM,
to select. Press the o BACK list of SiriusXM channels. Turn the or SiriusXM (if equipped), press and
button to go to the MENU knob to highlight and press hold a Favorites/Soft Key button on
previous menu. the MENU knob to select. Press o the faceplate.
Station List: Select to display a list BACK to go to the previous menu.
Mixed-Audio Favorites
of AM or FM stations. Press o Also see the radio settings common
BACK to go to the previous menu. for all sources earlier in this section. Media (If Equipped) and Broadcast
favorites can be stored.
Auto Volume: If equipped, this Finding a Station
feature adjusts the volume based on To display the favorites page, press
the vehicle speed. Select the level Seeking a Station q or r on the radio faceplate.
between Off, Low, Medium-Low, To manage Favorites. See “Manage
Medium, Medium-High, and High. Press g or l to search for the
Favorites” under Overview on
previous or next strongest station.
Press o BACK to go to the page 7-3.
previous menu.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Satellite Radio Browsing SiriusXM Channels Channel Not Available: This

previously assigned station is no
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio To browse the SiriusXM channels:
longer assigned.
Service 1. Press the MENU knob.
No XM Signal/Reception May Be
Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Blocked: The vehicle may be in a
radio tuner and a SiriusXM satellite XM Channel List. location where the SiriusXM signal
radio subscription can receive 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight is being blocked. When the vehicle
SiriusXM programming. the desired XM Channels. is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
based in the 48 contiguous United
SiriusXM Messages XM Radio ID: When tuned to
States and 10 Canadian provinces. XL (Explicit Language station 0, displays the SiriusXM
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide Channels): These stations, or any eight-digit radio ID label. This label
variety of programming and others, can be blocked by request, is needed to activate the service.
commercial-free music, coast to by calling 1-866-635-2349 in the Check XM Antenna: If this
coast, and in digital-quality sound. U.S., and 1-877-209-0079 in message does not clear within a
A service fee is required to receive Canada. short period of time, the receiver or
the SiriusXM service. See Loading XM: The audio system is antenna could have a fault. Consult
www.siriusxmradio.com or call acquiring and processing audio and with your dealer.
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.); or see text data. No action is needed.
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-209-0079 (Canada). Channel Off Air: This station is not Radio Reception
currently in service. Frequency interference and static
When SiriusXM is active, the
channel name and number, Channel Not Authorized: This can occur during normal radio
category name, song title, and artist station is blocked or cannot be reception if items such as phone
display on the screen. received. chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
interference or static, unplug the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Occasionally check that the antenna
item from the accessory power Service is tight at the base. If tightening is
outlet. required, protect the paint from
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service damage.
FM provides digital radio reception. Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with
FM signals only reach about 16 to
satellite radio signals, causing the
Multi-Band Antenna
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
sound to fade in and out. In The roof antenna is for OnStar®,
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce
addition, traveling or standing under SiriusXM® Satellite Radio, and GPS
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, (Global Positioning System). Keep
interference, some static can occur,
or tunnels may cause loss of the clear of obstructions for clear
especially around tall buildings or
SiriusXM signal for a period of time. reception. If the vehicle has a
hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out. sunroof, and it is open, reception
Cell Phone Usage can also be affected.
AM Cell phone usage, such as making
The range for most AM stations is
or receiving phone calls, charging, Pandora Internet Radio
or just having the phone on may
greater than for FM, especially at
cause static interference in the If equipped, Pandora® is a free
night. The longer range can cause Internet radio service that streams
radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off
station frequencies to interfere with personalized radio stations based
if this happens.
each other. Static can also occur on artists, tracks, genres, and
when things like storms and power comedians. Create stations using
lines interfere with radio reception. Fixed Mast Antenna the Pandora website or Smartphone
When this happens, try reducing the The fixed mast antenna will go application, then use - (thumbs up)
treble on the radio. through most car washes as long as or , (thumbs down) to personalize
it is securely attached. If the
stations. To set up an account, or for
antenna becomes slightly bent,
more information, go to
straighten it out by hand. If it is
badly bent, replace it.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
www.pandora.com. Pandora may When Pandora is chosen, the 2. Launch Pandora by selecting
not be available in Canada or Pandora logo will populate on the Pandora on the Home Page.
Mexico. screen and the system will display If nothing happens when the
A phone or tablet with Internet “Acquiring Pandora Radio Station.” available Pandora screen button is
connection and the Pandora Launch times can be significant. selected, download the latest
application installed is required. Using the iPhone Pandora application and retry.
Personal cell phone data plans are The login screen may display on the
used. Make sure the latest version 1. Plug the device into the USB
port. The phone screen must be device.
is installed on the device.
unlocked. Pandora Menus
Launching Pandora 2. Launch Pandora from the Home Select Menu on the Pandora
Connect the iPhone to the USB Page by selecting the main page.
port, or connect Android® or Pandora icon.
BlackBerry® through Bluetooth. See Pandora has a menu with the
If nothing happens when the following:
Auxiliary Jack on page 7-21 or available Pandora screen button is
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - pressed, download the latest Tone Settings: Select to adjust the
Base Radio) on page 7-31 or Pandora application and retry. tone settings. See AM-FM Radio on
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base page 7-8.
Radio) on page 7-35 or Bluetooth The login screen may display on the
(Voice Recognition - Base device. Bookmark Artist: Select to
Connected Radio) on page 7-45 or bookmark the artist.
Using an Android or BlackBerry
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-29 Phone Bookmark Song: Select to
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - bookmark the song.
Base Connected Radio) on The BlackBerry phone must be
unlocked to launch Pandora service. Auto Volume: This feature sets the
page 7-40. For first time use, set up
auto volume based on the speed of
the stations before connecting to the 1. Pair the phone using Bluetooth. the vehicle and noise in the vehicle.
vehicle. The Pandora icon will be
See AM-FM Radio on page 7-8.
available on the Home Page.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Pandora Features r or j (Play/Pause): Select to play 2. Take the Remote Keyless Entry
Pandora service has features to rate or pause playback. (RKE) transmitter at least 6 m
tracks, skip tracks, or change (20 ft) away from the vehicle.
Pandora Skip Limit
stations. 3. Wait about 30 seconds, and try
Pandora limits the number of skips to connect the device again. See
} (Bookmarks): When selected allowed on their service. When the Auxiliary Jack on page 7-21 or
during a track, a choice displays to
bookmark the artist or track. This skip limit is reached, , or next Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls
sends the bookmark to the Pandora arrow will not skip the currently - Base Radio) on page 7-31 or
account. playing track, but the , feedback Bluetooth (Voice Recognition -
will be recorded. Base Radio) on page 7-35 or
, (Thumbs Down): When Bluetooth (Voice Recognition -
selected, Pandora stores this Advertisement on Pandora Base Connected Radio) on
information, changes to the next page 7-45 or Bluetooth
Pandora may display
track, and does not play this track (Overview) on page 7-29 or
advertisements. The artist name
on this station again. This helps Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls
and track title will not be displayed
Pandora choose which tracks - Base Connected Radio) on
and the skip track button will not be
should not play on this station. This page 7-40.
available.
feature is only available on user
created stations. Pandora Troubleshooting Unable to Start Pandora
- (Thumbs Up): When selected, If the device is unable to launch
Unable to Connect Device to Pandora:
Pandora stores this information and Vehicle
- is highlighted for the remainder of . Check that the latest version of
the track. This helps Pandora If the device is unable to connect to Pandora is installed.
choose which tracks should play on the USB or Bluetooth:
this station.
. Check that there is an active
1. Turn the vehicle off. account logged into Pandora.
d (Next Track): When selected, . Have at least one station
Pandora changes to the next track.
created.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. For Android and BlackBerry Loss of Audio check the volume setting on
devices, check that the device is both phone/device and the
paired with the vehicle, and Loss of Pandora audio can happen
in different ways: Infotainment system.
whether the device displays in
the Connected phone sources . Weak or lost data connection. Common Pandora Messages
list under the Phone icon from Pandora Error/Please Check
. Device needs to be charged.
the Home Page. Device: Not signed in or Pandora
. Application needs to be is down for maintenance.
. For an iPhone, check that the
relaunched.
USB cable is connected to the No Stations Available: No stations
USB port and the screen is . Connection between phone and are available on the Pandora server
unlocked. radio lost. through the connected device.
. Close Pandora on the device . An iPhone is connected to both Action Unavailable. Please Check
and launch again. Devices that Bluetooth and the USB port. Device Connection.: A few
allow multitasking may require Playback can be resumed from conditions for loss of Internet
an extra step to quit the Pandora a loss of audio by double connection are:
application. See the cell phone tapping on the iPhone home
manufacturer's user guide.
. The connected device loses its
button then scrolling through the cellular connection.
Thumbs Up or Thumbs Down icons to find an icon that allows
. The device does not support
Error a change of flow between
Bluetooth and USB cable. Internet connectivity.
If there is an error trying to rate a
Volume and song selection may
. The device is not in the vehicle.
track with the , or - buttons, the
be controlled using the . The Bluetooth signal is lost.
message “Thumbs Down Error” or
Infotainment controls or on the
“Thumbs Up Error” will display.
phone/device. If Pandora is
Press OK to dismiss.
selected and nothing is heard,
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
No skips remaining for this Audio Players There can be increased skipping,
station or permitted during difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
advertisements: difficulty in loading and ejecting.
CD Player If these problems occur, check the
. The maximum Pandora skip limit
has been reached according to If the vehicle is equipped with a CD disc for damage or try a known
the plan that was obtained. player, it can be used for CD and good disc.
MP3 audio. To avoid damage to the CD player:
. Skipping an advertisement was
tried. With the vehicle on, insert a disc . Do not use scratched or
into the slot, label side up. Press the damaged discs.
See www.pandora.com/help. If the MEDIA button to select CD as a
service will not work, see a dealer source.
. Do not apply labels to discs. The
for assistance. labels could get caught in the
The system is capable of playing: player.
. Most audio CDs . Insert only one disc at a time.
. CD-R . Keep the loading slot free of
. CD-RW foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
. MP3 or unprotected WMA
formats . Use a marking pen to label the
top of the disc.
When playing any compatible
recordable disc, the sound quality
can be reduced due to disc quality,
the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been
recorded, or the way the disc has
been handled.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Loading and Ejecting Discs less than five seconds, it seeks Video application is only available
to the previous track. If longer on vehicles with Rear Seat
To load a disc:
than five seconds, the current Entertainment (RSE).
1. Turn the vehicle on. track starts from the beginning.
CD Menu
2. Insert a disc into the slot, label . Press and hold to fast reverse
side up. The player pulls it in the through a track. Release the While on the CD main page, press
rest of the way. If the disc is button to return to playing the MENU knob to display the CD
damaged or improperly loaded, speed. Elapsed time displays. menu and the following may display:
there is an error and the disc Browse: Select to display the files
ejects.
u (Seek Next/Fast Forward): or songs on the CD.
While on the CD main page:
Playing an Audio CD . Press to seek to the next track. Tone Settings: Select to adjust
Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
Press the MEDIA button on the . Press and hold to fast forward Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
faceplate until CD is selected. through a track. Release the “Tone Settings” under AM-FM Radio
On the CD main page, either a track button to return to playing on page 7-8.
number displays at the beginning of speed. Elapsed time displays.
Auto Volume: If equipped, this
each track or Song, Artist, and j /r (Pause/Play): While on the CD feature adjusts the volume based on
Album information displays when main page, press to pause. Press the vehicle speed. Select the level
available. again to resume. between Off, Low, Medium-Low,
Use the following screen controls to Z (Shuffle): Press Z to play the Medium, Medium-High, and High.
play the disc: songs in random order. Press again Press BACK to go to the
previous menu.
t (Seek Previous/Fast Reverse): to turn off.
While on the CD main page: If a Blu-ray Disc® or DVD disc is EQ (Equalizer) Settings:
loaded into the Disc player and the If equipped, this feature adjusts the
. Press to seek to the beginning of
CD screen button is selected, a equalizer settings. See “EQ
the current or previous track.
message comes on the screen to (Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM
If the track has been playing for
use the Video application. The Radio on page 7-8.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Error Messages
. There are load or eject errors. . Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW.
If Disc Error displays and/or the disc If the CD is not playing correctly, for Root Directory
comes out, it could be for one of the any other reason, try a known
good CD. The root directory is treated as a
following reasons: folder. All files contained directly
. The disc has an invalid or If any error continues, contact your under the root directory are
unknown format. dealer. accessed prior to any root directory
folders.
. The disc is very hot. Try the disc Playing an MP3 CD
again when the temperature To play an MP3 CD, follow the same Empty Folders
returns to normal. instructions as “Playing an If a root directory or folder is empty
. The road is very rough. Try the Audio CD.” or contains only folders, the player
disc again when the road is The following guidelines must be advances to the next folder in the
smoother. met when creating an MP3 disc, file structure that contains a
otherwise the CD might not play: compressed audio file. The empty
. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
folder(s) are not displayed or
or upside down. . Sampling rate: 16 kHz, numbered.
. The air is very humid. Try the 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
disc again later. 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz. No Folder
. There was a problem while . Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24, When the CD only contains
burning the disc. 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, compressed audio files without any
128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256, folders, all files are under the root
. The label is caught in the CD folder.
and 320 kbps.
player.
. Maximum number of folders:
If Disc Player Error displays, it could
eight folders with 255 files per
be for one of the following reasons:
folder.
. The player temperature is . Maximum of 1,000 files on
too high.
a disc.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
USB Port While the USB source is active, Auto Volume: If equipped, see
press the corresponding faceplate “Playing an Audio CD.”
Playing from a USB button for the icons on the screen to EQ (Equalizer) Settings:
A USB mass storage device or operate USB function: If equipped, this feature adjusts the
Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) . t (Seek Previous/Fast equalizer settings. See “EQ
device can be connected to the Reverse) (Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM
USB port. Radio on page 7-8.
. u (Seek Next/Fast Forward)
The USB ports are in the center Playing from an iPod®
console. . j /r (Play/Pause) This feature supports the following
USB MP3 Player and USB Drives . Z (Shuffle) iPod models:
. The USB MP3 players and USB
For information on how to use the
. iPod nano® (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
drives connected must comply 4th generation)
screen icons, see “Playing an
with the USB Mass Storage
Audio CD.” . iPod with video (5.0 and 5.5
Class specification (USB MSC).
generation).
. Hard disk drives are not USB Menu
supported.
. iPod classic® (6th generation)
Press the MENU knob to display the
To play a USB device: USB menu and the following may . iPod touch® (1st and 2nd
display: generation)
. Connect the USB.
Browse: Select to display the files
. Press the MEDIA button on the and folders on the USB device.
faceplate until the connected
device is shown. Tone Settings: Select to adjust
Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
“Tone Settings” under “Playing an
Audio CD.”
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
There may be problems with The iPod battery recharges EQ (Equalizer) Settings:
operation and function in the automatically while the vehicle is on. If equipped, this feature adjusts the
following situations: When the vehicle is off while an Equalizer settings. See “EQ
. When connecting an iPod with a iPod is connected using the iPod (Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM
more recent version of the USB cable, the iPod battery stops Radio on page 7-8.
firmware installed than is charging and the iPod automatically
turns off. Browse iPod Media
supported by the infotainment
system. If the iPod is an unsupported model, Use the following to browse:
. When connecting an iPod on it can still be listened to in the Playlists:
which firmware from other vehicle by connecting to the 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
providers is installed. auxiliary input jack using a standard and press to view the playlists
3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. stored on the iPod.
To connect and control an iPod:
iPod Menu 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
1. Connect one end of the standard
iPod USB cable to the iPod's Press the MENU knob to display the and press to select a playlist
dock connector. iPod Menu and the following may name to view a list of all songs
display: in the playlist.
2. Connect the other end to a USB
port in the center console. Browse: Select to display the files 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
or songs on the iPod. See “Browse and press to select the song
3. Press the MEDIA button to iPod Media” later in this section. from the list to begin playback.
select the source.
Tone Settings: Select to adjust Artists:
iPod music information displays on Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
the radio’s display and begins 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See and press to view the artists
playing through the vehicle’s audio “Tone Settings” under “Playing an
system. stored on the iPod.
Audio CD.”
Auto Volume: If equipped, see
“Playing an Audio CD.”
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Genres: Playing from an iPhone®

and press to select an artist 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight or iPad®
name to view a list of all albums and press to view the genres
by the artist. This feature supports iPhone 3G,
stored on the iPod. iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, and iPad.
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
and press to select an album Follow the same instructions as
and press to select a genre stated earlier for using an iPod.
name to view a list of all songs name to view a list of artists of
on the album. that genre. SD Card Reader
4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
and press to select the song This vehicle has a SD card reader
and press to select to view in the center console. See Center
from the list to begin playback. albums by that artist. Console Storage on page 4-3.
Albums: 4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 1. Plug the SD card into the reader.
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select an album to
and press to view the albums view songs. 2. Press the MEDIA button to
stored on the iPod. select the SD device.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select the song If an SD card has already been
and press to select an album from the list to begin playback. connected, but a different source is
name to view a list of all songs currently active, press the MEDIA
Songs: screen button repeatedly to cycle
on the album.
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight through all of the available audio
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to view a list of all source screens, until the SD card
and press to select the song songs stored on the iPod. screen is shown.
from the list to begin playback.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Playing Music from the SD Card
and press to select the song
An SD Card is played the same way
from the list to begin playback.
a USB device is played. See USB
Port on page 7-18.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Auxiliary Jack Playing from the AUX Jack Bluetooth Audio

The AUX jack is in the center An auxiliary device is played If equipped, music may be played
console. See Center Console through the audio system and from a paired Bluetooth device. See
Storage on page 4-3. controlled through the device itself. Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
Possible auxiliary audio sources AUX Menu Base Radio) on page 7-31 or
include: Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base
Press the MENU knob to display the Radio) on page 7-35 or Bluetooth
. Laptop computer AUX menu and the following may (Voice Recognition - Base
display: Connected Radio) on page 7-45 or
. Audio music player
Tone Settings: Select to adjust Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-29
This jack is not an audio output. Do Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
not plug headphones into the Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See Base Connected Radio) on
auxiliary input jack. Auxiliary “Tone Settings” under AM-FM Radio page 7-40 for help pairing a device.
devices should be set up while the on page 7-8.
vehicle is in P (Park). Volume and song selection may be
Auto Volume: If equipped, see controlled using the Infotainment
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable “Playing an Audio CD.” controls or on the phone/device.
from the auxiliary device to the If Bluetooth Audio is selected and
auxiliary input jack. EQ (Equalizer) Settings:
nothing is heard, check the volume
If equipped, this feature adjusts the
If an auxiliary device has already setting on both phone/device and
pre-defined equalizer settings. See
been connected, but a different the Infotainment system.
“EQ (Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM
source is currently active, press the Radio on page 7-8. Music can be launched by pressing
MEDIA faceplate button repeatedly the MEDIA screen button on the
to scroll through all of the available Home Page.
audio source screens, until the AUX
source screen is shown.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To play music via Bluetooth: All devices launch audio differently. Voice Recognition
1. Power on the device, and pair to When selecting Bluetooth audio as
a source, the radio may show as If equipped, voice recognition allows
connect the device.
paused on the screen. Press play for hands-free operation within the
2. Once paired, go into the audio on the device or press r to begin audio and phone applications. This
application from the Home Page playback. feature can be started by pressing
or via the application tray. Select either the g button on the steering
MEDIA until Bluetooth displays. Some phones support sending
wheel or the voice recognition icon
Bluetooth music information to
Bluetooth Audio Menu on the touchscreen display.
display on the radio. When the radio
Press the MENU screen button to receives this information, it will However, not all features within
display the Bluetooth Audio menu. check to see if any is available and these areas are supported by voice
The following may be available: display it. For more information commands. Generally, only complex
about supported Bluetooth features, tasks that require multiple manual
Tone: Select + or − to adjust the interactions to complete are
see www.gm.com/bluetooth.
tone settings. See AM-FM Radio on supported by voice commands.
page 7-8.
For example, tasks that take more
Press o BACK to go back to the than one or two button presses such
previous menu. as selecting a song or artist to play
Manage Bluetooth Devices: Select from a media device would be
to go to the Bluetooth page to add supported by voice commands.
or delete devices. Other tasks, like adjusting the
volume or seeking up or down are
When selecting Bluetooth audio, the audio features that are easily
radio may not be able to launch the performed by pressing one or two
audio player on the connected buttons, and are not supported by
device to start playing. When the voice commands.
vehicle is not moving, use the
phone to begin playback.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In general there are flexible ways to 1. Press g on the steering wheel 3. Wait until after the beep
speak commands for completing the control to activate voice completes, then clearly speak
tasks. Most of them, except one of the commands described
recognition, or press the g on
destination entry and voice keypad, in this section.
can be completed in a single the infotainment touchscreen on
command. If the task takes more the center stack. Press g to interrupt any voice
than one command to complete, the . If voice recognition is recognition system prompt. For
first command would be to indicate started from the steering example, if the prompt seems to
the kind of task that is to be wheel control, the be taking too long to finish,
performed. The system replies with instrument cluster displays press g again and the beep
prompts that lead through a dialog the selections and visual should happen right away.
to enter the necessary information. dialog content. There are two voice prompt modes
Voice recognition can be used when . If voice recognition is supported:
the ignition is on or when Retained started from the . Long verbal prompts: The longer
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. infotainment touchscreen prompts provide more
See Retained Accessory Power on the center stack, the information regarding the
(RAP) on page 9-29. selections and visual dialog supported actions.
content are displayed on
Using Voice Recognition both the center stack . Short prompts: The short
Voice recognition becomes available display and the instrument prompts provide simple
once the system has been cluster display. instructions about what can be
initialized. This begins when the stated.
2. The audio system mutes and the
ignition is turned on. Initialization system plays a prompt followed If a command is not spoken, the
may take a few moments. by a beep. voice recognition system says a
help prompt.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Prompts and Screen Displays

. Press or say “Cancel” or “Exit” to . Voice recognition system prompt
terminate the voice recognition can be interrupted during a
While a voice recognition session is
active, there will be corresponding
session and display the screen prompt by pressing g again.
from which voice recognition
buttons on screens displayed. was initiated. For example, if the prompt
Manual interaction in the voice seems to be taking too long to
recognition session is permitted. . Press i on the steering wheel finish, or if what is being
Interaction during a voice session controls to terminate the voice prompted causes a need for an
may be completed entirely using session and display the screen immediate reply, press g again
voice commands, or some from which voice recognition and wait for the beep.
selections may expedite a session. was initiated.
If a selection is made using a . Speak the command naturally,
manual control, the dialog will Helpful Hints for Speaking not too fast, not too slow. Use
progress in the same way as if the Commands direct commands without a lot of
selection was made through a voice extra words.
Voice recognition can understand
command. Once the system is able commands that are either naturally . Usually Phone and Audio
to complete the task, or the session stated in sentence form, or direct commands can be spoken in a
is terminated, the voice recognition commands that state the application single command.
dialog stops. and the task. For example, “Call David Smith
An example of this type of manual For best results: at work,” “Play” followed by the
intervention is pressing on an entry artist or song name, or “Tune”
of a displayed number list instead of
. Listen for the prompt and wait
followed by the radio station
speaking the number associated for the beep before saying a
number.
with the entry desired. command or reply.
There is no need to memorize
. Say “Help” or look at the screen
Canceling Voice Recognition display for commands.
specific command words. Direct
commands might be more clearly
. Press the Home screen button.
understood by the system. An
This will terminate the voice
example of a direct command would
recognition session.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
be “Call 555-1212.” Examples of Scrolling or flinging can be used to Help

these direct commands are help display other entries from Say “Help” on any voice recognition
displayed on most of the screens the list. screen and the help prompt for the
while a voice session is active. Manually scrolling or paging the list screen is played. Additionally, a
If “Phone” or “Phone Commands,” is on a screen during a voice pop-up displays a text version of the
stated, the system understands that recognition session suspends the help prompt. Depending on how
a phone call is requested and will current voice recognition event and voice recognition was initiated, the
respond with questions until enough plays the prompt “Make your Help pop-up will either display on
details are gathered. selection from the list using the the instrument cluster or the
If the phone number has been manual controls or press the Back infotainment touchscreen. Press the
saved with a name and a place, the button to try again.” Dismiss button to make the pop-up
direct command should include If manual selection takes more than go away.
both, for example “Call David Smith
at work.”
15 seconds, the session terminates Pressing g while the help prompt is
and prompts that it has timed out. playing will terminate the prompt
Using Voice Recognition for The screen returns back to the and a beep will be heard. Doing this
List Options screen where voice recognition was will stop the help prompt so that a
initiated. voice command can be used.
When a list is displayed, a voice
prompt will ask to confirm or select The Back Command
an option from that list. A selection Say “Back” or press the Back button
can be made by manually selecting to go to the previous screen.
the item, or by speaking the line
number for the item to select. If in voice recognition, and “Back” is
stated all the way through to the
When a screen contains a list, there initial screen, then “Back” is stated
may be options that are available one more time, the voice recognition
but not displayed. The list on a session will cancel.
voice recognition screen functions
the same as a list on other screens.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Voice Recognition for the “Tune to <AM frequency> AM”: “Tune to XM <XM channel
Radio Tune to the radio station whose name>”: Tune to the XM radio
frequency is identified in the station whose channel name is
command (like “nine fifty”). identified in the command.
“Tune to <FM frequency> FM”: Voice Recognition for Audio
Tune to the radio station whose My Media
frequency is identified in the
command (like “one o one
point one”).
“Tune to <AM frequency> AM
HD”: Tune to the HD Radio station
whose frequency is identified in the
All audio screens have a voice command.
recognition button g to launch audio
voice recognition. If browsing the “Tune to <FM frequency> FM
radio when the voice button on the HD”: Tune to the HD Radio station
screen is selected, the voice whose frequency is identified in the
command. If browsing My Media when the
recognition commands for Radio voice button is selected, the voice
features are available. “Tune to <FM frequency> FM HD recognition commands for My Media
“Switch to AM”: Switch bands to <HD channel number>”: Tune to features are available.
AM and tune to the last AM radio the HD Radio station whose
frequency and HD channel is “Play Artist”: Begin a dialog to
station. enter a specific Artist name.
identified in the command.
“Switch to FM”: Switch bands to “Play Artist <artist name>”:
FM and tune to the last FM radio “Tune to XM <XM channel
number>”: Tune to the XM radio Begin playback of the media
station. selection identified in the command.
station whose channel number is
“Switch to XM”: Switch bands to identified in the command.
XM and tune to the last XM channel.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
“Play Album”: Begin a dialog to name is the name displayed on the “Play Podcast”: Begin a dialog to
enter a specific album name. screen when the device is first enter a specific name.
“Play Album <album name>”: selected as an audio source. “Play Podcast <podcast
Begin playback of the identified “Play Chapter”: Begin a dialog to name>”: Begin playback of the
album name in the command. enter a specific name. media selection identified in the
“Play Song”: Begin a dialog to “Play Chapter <chapter name>”: command.
enter a specific song name. Begin playback of the media “Play Video”: Begin a dialog to
“Play Song <song name>”: Begin selection identified in the command. enter a specific name.
playback of the identified song “Play Audiobook”: Begin a dialog “Play Video <video name>”:
name in the command. to enter a specific name. Begin playback of the media
“Play Genre”: Begin a dialog to “Play Audiobook <audiobook selection identified in the command.
enter a specific genre. name>”: Begin playback of the “My Media”: Begin a dialog to
“Play Genre <genre name>”: media selection identified in the enter the desired media content.
Begin playback of the media command.
Handling Large Amounts of Media
selection identified in the command. “Play CD Track <track Content
“Play Playlist”: Begin a dialog to number>”: Begin playback of the
CD at the track identified in the It is expected that large amounts of
enter a specific playlist name. media content will be brought into
command.
“Play Playlist <playlist name>”: the vehicle. It may be necessary to
Begin playback of the identified “Play Episode”: Begin a dialog to handle large amounts of media
playlist in the command. enter a specific name. content in a different way than
“Play Episode <episode smaller amounts of media. The
“Play <device name>”: Play system may limit the options of
music from a specific device name>”: Begin playback of the
media selection identified in the voice recognition by not allowing
identified by name. The device selection of song titles by voice at
command.
the highest level if the number of
songs exceeds the maximum limit.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Voice command option changes directly with one command like, Voice Recognition for the
through media content limits are: “Play <album name>.” The Phone
. Song files including other command “Play Album” must first be
spoken; the system will then ask for “Call <contact name>”: Initiate a
individual files of all media types call to an entered contact. The
such as audiobook chapters, the album name. The reply would
be to say the name of the album command may include location if
podcast episodes, and videos. the contact has location numbers
to play.
. Album type folders including stored.
types such as albums and Once the number of songs has
exceeded approximately 8,000, “Call <contact name> At Home,”
audiobooks. “At Work,” “On Mobile,” or “On
there is no support for accessing the
There are no restrictions if the songs directly through voice Other”: Initiate a call to an entered
number of song files and albums is commands. There will still be contact and location at home, at
less than 4,000. When the number access to the media content by work, on mobile device, or on
of song files connected to the using commands for playlists, another phone.
system is between 4,000 and 8,000, artists, and genres. “Call <phone number>”: Initiate a
the content cannot be accessed call to a standard phone number
directly with one command like The access commands for playlists,
artists, and genres are prohibited seven or 10 digits in length, and
“Play <song name>.” also 911, 411, or 611.
after the number of this type of
The restriction is that the command media exceeds 4,000. “Pair Phone”: Begins the
“Play Song” must be spoken first; Bluetooth pairing process. Follow
the system will then ask for the song The system will provide feedback
the first time voice recognition is instructions on the radio display.
name. The reply command would be
to say the name of the song to play. initiated if it has become apparent “Switch Phone”: Select a different
that any of these limits are reached phone for outgoing calls.
Similar limits exist for album during a device initializing process.
content. If there are more than
4,000 albums, but less than 8,000,
the content cannot be accessed
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
“Voice Keypad”: Begins a dialog Phone To minimize driver distraction,

to enter special numbers like before driving, and with the vehicle
international numbers. The numbers parked:
can be entered in groups of digits Bluetooth (Overview) . Become familiar with the
with each group of digits being Instructions for using the cell phone features of the cell phone.
repeated back by the system. If the may differ between infotainment Organize the phone book and
group of digits is not correct, the systems. The base radio and base contact lists clearly and delete
command “Delete” will remove the radio with connectivity instructions duplicate or rarely used entries.
last group of digits and allow them are included in this manual. See the If possible, program speed dial
to be re-entered. Once the entire infotainment manual for instructions or other shortcuts.
number has been entered, the on the uplevel radios.
command “Call” will start dialing the . Review the controls and
number. Bluetooth-capable systems can operation of the infotainment
interact with many cell phones, system.
“Voice Mail”: Initiate a call to voice allowing:
mail numbers. . Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
. Placement and receipt of calls in The system may not work with
Voice Recognition for OnStar a hands-free mode. all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
(If Equipped) . Sharing of the cell phone’s this section.
“OnStar”: Begin Onstar Voice address book or contact list with . If the cell phone has voice
Recognition. the vehicle. dialing capability, learn to use
that feature to access the
address book or contact list. See
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this
section.
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers” in this section.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more { (Home Page): Press to go to the

{ Warning information about compatible Home Page. See Home Page on
phones. page 7-5.
When using a cell phone, it can
be distracting to look too long or Bluetooth Controls PHONE: Select to enter the phone
too often at the screen of the Use the buttons on the instrument main menu. See Bluetooth
phone or the infotainment panel, faceplate, and the steering (Infotainment Controls - Base
(navigation) system. Taking your wheel to operate the Bluetooth Radio) on page 7-31 or Bluetooth
eyes off the road too long or too system. (Voice Recognition - Base Radio) on
often could cause a crash page 7-35 or Bluetooth (Voice
resulting in injury or death. Focus Steering Wheel Controls Recognition - Base Connected
your attention on driving. g (Push to Talk): Press to answer Radio) on page 7-45 or Bluetooth
incoming calls, confirm system (Overview) on page 7-29 or
information, and start voice Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system Base Connected Radio) on
can use a Bluetooth-capable cell recognition.
page 7-40.
phone with a Hands-Free Profile to c (End Call): Press to end a call,
make and receive phone calls. The reject a call, or cancel an operation. Voice Recognition
infotainment system and voice Press to mute or unmute the The voice recognition system uses
recognition are used to control the infotainment system. commands to control the system
system. The system can be used and dial phone numbers.
while in ON/RUN or ACC/ Infotainment System Controls
ACCESSORY. The range of the For information about how to Noise: The system may not
Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m navigate the menu system using the recognize voice commands if there
(30 ft). Not all phones support all infotainment controls, see Overview is too much background noise, such
functions and not all phones work on page 7-3. as noise from open windows or loud
with the Bluetooth system. See talking inside the vehicle.
MENU: Turn to scroll through a list.
Press to select the highlighted list
option.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
When to Speak: A tone sounds to Bluetooth (Infotainment Pairing Information

indicate that the system is ready for
a voice command. Wait for the tone
Controls - Base Radio) . Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
and then speak. For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the . The pairing process is disabled
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a when the vehicle is moving.
calm and natural voice. infotainment controls, see Overview
on page 7-3. . Pairing only needs to be
Audio System completed once per phone,
Switching to Handset or
When using the Bluetooth system, unless the pairing information on
Hands-Free Mode the cell phone changes or the
sound comes through the vehicle's
front audio system speakers and To switch between handset mode cell phone is deleted from the
overrides the audio system. Use the and hands-free mode, use the system.
O knob during a call to change the OnStar command, “transfer call.” . Only one paired cell phone can
volume level. The system maintains Pairing be connected to the Bluetooth
a minimum volume level. system at a time.
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
Bluetooth Audio Quality must be paired to the Bluetooth . If multiple paired cell phones are
system and then connected to the within range of the system, the
Turn off the Echo and Noise
vehicle before it can be used. See system connects to the first
cancellation feature on your phone,
your cell phone manufacturer's user available paired cell phone in the
if supported, for the best hands-free
guide for Bluetooth functions before order that they were newly
performance.
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth paired to the system. To connect
See www.gm.com/bluetooth. phone is not connected, calls can to a different paired phone, see
be made using OnStar Hands-Free “Connecting to a Different
Calling, if available. See OnStar Phone” later in this section.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Pairing a Phone or Device 5. Locate the device named “Your Deleting a Paired Phone
1. From the Home Page, turn the Vehicle” in the list on the cell 1. From the Home Page, turn the
MENU knob to access the phone. Follow the instructions MENU knob, then press to
PHONE screen button, then on the cell phone to enter the select the PHONE screen
press the MENU knob to select PIN provided in Step 3. button.
the PHONE screen button. If a After the PIN is successfully 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
device has been previously entered, the system confirms the to select Manage Phones.
paired, the main Phone menu pairing process is complete.
will be shown. If no devices 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
6. If the phone prompts to accept the phone to be deleted.
have been paired, Step 2 can be connection or allow phone book
skipped. download, select always accept 4. Press the button below the
2. Turn the MENU knob and press and allow. The phone book may DELETE screen button to delete
to select Manage Phones. not be available if not accepted. the highlighted device.
3. Press the button just below the 7. Repeat steps 1–6 to pair 5. A confirmation screen is
PAIR/screen button. A four-digit additional phones or devices. displayed. Press the button just
Personal Identification Number below the DELETE screen
(PIN) appears on the display. Listing All Paired and Connected button to confirm deletion.
The PIN may be used in Step 5. Phones
Connecting to a Different Phone
4. Start the pairing process on the 1. To list all paired devices, from
the Home Page turn the MENU 1. From the Home Page, turn the
cell phone to be paired to the MENU knob, then press to
knob, then press to select the
vehicle. See the cell phone select the PHONE screen button
PHONE screen button.
manufacturer's user guide for or press the PHONE button on
information on this process. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press the faceplate.
to select Manage Phones.
2. Turn the MENU knob and press
to select Manage Phones.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Making a Call Using Contacts The Recent Calls menu allows you
the phone to be connected. and Recent Calls to access the phone numbers from
4. Press the button just below the the Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls,
For cell phones that support the and Missed Calls menus on the cell
CONNECT screen button to Contacts and Recent Calls feature,
connect to the highlighted phone to make a call.
the Bluetooth system can use the
device. contacts stored on your cell phone To make a call using the
to make calls. See your cell phone Contacts menu:
Phone Menu
manufacturer’s user guide or 1. From the Home Page, turn the
Once a phone is connected and contact your wireless provider to MENU knob, then press to
selected, the following may display: find out if this feature is supported select the PHONE screen
Recent Calls: Turn the MENU by your phone. button.
knob to highlight Recent Calls and If the phone prompts to allow phone 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
press to select. book download during the pairing Contacts and press to select.
Contacts: Turn the MENU knob to process, select Always Accept and
Allow. The phone book may not be 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
highlight Contacts and press to the letter group and press to
select. available if not accepted.
select.
Keypad: Turn the MENU knob to When a cell phone supports the
phone book feature, the Contacts 4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
highlight Keypad and press to the contact and press to select.
select. and Recent Calls menus are
automatically available. 5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
Active Call: Turn the MENU knob the desired number, then press
to highlight Active Call and press to The Contacts menu allows you to
access the phone book stored in the the MENU knob to call the
select and display the active call contact.
screen. cell phone to make a call.
Manage Phones: Turn the MENU
knob to highlight Manage Phones
and press to select.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To make a call using the Recent 2. Turn the MENU knob and press Declining a Call
Calls menu: to select Keypad. To decline a call, do one of the
1. From the Home Page, turn the 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight following:
MENU knob, then press to the first digit and press to select. . Press the button just below the
select the PHONE screen Continue this process through IGNORE screen button.
button. the number. To call, press the
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight button just below the CALL . Press c on the steering wheel
Recent Calls and press to screen button. controls.
select. Accepting or Declining a Call . Do nothing.
If necessary, select between When an incoming call is received, Call Waiting
Missed, Recent, and Sent calls the infotainment system mutes and
by pressing the button below the a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. Call waiting must be supported on
appropriate screen button. the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
Accepting a Call the wireless service carrier to work.
the contact or the phone To accept a call, do one of the Accepting a Call Waiting Call
number. following:
To accept a call waiting call, do one
4. Press the MENU knob to call the . Press the button just below the of the following:
contact. ANSWER screen button. . Press the button just below the
Making a Call Using the . Press g on the Steering Wheel SWITCH screen button.
Keypad Controls. . Press g on the steering wheel
To make a call: controls.
1. From the Home Page, turn the
MENU knob, then press to
select the PHONE screen
button.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Declining a Call Waiting Call Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Bluetooth (Voice

To decline a call waiting call, do one (DTMF) Tones Recognition - Base
of the following: The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can Radio)
. Press the button just below the send numbers during a call. This is
IGNORE screen button. used when calling a menu-driven Using Voice Recognition
phone system.
. Press c on the steering wheel To use voice recognition, press g
1. When a call is active, press the on the steering wheel. Use the
controls.
button just below the KEYPAD commands below for the various
. Do nothing. screen button. voice features. For additional
Ending a Call 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight information, say “Help” while you
the first digit and press to select. are in a voice recognition menu.
To end a call, do one of the
following: If not initially in the phone Pairing
application, from the Home Page,
. Press the button just below the turn the MENU knob, then press to Pairing a Phone
END screen button. select the PHONE screen button. 1. Press g. The system responds
. Press c on the steering wheel From the PHONE main menu, turn “Ready,” followed by a tone.
controls. the MENU knob to highlight Active
Call and press to select. 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
with instructions and a four-digit
Personal Identification Number
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
4. Start the pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone
cell phone that you want to pair. Phones To connect to a different cell phone,
For help with this process, see The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
your cell phone manufacturer's paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the
user guide. also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all available cell
5. Locate the device named “Your system responds with “is connected” phones were paired. This may need
Vehicle” in the list on the cell after that phone name. to be repeated depending on how
phone. Follow the instructions many cell phones have been
on the cell phone to enter the 1. Press g. The system responds connected.
PIN provided in Step 3. After the “Ready,” followed by a tone.
PIN is successfully entered, the 1. Press g. The system responds
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
system prompts you to provide a “Ready,” followed by a tone.
name for the paired cell phone. 3. Say “List.”
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
This name will be used to Deleting a Paired Phone
indicate which phones are 3. Say “Change phone.”
paired and connected to the If the phone name to delete is . If another cell phone is
vehicle. The system responds unknown, see “Listing All Paired found, the response will be
with “<Phone name> has been and Connected Phones.” “<Phone name> is now
successfully paired” after the 1. Press g. The system responds connected.”
pairing process is complete. “Ready,” followed by a tone. This can be repeated to
6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pair 2. Say “Bluetooth.” connect any of the up to
additional phones. five paired phones.
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
for which phone to delete.
. If another cell phone is not
found, the original phone
4. Say the name of the phone to remains connected.
delete.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Storing and Deleting Phone 3. Say the entire phone number or Using the “Delete” Command
Numbers a group of digits all at once with
no pauses, then follow the 1. Press g. The system responds
The following commands are used directions given by the system to “Ready,” followed by a tone.
to delete and store phone numbers. save a name tag for this number. 2. Say “Delete.”
Store: This command will store a
Using the “Digit Store” Command 3. Say the name tag you want to
phone number, or a group of
If an unwanted number is delete.
numbers as a name tag.
recognized by the system, say Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Digit Store: This command allows
“Correction” at any time to clear the Command
a phone number to be stored as a
last number.
name tag by entering the digits one This command deletes all stored
at a time. To hear all of the digits recognized name tags in the Hands-Free
by the system, say “Verify” at Calling Directory and the
Delete: This command is used to
any time. Destinations Directory.
delete individual name tags.
Delete All Name Tags: This 1. Press g. The system responds To delete all name tags:
command deletes all stored name “Ready,” followed by a tone.
1. Press g. The system responds
tags in the Hands-Free Calling 2. Say “Digit Store.” “Ready,” followed by a tone.
Directory and the Destinations
Directory. 3. Say each digit, one at a time. 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
After each digit is entered, the
Using the “Store” Command system repeats back the digit it Listing Stored Numbers
heard followed by a tone. After The list command will list all the
1. Press g. The system responds the last digit has been entered,
“Ready,” followed by a tone. stored numbers and name tags.
say “Store,” and then follow the
2. Say “Store.” directions given by the system to Using the “List” Command
save a name tag for this number. 1. Press g. The system responds
“Ready,” followed by a tone.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2. Say “Directory.” 3. Say the entire number without Using the “Digit Dial” Command
3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.” pausing or say the name tag. The digit dial command allows a
4. Say “List.” Once connected, the person called phone number to be dialed by
will be heard through the audio entering the digits one at a time.
Making a Call speakers. After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it
Calls can be made using the Calling 911 Emergency (US and heard followed by a tone.
following commands. Canada)
If an unwanted number is
Dial or Call: The dial or call 1. Press g. The system responds recognized by the system, say
command can be used “Say a command or say help,” “Correction” at any time to clear the
interchangeably to dial a phone followed by a tone. last number.
number or a stored name tag.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” To hear all of the numbers
Digit Dial: This command allows a
3. Say “911.” recognized by the system, say
phone number to be dialed by
“Verify” at any time.
entering the digits one at a time. 4. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
Re-dial: This command is used to 1. Press g. The system responds
Calling 066 Emergency (Mexico)
dial the last number used on the cell “Say a command or say help,”
phone. 1. Press g. The system responds followed by a tone.
“Say a command or say help,” 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
followed by a tone.
Command 3. Say each digit, one at a time.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” After each digit is entered, the
1. Press g. The system responds system repeats back the digit it
“Say a command or say help,” 3. Say “066.”
heard followed by a tone. After
followed by a tone. 4. Say “Dial” or “Call.” the last digit has been entered,
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” say “Dial.”
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Once connected, the person called Call Waiting 3. Use the “Dial” or “Call” command
will be heard through the audio to dial the number of the third
Call waiting must be supported on
speakers. party to be called.
the cell phone and enabled by the
Using the “Re-dial” Command wireless service carrier. 4. Once the call is connected,
press g to link all callers
1. Press g. The system responds . Press g to answer an incoming
together.
“Say a command or say help,” call when another call is active.
followed by a tone. The original call is placed Ending a Call
on hold.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” The Press c to end a call.
system dials the last number . Press g again to return to the
called from the connected cell original call. Transferring a Call
phone.
. To ignore the incoming call, no Audio can be transferred between
Once connected, the person called action is required. the Bluetooth system and the cell
will be heard through the audio phone.
speakers. . Press c to disconnect the
The cell phone must be paired and
current call and switch to the call
Receiving a Call connected with the Bluetooth
on hold.
system before a call can be
When an incoming call is received, transferred. The connection process
the audio system mutes and a ring
Three-Way Calling
can take up to two minutes after the
tone is heard in the vehicle. Three-way calling must be ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
supported on the cell phone and
. Press g to answer the call. enabled by the wireless service
. Press c to ignore a call. carrier.
1. While on a call, press g.
2. Say “Three-way call.”
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To Transfer Audio from the To access contacts stored in the cell Sending a Number or Name Tag
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone phone: During a Call
During a call with the audio in the 1. Press g. The system responds 1. Press g. The system responds
vehicle: “Say a command or say help,” “Ready,” followed by a tone.
1. Press g. followed by a tone. 2. Say “Dial.”
2. Say “Transfer Call.” 2. Say “Bluetooth.” 3. Say the number or name tag
3. Say “Voice.” The system to send.
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth responds “OK, accessing
System from a Cell Phone Clearing the System
<phone name>.”
During a call with the audio on the Unless information is deleted out of
The cell phone's normal prompt
cell phone, press g. The audio messages will go through their cycle the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio according to the phone's operating will be retained indefinitely. This
does not transfer to the vehicle, use instructions. includes all phone pairing
the audio transfer feature on the cell information. For information on how
phone. See your cell phone Dual Tone Multi-Frequency to delete this information, see
manufacturer's user guide for more (DTMF) Tones “Deleting a Paired Phone.”
information. The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored as Bluetooth (Infotainment
Voice Pass-Thru
name tags during a call. You can Controls - Base
Voice pass-thru allows access to the use this feature when calling a
voice recognition commands on the
Connected Radio)
menu-driven phone system.
cell phone. See your cell phone Account numbers can also be For information about how to
manufacturer's user guide to see if stored for use. navigate the menu system using the
the cell phone supports this feature. infotainment controls, see Overview
on page 7-3.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Switching to Handset or your cell phone manufacturer's user phone, see “Connecting to a
Hands-Free Mode guide for Bluetooth functions before Different Phone” after in this
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth section.
To switch between handset or phone is not connected, calls can
hands-free mode, from the Home be made using OnStar Hands-Free Pairing a Phone or Device
Page select the PHONE to display Calling, if available. See OnStar 1. From the Home Page, turn the
Call View. Overview on page 14-1. MENU knob to access the
. While the active call is PHONE screen button, then
Pairing Information press the MENU knob to select
hands-free, press the Handset
screen button to switch to the . Up to 10 cell phones can be the PHONE screen button. If a
handset mode. The screen paired to the Bluetooth system. device has been previously
button changes to Hands-Free . The pairing process is disabled paired, the main Phone menu
once the Bluetooth device when the vehicle is moving. will be shown. If no devices
confirms it is operating as have been paired, Step 2 can be
. Pairing only needs to be
handset. skipped.
completed once per phone,
. While the active call is handset, unless the pairing information on 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
select the Hands-Free screen the cell phone changes or the to select Manage Phones.
button to switch to the cell phone is deleted from the 3. Press the button just below the
hands-free mode. The screen system. PAIR/screen button. A four-digit
button changes to Handset once Personal Identification Number
the Bluetooth device confirms it . Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth (PIN) appears on the display.
is operating as hands-free. The PIN may be used in Step 5.
system at a time.
Pairing 4. Start the pairing process on the
. If multiple paired cell phones are
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone within range of the system, the cell phone to be paired to the
must be paired to the Bluetooth system connects to the most vehicle. See the cell phone
system and then connected to the recently connected device. To manufacturer's user guide for
vehicle before it can be used. See connect to a different paired information on this process.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
5. Locate the device named “GMC Deleting a Paired Phone Connecting to a Different Phone
IntelliLink” in the list on the cell 1. From the Home Page, turn the 1. From the Home Page, turn the
phone. Follow the instructions MENU knob, then press to MENU knob, then press to
on the cell phone to confirm the select the PHONE screen select the PHONE screen button
four-digit code. button. or press the PHONE button on
After the PIN is successfully 2. Turn the MENU knob and press the faceplate.
entered or the code is to select Manage Phones. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
confirmed, the system confirms to select Manage Phones.
the pairing process is complete. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
the phone to be deleted. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
6. If the phone prompts to accept the phone to be connected.
connection or allow phone book 4. Press the button below the
download, select always accept DROP screen button to 4. Press the button just below the
and allow. The phone book may disconnect the highlighted CONNECT screen button to
not be available if not accepted. device. connect to the highlighted
5. Press the button below the device.
7. Repeat Steps 1–6 to pair
additional phones or devices. DELETE screen button to delete Phone Menu
the highlighted device.
Listing All Paired and Connected Once a phone is connected and
Phones 6. A confirmation screen is selected, the following may display:
displayed. Press the button just
1. To list all paired devices, from below the DELETE screen Recent Calls: Turn the MENU
the Home Page turn the MENU button to confirm deletion. knob to highlight Recent Calls and
knob, then press to select the press to select.
PHONE screen button. Contacts: Turn the MENU knob to
2. Turn the MENU knob and press highlight Contacts and press to
to select Manage Phones. select.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Keypad: Turn the MENU knob to When a cell phone supports the To make a call using the Recent
highlight Keypad and press to phone book feature, the Contacts Calls menu:
select. and Recent Calls menus are 1. From the Home Page, turn the
Active Call: Turn the MENU knob automatically available. MENU knob, then press to
to highlight Active Call and press to The Contacts menu allows you to select the PHONE screen
select and display the active call access the phone book stored in the button.
screen. cell phone to make a call. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
Manage Phones: Turn the MENU The Recent Calls menu allows you Recent Calls and press to
knob to highlight Manage Phones to access the phone numbers from select.
and press to select. the Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, If necessary, select between
and Missed Calls menus on the cell Missed, Recent, and Sent calls
Making a Call Using Contacts phone to make a call.
and Recent Calls by pressing the button below the
To make a call using the appropriate screen button.
For cell phones that support the Contacts menu:
Contacts and Recent Calls feature, 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
the Bluetooth system can use the 1. From the Home Page, turn the the contact or the phone
contacts stored on your cell phone MENU knob, then press to number.
to make calls. See your cell phone select the PHONE screen 4. Press the MENU knob to call the
manufacturer’s user guide or button. contact.
contact your wireless provider to 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
find out if this feature is supported Contacts and press to select. Making a Call Using the
by your phone. Keypad
If the phone prompts to allow phone the contact and press to select. To make a call:
book download during the pairing 1. From the Home Page, turn the
process, select Always Accept and MENU knob, then press to
the desired number, then press
Allow. The phone book may not be select the PHONE screen
the MENU knob to call the
available if not accepted. button.
contact.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2. Turn the MENU knob and press Declining a Call Declining a Call Waiting Call
to select Keypad. To decline a call, do one of the To decline a call waiting call, do one
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight following: of the following:
the first digit and press to select. . Press the button just below the . Press the button just below the
Continue this process through IGNORE screen button. IGNORE screen button.
the number. To call, press the
button just below the CALL . Press c on the steering wheel . Press c on the steering wheel
screen button. controls. controls.
Accepting or Declining a Call . Do nothing. . Do nothing.
When an incoming call is received, Call Waiting Ending a Call
the infotainment system mutes and
a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. Call waiting must be supported on To end a call, do one of the
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by following:
Accepting a Call the wireless service carrier to work. . Press the button just below the
To accept a call, do one of the Accepting a Call Waiting Call END screen button.
following:
To accept a call waiting call, do one . Press c on the steering wheel
. Press the button just below the of the following: controls.
ANSWER screen button. . Press the button just below the
. Press g on the steering wheel SWITCH screen button.
controls. . Press g on the steering wheel
controls.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Bluetooth (Voice 2. Say “Dial” or “Call” followed by

(DTMF) Tones the complete phone number.
Recognition - Base
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can Connected Radio) Use the “Voice Keypad” command
send numbers during a call. This is for international numbers or special
used when calling a menu-driven Using Bluetooth Voice numbers which include * or #.
phone system. Recognition Once connected, the person called
1. When a call is active, press the To use voice recognition, press the will be heard through the audio
button just below the KEYPAD g button on the steering wheel. Use speakers.
screen button. the commands below for the various To call using a contact from your
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight voice features. For additional phone book:
the first digit and press to select. information, say “Help” while in a
voice recognition menu. See Voice 1. Press g. The system responds
If not initially in the phone Recognition on page 7-22 for help “Command Please,” followed by
application, from the Home Page, using voice recognition commands. a tone.
turn the MENU knob, then press to
Making a Call 2. Say “Dial” or “Call” and then say
select the PHONE screen button.
the contact name. For example
From the PHONE main menu, turn Calls can be made using the “Call John at Work.”
the MENU knob to highlight Active following commands.
Call and press to select. Once connected, the person called
Using the “Dial” or “Call” will be heard through the audio
Command speakers.
To call a number: Calling 911 Emergency (US and
Canada)
1. Press g. The system responds
“Command Please,” followed by 1. Press g. The system responds
a tone. “Ready,” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
3. Say “911.” Using the “Voice Keypad” Trademarks and

4. Say “Dial” or “Call.” Command
License Agreements
Calling 066 Emergency (Mexico) 1. Press g. The system responds
“Command Please,” followed by FCC Information
1. Press g. The system responds a tone. See Radio Frequency Statement on
“Ready,” followed by a tone. 2. After the tone, say “Voice page 13-15.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” Keypad.” The system allows
3. Say “066.” entry of special numbers and
characters.
4. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
Using the “Voice mail” Command
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio 1. Press g. The system responds
speakers. “Command Please,” followed by
a tone. "Made for iPod," and "Made for
Using the “Switch Phone”
Command 2. After the tone, say “Voice mail.” iPhone," mean that an electronic
The system dials the voice mail accessory has been designed to
1. Press g. The system responds number of the connected phone. connect specifically to iPod or
“Command Please,” followed by iPhone and has been certified by
a tone. Clearing the System the developer to meet Apple
2. After the tone, say “Switch Unless information is deleted out of performance standards. Apple is not
Phone.” The system displays a the vehicle Bluetooth system, it will responsible for the operation of this
list of phones to select. be retained. This includes phone device or its compliance with safety
pairing information. For directions and regulatory standards. Please
on how to delete this information, note that the use of this accessory
see “Deleting a Paired Phone.” with iPod or iPhone may affect
wireless performance. iPhone®,
iPod®, iPod classic®, iPod nano®,
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
iPod shuffle®, and iPod touch® are Explicit Language Notice: Channels patent rights, copyrights, and trade
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered with frequent explicit language are secrets of Digital Voice
in the U.S. and other countries. indicated with an “XL” preceding the Systems, Inc.
channel name. Channel blocking is General Requirements:
available for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio receivers by notifying 1. A License Agreement from
SiriusXM: SiriusXM® is required for any
product that incorporates
. USA Customers — See SiriusXM Technology and/or for
www.siriusxm.com or call use of any of the SiriusXM
1-866-635–2349. marks to be manufactured,
Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee, . Canadian Customers — See distributed, or marketed in the
taxes, one time activation fee, and
www.xmradio.ca or call SiriusXM Service Area.
other fees may apply. Subscription
1-877-209-0079. 2. For products to be distributed,
fee is consumer only. All fees and
programming subject to change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, marketed, and/or sold in
Subscriptions subject to Customer disassemble, reverse engineer, Canada, a separate agreement
Agreement available at hack, manipulate, or otherwise is required with Canadian
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM® make available any technology or Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as
service only available in the software incorporated in receivers SiriusXM Canada).
48 contiguous United States and compatible with the SiriusXM®
Canada. Satellite Radio System or that
support the SiriusXM website, the
In Canada: Some deterioration of
Online Service or any of its content.
service may occur in extreme
Furthermore, the AMBER voice
northern latitudes. This is beyond
compression software included in
the control of SiriusXM® Satellite
this product is protected by
Radio.
intellectual property rights including
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
HD Radio Technology Schedule I: Gracenote EULA Gracenote logo and logotype, and
the "Powered by Gracenote" logo
are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Gracenote in the
United States and/or other
countries.
Gracenote Terms of Use
HD Radio Technology manufactured This application or device contains
Music recognition technology and software from Gracenote, Inc. of
under license from iBiquity Digital related data are provided by
Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Emeryville, California ("Gracenote").
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the The software from Gracenote (the
patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, industry standard in music
HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are "Gracenote Software") enables this
recognition technology and related application to do disc or file
proprietary trademarks of iBiquity content delivery. For more
Digital Corp. identification and obtain
information visit music-related information, including
Other Information www.gracenote.com. name, artist, track, and title
Music-related data from Gracenote, information ("Gracenote Data") from
The Bluetooth® word mark and
Inc., copyright © 2000 to present online servers or embedded
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, databases (collectively, "Gracenote
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
copyright © 2000 to present Servers") and to perform other
by General Motors is under license.
Gracenote. One or more patents functions. You may use Gracenote
Other trademarks and trade names
owned by Gracenote may apply to Data only by means of the intended
are those of their respective owners.
this product and service. See the End-User functions of this
Gracenote website for a application or device.
non-exhaustive list of applicable This application or device may
Gracenote patents. Gracenote, contain content belonging to
CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote’s providers. If so, all of
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
the restrictions set forth herein with Gracenote Data, the Gracenote accuracy of any Gracenote Data.
respect to Gracenote Data shall Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to
also apply to such content and such Gracenote reserves all rights in delete data from the Gracenote
content providers shall be entitled to Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Servers or to change data
all of the benefits and protections Software, and the Gracenote categories for any cause that
set forth herein that are available to Servers, including all ownership Gracenote deems sufficient. No
Gracenote. rights. Under no circumstances will warranty is made that the Gracenote
You agree that you will use Gracenote become liable for any Software or Gracenote Servers are
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote payment to you for any information error-free or that functioning of
Software, and Gracenote Servers that you provide. You agree that Gracenote Software or Gracenote
for your own personal Gracenote may enforce its rights Servers will be uninterrupted.
non-commercial use only. You agree under this Agreement against you Gracenote is not obligated to
not to assign, copy, transfer or directly in its own name. provide you with new enhanced or
transmit the Gracenote Software or The Gracenote service uses a additional data types or categories
any Gracenote Data to any third unique identifier to track queries for that Gracenote may provide in the
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE statistical purposes. The purpose of future and is free to discontinue its
OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, a randomly assigned numeric services at any time.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, identifier is to allow the Gracenote GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, service to count queries without WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY knowing anything about who you IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
PERMITTED HEREIN. are. For more information, see the LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
You agree that your non-exclusive web page for the Gracenote Privacy WARRANTIES OF
license to use the Gracenote Data, Policy for the Gracenote service. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
the Gracenote Software, and The Gracenote Software and each FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
Gracenote Servers will terminate if item of Gracenote Data are licensed TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
you violate these restrictions. If your to you "AS IS." Gracenote makes no GRACENOTE DOES NOT
license terminates, you agree to representations or warranties, WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT
cease any and all use of the express or implied, regarding the WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
USE OF THE GRACENOTE Free Type Project Part C – EULA

SOFTWARE OR ANY Portions of this software are Copyright 2013, Software Systems
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO copyright © 2013 The FreeType GmbH & Co. KG. All Rights
CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE Project (http://www.freetype.org). All Reserved.
LIABLE FOR ANY rights reserved.
CONSEQUENTIAL OR The product you have purchased
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR iType ("Product") contains Software
ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST (Runtime Configuration No. 505962;
iType is a trademark of Monotype "Software") which is distributed by
REVENUES. Imaging Inc. registered in the U.S. or on behalf of the Product
© 2013. Gracenote, Inc. All Rights Patent & Trademark Office and may manufacturer "Manufacturer") under
Reserved. be registered in certain other license from Software Systems Co.
jurisdictions. ("QSSC"). You may only use the
PANDORA
Open Source SW Software in the Product and in
PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, compliance with the license terms
and the Pandora trade dress are The open source code used in this
below.
trademarks or registered trademarks device can be downloaded at the
of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with webpage shown in the information Subject to the terms and conditions
permission. at the center stack display. Further of this License, QSSC hereby
information concerning the OSS grants you a limited, non-exclusive,
Unicode licenses is shown in the center non-transferable license to use the
Copyright © 1991-2013 Unicode, stack display. Software in the Product for the
Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed purpose intended by the
under the Terms of Use in http:// QNX Manufacturer. If permitted by the
www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Portions of this software are Manufacturer, or by applicable law,
copyright © 2008-2013, QNX you may make one backup copy of
Software Systems. All rights the Software as part of the Product
reserved. software. QSSC and its licensors
reserve all license+C31 rights not
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
expressly granted herein, and retain INCLUDING, WITHOUT UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY,
all right, title and interest in and to LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING
all copies of the Software, including OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE, NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT OR
all intellectual property rights NON-INFRINGEMENT, OTHERWISE, FOR DAMAGES,
therein. Unless required by MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS INCLUDING ANY DIRECT,
applicable law you may not FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
reproduce, distribute or transfer, ANY WARRANTIES OR OTHER OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
or de-compile, disassemble or PROVISIONS OFFERED BY THE OF ANY CHARACTER ARISING AS
otherwise attempt to unbundle, MANUFACTURER OR ITS A RESULT OF THIS LICENSE OR
reverse engineer, modify or create DISTRIBUTOR(S) THAT DIFFER OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY
derivative works of, the Software. FROM THIS LICENSE ARE TO USE THE PRODUCT
You agree: (1) not to remove, cover OFFERED BY THE (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
or alter any proprietary notices, MANUFACTURER OR ITS TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF
labels or marks in or on the DISTRIBUTOR(S) ALONE AND GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE,
Software, and to ensure that all NOT BY QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES PRODUCT FAILURE OR
copies bear any notice contained on OR THEIR LICENSORS. YOU MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL
the original; and (2) not to export the ASSUME ANY RISKS OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES
Product or the Software in ASSOCIATED WITH YOUR USE OR LOSSES), EVEN IF QSSC, ITS
contravention of applicable export OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THIS AFFILIATES OR THEIR
control laws. LICENSE. LICENSORS HAVE BEEN
EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
APPLICABLE LAW, QSSC AND ITS APPLICABLE LAW (SUCH AS IN
LICENSORS PROVIDE THE THE CASE OF DELIBERATE OR
SOFTWARE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, GROSSLY NEGLIGENT ACTS), IN
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR NO EVENT SHALL QSSC, ITS
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, AFFILIATES OR THEIR
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO YOU
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
WMA
This product is protected by certain
intellectual property rights of
Microsoft. Use or distribution of
such technology outside of this
product is prohibited without a
license from Microsoft.
For more information on the
Software, including any open source
software license terms (and
available source code) as well as
copyright attributions applicable to
the Runtime Configuration indicated
above, please contact the
Manufacturer or contact QSSC at
175 Terence Matthews Crescent,
Kanata, Ontario, Canada K2M 1W8
(licensing@qnx.com).
END USER NOTICE
The marks of companies displayed
by this product to indicate business
locations are the marks of their
respective owners. The use of such
marks in this product does not imply
any sponsorship, approval,
or endorsement by such companies
of this product.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems
Climate Control Systems Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only)

Climate Control Systems (with With this system the heating and ventilation can be controlled.
Heater Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems (with
Air Conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
1. Fan Control 4. Defrost

2. Air Recirculation 5. TEMP (Temperature Control)
3. Air Delivery Mode Control
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
8-2 Climate Controls
TEMP (Temperature Control): - (Defog): This mode clears the

Turn clockwise or counterclockwise windows of fog or moisture. Air is
to increase or decrease the directed to the windshield, floor
temperature inside the vehicle. outlets, and side window vents.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise 0 (Defrost): Press to clear the
or counterclockwise to increase or windshield of fog or frost more
decrease the fan speed. Turn the quickly. Air is directed to the
knob all the way counterclockwise windshield and the side window
to turn the fan off. vents. The system automatically
Air Delivery Mode Control: Press forces outside air into the vehicle.
Y, \, [ , or - to change the Do not drive the vehicle until all the
direction of the airflow. An indicator windows are clear.
light comes on in the selected mode
button. See Air Vents on page 8-8.
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the @ (Recirculation): Press to turn
instrument panel outlets. on recirculation. An indicator light
comes on. Air is recirculated to
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided quickly cool the inside of the vehicle
between the instrument panel and or prevent outside air and odors
floor outlets. from entering.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some air directed
to the windshield, side window, and
second row floor outlets.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning) TEMP (Temperature Control):

Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled. to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob all the way counterclockwise
to turn the fan off.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Press
Y, \, [ , or - to change the
direction of the airflow. An indicator
light comes on in the selected mode
button.
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
1. Fan Control 5. TEMP (Temperature Control)
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
2. A/C (Air Conditioning) 6. Air Recirculation between the instrument panel and
3. Air Delivery Mode Control 7. Rear Window Defogger floor outlets.
4. Defrost [ (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some air directed
to the windshield and side window
outlets.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
- (Defog): This mode clears the enabled. If the fan is turned off, the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is air conditioner will not run. The A/C { Caution
directed to the windshield, floor light will stay on even if the outside
temperatures are below freezing. Using a razor blade or sharp
outlets, and side window vents. object to clear the inside rear
0 (Defrost): Press to clear the Rear Window Defogger window can damage the rear
windshield of fog or frost more K (Rear Window Defogger): window defogger. Repairs would
quickly. Air is directed to the Press to turn the rear window not be covered by the vehicle
windshield and the side window defogger on or off. An indicator light warranty. Do not clear the inside
vents. The system automatically on the button comes on to show that rear window with sharp objects.
forces outside air into the vehicle the rear window defogger is on.
and the air conditioning compressor
will run, unless the outside The rear window defogger only
temperature is close to freezing. works when the ignition is in ON/
RUN. The rear window defogger
Do not drive the vehicle until all the stays on for approximately
windows are clear. 10 minutes after the button is first
See Air Vents on page 8-8. pressed. Each subsequent press,
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the rear window defogger stays on
on recirculation. An indicator light for 5 minutes. The defogger also
comes on. Air is recirculated to turns off if the ignition is turned to
quickly cool the inside of the vehicle ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
or prevent outside air and odors
from entering.
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the air conditioning system on
or off. An indicator light comes on to
show that the air conditioning is
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Automatic Operation
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be The system automatically controls
controlled. the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning, and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
When the indicator light is on, the
system is in full automatic operation.
If the air delivery mode or fan
setting is manually adjusted, the
auto indicator turns off and displays
will show the selected settings.
To place the system in
automatic mode:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the driver and passenger
1. Driver Temperature Control 7. AUTO (Automatic Operation) temperature.
2. A/C (Air Conditioning) 8. Air Recirculation To find your comfort setting, start
3. Air Delivery Mode Controls 9. Power Button with 22°C (72°F) and allow the
system time to stabilize. Then
4. Fan Control 10. Rear Window Defogger adjust the temperature as
5. Defrost 11. SYNC (Synchronized needed for best comfort.
6. Passenger Temperature Control Temperature) To improve fuel efficiency and to
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
may be automatically selected in
warm weather.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The recirculation light will not come Driver and Passenger Changing the mode cancels the
on when automatically controlled. Temperature Control: The automatic operation and the system
Press @ to manually select temperature can be adjusted goes into manual mode. Press
recirculation; press it again to select separately for the driver and AUTO to return to automatic
outside air. passenger. operation.
Do not cover the solar sensor on the Turn the knob clockwise or Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
top of the instrument panel near the counterclockwise to increase or instrument panel outlets.
windshield. This sensor regulates decrease the driver or passenger \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
air temperature based on sun load. temperature setting. between the instrument panel and
See “Sensors” later in this section. SYNC (Synchronized floor outlets. Some air is directed
Temperature): Press to link the toward the windshield and side
Manual Operation passenger temperature setting to window outlets.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the the driver setting. The SYNC [ (Floor): Air is directed to the
climate control system on or off. indicator light will turn on. When the floor outlets, with some to the
Outside air still enters the vehicle, passenger setting is adjusted, the windshield, side window outlets, and
and is directed to the floor. This SYNC indicator light is off. second row floor outlets.
direction can be changed by
The driver side or passenger side - (Defog): This mode clears the
pressing the air delivery mode.
temperature display shows the windows of fog or moisture. Air is
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise temperature setting increasing or directed to the windshield, floor
or counterclockwise to increase or decreasing. outlets, and side window vents.
decrease the fan speed. Press the
Air Delivery Mode Control: Press 0 (Defrost): Press to clear the
knob to turn the fan off.
Y, \, [ , or - to change the windshield of fog or frost more
Press AUTO to return to automatic direction of the airflow. An indicator quickly. Air is directed to the
operation. light comes on in the selected mode windshield and the side window
button. vents. The system automatically
forces outside air into the vehicle
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
and the air conditioning compressor K (Rear Window Defogger): Heated Mirror: If equipped with
will run, unless the outside Press to turn the rear window heated outside rearview mirrors, the
temperature is close to freezing. defogger on or off. An indicator light mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost
Do not drive the vehicle until all on the button comes on to show that from the surface of the mirror when
windows are clear. the rear window defogger is on. the rear window defog button is
pressed. See Heated Mirrors on
See Air Vents on page 8-8. The rear window defogger only page 2-16.
works when the ignition is in ON/
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to RUN. The rear window defogger Sensors
turn the air conditioning system on stays on for approximately
or off. An indicator light comes on to 10 minutes after the button is first
show that the air conditioning is pressed. Each subsequent press,
enabled. If the fan is turned off, the the rear window defogger stays on
air conditioner will not run. The A/C for 5 minutes. The defogger also
light will stay on even if the outside turns off if the ignition is turned to
temperatures are below freezing. ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn
on recirculation. An indicator light
comes on. Air is recirculated to
{ Caution
quickly cool the inside of the vehicle Using a razor blade or sharp The solar sensor, located in the
or prevent outside air and odors object to clear the inside rear defrost grille in the middle of the
from entering. The air conditioning window can damage the rear instrument panel, monitors the solar
compressor also comes on when window defogger. Repairs would heat. Do not cover the solar sensor
this mode is activated. not be covered by the vehicle or the system will not work properly.
Rear Window Defogger warranty. Do not clear the inside
rear window with sharp objects.
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
There is also an exterior Air Vents Operation Tips

temperature sensor behind the front . Clear away any ice, snow,
grille. This sensor reads the outside Use the air vents in the center and
or leaves from air inlets at the
air temperature and helps maintain on the side of the instrument panel
base of the windshield that could
the temperature inside the vehicle. to direct airflow. Use the
block the flow of air into the
Any cover on the front of the vehicle thumbwheels near the air vents to
vehicle.
including a snowplow, could cause a open or close off the airflow.
. Keep the path under the front
false reading in the displayed Air vents blow warm air on the side
temperature. seats clear of objects to help
windows in cold weather. If Floor,
circulate the air inside of the
The climate control system uses the Defog or Defrost modes are
vehicle more effectively.
information from these sensors to selected, a small amount of air will
maintain comfort settings by come from the vents close to the . Use of non-GM approved hood
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan window. If the airflow is shut off deflectors can adversely affect
speed, and the air delivery mode. using the thumbwheels, warm air the performance of the system.
The system may also supply cooler will be directed to the other Check with your dealer before
air to the side of the vehicle facing instrument panel vents. This is adding equipment to the outside
the sun. The recirculation mode will normal operation. of the vehicle.
also be used as needed to maintain Use the thumbwheels to turn vent
cool outlet temperatures. airflow on or off based on the mode
selected.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-3. To find out what type of
filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11-14.
See your dealer.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2 NOTES
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .

Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-26
9-28
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/Electronic
Operating Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Hill Descent
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 9-29 Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Driving Information Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Parking over Things Cruise Control
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-32 Driver Assistance Systems
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust Driver Assistance
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Running the Vehicle While Assistance Systems for
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Assistance Systems for
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 9-11 Automatic Transmission Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-34 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-12 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Lane Departure
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-14 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Drive Systems
Truck-Camper Loading Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Fuel
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Brakes Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Starting and Operating Antilock Brake Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-71
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-23 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 California Fuel
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-72
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-55 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
9-2 Driving and Operating
E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72

. Designate a front seat
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Filling a Portable Fuel distractions.
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75 Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Trailer Towing
and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
General Towing
task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76 activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78 from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92 governments have enacted laws driving.
Trailer Sway regarding driver distraction. Become . Wait until the vehicle is parked
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101 familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
Conversions and Add-Ons To avoid distracted driving, always
Add-On Electrical . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102 to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
Adding a Snow Plow or . Keep pets in an appropriate
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . 9-102 . Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
Pickup Conversion to demanding driving situations.
Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-106 Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. Allow enough following distance
Control of a Vehicle
{ Warning between you and the driver in
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating
Taking your eyes off the road too are important factors in helping to
. Focus on the task of driving.
long or too often could cause a control a vehicle while driving.
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving. Drunk Driving Braking
Death and injury associated with
Braking action involves perception
Refer to the infotainment section for drinking and driving is a global
time and reaction time. Deciding to
more information on using that tragedy.
push the brake pedal is perception
system and the navigation system, time. Actually doing it is
if equipped, including pairing and { Warning reaction time.
using a cell phone.
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In
Defensive Driving that time, a vehicle moving at
perceptions, attentiveness, and
Defensive driving means “always judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
expect the unexpected.” The first a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
step in driving defensively is to wear can have a serious — or even distance in an emergency.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
page 3-12. drinking. include:
. Assume that other road users Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and you and the vehicle in front
a driver who has been drinking.
other drivers) are going to be of you.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking.
and be ready. who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the engine ever stops while the If the steering wheel is turned until it If power steering assist is lost
vehicle is being driven, brake reaches the end of its travel, and is because the engine stops or a
normally but do not pump the held in that position for an extended system malfunctions, the vehicle
brakes. Doing so could make the period of time, power steering assist can be steered but may require
pedal harder to push down. If the may be reduced. increased effort.
engine stops, there will be some If the steering assist is used for an See your dealer if there is a
power brake assist but it will be extended period of time, power problem.
used when the brake is applied. assist may be reduced.
Once the power assist is used up, it
can take longer to stop and the Normal use of the power steering { Caution
brake pedal will be harder to push. assist should return when the
system cools down. If the steering wheel is turned
until it reaches the end of its
Steering See specific vehicle steering travel, and is held in that position
messages under Vehicle Messages for more than 15 seconds,
Electric Power Steering (All on page 5-34.
Except 6.0L and 6.6L) damage may occur to the power
Hydraulic Power Steering steering system and there may be
If the vehicle has electric power loss of power steering assist.
steering, it does not have power If the vehicle has hydraulic power
steering fluid. Regular maintenance steering, it may require
is not required. maintenance. See Power Steering Curve Tips
Fluid (6.0L V8 and 6.6L V8 Engines)
If power steering assist is lost due . Take curves at a reasonable
on page 10-26 or Power Steering
to a system malfunction, the vehicle speed.
Fluid (4.3L V6, 5.3L V8, and 6.2L
can be steered, but may require . Reduce speed before entering a
V8 Engines) on page 10-26.
increased effort. See your dealer if curve.
there is a problem.
. Maintain a reasonable steady
speed through the curve.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
Off-Road Recovery 3. Turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies Loss of Control
. There are some situations when Skidding
steering around a problem may
There are three types of skids that
be more effective than braking.
correspond to the vehicle's three
. Holding both sides of the control systems:
steering wheel allows you to turn . Braking Skid — wheels are not
180 degrees without removing
rolling.
a hand.
. Steering or Cornering Skid —
. Antilock Brake System (ABS) too much speed or steering in a
allows steering while braking.
curve causes tires to slip and
The vehicle's right wheels can drop lose cornering force.
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving. Follow
. Acceleration Skid — too much
these tips: throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
1. Ease off the accelerator and
then, if there is nothing in the Defensive drivers avoid most skids
way, steer the vehicle so that it by taking reasonable care suited to
straddles the edge of the existing conditions, and by not
pavement. overdriving those conditions. But
skids are always possible.
2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
pavement edge.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help

these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid. Warning (Continued)
. Ease your foot off the lose control and crash. You and
accelerator pedal and steer the Off-Road Driving your passengers should always
way you want the vehicle to go. Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be wear safety belts.
The vehicle may straighten out. used for off-road driving. Vehicles
Be ready for a second skid if it without four-wheel drive and
occurs. vehicles not equipped with All Before Driving Off-Road
. Slow down and adjust your Terrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR) . Have all necessary maintenance
driving according to weather tires must not be driven off-road and service work completed.
conditions. Stopping distance except on a level, solid surface. For . Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,
can be longer and vehicle more contact information about the
and check inflation pressure in
control can be affected when original equipment tires, see the
all tires, including the spare,
traction is reduced by water, Limited Warranty and Owner
if equipped.
snow, ice, gravel, or other Assistance Information manual.
material on the road. Learn to
. Read all the information about
One of the best ways for successful
recognize warning clues — such four-wheel-drive vehicles in this
off-road driving is to control the
as enough water, ice, or packed manual.
speed.
snow on the road to make a . Remove any underbody air
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt. { Warning deflector, if equipped. Re-attach
the air deflector after off-road
. Try to avoid sudden steering, When driving off-road, bouncing driving.
acceleration, or braking, and quick changes in direction . Know the local laws that apply to
including reducing vehicle speed can easily throw you out of off-road driving.
by shifting to a lower gear. Any position. This could cause you to
sudden changes could cause (Continued)
the tires to slide.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To gain more ground clearance if

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,
needed, it may be necessary to Warning (Continued) trees, or grasses or disturb
remove the front fascia lower wildlife.
air dam.
. Keep cargo in the cargo area
as far forward and as low as
. Do not park over things that
possible. The heaviest things burn. See Parking over Things
{ Caution should be on the floor, That Burn on page 9-32.
forward of the rear axle. Driving on Hills
Operating the vehicle for
extended periods without the front . Heavy loads on the roof raise Driving safely on hills requires good
fascia lower air dam installed can the vehicle's center of gravity, judgment and an understanding of
cause improper air flow to the making it more likely to roll what the vehicle can and cannot do.
engine. Re-attach the front fascia over. You can be seriously or
fatally injured if the vehicle
air dam after off-road driving.
rolls over. Put heavy loads { Warning
inside the cargo area, not on Many hills are simply too steep
Loading the Vehicle for the roof. for any vehicle. Driving up hills
Off-Road Driving can cause the vehicle to stall.
For more information about loading Driving down hills can cause loss
{ Warning the vehicle, see If the Vehicle Is of control. Driving across hills can
Stuck on page 9-14 and Tires on cause a rollover. You could be
. Unsecured cargo on the load page 10-52.
floor can be tossed about injured or killed. Do not drive on
when driving over rough Environmental Concerns steep hills.
terrain. You or your . Always use established trails,
passengers can be struck by Before driving on a hill, assess the
roads, and areas that have been
flying objects. Secure the steepness, traction, and
set aside for public off-road
cargo properly. obstructions. If the terrain ahead
recreational driving and obey all
(Continued) posted regulations.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
cannot be seen, get out of the

. Never go downhill forward or . When driving down a hill, keep
vehicle and walk the hill before backward with either the the vehicle headed straight
driving further. transmission or transfer case in down. Use a low gear because
N (Neutral). The brakes could the engine will work with the
When driving on hills: overheat and you could lose brakes to slow the vehicle and
. Use a low gear and keep a firm control. help keep the vehicle under
grip on the steering wheel. control.
. Maintain a slow speed. { Warning
. When possible, drive straight up If the vehicle has the two‐speed
{ Warning
or down the hill. automatic transfer case, shifting Heavy braking when going down
. Slow down when approaching the transfer case to N (Neutral) a hill can cause your brakes to
the top of the hill. can cause your vehicle to roll overheat and fade. This could
even if the transmission is in cause loss of control and you or
. Use headlamps even during the
P (Park). This is because the others could be injured or killed.
day to make the vehicle more
visible. N (Neutral) position on the Apply the brakes lightly when
transfer case overrides the descending a hill and use a low
transmission. You or someone gear to keep vehicle speed under
{ Warning else could be injured. If leaving control.
Driving to the top of a hill at high the vehicle, set the parking brake
speed can cause an accident. and shift the transmission to If the vehicle stalls on a hill:
There could be a drop-off, P (Park). Shift the transfer case to
any position but N (Neutral). 1. Apply the brakes to stop the
embankment, cliff, or even vehicle, and then apply the
another vehicle. You could be parking brake.
seriously injured or killed. As you
near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2. Shift into P (Park) and then 3. If the vehicle cannot be restarted

. Hidden obstacles can make the
restart the engine. after stalling, set the parking steepness of the incline more
brake, shift into P (Park), and severe. If a rock is driven across
. If driving uphill when the with the uphill wheels, or if the
vehicle stalls, shift to turn the vehicle off.
downhill wheels drop into a rut
R (Reverse), release the 3.1. Leave the vehicle and or depression, the vehicle can tilt
parking brake, and back seek help. even more.
straight down. 3.2. Stay clear of the path the . If an incline must be driven
. Never try to turn the vehicle vehicle would take if it across, and the vehicle starts to
around. If the hill is steep rolled downhill. slide, turn downhill. This should
enough to stall the vehicle, . Avoid turns that take the vehicle help straighten out the vehicle
it is steep enough to cause across the incline of the hill. and prevent the side slipping.
it to roll over. A hill that can be driven straight
. If you cannot make it up the
hill, back straight down
up or down might be too steep to
drive across. Driving across an
{ Warning
the hill. incline puts more weight on the Getting out of the vehicle on the
. Never back down a hill in downhill wheels, which could downhill side when stopped
N (Neutral) using only the cause a downhill slide or a across an incline is dangerous.
brake. rollover. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
. Surface conditions can be a be crushed or killed. Always get
The vehicle can roll out on the uphill side of the
backward quickly and you problem. Loose gravel, muddy
spots, or even wet grass can vehicle and stay well clear of the
could lose control.
cause the tires to slip sideways, rollover path.
. If driving downhill when the downhill. If the vehicle slips
vehicle stalls, shift to a sideways, it can hit something
lower gear, release the that will trip it — a rock, a rut,
parking brake, and drive etc. — and roll over.
straight down the hill.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,

or Ice Warning (Continued) { Caution
Use a low gear when driving in vehicle could fall through the ice; Do not drive through standing
mud — the deeper the mud, the you and your passengers could water if it is deep enough to cover
lower the gear. Keep the vehicle drown. Drive your vehicle on safe the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
moving to avoid getting stuck. surfaces only. pipe. Deep water can damage the
Traction changes when driving on axle and other vehicle parts.
sand. On loose sand, such as on Driving in Water
beaches or sand dunes, the tires If the standing water is not too deep,
tend to sink into the sand. This
affects steering, accelerating, and { Warning drive slowly through it. At faster
speeds, water splashes and the
braking. Drive at a reduced speed Driving through rushing water can vehicle can stall. When going
and avoid sharp turns or abrupt be dangerous. Deep water can through water, the brakes get wet
maneuvers. and it may take longer to stop. See
sweep your vehicle downstream
Traction is reduced on hard packed and you and your passengers “Driving on Wet Roads” later in this
snow and ice and it is easy to lose could drown. If it is only shallow section.
control. Reduce vehicle speed when water, it can still wash away the After Off-Road Driving
driving on hard packed snow ground from under your tires.
and ice. Traction could be lost, and the Remove any brush or debris that
vehicle could roll over. Do not has collected on the underbody or
{ Warning drive through rushing water.
chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, After operation in mud or sand,
or rivers can be dangerous. Ice have the brake linings cleaned and
conditions vary greatly and the checked. These substances can
(Continued) cause glazing and uneven braking.
Check the body structure, steering,
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
suspension, wheels, tires, and There is no hard and fast rule about
exhaust system for damage and Warning (Continued) hydroplaning. The best advice is to
check the fuel lines and cooling slow down when the road is wet.
system for any leakage. After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle Other Rainy Weather Tips
More frequent maintenance service wash, lightly apply the brake
is required. See the Maintenance Besides slowing down, other wet
pedal until the brakes work weather driving tips include:
Schedule on page 11-3. normally.
. Allow extra following distance.
Driving on Wet Roads Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
. Pass with caution.
Rain and wet roads can reduce flowing water could cause the . Keep windshield wiping
vehicle traction and affect your vehicle to be carried away. If this equipment in good shape.
ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle
Always drive slower in these types
. Keep the windshield washer fluid
occupants could drown. Do not reservoir filled.
of driving conditions and avoid
ignore police warnings and be
driving through large puddles and . Have good tires with proper
deep‐standing or flowing water. very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water. tread depth. See Tires on
page 10-52.
{ Warning . Turn off cruise control.
Hydroplaning
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water Highway Hypnosis
can build up under the vehicle's
quick stop and could cause tires so they actually ride on the Always be alert and pay attention to
pulling to one side. You could water. This can happen if the road is your surroundings while driving.
lose control of the vehicle. wet enough and you are going fast If you become tired or sleepy, find a
(Continued) enough. When the vehicle is safe place to park the vehicle
hydroplaning, it has little or no and rest.
contact with the road.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Other driving tips include:

. Stay in your own lane. Do not
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
{ Warning swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
. Keep the interior Using the brakes to slow the speeds that let you stay in your
temperature cool. vehicle on a long downhill slope own lane.
can cause brake overheating, can
. Keep your eyes moving — scan . Be alert on top of hills;
reduce brake performance, and something could be in your lane
the road ahead and to the sides.
could result in a loss of braking. (stalled car, accident).
. Check the rearview mirror and Shift the transmission to a lower
vehicle instruments often. gear to let the engine assist the
. Pay attention to special road
brakes on a steep downhill slope. signs (falling rocks area, winding
Hill and Mountain Roads roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
Driving on steep hills or through appropriate action.
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
{ Warning
driving in these conditions include:
Winter Driving
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in or with the ignition off is Driving on Snow or Ice
good shape. dangerous. This can cause Drive carefully when there is snow
overheating of the brakes and or ice between the tires and the
. Check all fluid levels and brakes,
loss of steering. Always have the road, creating less traction or grip.
tires, cooling system, and
transmission. engine running and the vehicle Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
in gear. (32°F) when freezing rain begins to
. Shift to a lower gear when going fall, resulting in even less traction.
down steep or long hills. Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Drive with caution, whatever the Turn off cruise control on slippery
condition. Accelerate gently so surfaces. { Warning
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin Blizzard Conditions Snow can trap engine exhaust
and makes the surface under the Being stuck in snow can be a under the vehicle. This may
tires slick, so there is even less serious situation. Stay with the cause exhaust gases to get
traction. vehicle unless there is help nearby. inside. Engine exhaust contains
If possible, use Roadside carbon monoxide (CO) which
Try not to break the fragile traction. cannot be seen or smelled. It can
If you accelerate too fast, the drive Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 13-5. cause unconsciousness and even
wheels will spin and polish the
To get help and keep everyone in death.
surface under the tires even more.
the vehicle safe: If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
improves vehicle stability during
. Turn on the hazard warning . Clear away snow from around
hard stops on slippery roads, but flashers. the base of your vehicle,
apply the brakes sooner than when . Tie a red cloth to an outside especially any that is blocking
on dry pavement. See Antilock mirror. the exhaust pipe.
Brake System (ABS) on page 9-53. . Check again from time to
Allow greater following distance on time to be sure snow does
any slippery road and watch for not collect there.
slippery spots. Icy patches can . Open a window about 5 cm
occur on otherwise clear roads in (2 in) on the side of the
shaded areas. The surface of a vehicle that is away from the
curve or an overpass can remain icy wind to bring in fresh air.
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering (Continued)
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If it takes some time for help to

Warning (Continued) arrive, now and then when you run { Warning
the engine, push the accelerator
. Fully open the air outlets on pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high
or under the instrument faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and you
panel. keeps the battery charged to restart or others could be injured. The
. Adjust the climate control the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle can overheat, causing an
system to a setting that with the headlamps. Do this as little engine compartment fire or other
circulates the air inside the as possible to save fuel. damage. Spin the wheels as little
vehicle and set the fan speed as possible and avoid going
to the highest setting. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck above 56 km/h (35 mph).
“Climate Control Systems” in
the Index. Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when For information about using tire
For more information about stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. chains on the vehicle, see Tire
carbon monoxide, see Engine See “Rocking the Vehicle to Get It Chains on page 10-76.
Exhaust on page 9-33. Out” later in this section.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
The Traction Control System (TCS) It Out
To save fuel, run the engine for only can often help to free a stuck
short periods as needed to warm vehicle. See Traction Control/ Turn the steering wheel left and
the vehicle and then shut the engine Electronic Stability Control on right to clear the area around the
off and close the window most of page 9-56. If TCS cannot free the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
the way to save heat. Repeat this vehicle, see “Rocking the Vehicle to vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel Drive
until help arrives but only when you Get it Out” following. High. Turn the TCS off. Shift back
feel really uncomfortable from the and forth between R (Reverse) and
cold. Moving about to keep warm a forward gear, spinning the wheels
also helps. as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
gears. Slowly spinning the wheels in Vehicle Load Limits

the forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could It is very important to know how
free the vehicle. If that does not get much weight the vehicle can
the vehicle out after a few tries, it carry. This weight is called the
might need to be towed out. See vehicle capacity weight and
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-94. includes the weight of all
Recovery hooks can be used, if the occupants, cargo, and all
vehicle has them. nonfactory-installed options.
Recovery Hooks Two labels on the vehicle show
how much weight it was
{ Warning designed to carry: the Tire and
Never pull on recovery hooks

{ Caution Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
from the side. The hooks could Do not drive through standing
break and you and others could
be injured. When using recovery
water if it is deep enough to cover { Warning
the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
hooks, always pull the vehicle pipe. Deep water can damage the Do not load the vehicle any
from the front. axle and other vehicle parts. heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
There are recovery hooks at the (GVWR), or either the
front of the vehicle. Use them if the maximum front or rear Gross
vehicle is stuck off-road and needs Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
to be pulled some place to continue This can cause systems to
driving. break and change the way the
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
open, you will find the label the front and rear axles. See
Warning (Continued) attached below the door lock “Certification/Tire Label” later in
vehicle handles. This could post (striker). The Tire and this section.
cause loss of control and a Loading Information label shows “Steps for Determining Correct
crash. Overloading can also the number of occupant seating Load Limit–
shorten the life of the vehicle. positions (1), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (2) in 1. Locate the statement "The
kilograms and pounds. combined weight of
Tire and Loading Information occupants and cargo should
Label The Tire and Loading never exceed XXX kg or
Information label also shows the XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
size of the original equipment placard.
tires (3) and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures (4). 2. Determine the combined
For more information on tires weight of the driver and
and inflation see Tires on passengers that will be riding
page 10-52 and Tire Pressure in your vehicle.
on page 10-61. 3. Subtract the combined
There is also important loading weight of the driver and
information on the vehicle passengers from XXX kg or
Certification/Tire label. It tells XXX lbs.
Label Example you the Gross Vehicle Weight 4. The resulting figure equals
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross the available amount of cargo
A vehicle-specific Tire and Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
Loading Information label is and luggage load capacity.
attached to the center pillar For example, if the "XXX"
(B-pillar). With the driver door amount equals 1400 lbs. and
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
there will be five 150 lb

passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity Example 1 Example 2
calculated in Step 4. 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
6. If your vehicle will be towing Example 1 = (453 kg) (1,000 lb) Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lb)
a trailer, load from your trailer 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
will be transferred to your 68 kg (150 lb) × 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lb) × 5 = 340 kg
vehicle. Consult this manual (300 lb) (750 lb)
to determine how this 3. Available Occupant and Cargo 3. Available Cargo Weight = 113 kg
reduces the available cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lb) (250 lb)
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.”
See Trailer Towing on page 9-78
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules, and trailering tips.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
of the driver, passengers, and Rating (GVWR). The GVWR

cargo should never exceed the includes the weight of the
vehicle's capacity weight. vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and
Certification/Tire Label
cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also
tells you the maximum weights
for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). To find out the
actual loads on the front and
rear axles, you need to go to a
Example 3 weigh station and weigh the
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for vehicle. Your dealer can help
Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lb) you with this. Be sure to spread
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ out the load equally on both
91 kg (200 lb) × 5 = 453 kg sides of the centerline.
(1,000 lb) A vehicle-specific Certification/ Never exceed the GVWR for the
3. Available Cargo Weight = Tire label is label is attached to vehicle, or the GAWR for either
0 kg (0 lb) the center pillar (B-pillar). The the front or rear axle.
label shows the size of the
Refer to the Tire and Loading The Certification/Tire label also
vehicle's original tires and the
Information label for specific contains important information
inflation pressures needed to
information about the vehicle's about the Front Axle Reserve
obtain the gross weight capacity
capacity weight and seating Capacity. See Adding a Snow
of the vehicle. This is called
positions. The combined weight Plow or Similar Equipment on
Gross Vehicle Weight
page 9-102.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
vehicle goes. If you have to stop

{ Warning Warning (Continued) or turn quickly, or if there is a
In the case of a sudden stop cause loss of control and a crash, they will keep going.
or collision, things carried in crash. Overloading can also
the bed of your truck could shorten the life of the vehicle. { Warning
shift forward and come into Things you put inside the
the passenger area, injuring vehicle can strike and injure
you and others. If you put
things in the bed of your truck,
{ Caution people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
you should make sure they Overloading the vehicle may
are properly secured. cause damage. Repairs would
. Put things in the cargo
not be covered by the vehicle area of the vehicle. Try to
warranty. Do not overload the spread the weight evenly.
vehicle.
{ Warning . Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
Do not load the vehicle any Using heavier suspension inside the vehicle so that
heavier than the Gross components to get added some of them are above
Vehicle Weight Rating durability might not change the the tops of the seats.
(GVWR), or either the weight ratings. Ask your dealer . Do not leave an
maximum front or rear Gross to help load the vehicle the
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). unsecured child restraint
right way. in the vehicle.
This can cause systems to
If you put things inside the (Continued)
break and change the way the
vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
vehicle handles. This could
packages, or anything
(Continued) else — they go as fast as the
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
When using this upper load be necessary. Be sure to weigh

Warning (Continued) platform, be sure the load is the vehicle before buying and
. When you carry something securely tied down to prevent it installing the new equipment.
inside the vehicle, secure from shifting. The load's center
it whenever you can. of gravity should be positioned { Caution
in a zone over the rear axle. The
. Do not leave a seat folded zone is located in the area Overloading the vehicle may
down unless you need to. between the front of each wheel cause damage. Repairs would
well and the rear of each wheel not be covered by the vehicle
well. The center of gravity height warranty. Do not overload the
There is also important loading vehicle.
information for off-road driving in must not extend above the top
this manual. See “Loading the of the pickup box flareboard.
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving“ Remember not to exceed the
Any load that extends beyond
under Off-Road Driving on Gross Axle Weight
the vehicle's taillamp area must
page 9-6. Rating (GAWR) of the front or
be properly marked according to
rear axle.
Two-Tiered Loading local laws and regulations.
Maximum
Depending on the model of the Remember not to exceed the * Equipment Weight
pickup, an upper load platform Gross Axle Weight
can be created by positioning Rating (GAWR) of the front or Ladder Rack 340 kg (750 lb)
three or four 5 cm (2 in) by rear axle. and Cargo
15 cm (6 in) wooden planks Add-On Equipment Cross Toolbox 181 kg (400 lb)
across the width of the pickup and Cargo
box. The planks must be When carrying removable items,
inserted in the pickup box a limit on how many people
depressions. carried inside the vehicle may
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Maximum 3. GM Approved Accessory load. It will help to match the

Mounting Points right slide-in camper to the
* Equipment Weight
Structural members (1) and (2) are vehicle.
Side Boxes 113 kg per included in the pickup box design.
and Cargo side (250 lb Your dealer can help make a
Additional accessories should use
per side) good vehicle-camper match and
these load points. Depending on the
accessory design, use a spacer help determine the Cargo
* The combined weight for all under the accessory at the load Weight Rating (CWR).
rail-mounted equipment should points to remove gap. The holes for When installing and loading a
not exceed 454 kg (1,000 lb). GM approved accessories (3) are slide-in camper, check the
not intended for aftermarket manufacturer's instructions.
Loading Points equipment. See www.gmupfitter.com
for additional pickup box load When carrying a slide-in
bearing structural information. camper, the total cargo load of
the vehicle is the weight of the
Truck-Camper Loading camper plus:
Information . Everything added to the
A vehicle-specific Truck-Camper camper after it left the
Loading Information label is factory.
attached to the inside of the . Everything in the camper.
vehicle's glove box. This label
indicates if a slide-in camper
. All the people inside.
can be carried, how much of a The CWR is the maximum
load the vehicle can carry, and weight of the load the vehicle
1. Primary Load Points
how to correctly spread out the can carry. It does not include the
2. Secondary Load Areas
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
weight of the people inside. But, The recommended location for When the truck is used to carry
use about 68 kg (150 lb) for the cargo center of gravity is at a slide-in camper, the total cargo
each seat. point 3 for the CWR. It is the load of the truck consists of the
The total cargo load must not be point where the mass of a body manufacturer's camper weight
more than the vehicle's CWR. is concentrated and, figure, the weight of installed
if suspended at that point, would additional camper equipment not
Refer to the Truck-Camper balance the front and rear. included in the manufacturer's
Loading Information label in the camper weight figure, the weight
glove box for dimensions 1 and Here is an example of proper
truck and camper match: of camper cargo, and the weight
2 as shown in the following of passengers in the camper.
illustration. The total cargo load should not
exceed the truck's cargo weight
rating, and the camper's center
of gravity (1) should fall within
the truck's recommended center
of gravity zone (2) when
installed.
Any accessories or other
equipment that are added to the
vehicle must be weighed. Then,
Use the rear edge of the load subtract this extra weight from
floor for measurement purposes. the CWR. This extra weight may
1. Camper Center of Gravity
shorten the center of gravity
2. Recommended Center of
zone of the vehicle.
Gravity Location Zone
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the slide-in camper and its See “Certification/Tire Label” Starting and
load weighs less than the CWR, under Vehicle Load Limits on
the center of gravity zone for the page 9-15. If weight ratings are Operating
vehicle may be larger. exceeded, move or remove
items to bring all weights below New Vehicle Break-In
Secure loose items to prevent
weight shifts that could affect the the ratings.
balance of the vehicle. When the See your dealer for more { Caution
truck-camper is loaded, drive to information on curb weights, The vehicle does not need an
a scale and weigh on the front cargo weights, Cargo Weight elaborate break-in. But it will
and on the rear wheels Rating, and the correct center of perform better in the long run if
separately to determine axle gravity zone. you follow these guidelines:
loads. Individual axle loads . Keep the vehicle speed at
should not exceed either of the 88 km/h (55 mph) or less for
gross axle weight ratings the first 805 km (500 mi).
(GAWR). The total axle loads . Do not drive at any one
should not exceed the vehicle's constant speed, fast or slow,
gross vehicle weight rating for the first 805 km (500 mi).
(GVWR). These ratings are Do not make full-throttle
given on the Certification/Tire starts. Avoid downshifting to
label attached to the B-pillar. brake or slow the vehicle.
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Caution (Continued)
Adjustable Throttle and Lift the switch up to move the
pedals closer to your body. Press
Brake Pedal the switch down to move the
. Avoid making hard stops for If equipped, the position of the pedals away.
the first 322 km (200 mi) or throttle and brake pedals can be
so. During this time the new Before you start driving, fully press
changed. the brake pedal to confirm the
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with No adjustment to the pedals can be adjustment is right for you. While
made when the vehicle is in driving, make only small
new linings can mean
R (Reverse) or while using cruise adjustments.
premature wear and earlier
control. The vehicle may have a memory
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every function, which lets pedal settings
time you get new brake be saved and recalled. See Memory
linings. Seats on page 3-6.
. Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Trailer Towing
on page 9-78 for the trailer
towing capabilities of the
vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
The switch used to adjust the

pedals is on the center stack, below
the climate controls.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Ignition Positions This position locks the ignition and 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
steering wheel. It also locks the This can be done while the
transmission on automatic vehicle is moving. After shifting
transmission vehicles. The key can to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
be removed in LOCK/OFF. brakes and steer the vehicle to a
The steering can bind with the safe location.
wheels turned off center. If this 3. Come to a complete stop, shift
happens, move the steering wheel to P (Park), and turn the ignition
from right to left while turning the to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this an automatic transmission, the
does not work, then the vehicle shift lever must be in P (Park) to
needs service. turn the ignition switch to the
Do not turn the engine off when the LOCK/OFF position.
vehicle is moving. This will cause a 4. Set the parking brake. See
The ignition switch has four different loss of power assist in the brake Parking Brake on page 9-54.
positions. and steering systems and disable
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
the airbags. { Warning
must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ If the vehicle must be shut off in an
ACCESSORY and the regular brake emergency: Turning off the vehicle while
pedal must be applied. moving may cause loss of power
1. Brake using a firm and steady assist in the brake and steering
1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/ pressure. Do not pump the systems and disable the airbags.
OFF): When the vehicle is stopped, brakes repeatedly. This may While driving, only shut the
turn the ignition switch to LOCK/ deplete power assist, requiring
vehicle off in an emergency.
OFF to turn the engine off. Retained increased brake pedal force.
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9-29.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, indicator lights. This position can Starting the Engine
and must be shut off while driving, also be used for service and
turn the ignition to ACC/ diagnostics, and to verify the proper If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
ACCESSORY. operation of the malfunction see the Duramax diesel
indicator lamp as may be required supplement.
{ Caution for emission inspection purposes.
The switch stays in this position { Caution
Using a tool to force the key to when the engine is running. The
turn in the ignition could cause transmission is also unlocked in this Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
damage to the switch or break the position on automatic transmission vehicle is moving. If you do, you
key. Use the correct key, make vehicles. could damage the transmission.
sure it is all the way in, and turn it If the key is left in the ACC/ Shift to P (Park) only when the
only with your hand. If the key ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position vehicle is stopped.
cannot be turned by hand, see with the engine off, the battery could
your dealer. be drained. The vehicle may not Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
start if the battery is allowed to drain N (Neutral). The engine will not start
for an extended period of time. in any other position. To restart the
2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
position lets things like the radio 4 (START): This is the position that engine when the vehicle is already
and the windshield wipers operate starts the engine. When the engine moving, use N (Neutral) only.
while the engine is off. It also starts, release the key. The ignition
unlocks the steering wheel. Use this switch returns to ON/RUN for
position if the vehicle must be driving.
pushed or towed. A warning tone will sound when the
3 (ON/RUN): This position can be driver door is opened and the
used to operate the electrical ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
accessories and to display some LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the
instrument cluster warning and ignition.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The vehicle has a When the low fuel warning light

{ Caution Computer-Controlled Cranking is on and the FUEL LEVEL LOW
System. This feature assists in message is displayed in the
If you add electrical parts or starting the engine and protects Driver Information Center (DIC),
accessories, you could change components. If the ignition key is the Computer-Controlled
the way the engine operates. Any turned to the START position, Cranking System is disabled to
resulting damage would not be and then released when the prevent possible vehicle
covered by the vehicle warranty. engine begins cranking, the component damage. When this
See Add-On Electrical Equipment engine will continue cranking for happens, hold the ignition switch
on page 9-102. a few seconds or until the in the START position to
vehicle starts. If the engine does continue engine cranking.
not start and the key is held in
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator
START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after
{ Caution
pedal, turn the ignition key to 15 seconds to prevent cranking Cranking the engine for long
START. When the engine starts, motor damage. To prevent gear periods of time, by returning the
let go of the key. The idle speed damage, this system also ignition to the START position
will go down as the engine gets prevents cranking if the engine immediately after cranking has
warm. Do not race the engine is already running. Engine ended, can overheat and damage
immediately after starting it. cranking can be stopped by the cranking motor, and drain the
Operate the engine and turning the ignition switch to the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
transmission gently to allow the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
between each try, to let the
oil to warm up and lubricate all OFF position.
moving parts. cranking motor cool down.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2. If the engine does not start after Fast Idle System When the fast idle is active, the
five to 10 seconds, especially in Driver Information Center (DIC) will
very cold weather (below If equipped, this feature is available display FAST IDLE ON.
−18°C or 0°F), it could be only with cruise control. The manual
fast idle switch is operated using the One of the following actions will turn
flooded with too much gasoline. off the fast idle:
Try pushing the accelerator cruise control buttons on the left
pedal all the way to the floor and side of the steering wheel. . Pressing the brake.
holding it there while holding the This system can be used to . Selecting the cruise control
key in START for up to increase engine idle speed cancel button.
15 seconds. Wait at least whenever the following conditions
15 seconds between each try, to
. Releasing the parking brake.
are met:
allow the cranking motor to cool .
. Moving the transmission shift
down. When the engine starts, The parking brake is set.
lever out of P (Park) or
let go of the key and accelerator. . The brake pedal is not pressed. N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts briefly but . The vehicle must not be moving
then stops again, do the same
. Selecting the cruise control on/
and the accelerator must not be off button when it was
thing. This clears the extra pressed.
gasoline from the engine. Do not previously on.
race the engine immediately To control the fast idle: . Pressing the cruise control SET-
after starting it. Operate the . To enable the Fast Idle System, button a second time.
engine and transmission gently press and release the cruise . Pressing the accelerator more
until the oil warms up and control on/off button and ensure than one-quarter of the
lubricates all moving parts. that the switch indicator light way down.
is lit. . Turning the ignition switch to the
. Press and release the cruise LOCK/OFF position.
control SET- button. Engine
speed will be held at
approximately 1200 rpm.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Retained Accessory The APOs in the console or center See Instrument Panel Fuse Block
seat position are powered by RAP. (Left) on page 10-46 or Instrument
Power (RAP) They will continue to work for up to Panel Fuse Block (Right) on
The following vehicle accessories 10 minutes after the key is turned page 10-49. If you are not
can be used for up to 10 minutes from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, or until comfortable performing this change,
after the engine is turned off: the driver door is opened. see your dealer.
. Audio System The APOs on the center stack come
from the factory powered directly Engine Coolant Heater
. Power Windows
from the vehicle battery, and supply The engine heater can provide
. OnStar System (if equipped) accessory power at all times, easier starting and better fuel
. Sunroof (if equipped) regardless of ignition key position. economy during engine warm-up in
If electronic items are left plugged cold weather conditions at or below
These features work when the key
into these APOs for long periods of −18°C (0°F). Vehicles with an
is in ON/RUN or ACC/
time with the vehicle off, the vehicle engine heater should be plugged in
ACCESSORY. Once the key is
battery could be drained. The at least four hours before starting.
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
vehicle may not start if the battery is An internal thermostat in the
the windows and sunroof continue
allowed to drain for an extended plug-end of the cord may exist,
to work up to 10 minutes or until any
period of time. which will prevent engine coolant
door is opened. The radio continues
heater operation at temperatures
to work for up to 10 minutes or until The source of power for the APOs above −18°C (0°F).
the driver door is opened. on the center stack can be changed
from direct battery power to RAP by If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
Accessory Power Outlets (APOs) see the Duramax diesel
moving the fuse at location 10, in
The vehicle may have APOs in the left instrument panel fuse block, supplement.
several locations. See Power to position 11. Once the fuse is
Outlets on page 5-5. moved, the APOs will continues to
work for up to 10 minutes or until the
driver door is opened.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To Use the Engine Coolant

Heater Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
1. Turn off the engine. If the cord will not reach, use a brake firmly set. The vehicle can
2. Open the hood and unwrap the heavy-duty three-prong extension roll. If you have left the engine
electrical cord. The cord is cord rated for at least 15 amps. running, the vehicle can move
secured to the driver side fender suddenly. You or others could be
with a clip, next to the engine 4. Before starting the engine, be injured. To be sure the vehicle will
compartment fuse block. sure to unplug and store the not move, even when you are on
Carefully remove the wire tie cord as it was before to keep it fairly level ground, use the steps
that bundles the electrical plug. away from moving engine parts. that follow. With four-wheel drive,
Do not cut the electrical cord. If you do not, it could be if the transfer case is in
3. Plug the cord into a normal, damaged. N (Neutral), the vehicle will be
grounded 110-volt AC outlet. free to roll, even if the shift lever
The length of time the heater should
is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer
remain plugged in depends on
case is in a drive gear. If towing a
{ Warning several factors. Ask a dealer in the
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
area where you will be parking the
Plugging the cord into an vehicle for the best advice on this. and Towing Tips on page 9-76.
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong Shifting Into Park 1. Hold the brake pedal down, then
kind of extension cord could set the parking brake.
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
{ Warning See Parking Brake on
page 9-54.
the cord into a properly grounded It can be dangerous to get out of
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. the vehicle if the shift lever is not 2. Move the shift lever into the
fully in P (Park) with the parking P (Park) position by pulling the
(Continued) shift lever toward you and
(Continued) moving it up as far as it will go.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a Torque Lock

drive gear — not in N (Neutral). Warning (Continued)
If you are parking on a hill and you
4. Turn the ignition key to P (Park). So be sure the transfer do not shift the transmission into
LOCK/OFF. case is in a drive gear — not in P (Park) properly, the weight of the
5. Remove the key and take it with N (Neutral). vehicle may put too much force on
you. If you can leave the vehicle the parking pawl in the
And, if you leave the vehicle with transmission. You may find it difficult
with the ignition key in your the engine running, it could
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
overheat and even catch fire. You This is called torque lock. To
Leaving the Vehicle with the or others could be injured. Do not prevent torque lock, set the parking
Engine Running leave the vehicle with the engine brake and then shift into P (Park)
running unless you have to. properly before you leave the driver
{ Warning seat. To find out how, see Shifting
Into Park on page 9-30.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
It can be dangerous to leave the the engine running, be sure the When you are ready to drive, move
vehicle with the engine running. vehicle is in P (Park) and the the shift lever out of P (Park) before
The vehicle could move suddenly parking brake is firmly set before you release the parking brake.
if the shift lever is not fully in you leave it. After you move the shift
If torque lock does occur, you may
P (Park) with the parking brake lever into P (Park), hold the regular
need to have another vehicle push
firmly set. brake pedal down. Then, see if you
yours a little uphill to take some of
can move the shift lever away from
If you have four-wheel drive and the pressure from the parking pawl
P (Park) without first pulling it toward
the transfer case is in N (Neutral), in the transmission. You will then be
you. If you can, it means that the
the vehicle will be free to roll, able to pull the shift lever out of
shift lever was not fully locked into
even if the shift lever is in P (Park).
P (Park).
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Shifting out of Park If you still are unable to shift out of Active Fuel Management®
P (Park):
This vehicle is equipped with an Vehicles with a V8 or V6 gasoline
electronic shift lock release system. 1. Ease the pressure on the shift engine may have Active Fuel
The shift lock release is lever. Management. This system allows
designed to: 2. While holding down the brake the engine to operate on either all of
. Prevent ignition key removal pedal, press the shift lever all its cylinders, or in V4 mode,
unless the shift lever is in the way into P (Park). depending on the driving conditions.
P (Park). 3. Move the shift lever to the When less power is required, such
. Prevent movement of the shift desired position. as cruising at a constant vehicle
lever out of P (Park), unless the speed, the system will operate in
If you are still having a problem
ignition is in ON/RUN and the the V4 mode, allowing the vehicle to
shifting, then have the vehicle
regular brake pedal is applied. achieve better fuel economy. When
serviced soon.
greater power demands are
The shift lock release is always required, such as accelerating from
functional except in the case of an Parking over Things a stop, passing, or merging onto a
uncharged or low voltage (less than That Burn freeway, the system will maintain
9 volt) battery. full-cylinder operation.
If the vehicle has an uncharged { Warning If the vehicle has an Active Fuel
battery or a battery with low voltage, Management indicator, see Driver
try charging or jump starting the Things that can burn could touch Information Center (DIC) (Base
battery. See Jump Starting on hot exhaust parts under the Level) on page 5-29 or Driver
page 10-90. vehicle and ignite. Do not park Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
To shift out of P (Park): over papers, leaves, dry grass, on page 5-31 for more information
or other things that can burn. on using this display.
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Engine Exhaust Warning (Continued)

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
{ Warning . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
It is better not to park with the
engine running.
Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not If the vehicle is left with the engine
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed. running, follow the proper steps to
can cause unconsciousness and be sure the vehicle will not move.
If unusual fumes are detected or
even death. See Shifting Into Park on page 9-30
if it is suspected that exhaust is and Engine Exhaust on page 9-33.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
If parking on a hill and pulling a
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows trailer, see Driving Characteristics
with poor ventilation (parking completely down. and Towing Tips on page 9-76.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Automatic especially when the vehicle has a

heavy load, you might notice an { Warning
Transmission increase in the effort to shift out of
If you have four-wheel drive, the
P (Park). See “Torque Lock” under
If equipped, there is an electronic vehicle will be free to roll — even
Shifting Into Park on page 9-30.
shift lever position indicator within if the shift lever is in P (Park) — if
the instrument cluster. This display the transfer case is in N (Neutral).
comes on when the ignition key is { Warning So, be sure the transfer case is in
turned to the ON/RUN position. a drive gear, Two-Wheel Drive
It is dangerous to get out of the
There are several different positions vehicle if the shift lever is not fully High or Four-Wheel Drive High or
for the shift lever. in P (Park) with the parking brake Four-Wheel Drive Low — not in
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. N (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park
on page 9-30.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle R (Reverse): Use this gear to
can move suddenly. You or others back up.
could be injured. To be sure the
Heavy-Duty 6-Speed Automatic vehicle will not move, even when { Caution
Transmission Shown, Light Duty you are on fairly level ground,
6-Speed Similar always set the parking brake and Shifting to R (Reverse) while the
move the shift lever to P (Park). vehicle is moving forward could
See “Range Selection Mode” under
See Shifting Into Park on damage the transmission. The
Manual Mode on page 9-37.
page 9-30 and Driving repairs would not be covered by
P (Park): This position locks the the vehicle warranty. Shift to
rear wheels. It is the best position to Characteristics and Towing Tips
on page 9-76. R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
use when starting the engine is stopped.
because the vehicle cannot move
easily. When parked on a hill,
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To rock the vehicle back and forth to D (Drive) can be used when towing
get out of snow, ice, or sand without { Caution a trailer, carrying a heavy load,
damaging the transmission, see If driving on steep hills, or driving
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-14. Shifting out of P (Park) or off-road. Shift the transmission to a
N (Neutral) with the engine lower gear selection if the
N (Neutral): In this position, the running at high speed may
engine does not connect with the transmission shifts too often.
damage the transmission. The
wheels. To restart when you are repairs would not be covered by Downshifting the transmission in
already moving, use N (Neutral) the vehicle warranty. Be sure the slippery road conditions could result
only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the in skidding. See “Skidding” under
engine is not running at high
vehicle is being towed. Loss of Control on page 9-5.
speed when shifting the vehicle.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization
{ Warning D (Drive): This position is for
feature that adjusts the transmission
shifting to the current driving
Shifting into a drive gear while the normal driving. It provides the best conditions in order to reduce rapid
engine is running at high speed is fuel economy. If you need more upshifts and downshifts. This shift
dangerous. Unless your foot is power for passing, and you are: stabilization feature is designed to
firmly on the brake pedal, the . Going less than about 55 km/h determine, before making an
vehicle could move very rapidly. (35 mph), push the accelerator upshift, if the engine is able to
You could lose control and hit pedal about halfway down. maintain vehicle speed by analyzing
people or objects. Do not shift things such as vehicle speed,
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
into a drive gear while the engine throttle position, and vehicle load.
more, push the accelerator all
is running at high speed. If the shift stabilization feature
the way down.
determines that a current vehicle
By doing this, the vehicle shifts speed cannot be maintained, the
down to the next gear and has transmission does not upshift and
more power. instead holds the current gear.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In some cases, this could appear to M (Manual Mode): This position when driving on downhill grades by
be a delayed shift, however the allows selection of a range of gears using the engine and transmission
transmission is operating normally. appropriate for current driving to slow the vehicle. The first time
The transmission uses adaptive conditions. If equipped, see “Range the system engages for each
shift controls. The adaptive shift Selection Mode” under Manual ignition key cycle, a DIC message
control process continually Mode on page 9-37. will be displayed. See Transmission
compares key shift parameters to Messages on page 5-41.
pre-programmed ideal shifts stored { Caution To disable or enable Normal Mode
in the transmission’s computer. The Grade Braking within the current
transmission constantly makes Spinning the tires or holding the ignition key cycle, press and hold
adjustments to improve vehicle vehicle in one place on a hill the Tow/Haul button for
performance according to how the using only the accelerator pedal five seconds. When the button is
vehicle is being used, such as with may damage the transmission. released, the requested mode
a heavy load or when the The repair will not be covered by change is made. A DIC message
temperature changes. During this the vehicle warranty. If you are displays. See Transmission
adaptive shift control process, stuck, do not spin the tires. When Messages on page 5-41.
shifting might feel different as the stopping on a hill, use the brakes For other forms of grade braking,
transmission determines the best to hold the vehicle in place. see Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-38
settings. and Cruise Control on page 9-59.
When temperatures are very cold, Normal Mode Grade Braking
the transmission's gear shifting
could be delayed providing more If equipped with a gasoline engine
stable shifts until the engine warms and an automatic transmission,
up. Shifts could be more noticeable Normal Mode Grade Braking is
with a cold transmission. This enabled when the vehicle is started,
difference in shifting is normal. but is not enabled in Range
Selection Mode. It assists in
maintaining desired vehicle speeds
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Manual Mode When the shift lever is moved from In vehicles with gasoline engines,
D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), a when the shift lever is moved from
Range Selection Mode number displays next to the M, D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), a
indicating the current transmission downshift may occur. The gear that
range. the transmission is operating in
This number is the highest gear that when the shift lever is moved from
the transmission will command while D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode)
operating in M (Manual Mode). All determines if a downshift occurs.
gears below that number are See the following chart.
available. As driving conditions
If equipped, Range Selection Mode change, the transmission can
helps control the vehicle's automatically shift to lower gears.
transmission and vehicle speed For example, when M5 is selected,
while driving downhill or towing a 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
trailer by letting you select a desired automatically shifted by the
range of gears. transmission, but 6 (Sixth) cannot
be used until the plus/minus button
To use this feature: on the shift lever is used to change
1. Move the shift lever to to the range.
M (Manual Mode).
2. Press the plus/minus buttons on
the shift lever to select the
desired range of gears for
current driving conditions.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Gear before shifting from D Tow/Haul Mode

6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
(Drive) to M (Manual Mode)
Range after shifting from D
M4 M4 M3 M2 M2 M1
(Drive) to M (Manual Mode)
Grade Braking is not available when

Range Selection Mode is active. Caution (Continued)
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-38. Vehicles with an automatic
the vehicle warranty. If you are transmission have a Tow/Haul
While using Range Selection Mode, stuck, do not spin the tires. When Mode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts
cruise control and the Tow/Haul stopping on a hill, use the brakes the transmission shift pattern to
Mode can be used. to hold the vehicle in place. reduce shift cycling, providing
If the vehicle has an exhaust brake, increased performance, vehicle
it can also be used, but will not Low Traction Mode control, and transmission cooling
automatically downshift the when driving down steep hills or
transmission. See “Exhaust Brake” Low Traction Mode assists in mountain grades, towing, or hauling
in the Duramax diesel supplement. vehicle acceleration when road heavy loads.
conditions are slippery, such as with
The selector button is on the end of
{ Caution ice or snow. While the vehicle is at a
stop, select M2 using Range the shift lever. Turn the Tow/Haul
Selection Mode. This will limit Mode on and off by pressing the
Spinning the tires or holding the button. When the Tow/Haul Mode is
vehicle in one place on a hill torque to the wheels and help to
prevent the tires from spinning. enabled, a light on the instrument
using only the accelerator pedal cluster will come on.
may damage the transmission.
The repair will not be covered by See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
page 5-25 and Hill and Mountain
(Continued) Roads on page 9-12.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” under On vehicles with a diesel engine, Drive Systems
Towing Equipment on page 9-92. Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking can
be enabled or disabled by pressing
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking the Tow/Haul Mode button. Use the Four-Wheel Drive
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking is exhaust brake and Tow/Haul Mode If equipped, you can send the
only enabled while the Tow/Haul for maximum grade braking. engine's driving power to all four
Mode is selected and the vehicle is See Towing Equipment on wheels for extra traction. To get the
not in the Range Selection Mode. page 9-92. most satisfaction out of four-wheel
See “Tow/Haul Mode” listed drive, you must be familiar with its
previously and Manual Mode on For other forms of grade braking, operation. Read the following before
page 9-37. Tow/Haul Mode Grade see Automatic Transmission on using four-wheel drive. See the
Braking assists in maintaining page 9-34 and Cruise Control on appropriate text for the transfer case
desired vehicle speeds when driving page 9-59. in the vehicle.
on downhill grades by using the
engine and transmission to slow the
vehicle.
{ Caution
On vehicles with a gasoline engine, Driving on clean, dry pavement in
to disable or enable Tow/Haul Four-Wheel Drive High or
Grade Braking within the current Four-Wheel Drive Low for an
ignition key cycle, press and hold extended period of time may
the Tow/Haul button for cause premature wear on the
five seconds. When the button is vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive
released, the requested mode on clean, dry pavement in
change is made. A DIC message is Four-Wheel Drive High or
displayed. See Transmission Four-Wheel Drive Low for
Messages on page 5-41. extended periods of time.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
While driving on clean, dry Manual Transfer Case

pavement and during tight turns,
you may experience vibration in the
steering system.
Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low
will turn Traction Control and
StabiliTrak® off. See Traction A four-wheel drive indicator light
Control/Electronic Stability Control comes on when you shift into
on page 9-56. four-wheel drive and the front axle
engages. See Four-Wheel-Drive
Front Axle Light on page 5-24.
The front axle engages and Some delay between shifting and
disengages automatically when you when the indicator light comes on is
shift the transfer case. Some delay normal.
for the axle to engage or disengage Use this lever to shift into and out of
is normal. four-wheel drive.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Recommended Transfer Case Settings Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low

will turn Traction Control and
Transfer Case Settings StabiliTrak off. See Traction Control/
Driving Conditions
2m 4m 4n N Electronic Stability Control on
page 9-56.
Normal YES
Severe YES
Extreme YES
Vehicle in Tow* YES
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10-95 or Towing the Vehicle on
page 10-94.
A parking brake symbol is next to
the N (Neutral) symbol as a
reminder to set the parking brake
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This before shifting the transfer case into
{ Caution setting also engages the front axle N (Neutral).
and delivers extra torque. You may
Driving on clean, dry pavement in never need Four-Wheel Drive Low.
four-wheel drive for an extended It sends maximum power to all
period of time can cause four wheels. You might choose
premature wear on the vehicle's Four-Wheel Drive Low if you are
powertrain. Do not drive on clean, driving off-road in deep sand, deep
dry pavement in four-wheel drive mud, or deep snow, and while
for extended periods of time. climbing or descending steep hills.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. You may notice that it is harder
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
{ Warning this setting when you need extra
to shift when the vehicle is cold.
After the vehicle warms up, the
Shifting the transfer case to traction, such as on snowy or icy
shifting will return to normal.
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle roads or in most off-road situations.
This setting also engages the front . While in Four-Wheel Drive High
to roll even if the transmission is
axle to help drive your vehicle. This or Four-Wheel Drive Low you
in P (Park). You or someone else may experience reduced fuel
is the best setting to use when
could be seriously injured. Be economy.
plowing snow.
sure to set the parking brake
before placing the transfer case in You can shift from Two-Wheel Drive . Avoid driving in four-wheel drive
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on High to Four-Wheel Drive High or on clean, dry pavement. It may
page 9-54. Four-Wheel Drive High to cause your tires to wear faster,
Two-Wheel Drive High while the make the transfer case harder to
vehicle is moving. In extremely cold shift, and run noisier.
N (Neutral): Shift to this setting weather, it may be necessary to . If the transfer case shift lever is
only when the vehicle needs to be stop or slow the vehicle to shift into in the N (Neutral) position and
towed. See Recreational Vehicle Four-Wheel Drive High. you have difficulty reaching the
Towing on page 10-95 or Towing the
When Using the Manual selected transfer case mode,
Vehicle on page 10-94.
Transfer Case with the engine running, shift the
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This transmission momentarily to
. Shifts into or out of Four-Wheel D (Drive) and then back to
setting is used for driving in most
Drive Low or N (Neutral) should N (Neutral). This will realign the
street and highway situations.
be made using quick motions to gear teeth in the transfer case
The front axle is not engaged in
avoid excessive gear grinding. and allow you to complete the
two-wheel drive. This setting also
Shifting slowly may make it more shift.
provides the best fuel economy.
difficult to shift.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Shifting from Two-Wheel Drive Shifting In or Out of Four-Wheel

. Shift the transfer case shift lever
High to Four-Wheel Drive High Drive Low in one continuous motion into or
out of the Four-Wheel Drive Low
. Shifts between Two-Wheel Drive position.
High and Four-Wheel Drive High { Caution
can be made at any vehicle
speed. Shifting the transfer case into { Warning
Four-Wheel Drive Low while
. Shift the transfer case shift lever moving at speeds faster than Shifting the transfer case to
in one continuous motion into 5 km/h (3 mph) may cause N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
either the Four-Wheel Drive High premature wear to the transfer to roll even if the transmission is
or Two-Wheel Drive High in P (Park). You or someone else
case, and may cause the gears to
position. could be seriously injured. Be
grind. To avoid causing premature
. Shifting from Two-Wheel Drive wear, and grinding the gears, do sure to set the parking brake
High to Four-Wheel Drive High not shift the transfer case into before placing the transfer case in
while the vehicle is in motion Four-Wheel Drive Low while the N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on
may require that moderate force vehicle is moving faster than page 9-54.
be applied to the shift lever for a 5 km/h (3 mph).
few seconds before Four-Wheel
Drive High can be engaged,
especially in cold weather. . Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive
Low should be done, if possible,
. In extremely cold weather, it may with the vehicle at a slight roll,
be necessary to slow or stop the 5 km/h (3 mph) or less.
vehicle to shift into Four-Wheel
Drive High. . Shift the transmission into
N (Neutral).
. While in Four-Wheel Drive High,
the vehicle can be driven at any
posted legal speed limit.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Shifting In or Out of Neutral Electronic Transfer Case
Low with the vehicle at a stop
may be more difficult. You may 1. With the vehicle running and the
be unable to complete the shift engine at an idle, set the parking
to Four-Wheel Drive Low, and brake.
the transfer case will end up in 2. Place the transmission into
N (Neutral). This is normal, and N (Neutral).
is a function of the gear teeth
Shift the transfer case in one
aligning in the transfer case.
continuous motion into or out of the
When this happens, make sure
N (Neutral) position.
the engine is on, shift the
transmission momentarily to
D (Drive) and back to
N (Neutral), and then complete
the transfer case shift.
The transfer case knob is next to
. When Four-Wheel Drive Low is
the steering column.
engaged, vehicle speed should
be kept below 72 km/h (45 mph). Use the dial to shift into and out of
Extended high-speed operation four-wheel drive.
in Four-Wheel Drive Low may
damage or shorten the life of the
drivetrain.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Recommended Transfer Case Settings The knob will need to be turned

back to the previous transfer case
Transfer Case Settings setting in order to see the indicator.
Driving Conditions
2m 4m 4n N Choose among four driving settings:
Normal YES 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
Severe YES setting is used for driving in most
street and highway situations. The
Extreme YES
front axle is not engaged in
Vehicle in Tow* YES two-wheel drive. This setting also
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10-95 or Towing the Vehicle on provides the best fuel economy.
page 10-94. 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
the Four-Wheel Drive High position
when extra traction is needed, such
Indicator lights show which setting on, the knob may have been turned as on snowy or icy roads or in most
the transfer case is in. Two-Wheel while the vehicle was off. To see the off-road situations. This setting also
Drive High, Four-Wheel Drive High, indicator, turn the knob to another engages the front axle to help drive
and Four-Wheel Drive Low are position so that it matches the the vehicle. This is the best setting
indicated through the outer ring of actual transfer case setting. to use when plowing snow.
the transfer case knob. N (Neutral) An indicator light flashes while
is indicated on the face of the knob. 4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This
shifting the transfer case and setting also engages the front axle
The indicator lights will display remains illuminated when the shift is
briefly when you turn on the ignition and delivers extra torque. You may
complete. If the transfer case never need this setting. It sends
and one will stay on. If no lights cannot make a requested shift, it will
display, take the vehicle to your maximum power to all four wheels.
return to the last chosen setting. You might choose Four-Wheel Drive
dealer for service. If the lights
display momentarily when the Low while driving off-road in deep
ignition is in ON/RUN, but none stay
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
sand, deep mud, or deep snow, and If the SERVICE 4WD message Shifting Into Four-Wheel
while climbing or descending steep stays on, take the vehicle to your Drive Low
hills. dealer for service. See “SERVICE When Four-Wheel Drive Low is
Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low 4WD” under Transmission engaged, vehicle speed should be
will turn Traction Control and Messages on page 5-41. kept below 72 km/h (45 mph).
StabiliTrak off. See Traction Control/ Shifting Into Four-Wheel Extended high-speed operation in
Electronic Stability Control on Drive High Four-Wheel Drive Low may damage
page 9-56. or shorten the life of the drivetrain.
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel
Drive High position. This can be To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive
{ Warning done at any speed up to 121 km/h Low position, the ignition must be in
(75 mph), except when shifting from ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
Shifting the transfer case to Four-Wheel Drive Low. The stopped or moving less than 5 km/h
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle indicator light will flash while (3 mph) with the transmission in
to roll even if the transmission is shifting. It will remain on when the N (Neutral). The preferred method
in P (Park). You or someone else shift is completed. for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive
could be seriously injured. Be Low is to have the vehicle moving
sure to set the parking brake Shifting Into Two-Wheel 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn the
before placing the transfer case in Drive High knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel position. You must wait for the
page 9-54. Drive High position. This can be Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light
done at any speed, except when to stop flashing before shifting the
shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low. transmission into gear.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's
See “Shifting Out of Four-Wheel
transfer case to N (Neutral) only
Drive Low” later in this section.
when towing the vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10-95 or Towing the Vehicle
on page 10-94.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
shift to Four-Wheel Drive

{ Caution High mode. In this case, the knob { Caution
will need to be turned to the
Shifting the transmission into gear Four-Wheel Drive High position in Shifting the transmission into gear
before the requested mode order to see the indicator. With the before the requested mode
indicator light has stopped vehicle moving less than 5 km/h indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the (3 mph), and the transmission in flashing could damage the
transfer case. To help avoid N (Neutral), attempt the shift again. transfer case. To help avoid
damaging the vehicle, always wait damaging the vehicle, always wait
for the mode indicator lights to Shifting Out of Four-Wheel for the mode indicator lights to
stop flashing before shifting the Drive Low stop flashing before shifting the
transmission into gear. To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low transmission into gear.
to Four-Wheel Drive High or
Two-Wheel Drive High, the vehicle
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit
must be stopped or moving less
significant engagement noise and significant engagement noise and
than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the
bump when shifting between bump when shifting between
transmission in N (Neutral) and the
Four-Wheel Drive Low and Four-Wheel Drive Low and
ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred
Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or
method for shifting out of
from transfer case N (Neutral) with from transfer case N (Neutral) with
Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have
the engine running. the engine running.
the vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h
If the knob is turned to the (1 to 2 mph). Turn the knob to the If the knob is turned to the
Four-Wheel Drive Low position Four-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive High or
when the vehicle is in gear and/or Two-Wheel Drive High position. You Two-Wheel Drive High switch
moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive position when the vehicle is in gear
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator High or Two-Wheel Drive High and/or moving more than
light will flash for 30 seconds and indicator light to stop flashing before 5 km/h (3 mph), the Four-Wheel
not complete the shift. After shifting the transmission into gear. Drive High or Two-Wheel Drive High
30 seconds the transfer case will indicator light will flash for
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
30 seconds, but will not complete 10 seconds. Then slowly release Shifting Out of N (Neutral)
the shift. With the vehicle moving the dial to the Four-Wheel Drive To shift the transfer case out of
less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the Low position. The N (Neutral) N (Neutral):
transmission in N (Neutral), attempt light will come on when the
the shift again. transfer case shift to N (Neutral) 1. Set the parking brake and apply
is complete. the regular brake pedal.
Shifting into N (Neutral)
7. If the engine is running, verify 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
To shift the transfer case to that the transfer case is in the engine off, and shift the
N (Neutral): N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to N (Neutral).
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked transmission to R (Reverse) for 3. Turn the transfer case dial to
so that it will not roll. one second, then shift the Two-Wheel Drive High.
2. Set the parking brake and press transmission to D (Drive) for
one second. After the transfer case has
and hold the regular brake shifted out of N (Neutral), the
pedal. See Parking Brake on 8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ N (Neutral) light will go out.
page 9-54. ACCESSORY, which will turn the
engine off. 4. Release the parking brake prior
3. Start the vehicle or turn the to moving the vehicle.
ignition to ON/RUN. 9. Place the transmission shift
4. Shift the transmission to lever in P (Park).
N (Neutral). 10. Release the parking brake prior
5. Shift the transfer case to to moving the vehicle.
Two-Wheel Drive High. 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
6. Turn the transfer case dial
clockwise to N (Neutral) until it
stops and hold it there until the
N (Neutral) light starts blinking.
This will take at least
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Automatic Transfer Case when you turn on the ignition and

{ Caution one will stay on. If no lights display,
take the vehicle to your dealer for
Shifting the transmission into gear service. If the lights display
before the requested mode momentarily when the ignition is in
indicator light has stopped ON/RUN, but none stay on, the
flashing could damage the knob may have been turned while
transfer case. To help avoid the vehicle was off. To see the
damaging the vehicle, always wait indicator, turn the knob to another
for the mode indicator lights to position so that it matches the
stop flashing before shifting the actual transfer case setting.
transmission into gear. An indicator light flashes while
shifting the transfer case and
5. Start the engine and shift the remains illuminated when the shift is
transmission to the desired The transfer case knob is next to complete. If the transfer case
position. the steering column. cannot make a requested shift, it will
return to the last chosen setting.
Use the dial to shift into and out of The knob will need to be turned
four-wheel drive. back to the previous transfer case
Indicator lights show which setting setting in order to see the indicator.
the transfer case is in. Two-Wheel Choose among five driving settings:
Drive High, Automatic Four-Wheel
Drive, Four-Wheel Drive High, and 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
Four-Wheel Drive Low are indicated setting is used for driving in most
through the outer ring of the transfer street and highway situations. The
case knob. N (Neutral) is indicated front axle is not engaged in
on the face of the knob. The two-wheel drive. This setting also
indicator lights will display briefly provides the best fuel economy.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel deep sand, deep mud, or deep If the SERVICE 4WD message
Drive): This setting is ideal for use snow, and while climbing or stays on, take the vehicle to your
when road surface traction descending steep hills. dealer for service. See “SERVICE
conditions are variable. When Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low 4WD” under Transmission
driving the vehicle in AUTO, the will turn Traction Control and Messages on page 5-41.
front axle is engaged, and the StabiliTrak off. See Traction Control/
vehicle's power is sent to the front Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive
Electronic Stability Control on High or AUTO (Automatic
and rear wheels automatically page 9-56. Four-Wheel Drive)
based on driving conditions. Driving
in this mode results in slightly lower Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel
fuel economy than Two-Wheel { Warning Drive High or AUTO position. This
Drive High. can be done at any speed, except
Shifting the transfer case to when shifting from Four-Wheel
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle Drive Low. The indicator light will
this position when extra traction is to roll even if the transmission is flash while shifting. It will remain on
needed, such as on snowy or icy in P (Park). You or someone else when the shift is completed.
roads or in most off-road situations. could be seriously injured. Be
This setting also engages the front sure to set the parking brake Shifting Into Two-Wheel
axle to help drive the vehicle. This is before placing the transfer case in Drive High
the best setting to use when N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel
plowing snow. page 9-54. Drive High position. This can be
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This done at any speed, except when
shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.
setting also engages the front axle N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's
The indicator light will flash while
and delivers extra torque. You may transfer case to N (Neutral) only
shifting. It will remain on when the
never need this setting. It sends when towing the vehicle. See
shift is completed.
maximum power to all four wheels. Recreational Vehicle Towing on
You might choose Four-Wheel Drive page 10-95 or Towing the Vehicle
Low if you are driving off-road in on page 10-94.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Shifting Into Four-Wheel shift to Four-Wheel Drive

Drive Low { Caution High mode. In this case, the knob
When Four-Wheel Drive Low is will need to be turned to the
Shifting the transmission into gear Four-Wheel Drive High position in
engaged, vehicle speed should be before the requested mode
kept below 72 km/h (45 mph). order to see the indicator. With the
indicator light has stopped vehicle moving less than 5 km/h
Extended high-speed operation in flashing could damage the
Four-Wheel Drive Low may damage (3 mph), and the transmission in
transfer case. To help avoid N (Neutral), attempt the shift again.
or shorten the life of the drivetrain. damaging the vehicle, always wait
To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive for the mode indicator lights to Shifting Out of Four-Wheel
Low position, the ignition must be in stop flashing before shifting the Drive Low
ON/RUN and the vehicle must be transmission into gear. To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low
stopped or moving less than 5 km/h to Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,
(3 mph) with the transmission in or Two-Wheel Drive High, the
N (Neutral). The preferred method It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit
vehicle must be stopped or moving
for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive significant engagement noise and
less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the
Low is to have the vehicle moving bump when shifting between
transmission in N (Neutral) and the
1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn the Four-Wheel Drive Low and
ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred
knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or
method for shifting out of
position. You must wait for the from N (Neutral) with the engine
Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have
Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light running.
the vehicle moving
to stop flashing before shifting the If the knob is turned to the 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn the
transmission into gear. Four-Wheel Drive Low position knob to the Four-Wheel Drive High,
when the vehicle is in gear and/or AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High
moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), position. You must wait for the
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,
light will flash for 30 seconds and or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator
not complete the shift. After light to stop flashing before shifting
30 seconds the transfer case will the transmission into gear.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
for 30 seconds but will not complete 6. Turn the transfer case dial
{ Caution the shift. With the vehicle moving clockwise to N (Neutral) until it
less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the stops and hold it there until the
Shifting the transmission into gear transmission in N (Neutral), attempt N (Neutral) light starts blinking.
before the requested mode the shift again. This will take at least
indicator light has stopped 10 seconds. Then slowly release
flashing could damage the Shifting into N (Neutral) the dial to the Four-Wheel Drive
transfer case. To help avoid To shift the transfer case to Low position. The N (Neutral)
damaging the vehicle, always wait N (Neutral): light will come on when the
for the mode indicator lights to transfer case shift to N (Neutral)
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked
stop flashing before shifting the is complete.
so that it will not roll.
transmission into gear. 7. If the engine is running, make
2. Set the parking brake and apply
the regular brake pedal. See sure that the transfer case is in
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit Parking Brake on page 9-54. N (Neutral) by shifting the
significant engagement noise and transmission to R (Reverse) for
bump when shifting between 3. Start the vehicle or turn the one second, then shift the
Four-Wheel Drive Low and ignition to ON/RUN. transmission to D (Drive) for
Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or 4. Put the transmission in one second.
from N (Neutral) with the engine N (Neutral). 8. Turn the ignition to ACC/
running. ACCESSORY, which will turn the
5. Shift the transfer case to
If the knob is turned to the Two-Wheel Drive High. engine off.
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, 9. Place the transmission shift
or Two-Wheel Drive High switch lever in P (Park).
position when the vehicle is in gear
and/or moving more than 10. Release the parking brake prior
5 km/h (3 mph), the Four-Wheel to moving the vehicle.
Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Drive High indicator light will flash
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Shifting Out of N (Neutral) Brakes

To shift out of N (Neutral):
{ Caution
1. Set the parking brake and apply Shifting the transmission into gear Antilock Brake
the regular brake pedal. before the requested mode System (ABS)
indicator light has stopped
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
flashing could damage the
the engine off, and shift the electronic braking system that helps
transfer case. To help avoid
transmission to N (Neutral). prevent a braking skid.
damaging the vehicle, always wait
3. Turn the transfer case dial to for the mode indicator lights to When the vehicle begins to drive
Two-Wheel Drive High, stop flashing before shifting the away, ABS checks itself.
Four-Wheel Drive High, transmission into gear. A momentary motor or clicking noise
or AUTO. might be heard while this test is
After the transfer case has going on, and it might even be
5. Start the engine and shift the noticed that the brake pedal moves
shifted out of N (Neutral), the transmission to the desired
N (Neutral) light will go out. a little. This is normal.
position.
4. Release the parking brake prior
to moving the vehicle.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5-24.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always Parking Brake
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
to each wheel, as required, faster normal.
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard. ABS allows you to steer and brake
at the same time. In many
As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help Set the parking brake by holding the
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best regular brake pedal down, then
on wheel speed and controls braking. pushing down the parking brake
braking pressure accordingly. pedal.
Remember: ABS does not change If the ignition is on, the brake
the time needed to get a foot up to system warning light will come on.
the brake pedal or always decrease See Brake System Warning Light on
stopping distance. If you get too page 5-23.
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Brake Assist Hill Start Assist (HSA)

{ Caution
This vehicle has a brake assist This vehicle has an HSA feature,
Driving with the parking brake on feature designed to assist the driver which may be useful when the
can overheat the brake system in stopping or decreasing vehicle vehicle is stopped on a grade. This
and cause premature wear or speed in emergency driving feature is designed to prevent the
damage to brake system parts. conditions. This feature vehicle from rolling, either forward or
Make sure that the parking brake automatically uses the stability rearward, during vehicle drive off.
is fully released and the brake system hydraulic brake control After you completely stop and hold
warning light is off before driving. module to supplement the power the vehicle in a complete standstill
brake system under conditions on a grade, HSA will automatically
where the driver has quickly and activate. During the transition period
To release the parking brake, hold forcefully applied the brake pedal in between when you release the
the regular brake pedal down, then an attempt to quickly stop or slow brake pedal and start to accelerate
push down momentarily on the down the vehicle. The stability to drive off on a grade, HSA holds
parking brake pedal until you feel system hydraulic brake control the braking pressure for a maximum
the pedal release. Slowly pull your module increases brake pressure at of two seconds to ensure that there
foot up off the parking brake pedal. each corner of the vehicle until the is no rolling. The brakes will
If the parking brake is not released ABS activates. Minor brake pedal automatically release when the
when you begin to drive, the brake pulsation or pedal movement during accelerator pedal is applied within
system warning light will flash and a this time is normal and the driver the two-second window. If the
chime will sound warning you that should continue to apply the brake vehicle is equipped with the
the parking brake is still on. pedal as the driving situation Integrated Trailer Brake Control
If you are towing a trailer and are dictates. The brake assist feature (ITBC) system, HSA may also apply
parking on a hill, see Driving will automatically disengage when the trailer brakes. It will not activate
Characteristics and Towing Tips on the brake pedal is released or brake if the vehicle is in a drive gear and
page 9-76. pedal pressure is quickly facing downhill or if the vehicle is
decreased. facing uphill and in R (Reverse).
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
There may be situations on minor Ride Control Systems vehicle wheel brakes to assist the
hills (less than 5% grade) with a driver in keeping the vehicle on the
loaded vehicle or while pulling a intended path. Trailer Sway Control
trailer where HSA will not activate. Traction Control/ (TSC) is also on automatically when
If you release the brake pedal and
Electronic Stability the vehicle is started. See Trailer
then reapply the brake pedal while Control Sway Control (TSC) on page 9-101.
HSA is activated, the brake pedal If cruise control is being used and
typically feels firmer with less pedal System Operation traction control or StabiliTrak begins
travel. The vehicle has a Traction Control to limit wheel spin, cruise control will
System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an disengage. Cruise control may be
electronic stability control system. turned back on when road
These systems help limit wheel spin conditions allow.
and assist the driver in maintaining Both systems come on
control, especially on slippery road automatically when the vehicle is
conditions. started and begins to move. The
TCS activates if it senses that any systems may be heard or felt while
of the drive wheels are spinning or they are operating or while
beginning to lose traction. When this performing diagnostic checks. This
happens, TCS applies the brakes to is normal and does not mean there
the spinning wheels and reduces is a problem with the vehicle.
engine power to limit wheel spin. It is recommended to leave both
StabiliTrak activates when the systems on for normal driving
vehicle senses a difference between conditions, but it may be necessary
the intended path and the direction to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets
the vehicle is actually traveling. stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
StabiliTrak selectively applies
braking pressure to any one of the
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on

. Turn on and stay on when either Turning the Systems Off
page 9-14 and “Turning the system is not working. and On
Systems Off and On” later in this If either system fails to turn on or to
section. activate, a message displays in the
When the transfer case is in Driver Information Center (DIC), and
Four-Wheel Drive Low, the stability d comes on and stays on to
system is automatically disabled, indicate that the system is inactive
the StabiliTrak OFF light comes on, and is not assisting the driver in
and the appropriate message will maintaining control. The vehicle is
appear on the DIC. Both traction safe to drive, but driving should be The button for TCS and StabiliTrak
control and StabiliTrak are adjusted accordingly. is on the center stack.
automatically disabled in this If d comes on and stays on:
condition.
1. Stop the vehicle. { Caution
2. Turn the engine off and wait Do not repeatedly brake or
15 seconds. accelerate heavily when TCS is
3. Start the engine. off. The vehicle driveline could be
damaged.
Drive the vehicle. If d comes on
and stays on, the vehicle may need To turn off only TCS, press and
The indicator light for both systems more time to diagnose the problem.
is in the instrument cluster. This If the condition persists, see your release the g button. The traction
light will: dealer. off light i displays in the instrument
. Flash when TCS is limiting cluster. The appropriate message
wheel spin. will display in the DIC. See Ride
Control System Messages on
. Flash when StabiliTrak is page 5-38. To turn TCS on again,
activated.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
press and release the g button. The StabiliTrak will automatically turn on Press 5 to enable or disable HDC.
if the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h Vehicle speed must be below
traction off light i displayed in the
(35 mph). Traction control will 50 km/h (31 mph).
instrument cluster will turn off. remain off.
If TCS is limiting wheel spin when The vehicle has a Trailer Sway
the g button is pressed, the system Control (TSC) feature and a Hill
will not turn off until the wheels stop Start Assist (HSA) feature. See
spinning. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) on
To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak, page 9-101 or Hill Start Assist
(HSA) on page 9-55.
press and hold the g button until
Adding accessories can affect the The HDC light displays on the
the traction off light i and the instrument cluster when enabled.
vehicle performance. See
StabiliTrak OFF light g come on Accessories and Modifications on HDC can maintain vehicle speeds
and stay on in the instrument page 10-3. between 3 and 22 km/h (2 and
cluster, then release. The 14 mph) on an incline greater than
appropriate message will display in Hill Descent or equal to a 10% grade. A blinking
the DIC. See Ride Control System
Messages on page 5-38. Control (HDC) HDC light indicates that the system
is actively applying the brakes to
To turn TCS and StabiliTrak on If equipped, HDC can be used when maintain vehicle speed.
driving downhill. It sets and
again, press and release the g When HDC is set, that is the initial
maintains vehicle speed while
button. The traction off light i and descending a very steep incline in a set speed. It can be increased or
the StabiliTrak OFF light g in the forward or reverse gear. decreased by applying the
accelerator or brake pedal. This
instrument cluster turn off. The HDC switch is on the center adjusted speed becomes the new
stack, below the climate controls. set speed.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
HDC will remain enabled between Cruise Control If equipped with an Allison or
22 and 60 km/h (14 and 37 mph), Hydra-Matic 6-speed automatic
however vehicle speed cannot be transmission, see “Tow/Haul Mode
set or maintained in this range. { Warning Grade Braking” under Tow/Haul
It will automatically disable if the Mode on page 9-38 for an
vehicle speed is above 80 km/h Cruise control can be dangerous explanation of how cruise control
(50 mph) or above 60 km/h where you cannot drive safely at interacts with the Range Selection
(37 mph) for at least 30 seconds. a steady speed. So, do not use Mode, Tow/Haul Mode, and Grade
5 must be pressed again to the cruise control on winding Braking systems.
re-enable HDC. roads or in heavy traffic.
If the cruise control is being used
When enabled, if the vehicle is at a Cruise control can be dangerous and the Traction Control (TCS)
speed above 22 km/h (14 mph) and on slippery roads. On such roads, system or StabiliTrak begins to limit
less than 60 km/h (37 mph), a DIC fast changes in tire traction can wheel spin, the cruise control will
message will display. cause excessive wheel slip, and automatically disengage. See
you could lose control. Do not use Traction Control/Electronic Stability
Locking Rear Axle cruise control on slippery roads. Control on page 9-56. If a collision
alert occurs when cruise control is
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can activated, cruise control is
give more traction on snow, mud, With cruise control a speed of about disengaged. See Forward Collision
ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a 40♦km/h (25♦mph) or more can be Alert (FCA) System on page 9-65.
standard axle most of the time, but maintained without keeping your When road conditions allow the
when traction is low, this feature will foot on the accelerator. Cruise cruise control to be safely used
allow the rear wheel with the most control does not work at speeds again, it can be turned back on.
traction to move the vehicle. below about 40♦km/h (25♦mph).
If the brakes are applied, the cruise
control disengages.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
SET− (Set/Coast): Press briefly to Resuming a Set Speed

set the speed and activate cruise If the cruise control is set at a
control. If cruise control is already desired speed and then the brakes
active, use to decrease vehicle are applied, the cruise control is
speed. disengaged without erasing the set
* (Cancel): Press to disengage speed from memory.
cruise control without erasing the Once the vehicle speed reaches
set speed from memory. about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
Setting Cruise Control press the +RES button briefly on the
steering wheel. The vehicle returns
If the cruise button is on when not in to the previous set speed.
use, it could get pressed and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the Increasing Speed While Using
5 (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control button off when cruise Cruise Control
system on or off. The indicator light is not being used. If the cruise control system is
is white when cruise control is on
The cruise control light on the already activated:
and turns off when cruise control
instrument cluster will come on . Press and hold the +RES button
is off.
green after the cruise control has on the steering wheel until the
+RES (Resume/Accelerate): been set to the desired speed. desired speed is reached, then
Press briefly to make the vehicle
1. Press 5 to turn the cruise release it.
resume to a previously set speed,
or press and hold to accelerate. system on. . To increase vehicle speed in
If cruise control is already active, 2. Get up to the desired speed. small increments, briefly press
use to increase vehicle speed. the +RES button. Each time this
3. Press and release the SET− is done, the vehicle goes about
button on the steering wheel. 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
4. Remove foot from the
accelerator.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Reducing Speed While Using Using Cruise Control on Hills To disable and enable Cruise
Cruise Control How well the cruise control works Grade Braking for the current
If the cruise control system is on hills depends on the vehicle ignition key cycle, press and
already activated: speed, the load, and the steepness hold the Tow/Haul button for
of the hills. When going up steep five seconds. A DIC message
. Press and hold the SET– button displays. See Transmission
on the steering wheel until the hills, pressing the accelerator pedal
may be necessary to maintain Messages on page 5-41.
desired lower speed is reached,
then release it. vehicle speed. . Vehicles with a diesel engine
While going downhill: have Cruise Grade Braking
. To slow down in small enabled when Tow/Haul Mode is
increments, briefly press the . Vehicles with a 6-speed on, the exhaust brake is on,
SET– button. Each time this is automatic transmission and a or both are on.
done, the vehicle goes about gasoline engine have Cruise
1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. Grade Braking to help maintain For other forms of Grade Braking,
driver selected speed. see Automatic Transmission on
Passing Another Vehicle While page 9-34.Tow/Haul Mode on
Using Cruise Control Cruise Grade Braking is enabled page 9-38, and Hill Descent Control
when the vehicle is started and (HDC) on page 9-58.
Use the accelerator pedal to
cruise control is active. It is not
increase the vehicle speed. When
enabled in Range Selection
you take your foot off the pedal, the
Mode. It assists in maintaining
vehicle will slow down to the
driver selected speed when
previous set cruise speed. While
driving on downhill grades by
pressing the accelerator pedal or
using the engine and
shortly following the release to
transmission to slow the vehicle.
override cruise control, briefly
pressing the SET– button will result
in cruise control set to the current
vehicle speed.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Ending Cruise Control Driver Assistance Warning (Continued)

There are three ways to end cruise
control:
Systems
Under many conditions, these
. To disengage cruise control, This vehicle may have features that systems will not:
step lightly on the brake pedal. work together to help avoid crashes
or reduce crash damage while
. Detect children, pedestrians,
. Press * on the steering wheel. driving, backing, and parking. Read bicyclists, or animals.
this entire section before using . Detect vehicles or objects
. To turn off the cruise control,
these systems. outside the area monitored by
press 5 on the steering wheel. the system.
Erasing Speed Memory { Warning . Work at all driving speeds.
The cruise control set speed is Do not rely on the Driver . Warn you or provide you with
erased from memory by pressing 5 Assistance Systems. These enough time to avoid a crash.
or if the ignition is turned off. systems do not replace the need . Work under poor visibility or
for paying attention and driving bad weather conditions.
safely. You may not hear or feel . Work if the detection sensor
alerts or warnings provided by is not cleaned or is covered
these systems. Failure to use by ice, snow, mud, or dirt.
proper care when driving may
result in injury, death, or vehicle Complete attention is always
damage. See Defensive Driving required while driving, and you
on page 9-3. should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes and/or steer
(Continued)
the vehicle to avoid crashes.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Audible or Safety Alert Seat The RVC and Rear Parking Assist
will not work properly if the tailgate Warning (Continued)
Some driver assistance features
alert the driver of obstacles by is down. If the tailgate is down, do
not use these systems. vehicle using only the RVC
beeping. To change the volume of screen, during longer, higher
the warning chime, see “Comfort When the vehicle is shifted into speed backing maneuvers,
and Convenience” under Vehicle R (Reverse), the RVC displays an or where there could be cross
Personalization on page 5-44. image of the area behind the vehicle traffic. Failure to use proper care
If equipped with the Safety Alert in the center stack display. The before backing may result in
Seat, the driver seat cushion may previous screen displays when the
injury, death, or vehicle damage.
provide a vibrating pulse alert vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)
Always check behind and around
instead of beeping. To change this, after a short delay. To return to the
previous screen sooner, press a the vehicle before backing.
see “Collision/Detection Systems”
under Vehicle Personalization on button on the infotainment system,
page 5-44. shift into P (Park), or reach a vehicle
speed of 8 km/h (5 mph).
Assistance Systems for
Parking or Backing { Warning
When the vehicle is in R (Reverse), The RVC system does not display
the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) and children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
Rear Parking Assist may help the animals, or any other object
driver to avoid a crash or to reduce located outside the camera's field
crash damage. Some models may of view, below the bumper,
also have Front Parking Assist. or under the vehicle. Perceived
distances may be different from
actual distances. Do not back the
1. View Displayed by the Camera
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle

that are within a zone 25 cm (10 in)
high off the ground and below
bumper level.
{ Warning
The parking assist system does
not detect children, pedestrians,
1. View Displayed by the Camera bicyclists, animals, or objects
2. Corners of the Rear Bumper located below the bumper or that
are too close or too far from the
Displayed images may be farther or
closer than they appear. The area vehicle. It is not available at The instrument cluster parking
displayed is limited and objects that speeds greater than 8 km/h assist display has bars that show
are close to either corner of the (5 mph). To prevent injury, death, “distance to object” and object
bumper or under the bumper do not or vehicle damage, even with location information for URPA, and
display. parking assist, always check the on some vehicles, for the Front
area around the vehicle and Parking Assist system. As the object
A warning triangle may display on gets closer, more bars light up.
check all mirrors before moving
the RVC screen to show where the When an object is first detected in
forward or backing.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist the rear, one beep will be heard
(URPA) has detected an object. This from the rear, or both sides of the
triangle changes from amber to red Safety Alert Seat will pulse two
and increases in size the closer the times. When an object is very close
object. (<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,
With URPA, as the vehicle backs up or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),
at speeds of less than 8 km/h a continuous beep will sound from
(5 mph), the system detects objects the front or rear, or both sides of the
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Safety Alert Seat will pulse five be disabled. To turn the parking The RVC is disconnected by
times. Beeps for Front Parking assist on again, select On in the removing the connector from the
Assist are higher pitched than for vehicle personalization menu. The electrical junction block mounted on
Rear Parking Assist. On with Towbar setting allows for the left side of the cross member of
the parking assist to work properly the vehicle frame. After
Turning the Features On or Off with a small item attached to the disconnecting, the cap mounted
trailer hitch. Turn off parking assist next to the camera connector must
when towing a trailer. be relocated so that the open
To turn the Rear Vision Camera terminals on the junction block are
(RVC) system rear parking assist covered.
symbols or guidance lines on or off:
Assistance Systems for
1. On the infotainment system
Home screen, press the Settings Driving
The X button on the center stack
screen button, or turn the MENU If equipped, when driving the
is used to turn on or off the Front
knob to highlight Settings and vehicle, Forward Collision Alert
and Rear Parking Assist. The
press MENU. (FCA) and Lane Departure Warning
indicator light in the button comes
on when the features are on and 2. Select Rear Camera. (LDW) can help to avoid a crash or
turns off when the features have reduce crash damage.
3. Press Rear Park Assist Symbols
been disabled. or Guidance Line and then Forward Collision Alert
Front and Rear Parking Assist can select Off or On.
be turned off, on, or on with towbar (FCA) System
through vehicle personalization. See Disconnecting the Rear Vision
The FCA system may help to avoid
“Parking Assist” under Vehicle Camera (RVC) or reduce the harm caused by
Personalization on page 5-44. If the The RVC must be disconnected if front-end crashes. FCA provides a
parking assist is turned off through the tailgate needs to be removed. red flashing alert on the windshield,
vehicle personalization, the park and beeps or pulses the Safety Alert
assist button on the center stack will Seat when approaching a vehicle
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
directly ahead too quickly. FCA also Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
provides a visual alert if following Warning (Continued)
another vehicle much too closely.
or ice, or if the windshield is
FCA detects vehicles within a damaged. It may also not detect a
distance of approximately 60 m vehicle on winding or hilly roads,
(197 ft) and operates at speeds or in conditions that can limit
above 40 km/h (25 mph). visibility such as fog, rain,
or snow, or if the headlamps or
{ Warning FCA warnings will not occur unless
the FCA system detects a vehicle
windshield are not cleaned or in
proper condition. Keep the
FCA is a warning system and ahead. The vehicle ahead indicator
windshield, headlamps, and FCA
does not apply the brakes. When will display green when a vehicle is
detected in front. Vehicles may not sensors clean and in good repair.
approaching a slower-moving or
stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, be detected on curves, highway exit
or when following a vehicle too ramps, or hills; or due to poor
closely, FCA may not provide a visibility. FCA will not detect another
warning with enough time to help vehicle ahead until it is completely
avoid a crash. FCA does not warn in the driving lane.
of pedestrians, animals, signs,
guardrails, bridges, construction { Warning
barrels, or other objects. Be ready
FCA does not provide a warning
to take action and apply the
to help avoid a crash, unless it
brakes. For more information, see
detects a vehicle. FCA may not
Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA
sensor is blocked by dirt, snow,
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Collision Alert Tailgating Alert Press the collision alert button on

the steering wheel to set the FCA
timing to Far, Medium, Near, or Off.
The first button press shows the
current setting on the DIC.
Additional button presses will
change this setting. The chosen
setting will remain until it is changed
The vehicle ahead indicator will and will affect the timing of both the
display amber when you are Collision Alert and the Tailgating
following a vehicle ahead much too Alert features. The timing of both
closely. alerts will vary based on vehicle
speed. The faster the vehicle speed,
Selecting the Alert Timing the farther away the alert will occur.
When your vehicle approaches Consider traffic and weather
another vehicle too rapidly, six red conditions when selecting the alert
lights will flash on the windshield. In timing. The range of selectable alert
addition, either eight beeps will timing may not be appropriate for all
sound from the front, or both sides drivers and driving conditions.
of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse Unnecessary Alerts
five times.
FCA may provide unnecessary
alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles
in other lanes, objects that are not
vehicles, or shadows. These alerts
are normal operation and the
vehicle does not need service.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Cleaning the System the lane departure direction. LDW

will not warn if the turn signal is on Warning (Continued)
If the FCA system does not seem to
or if a sharp maneuver is made.
operate properly, cleaning the departing the lane on the side
outside of the windshield in front of where it has detected a lane
the camera sensor and the front of { Warning marker. Even with LDW, always
the vehicle may correct the issue. keep your attention on the road
The LDW system is an aid to help
the vehicle stay in the driving and maintain proper vehicle
Lane Departure lane. It does not steer the vehicle. position within the lane, or vehicle
Warning (LDW) The LDW system may not: damage, injury, or death could
occur. Always keep the
LDW may help avoid crashes due to . Provide enough time to avoid windshield clean and do not use
unintentional lane departures. It may a crash.
provide a warning if the vehicle is LDW in bad weather conditions.
crossing a detected lane marking
. Detect lane markings under
without using a turn signal. LDW bad weather conditions or if
uses a camera sensor to detect the the windshield is dirty.
lane markings. It only operates at . Detect lane markings and will
speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or not detect road edges.
greater. . Warn that the vehicle is
When the vehicle crosses a crossing a lane marking if the
detected lane marking, the LDW system does not detect the
indicator will flash and either three lane marking.
beeps will be sounded from the left
If LDW only detects lane
or right side, or three Safety Alert
Seat pulses will occur on the left or markings on one side of the road,
right side of the seat, depending on it will only warn you when
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
How the System Works sounded from the left or right side, A damaged windshield can also
or the Safety Alert Seat will pulse impact the performance of the
The LDW camera sensor is on the
three times on either the left or right system. If the windshield is
windshield ahead of the rearview
side of the seat, depending on the damaged, it should be replaced.
mirror.
lane departure direction. Lane markings may not be detected
To turn LDW on and off, press @ on on curves, highway exit ramps,
When the System Does Not
the center stack. The control or hills; or due to poor visibility.
Seem to Work Properly
indicator will light when LDW is on.
If the system is on, the vehicle is If the LDW camera system does not
traveling at speeds of 56 km/h seem to operate properly, cleaning
(35 mph) or greater, and the LDW the outside of the windshield in front
symbol does not appear: of the camera sensor may correct
the issue.
. The lane markings on the road
may not be seen.
{ Warning
. The camera sensor may be
When the vehicle is started, the blocked by dirt, snow, or ice. LDW does not provide a warning
LDW indicator on the instrument to help avoid a crash, unless it
cluster will come on briefly. . The weather may be limiting
visibility. detects the lane markings. LDW
If LDW is on and the vehicle is may not detect the lane markings
traveling at speeds of 56 km/h This is normal operation; the vehicle if the camera sensor is blocked
(35 mph) or greater, the LDW does not need service. Clean the by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the
indicator will appear green if the windshield. windshield is damaged. It may
system detects a left or right lane also not detect a lane on winding
marking. If the vehicle crosses a or hilly roads, or in conditions that
detected lane marking without using can limit visibility such as fog,
the turn signal, this indicator will
change to amber and flash. In (Continued)
addition, three beeps will be
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Warning (Continued) Fuel

For diesel engine vehicles, see
rain, or snow, or if the headlamps “Fuel for Diesel Engines” in the
or windshield are not cleaned or Duramax diesel supplement.
in proper condition. Keep the
windshield, headlamps, and For gasoline engine vehicles, use of
camera sensors clean and in the recommended fuel is an
important part of the proper
good repair.
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
LDW warnings may occur due to tar optimum vehicle performance, we
marks, shadows, cracks in the road, recommend using TOP TIER
or other road imperfections. This is Detergent Gasolines. If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap,
normal system operation; the See www.toptiergas.com for a list of E85 or flex fuel can be used in the
vehicle does not need service. TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines. vehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel on
page 9-72.
Recommended Fuel
For all vehicles except those with
the 6.2L V8 engine, use regular
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the
octane rating is less than 87, an
audible knocking noise may be
heard. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon
as possible. If heavy knocking is
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
heard when using a higher octane then they are acceptable to use. Gasoline Specifications
rated gasoline, the engine needs However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
service. other fuels containing more than At a minimum, gasoline should meet
15% ethanol must be used only in ASTM specification D 4814. Some
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine gasolines contain an
(VIN Code J), use premium flex fuel vehicles.
octane-enhancing additive called
unleaded gasoline with a posted methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
octane rating of 91 or higher. { Caution tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
Regular unleaded gasoline rated at against the use of gasolines
87 octane or higher can be used, Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal containing MMT. See “Prohibited
but acceleration could be reduced, Fuels" in Recommended Fuel on
and an audible knocking noise may parts in the fuel system and also
page 9-70.
be heard. If the octane is less than damage plastic and rubber parts.
87, a heavy knocking noise may be That damage would not be
heard. Use 87 octane rated gasoline covered under the vehicle
California Fuel
or higher as soon as possible. warranty. Requirements
Otherwise, the engine could be If the vehicle is certified to meet
damaged. If heavy knocking is California Emissions Standards, it is
Some gasolines that are not
heard when using a higher octane designed to operate on fuels that
reformulated for low emissions can
rated gasoline, the engine needs meet California specifications. See
contain an octane-enhancing
service. the underhood emission control
additive called
Prohibited Fuels methylcyclopentadienyl manganese label. If this fuel is not available in
tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use states adopting California Emissions
Gasolines containing oxygenates, Standards, the vehicle will operate
gasolines with MMT as they can
such as ethers and ethanol, as well satisfactorily on fuels meeting
reduce spark plug life and affect
as reformulated gasolines are federal specifications, but emission
emission control system
available in some cities. If these control system performance might
performance. The malfunction
gasolines comply with the be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on. If this
previousely described specification, indicator lamp could turn on and the
occurs, see your dealer for service.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
vehicle may not pass a smog-check Fuel Additives The use of E85 or FlexFuel is
test. See Malfunction Indicator encouraged when the vehicle is
Lamp on page 5-20. If this occurs, To keep fuel systems clean, TOP designed to use it. E85 or FlexFuel
return to your authorized dealer for TIER Detergent Gasoline is is made from renewable sources.
diagnosis. If it is determined that the recommended. See Fuel on
page 9-70. To help locate fuel stations that
condition is caused by the type of carry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.
fuel used, repairs may not be If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is Department of Energy has an
covered by the vehicle warranty. not available, one bottle of Fuel alternative fuels website. See
System Treatment PLUS, part www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/
Fuels in Foreign number 88861013, added to the fuel stations.
Countries tank at every engine oil change, can
help. Fuel System Treatment PLUS E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTM
If planning to drive in countries is the only gasoline additive Specification D 5798 or CAN/
outside the U.S. or Canada, the recommended by General Motors. CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not use
proper fuel might be hard to find. It is available at your dealer. the fuel if the ethanol content is
Check regional auto club or fuel greater than 85%. Fuel mixtures that
retail brand websites for availability Do not use additives with E85 or do not meet ASTM or CGSB
in the country where driving. Never FlexFuel. specifications can affect driveability
use leaded gasoline, fuel containing and could cause the malfunction
methanol, or any other fuel not E85 or FlexFuel indicator lamp to come on.
recommended. Costly repairs Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can For the 6.0L V8 engine, after
caused by use of improper fuel use either unleaded gasoline or fuel refueling, the vehicle calculates the
would not be covered by the vehicle containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). composition of the fuel. It is not
warranty. All other vehicles should use only recommended to repeatedly switch
the unleaded gasoline as described between fuels. If fuels are switched
in Recommended Fuel on frequently, add as much fuel as
page 9-70. possible and do not add less than
11 L (3 gal) when refueling. Drive at
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
least 11 km (7 mi) immediately after

refueling to allow the vehicle to { Caution Warning (Continued)
adapt to the change in ethanol
concentration. Do not use fuel containing . Turn off the engine when
methanol. It can corrode metal refueling.
Because E85 or FlexFuel has less parts in the fuel system and also
energy per liter (gallon) than
. Keep sparks, flames, and
damage plastic and rubber parts. smoking materials away
gasoline, the vehicle will need to be That damage would not be
refilled more often. See Filling the from fuel.
covered under the vehicle
Tank on page 9-73. . Do not leave the fuel pump
warranty.
unattended.
{ Caution . Do not reenter the vehicle
Filling the Tank while pumping fuel.
Some additives are not
compatible with E85 or FlexFuel If the vehicle has a diesel engine, . Keep children away from the
see the Duramax diesel supplement fuel pump and never let
and can harm the vehicle's fuel
for more information. children pump fuel.
system. Do not add anything to
E85 or FlexFuel. Damage caused . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
by additives would not be covered { Warning cap is opened too quickly.
by the vehicle warranty. This spray can happen if the
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn
tank is nearly full, and is
violently and can cause injury or more likely in hot weather.
death. Open the fuel cap slowly and
. To help avoid injuries to you wait for any hiss noise to stop
and others, read and follow then unscrew the cap all
all the instructions on the fuel the way
pump island.
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The tethered fuel cap is located the fuel cap has been left off or
behind a hinged fuel door on the improperly installed. This would { Caution
driver side of the vehicle. Vehicles allow fuel to evaporate into the
that have a FlexFuel badge and a atmosphere. See Malfunction If a new fuel cap is needed, be
yellow fuel cap can use either Indicator Lamp on page 5-20. sure to get the right type of cap
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel from your dealer. The wrong type
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message of fuel cap might not fit properly,
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). displays on the Driver Information
See E85 or FlexFuel on page 9-72. might cause the malfunction
Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not indicator lamp to light, and could
To remove the fuel cap, turn it properly installed. See Fuel System
damage the fuel tank and
slowly counterclockwise. Messages on page 5-37 for more
emissions system. See
If the vehicle is a dual fuel tank information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
chassis cab model, and it runs out page 5-20.
of fuel, refuel the front fuel tank first { Warning
to ensure a quick restart.
If a fire starts while you are
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not refueling, do not remove the
top off or overfill the tank and wait a nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
few seconds after you have finished shutting off the pump or by
pumping before removing the notifying the station attendant.
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
Leave the area immediately.
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 10-97.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks. It will require
more effort to turn the fuel cap on
the last turn as you tighten it. Make
sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Filling a Portable Fuel Warning (Continued) Trailer Towing

Container
keep it in contact with the fill General Towing
{ Warning opening until filling is
complete.
Information
Filling a portable fuel container Only use towing equipment that has
. Fill the container no more
while it is in the vehicle can cause been designed for the vehicle.
than 95% full to allow for
fuel vapors that can ignite either Contact your dealer or trailering
expansion.
by static electricity or other dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke, light matches, the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read
means. You or others could be
or use lighters while the entire section before towing a
badly burned and the vehicle pumping fuel. trailer.
could be damaged. Always:
. Avoid using cell phones or For towing a disabled vehicle, see
. Use approved fuel other electronic devices. Towing the Vehicle on page 10-94.
containers. For towing the vehicle behind
. Remove the container from another vehicle such as a motor
the vehicle, trunk, or pickup home, see Recreational Vehicle
bed before filling. Towing on page 10-95.
. Place the container on the
ground.
. Place the nozzle inside the fill
opening of the container
before dispensing fuel, and
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Driving Characteristics Towing a trailer requires a certain

and Towing Tips
{ Warning amount of experience. The
combination you are driving is
When towing a trailer, exhaust longer and not as responsive as the
Driving with a Trailer gases may collect at the rear of vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
When towing a trailer: the vehicle and enter if the the handling and braking of the rig
. Become familiar with the state liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most before setting out for the open road.
and local laws that apply to window is open.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
trailer towing. When towing a trailer: parts and attachments, safety
. Do not tow a trailer during the . Do not drive with the liftgate, chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
first 800 km (500 mi) to prevent trunk/hatch, or rear-most tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has
damage to the engine, axle, window open. electric brakes, start the
or other parts. combination moving and then apply
. Fully open the air outlets on the trailer brake controller by hand
. Then during the first 800 km or under the instrument to be sure the brakes work.
(500 mi) of trailer towing, do not panel.
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and During the trip, check occasionally
do not make starts at full throttle.
. Also adjust the climate to be sure that the load is secure
control system to a setting and the lamps and any trailer
. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). that brings in only outside air. brakes still work.
Shift the transmission to a lower See “Climate Control System”
gear if the transmission shifts in the Index. Following Distance
too often under heavy loads and/
For more information about Stay at least twice as far behind the
or hilly conditions.
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine vehicle ahead as you would when
. Turn off Park Assist when Exhaust on page 9-33. driving the vehicle without a trailer.
towing. This can help to avoid heavy
braking and sudden turns.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Passing Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift

Caution (Continued) the transmission to a lower gear if
More passing distance is needed
the transmission shifts too often
when towing a trailer. The The vehicle could be damaged. under heavy loads and/or hilly
combination will not accelerate as Avoid making very sharp turns conditions.
quickly and is longer so it is while trailering.
necessary to go much farther The Tow/Haul Mode may be used if
beyond the passed vehicle before the transmission shifts too often.
returning to the lane. When turning with a trailer, make See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-38.
wider turns than normal. Do this so
Backing Up the trailer will not strike soft When towing at high altitude on
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, steep uphill grades, consider the
Hold the bottom of the steering following: Engine coolant will boil at
wheel with one hand. To move the or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in a lower temperature than at normal
trailer to the left, move that hand to altitudes. If the engine is turned off
the left. To move the trailer to the advance.
immediately after towing at high
right, move your hand to the right. If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn altitude on steep uphill grades, the
Always back up slowly and, out, the arrows on the instrument vehicle may show signs similar to
if possible, have someone cluster will still flash for turns. It is engine overheating. To avoid this,
guide you. important to check occasionally to let the engine run while parked,
be sure the trailer bulbs are still preferably on level ground, with the
Making Turns working. automatic transmission in P (Park)
for a few minutes before turning the
{ Caution Driving on Grades
engine off. If the overheat warning
Reduce speed and shift to a lower comes on, see Engine Overheating
Making very sharp turns while gear before starting down a long or on page 10-23.
trailering could cause the trailer to steep downgrade. If the
come in contact with the vehicle. transmission is not shifted down, the
(Continued) brakes might get hot and no longer
work well.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then lubricant, belts, cooling system, and
apply the parking brake and shift brake system. It is a good idea to
{ Warning into P (Park). inspect these before and during
the trip.
5. Release the brake pedal.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with Check periodically to see that all
the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
dangerous. If something goes 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
wrong, the rig could start to move.
2. Start the engine. see the Duramax diesel
People can be injured, and both
supplement.
the vehicle and the trailer can be 3. Shift into a gear.
damaged. When possible, always If the vehicle is bi-fuel, see the
4. Release the parking brake.
park the rig on a flat surface. bi-fuel supplement.
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in.
If parking the rig on a hill: 6. Drive slowly until the trailer is See New Vehicle Break-In on
clear of the chocks. page 9-23.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn 7. Stop and have someone pick up
the wheels into the curb if facing and store the chocks. { Warning
downhill or into traffic if facing Maintenance when Trailer The driver can lose control when
uphill. Towing pulling a trailer if the correct
2. Have someone place chocks The vehicle needs service more equipment is not used or the
under the trailer wheels. often when pulling a trailer. See vehicle is not driven properly. For
3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance Schedule on example, if the trailer is too
place, release the regular brakes page 11-3. Things that are heavy, the brakes may not work
until the chocks absorb the load. especially important in trailer well or even at all. The driver and
operation are automatic passengers could be seriously
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle (Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To identify the trailering capacity of vehicle, and the amount of tongue

Warning (Continued) the vehicle, read the information in weight the vehicle can carry. See
“Weight of the Trailer” later in this “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later
injured. The vehicle may also be section. in this section for more information.
damaged; the resulting repairs
would not be covered by the Trailering is different than just Trailer weight rating (TWR) is
vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer driving the vehicle by itself. calculated assuming the tow vehicle
only if all the steps in this section Trailering means changes in has only the driver but all required
have been followed. Ask your handling, acceleration, braking, trailering equipment. Weight of
durability, and fuel economy. additional optional equipment,
dealer for advice and information
Successful, safe trailering takes passengers, and cargo in the tow
about towing a trailer with the
correct equipment, and it has to be vehicle must be subtracted from the
vehicle. used properly. trailer weight rating.
The following information has many For kingpin weight and trailer
time-tested, important trailering tips tongue weight information, see
{ Caution and safety rules. Many of these are “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later
important for your safety and that of in this section.
Pulling a trailer improperly can your passengers. Read this section
damage the vehicle and result in Use the following chart to determine
carefully before pulling a trailer. how much the vehicle can weigh,
costly repairs not covered by the
Weight of the Trailer based upon the vehicle model and
vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer
options.
correctly, follow the advice in this How heavy can a trailer safely be?
section and see your dealer for Weights listed apply for
It depends on how the rig is used. conventional trailers and fifth-wheel
important information about
Speed, altitude, road grades, trailers unless otherwise noted.
towing a trailer with the vehicle. outside temperature, and how much
the vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. It can depend on
any special equipment on the
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a)

1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.23 2 903 kg (6,400 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
4.3L V6 (b) 4.10 2 223 kg (4,900 lb) 4 309 kg (9,500 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 or 3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.23 2 722 kg (6,000 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 4 037 kg (8,900 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 491 kg (9,900 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.73 5 216 kg (11,500 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6.2L V8 3.42 4 445 kg (9,800 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.73 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.23 2 631 kg (5,800 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 3 946 kg (8,700 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.73 5 126 kg (11,300 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

6.2L V8 3.42 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.73 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)
4.3L V6 3.23 2 676 kg (5,900 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 3 992 kg (8,800 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 445 kg (9,800 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.73 5 171 kg (11,400 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6.2L V8 3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.73 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.23 2 858 kg (6,300 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 627 kg (10,200 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.42 3 266 kg (7,200 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 or 3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

4.3L V6 (b) 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 3 901 kg (8,600 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 354 kg (9,600 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.73 5 080 kg (11,200 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6.2L V8 3.42 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.73 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
4.3L V6 (b) 3.42 2 994 kg (6,600 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 3 856 kg (8,500 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.73 5 035 kg (11,100 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6.2L V8 3.42 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.73 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)
4.3L V6 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 3 901 kg (8,600 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

5.3L V8 3.42 4 354 kg (9,600 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.73 5 080 kg (11,200 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6.2L V8 3.42 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.2L V8 3.73 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
4.3L V6 (b) 3.42 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.08 4 037 kg (8,900 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 4 491 kg (9,900 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 – Conventional Trailer 4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)
6.0L V8 – Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 577 kg (14,500 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 445 kg (9,800 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

6.0L V8 3.73 4 672 kg (10,300 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box
6.0L V8 3.73 4 491 kg (9,900 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box
6.0L V8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

6.0L V8 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 581 kg (10,100 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
Conventional Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 445 kg (9,800 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 218kg (9,300 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

6.0L V8 3.73 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 396 kg (14,100 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 3.73 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

Fifth-Wheel Trailer
(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
(b) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.
Ask your dealer for trailering vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and page 9-15 for more information
information or advice. the people who will be riding in the about the vehicle's maximum load
vehicle as well as trailer tongue capacity.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue weight. Vehicle options, equipment,
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is passengers and cargo in the vehicle
very important because it is also reduce the amount of tongue weight
part of the vehicle weight. The the vehicle can carry, which will also
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) reduce the trailer weight the vehicle
includes the curb weight of the can tow. See Vehicle Load Limits on
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Maximum Tongue
Vehicle Series Hitch Type Weight
1500 Weight-Carrying 363 kg (800 lb)
1500 Weight-Distributing 544 kg (1,200 lb)
2500/3500 Weight-Carrying or 680 kg (1,500 lb)
Standard Box Weight-Distributing
2500/ Weight-Carrying or 907 kg (2,000 lb)
3500 Long Box Weight-Distributing
2500 Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 361 kg (3,000 lb)
Trailer tongue weight (1) should be 3500 Single Rear Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 814 kg (4,000 lb)
10–15 percent and fifth-wheel or Wheels
gooseneck kingpin weight should be 3500 Dual Rear Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 2 495 kg (5,500 lb)
15–25 percent of the loaded trailer Wheels
weight up to the maximums for
vehicle series and hitch type.
Do not exceed the maximum Trailer rating may be limited by the
allowable tongue weight for the vehicle's ability to carry tongue
vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch weight. Tongue or kingpin weight
extension that will position the hitch cannot cause the vehicle to exceed
ball closest to the vehicle. This will the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
help reduce the effect of trailer Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross
tongue weight on the rear axle. Axle Weight Rating). See “Total
Weight on the Vehicle's Tires” later
in this section.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
After loading the trailer, weigh the Total Weight on the Vehicle's Weight of the Trailering
trailer and then the tongue, Tires Combination
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments Be sure the vehicle's tires are It is important that the combination
might be made by moving some inflated to the inflation pressures of the tow vehicle and trailer does
items around in the trailer. found on the Certification/Tire label not exceed any of its weight ratings
on the center pillar or see Vehicle — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Trailer
If a cargo carrier is used in the Load Limits on page 9-15. Make Weight Rating, or Tongue Weight.
trailer hitch receiver, choose a sure not to exceed the GVWR limit The only way to be sure it is not
carrier that positions the load as for the vehicle, or the RGAWR, with exceeding any of these ratings is to
close to the vehicle as possible. the tow vehicle and trailer fully weigh the tow vehicle and trailer
Make sure the total weight, loaded for the trip including the combination, fully loaded for the trip,
including the carrier, is no more than weight of the trailer tongue. If using getting individual weights for each of
half of the maximum allowable a weight-distributing hitch, make these items.
tongue weight for the vehicle or sure not to exceed the RGAWR
227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less. before applying the weight
distribution spring bars.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Towing Equipment If a step-bumper hitch will be used, Weight-Distributing Hitch and

the bumper could be damaged in Adjustment
Hitches sharp turns. Make sure there
is ample room when turning to avoid A weight distributing hitch may be
The correct hitch equipment helps useful with some trailers. Use the
maintain combination control. Many contact between the trailer and the
bumper. following guidelines to determine if a
trailers can be towed with a weight distributing hitch should
weight-carrying hitch which simply Consider using sway controls with be used.
features a coupler latched to the any trailer. Ask a trailering
hitch ball, or a tow eye latched to a professional about sway controls or
pintle hook. Other trailers may refer to the trailer manufacturer's
require a weight-distributing hitch recommendations and instructions.
that uses spring bars to distribute
the trailer tongue weight among the
two vehicle and trailer axles.
Fifth-wheel and gooseneck hitches
may also be used. See “Weight of
the Trailer Tongue” under Trailer
Towing on page 9-78 for rating limits
with various hitch types.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Weight Distributing Hitch

Vehicle Series Trailer Weight Usage Hitch Distribution
1500 Up to 7,000 lb Optional Refer to trailer
manufacturer’s
recommendation
1500 Over 7,000 lb Required 50%
2500/3500 Up to 18,000 lb Optional Refer to trailer
manufacturer’s
recommendation
When using a weight-distributing (kingpin weight) on the tow vehicle

hitch, measure distance (1) before than conventional trailers. Make
coupling the trailer to the hitch ball. sure this weight does not cause the
Measure the height again after the vehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.
trailer is coupled and adjust the Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin
spring bars so the distance (1) is as weight should be 15 to 25 percent of
close as possible to halfway the trailer weight up to the maximum
between the two measurements. amount specified in the trailering
Fifth-Wheel and Gooseneck chart for the vehicle. See “Weight of
Trailering the Trailer” under Trailer Towing on
page 9-78.
Fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailers
can be used with many pickup The hitch should be located in the
1. Body to Ground Distance models. These trailers place a pickup bed so that its centerline is
larger percentage of the weight over or slightly in front of the rear
2. Front of Vehicle
axle. Take care that it is not so far
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
forward that it will contact the back step bumper, safety chains may be If equipped, this relay will be on the
of the cab in sharp turns. This is attached to the attaching points on driver side of the vehicle, next to the
especially important for short box the bumper; otherwise, safety underhood electrical center.
pickups. Trailer pin box extensions chains should be attached to holes Be sure to follow the proper
and sliding fifth-wheel hitch on the trailer hitch platform. Always installation instructions included with
assemblies can help this condition. leave just enough slack so the any electrical equipment that is
There should be at least 15 cm (6 in) combination can turn. Never allow installed.
of clearance between the top of the safety chains to drag on the ground.
pickup box and the bottom of the
trailer shelf that extends over Trailer Brakes { Caution
the box. A loaded trailer that weighs more Leaving electrical equipment on
Make sure the hitch is attached to than 900 kg (2,000 lb) needs to have
for extended periods will drain the
the tow vehicle frame rails. Do not its own brake system that is
battery. Always turn off electrical
use the pickup box for support. adequate for the weight of the
trailer. Be sure to read and follow equipment when not in use and
Safety Chains the instructions for the trailer brakes do not use equipment that
so they are installed, adjusted, and exceeds the maximum amperage
Always attach chains between the rating of 30 amps for the auxiliary
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the maintained properly.
battery provision.
safety chains under the tongue of Do not tap into the vehicle's
the trailer to help prevent the tongue hydraulic brake system.
from contacting the road if it Trailer Wiring Harness
becomes separated from the hitch. Auxiliary Battery
The vehicle is equipped with one of
Instructions about safety chains The auxiliary battery provision can the following wiring harnesses for
may be provided by the hitch be used to supply electrical power towing a trailer or hauling a slide-in
manufacturer or by the trailer to additional equipment that may be camper.
manufacturer. If the trailer being added, such as a slide-in camper.
towed weighs up to 2 271 kg
(5,000 lb) with a factory-installed
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Basic Trailer Wiring For vehicles equipped with heavy headlamps as a second way to
All regular, extended cab, and crew duty trailering, the harness boost the vehicle system and
cab pickups have a seven-wire connector is mounted in the bumper. charge the battery.
trailer towing harness. The seven-wire harness contains
the following trailer circuits: Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring
For vehicles not equipped with Package
heavy duty trailering, the harness is
. Green/Violet: Left Stop/Turn
The seven-wire camper harness is
secured to the vehicle's frame Signal
under the rear bumper, attached to
behind the spare tire mount. The . Yellow/Grey: Right Stop/Turn the frame near the rear
harness requires the installation of a Signal crossmember. A connector must be
trailer connector, which is available . Grey/Brown: Taillamps/ added to the wiring harness that
through your dealer. Parklamps connects to the camper.
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness . White: Ground The harness contains the following
Package camper/trailer circuits:
. White/Green: Back-up Lamps
. Green/Violet: Left Stop/Turn
. Red/Green: Battery Feed Signal
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake . Yellow/Grey: Right Stop/Turn
If charging a remote (non-vehicle) Signal
battery, press the Tow/Haul Mode . Grey/Brown: Taillamps/
button, if equipped, located at the Parklamps
end of the shift lever. This will boost
the vehicle system voltage and
. White: Ground
properly charge the battery. If the . White/Green: Back-up Lamps
trailer is too light for Tow/Haul . Red/Green: Battery Feed
Mode, or the vehicle is not equipped
with Tow/Haul, turn on the . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
If the vehicle is equipped with the Tow/Haul Mode Tow/Haul is a feature that assists
heavy-duty trailering option, see when pulling a heavy trailer or a
“Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul
Package” earlier in this section. Mode on page 9-38.
When the camper-wiring harness is Tow/Haul is designed to be most
ordered without the heavy-duty effective when the vehicle and
trailering package, a seven-wire trailer combined weight is at least
harness with a seven-pin connector 75 percent of the vehicle's Gross
is at the rear of the vehicle and is Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
tied to the vehicle's frame. See “Weight of the Trailer” under
Trailer Towing on page 9-78. Tow/
Electric Brake Control Wiring Haul is most useful under the
Provisions following driving conditions:
These wiring provisions are . When pulling a heavy trailer or a
included with the vehicle as part of Pressing this button at the end of large or heavy load through
the trailer wiring package. These the shift lever turns on and off the rolling terrain.
provisions are for an electric brake Tow/Haul Mode.
controller.
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load in
The harness should be installed by stop-and-go traffic.
your dealer or a qualified service
center.
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load in busy
parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is
This indicator light on the instrument desired.
cluster comes on when the Tow/
Haul Mode is on.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul This symbol is on the Trailer Brake all of these systems are fully
when lightly loaded or with no trailer Control Panel on vehicles with an operational to ensure full
at all will not cause damage. Integrated Trailer Brake Control functionality of the ITBC system.
However, there is no benefit to the system. The power output to the The ITBC system is powered
selection of Tow/Haul when the trailer brakes is based on the through the vehicle's electrical
vehicle is unloaded. Such a amount of brake pressure being system. Turning the ignition off will
selection when unloaded may result applied by the vehicle’s brake also turn off the ITBC system. The
in unpleasant engine and system, and on the type of trailer ITBC system is fully functional only
transmission driving characteristics brakes detected. This available when the ignition is in ON/RUN.
and reduced fuel economy. Tow/ power output to the trailer brakes
Haul is recommended only when can be adjusted to a wide range of
pulling a heavy trailer or a large or trailering situations. { Warning
heavy load. The ITBC system is integrated with Connecting a trailer that has an
Integrated Trailer Brake the vehicle’s brake, antilock brake, air brake system may result in
Control System and StabiliTrak systems. In trailering reduced or complete loss of trailer
conditions that cause the vehicle’s braking. There may be an
antilock brake or StabiliTrak increase in stopping distance or
systems to activate, power sent to trailer instability which could
the trailer's brakes will be result in personal injury or
automatically adjusted to minimize damage to the vehicle, trailer,
trailer wheel lock-up. This does not
or other property. Use the ITBC
imply that the trailer has StabiliTrak.
system only with electric or
The vehicle may have an Integrated If the vehicle’s brake, antilock brake, electric over hydraulic trailer
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system or StabiliTrak systems are not brakes.
for use with electric trailer brakes or functioning properly, the ITBC
most electric-over-hydraulic trailer system may not be fully functional
brakes. or may not function at all. Make sure
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Trailer Brake Control Panel along with the Trailer Brake Display
. Activate the Manual Trailer
Page on the DIC to adjust and Brake Apply Lever.
display power output to the trailer TRAILER GAIN: This setting can be
brakes. adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page a trailer connected or disconnected.
To adjust the Trailer Gain, press one
The ITBC system displays of the Trailer Gain Adjustment
messages in the Driver Information buttons. Press and hold a gain
Center (DIC). button to continuously adjust the
The display page indicates Trailer Trailer Gain. To turn the output to
Gain setting, power output to the the trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gain
trailer brakes, trailer connection, and setting to 0.0 (zero).
system operational status. TRAILER OUTPUT: Displays any
To display the Trailer Brake Display time a trailer with electric brakes is
1. Manual Trailer Brake Apply connected. Output to the trailer
Page do any of the following:
Lever brakes is based on the amount of
. Scroll through the DIC menu vehicle braking present and relative
2. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons
pages. to the Trailer Gain setting. Output is
The ITBC system has a control . displayed from 0 to 100% for each
Press a Trailer Gain button—If
panel on the instrument panel to the gain setting.
the Trailer Brake Display Page is
left of the steering column. See
not currently displayed, press a
Instrument Panel on page 1-2. The
Trailer Gain button to recall the
control panel allows adjustment to
current Trailer Gain setting.
the amount of output, referred to as
Each press and release of the
Trailer Gain, available to the trailer
gain buttons will then change the
brakes and allows manual
Trailer Gain setting.
application of the trailer brakes. The
Trailer Brake Control Panel is used
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The Trailer Output will indicate Manual Trailer Brake Apply

“- - - - - -” on the Trailer Brake The Manual Trailer Brake Apply
{ Warning
Display Page whenever the Lever is used to apply the trailer’s
following occur: Trailer brakes that are
electric brakes independent of the over-gained or under-gained may
. No trailer is connected. vehicle’s brakes. Sliding the lever to not stop the vehicle and the trailer
. A trailer without electric brakes the left will apply only the trailer as intended and can result in a
is connected (no DIC message brakes. Use this lever to adjust crash. Always follow the
displayed). Trailer Gain to properly adjust the instructions to set the Trailer Gain
power output to the trailer brakes.
. A trailer with electric brakes has for the proper trailer stopping
become disconnected (a The trailer's and the vehicle's brake performance.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING lamps will come on when either
message will also display on vehicle brakes or manual trailer
brakes are applied. Use the following to adjust Trailer
the DIC). Gain for each towing condition:
. There is a fault present in the Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
1. Drive the vehicle with the trailer
wiring to the trailer brakes (a Trailer Gain should be set for a attached on a level road surface
CHECK TRAILER WIRING specific trailering condition and must representative of the towing
message will also display on be adjusted any time vehicle condition and free of traffic at
the DIC). loading, trailer loading, or road about 32 to 40 km/h (20 to
. The ITBC system is not working surface conditions change. 25 mph) and fully apply the
due to a fault (a SERVICE Manual Trailer Brake Apply
TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM Lever.
message will also display in Adjusting Trailer Gain at speeds
the DIC). lower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to
25 mph) may result in an
incorrect gain setting.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, using the TRAILER CONNECTED: This message will also turn off if it is
Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons, message will briefly display when a acknowledged or if the trailer
to just below the point of trailer trailer with electric brakes is first harness is reconnected.
wheel lock-up, indicated by connected to the vehicle. This 2. There is an electrical fault in the
trailer wheel squeal or tire message will automatically turn off wiring to the trailer brakes. This
smoke when a trailer wheel in about 10 seconds. This message message will continue as long
locks. can be acknowledged before it as there is an electrical fault in
Trailer wheel lock-up may not automatically turns off. the trailer wiring. This message
occur if towing a heavily loaded CHECK TRAILER WIRING: This will also turn off if it is
trailer. In this case, adjust the message will display if: acknowledged.
Trailer Gain to the highest 1. The ITBC system first To determine if the electrical fault is
allowable setting for the towing determines connection to a on the vehicle side or trailer side of
condition. trailer with electric brakes and the trailer wiring harness
3. Readjust Trailer Gain any time then the trailer harness becomes connection:
vehicle loading, trailer loading, disconnected from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect the trailer wiring
or road surface conditions If the disconnect occurs while harness from the vehicle.
change or if trailer wheel lock-up the vehicle is stationary, this
is noticed at any time while 2. Turn the ignition off.
message will automatically turn
towing. off in about 30 seconds. This 3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the
Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages message will also turn off if it is ignition back to RUN.
acknowledged or if the trailer
In addition to displaying TRAILER harness is reconnected.
GAIN and OUTPUT through the
DIC, trailer connection and ITBC If the disconnect occurs while
system status are displayed on the vehicle is moving, this
the DIC. message will continue until the
ignition is turned off. This
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING wiring connection to the trailer and the electric actuated brake system,
message reappears, the turn the ignition back on. If either of StabiliTrak may also apply the trailer
electrical fault is on the these messages continues, either brakes.
vehicle side. the vehicle or trailer needs service. If TSC is enabled, the Traction
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING A GM dealer may be able to Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak
message only reappears when diagnose and repair problems with warning light will flash on the
connecting the trailer wiring the trailer. However, any diagnosis instrument cluster. Vehicle speed
harness to the vehicle, the and repair of the trailer is not must be reduced. If trailer sway
electrical fault is on the covered under the vehicle warranty. continues, StabiliTrak can reduce
trailer side. Contact your trailer dealer for engine torque to help slow the
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE assistance with trailer repairs and vehicle. See Traction Control/
SYSTEM: This message will display trailer warranty information. Electronic Stability Control on
when there is a problem with the page 9-56.
ITBC system. If this message Trailer Sway
continues over multiple ignition Control (TSC)
cycles, there is a problem with the
Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a
ITBC system. Have the vehicle
TSC feature. Trailer sway is
serviced.
unintended side-to-side motion of a
If either the CHECK TRAILER trailer while being towed. If the
WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER vehicle is towing a trailer and the
BRAKE SYSTEM message displays TSC detects that sway is increasing,
while driving, the ITBC system may the vehicle brakes are selectively
not be fully functional or may not applied at each wheel, to help
function at all. When traffic reduce excessive trailer sway. If the
conditions allow, carefully pull the vehicle is equipped with the
vehicle over to the side of the road Integrated Trailer Brake Control
and turn the ignition off. Check the (ITBC) system, and the trailer has
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Conversions and Adding a Snow Plow or

{ Warning Similar Equipment
Even if the vehicle is equipped
Add-Ons
with TSC, trailer sway could result
in loss of control and the vehicle
Add-On Electrical { Caution
could crash. If excessive trailer Equipment Do not exceed 64 km/h (40 mph)
sway is detected, slow down to a with a snowplow mounted to the
safe speed. Check the trailer and { Caution vehicle. The vehicle could
vehicle to help correct possible overheat and be damaged.
causes. These could include an Some electrical equipment can
improperly or overloaded trailer, damage the vehicle or cause
components to not work and Before installing a snow plow on the
unrestrained cargo, improper vehicle, here are some things you
trailer hitch configuration, would not be covered by the
need to know:
excessive vehicle-trailer speed, warranty. Always check with your
dealer before adding electrical
or improperly inflated or incorrect
vehicle or trailer tires. See Towing equipment. { Caution
Equipment on page 9-92 for If the vehicle does not have the
trailer ratings and hitch setup Add-on equipment can drain the snow plow prep package, adding
recommendations. vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the a plow can damage the vehicle,
vehicle is not operating. and the repairs would not be
Adding non-dealer accessories can The vehicle has an airbag system. covered by warranty. Unless the
affect the vehicle performance. See Before attempting to add anything vehicle was built to carry a snow
Accessories and Modifications on electrical to the vehicle, see plow, do not add one to the
page 10-3. Servicing the Airbag-Equipped vehicle. If the vehicle has the
Vehicle on page 3-35 and Adding snow plow prep package, called
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped (Continued)
Vehicle on page 3-35.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. The weight of items added to the . Follow the snow plow
Caution (Continued) vehicle, like a tool box or manufacturer's
truck cap. recommendations regarding rear
RPO VYU, then the payload the ballast. Rear ballast may be
. The total weight of any
vehicle can carry will be reduced required to ensure a proper front
additional cargo intended to be
when a snow plow is installed. and rear weight distribution ratio,
carried.
The vehicle can be damaged if even though the actual weight at
either the front or rear axle ratings Say, for example, you have a 318 kg the front axle may be less than
or the Gross Vehicle Weight (700 lb) snow plow. The total weight the front axle rating.
Rating (GVWR) are exceeded. of all occupants and cargo inside
the cab should not exceed 135 kg
. The snow plow manufacturer or
(300 lb). This means that you may installer can assist you in
Some vehicles are built with a only be able to carry one passenger. determining the amount of rear
special snow plow prep package, But, even this may be too much if ballast required, to help make
called RPO VYU. If the vehicle has there is other equipment already sure the snowplow/vehicle
this option, you can add a plow to it, adding to the weight of the vehicle. combination does not exceed
provided certain weights, such as the GVW rating, the front and
the weights on the vehicle's axles Here are some guidelines for safely rear axle ratings, and the front
and the Gross Vehicle Weight carrying a snow plow on the vehicle: and rear weight distribution ratio.
Rating (GVWR), are not exceeded. . Make sure the weight on the . The total vehicle must not
The plow the vehicle can carry front and rear axles does not exceed the GVW rating.
depends on many things, such as: exceed the axle rating for each.
Front axle reserve capacity is the
. The options the vehicle came
. For the front axle, if more cargo difference between the Gross Axle
with, and the weight of those or passengers must be carried, Weight Rating (GAWR) and the front
options. appropriate counter ballast must axle weight of the vehicle with full
be installed rear of the rear axle. fuel and passengers. Basically, it is
. The weight and number of Counter ballast must be properly the amount of weight that can be
passengers intended to be secured so it will not move added to the front axle before
carried. during driving. reaching the front GAWR.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
The front axle reserve capacity for

the vehicle can be found in the
lower right corner of the
Certification/Tire label, as shown.
Canada (W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the

In order to calculate the amount of accessory is adding to the
weight any front accessory, such as front axle.
a snow plow, is adding to the front Where:
United States axle, use the following formula: W = Weight of added accessory
A = Distance that the accessory
is in front of the front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
For example, adding a 318 kg

(700 lb) snow plow actually adds { Warning Warning (Continued)
more than 318 kg (700 lb) to the
front axle. Using the formula, if the On some vehicles that have rear weight distribution ratio is
snow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front of certain front mounted equipment, necessary to provide proper
the front axle and the wheel base is such as a snow plow, it may be braking performance.
305 cm (10 ft), then: possible to load the front axle to
W = 318 kg (700 lb) the front gross axle weight rating Total vehicle reserve capacity is the
A = 122 cm (4 ft) (GAWR) but not have enough difference between the GVWR and
W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft) weight on the rear axle to have the weight of the truck with full fuel
proper braking performance. If the and passengers. It is the amount of
(W x (A + W.B.)/W.B. =
(318 x (122 + 305))/305 = 445 kg brakes cannot work properly, you weight that can be added to the
(980 lb) could have a crash. To help the vehicle before reaching the GVWR.
brakes work properly when a Keep in mind that reserve capacity
So, if the front axle reserve capacity snow plow is installed, always numbers are intended as a guide
is more than 445 kg (980 lb), the follow the snow plow when selecting the amount of
snow plow could be added without manufacturer or installer's equipment or cargo the truck can
exceeding the front GAWR. recommendation for rear ballast carry. If unsure of the vehicle's front,
Heavier equipment can be added on to ensure a proper front and rear rear, or total weight, go to a weigh
the front of the vehicle if it is weight distribution ratio, even station and weigh the vehicle. Your
compensated for by carrying fewer though the actual front weight dealer can also help with this.
passengers or less cargo, or by may be less than the front The total vehicle reserve capacity
positioning cargo toward the rear. GAWR, and the total vehicle for the vehicle can be found in the
This has the effect of reducing the weight is less than the gross lower right corner of the
load on the front. However, the front vehicle weight rating (GVWR). Certification/Tire label as shown
GAWR, rear GAWR, and Gross Maintaining a proper front and previously.
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must
never be exceeded. (Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
See your dealer for additional Pickup Conversion to

advice and information about using
a snow plow on the vehicle. Also,
Chassis Cab
see Vehicle Load Limits on We are aware that some vehicle
page 9-15. owners might consider having the
pickup box removed and a
Emergency Roof Lamp commercial or recreational body
Provisions installed. Owners should be aware
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow that, as manufactured, there are
plow prep package also have an differences between a chassis cab
emergency roof lamp provision and a pickup with the box removed
package, RPO TRW. Wiring for the which could affect vehicle safety.
emergency roof lamp is provided The components necessary to adapt
above the overhead console. See a pickup to permit its safe use with
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp on a specialized body should be
page 6-5 for switch location. installed by the body builder.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-1
Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Vehicle Care Power Steering Fluid (4.3L
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
V6, 5.3L V8, and 6.2L Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
V8 Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
General Information Power Steering Fluid (6.0L Headlamps, Front Turn
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 V8 and 6.6L Signal, Sidemarker, and
California Proposition V8 Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
California Perchlorate Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Taillamps (Chassis Cab
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Accessories and Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Vehicle Checks Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Doing Your Own Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Center High-Mounted
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-34 Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-35 Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Engine Compartment Automatic Transmission Shift License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-41
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Lock Control Function Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13 Ignition Transmission Lock Electrical System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Electrical System
Automatic Transmission
Park Brake and P (Park) Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-17
Wiper Blade Engine Compartment Fuse
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-37 Instrument Panel Fuse
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-23
Block (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Overheated Engine Headlamp Aiming Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Protection Operating Mode Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 (Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
(6.0L V8 Engine Only) . . . . . 10-25
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-2 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-75 General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 For service and parts needs, visit
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 your dealer. You will receive
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-89 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 and supported service people.
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-54 Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90 Genuine GM parts have one of
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 these marks:
Tire Terminology and Towing the Vehicle
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Recreational Vehicle
Tire Pressure for High-Speed Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Tire Pressure Monitor Appearance Care
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Tire Pressure Monitor Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Different Size Tires and
California Proposition
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 65 Warning
Uniform Tire Quality Most motor vehicles, including this
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 one, contain and/or emit chemicals
Wheel Alignment and Tire known to the State of California to
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-3
cause cancer and birth defects or handling, emissions systems, Vehicle Checks
other reproductive harm. Engine aerodynamics, durability, and
exhaust, many parts and systems, electronic systems like antilock
many fluids, and some component brakes, traction control, and stability Doing Your Own
wear by-products contain and/or control. These accessories or Service Work
emit these chemicals. modifications could even cause
California Perchlorate
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
{ Warning
Materials Requirements Damage to vehicle components It can be dangerous to work on
resulting from modifications or the your vehicle if you do not have
Certain types of automotive the proper knowledge, service
installation or use of non‐GM
applications, such as airbag manual, tools, or parts. Always
certified parts, including control
initiators, safety belt pretensioners, follow owner manual procedures
module or software modifications, is
and lithium batteries contained in and consult the service manual
not covered under the terms of the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
vehicle warranty and may affect for your vehicle before doing any
may contain perchlorate materials.
remaining warranty coverage for service work.
Special handling may be necessary.
affected parts.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ GM Accessories are designed to If doing some of your own service
perchlorate. complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. See your manual. It tells you much more
Accessories and dealer to accessorize the vehicle about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories than this manual can. To order the
Modifications installed by a dealer technician. proper service manual, see Service
Adding non‐dealer accessories or Also, see Adding Equipment to the Publications Ordering Information
making modifications to the vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on on page 13-11.
can affect vehicle performance and page 3-35.
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-4 Vehicle Care
This vehicle has an airbag system. Hood 2. Go to the front of the vehicle to
Before attempting to do your own find the secondary hood release.
service work, see Airbag System To open the hood: The handle is under the front
Check on page 3-36. edge of the hood near the
Keep a record with all parts receipts center. Push the handle to the
and list the mileage and the date of right and at the same time raise
any service work performed. See the hood.
Maintenance Records on Before closing the hood, be sure all
page 11-16. the filler caps are on properly. Then
1. Pull the handle with this symbol bring the hood from full open to
{ Caution on it. It is inside the vehicle to within 15 cm (6 in) from the closed
position, pause, and push the front
the lower left of the steering
Even small amounts of wheel. center of the hood with a swift, firm
contamination can cause damage motion to fully close the hood.
to vehicle systems. Do not allow
contaminants to contact the fluids,
reservoir caps, or dipsticks.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-5
Engine Compartment Overview
4.3L V6 Engine
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-6 Vehicle Care
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump 9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See

Starting on page 10-90. “Checking Engine Oil” under
2. Battery on page 10-30. Engine Oil on page 10-10.
3. Coolant Surge Tank and 10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See

Pressure Cap. See Cooling Brake Fluid on page 10-29.
System on page 10-18. 11. Windshield Washer Fluid
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
page 10-17. Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10-27.
5. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
(If Equipped). See “How to 12. Clutch Fluid Reservoir
Check Automatic Transmission (If Equipped).
Fluid” under Automatic 13. Engine Compartment Fuse
Transmission Fluid on Block on page 10-42.
page 10-14.
6. Remote Negative (–) Location.
See Jump Starting on
page 10-90.
7. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 10-18.
8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
Oil on page 10-10.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-7
5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 6.2L V8 Engine Similar

5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-8 Vehicle Care
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump 10. Windshield Washer Fluid

Starting on page 10-90. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
2. Battery on page 10-30. Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10-27.
3. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Cooling 11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
System on page 10-18. Brake Fluid on page 10-29.
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 12. Engine Compartment Fuse

page 10-17. Block on page 10-42.
5. Automatic Transmission
Dipstick. See “How to Check
Automatic Transmission Fluid”
under Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10-14.
6. Remote Negative (–) Location
(Out of View). See Jump Starting
on page 10-90.
7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of
page 10-18.
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
Oil on page 10-10.
9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
“Checking Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil on page 10-10.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-9
6.0L V8 Engine
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-10 Vehicle Care
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump 10. Power Steering Fluid Engine Oil
Starting on page 10-90. Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid (6.0L V8 and 6.6L For diesel engine vehicles, see
2. Battery on page 10-30. “Engine Oil” in the Duramax diesel
V8 Engines) on page 10-26 or
3. Coolant Surge Tank and Power Steering Fluid (4.3L V6, supplement.
Pressure Cap. See Cooling 5.3L V8, and 6.2L V8 Engines) To ensure proper engine
System on page 10-18. on page 10-26. performance and long life, careful
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 11. Windshield Washer Fluid attention must be paid to engine oil.
page 10-17. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer Following these simple, but
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on important steps will help protect
5. Automatic Transmission
page 10-27. your investment:
Dipstick. See “How to Check
. Always use engine oil approved
Automatic Transmission Fluid” 12. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
under Automatic Transmission Brake Fluid on page 10-29. to the proper specification and of
Fluid on page 10-14. the proper viscosity grade. See
13. Auxiliary Battery (If Equipped). “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See See Battery on page 10-30. in this section.
“Checking Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil on page 10-10. 14. Engine Compartment Fuse . Check the engine oil level
Block on page 10-42. regularly and maintain the
If the vehicle has a diesel engine proper oil level. See “Checking
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Oil on page 10-10. and/or an Allison Transmission, see
the Duramax diesel supplement. Engine Oil” in this section.
8. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of . Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
page 10-18. Life System on page 10-13.
9. Remote Negative (–) Location. . Always dispose of engine oil
See Jump Starting on
properly. See “What to Do with
page 10-90. Used Oil” in this section.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-11
Checking Engine Oil what kind of oil to use. For engine

It is a good idea to check the engine
{ Warning oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to The engine oil dipstick handle page 12-2.
get an accurate reading, the vehicle may be hot; it could burn you.
must be on level ground. The Use a towel or glove to touch the
engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. dipstick handle. { Caution
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10-5 for the location of the Do not add too much oil. Oil
engine oil dipstick. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it levels above or below the
with a paper towel or cloth, then acceptable operating range
If a low oil message displays on the push it back in all the way. shown on the dipstick are harmful
DIC, it is important to park on level Remove it again, keeping the tip to the engine. If you find that you
ground to accurately measure the down, and check the level. have an oil level above the
oil level on the dipstick. Idling the operating range, i.e., the engine
vehicle on steep grades for a long When to Add Engine Oil
has so much oil that the oil level
time can influence the level sensing
gets above the cross-hatched
accuracy.
area that shows the proper
Obtaining an accurate oil level operating range, the engine could
reading is essential: be damaged. You should drain
1. If the engine has been running out the excess oil or limit driving
recently, turn off the engine and of the vehicle and seek a service
allow several minutes for the oil professional to remove the
to drain back into the oil pan. If the oil is below the cross-hatched excess amount of oil.
Checking the oil level too soon area at the tip of the dipstick, add
after engine shutoff will not 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
and then recheck the level. See See Engine Compartment Overview
provide an accurate oil level
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in on page 10-5 for the location of the
reading.
this section for an explanation of engine oil fill cap.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-12 Vehicle Care
Add enough oil to put the level Cold Temperature Operation: In an

somewhere in the proper operating area of extreme cold, where the
range. Push the dipstick all the way temperature falls below −29°C
back in when through. (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
used in the 4.3L or 6.0L engine. An
Selecting the Right Engine Oil oil of this viscosity grade will provide
Selecting the right engine oil easier cold starting for the engine at
depends on both the proper oil { Caution extremely low temperatures. When
selecting an oil of the appropriate
specification and viscosity grade.
See Recommended Fluids and Failure to use the recommended viscosity grade, always select an oil
Lubricants on page 11-12. engine oil can result in engine of the correct specification. See
damage not covered by the “Specification” earlier in this section
Specification for more information.
vehicle warranty. Check with your
Use and ask for licensed engine oils dealer or service provider on
with the dexos1® approved Engine Oil Additives/Engine
whether the oil is approved to the
certification mark. Engine oils Oil Flushes
dexos1 specification.
meeting the requirements for the Do not add anything to the oil. The
vehicle should have the dexos1 recommended oils with the dexos
approved certification mark. This Viscosity Grade specification and displaying the
certification mark indicates that the SAE 0W-20 is the best viscosity dexos certification mark are all that
oil has been approved to the dexos1 grade for the 5.3L and 6.2L is needed for good performance and
specification. V8 engines. SAE 5W-30 is the best engine protection.
viscosity grade for the 4.3L V6, and Engine oil system flushes are not
6.0L V8 engines. Do not use other recommended and could cause
viscosity grade oils such as engine damage not covered by the
SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50. vehicle warranty.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-13
What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and,
Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil at this time, the system must be
elements that can be unhealthy for
This vehicle has a computer system reset. For vehicles without the
your skin and could even cause
that indicates when to change the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
engine oil and filter. This is based message, an oil change is needed
your skin for very long. Clean your
on a combination of factors which when the OIL LIFE
skin and nails with soap and water,
include engine revolutions, engine REMAINING percentage is near
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
temperature, and miles driven. 0%. Your dealer has trained service
properly dispose of clothing or rags
Based on driving conditions, the people who will perform this work
containing used engine oil. See the
mileage at which an oil change is and reset the system. It is also
manufacturer's warnings about the
indicated can vary considerably. For important to check the oil regularly
use and disposal of oil products.
the oil life system to work properly, over the course of an oil drain
Used oil can be a threat to the interval and keep it at the proper
the system must be reset every time
environment. If you change your the oil is changed. level.
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
On some vehicles, when the system If the system is ever reset
from the filter before disposal. Never
has calculated that oil life has been accidentally, the oil must be
dispose of oil by putting it in the
diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
trash or pouring it on the ground,
OIL SOON message comes on to since the last oil change.
into sewers, or into streams or
indicate that an oil change is Remember to reset the oil life
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
necessary. See Engine Oil system whenever the oil is changed.
it to a place that collects used oil.
Messages on page 5-36. Change
the oil as soon as possible within
the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is
possible that, if driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system
might indicate that an oil change is
not necessary for up to a year. The
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-14 Vehicle Care
How to Reset the Engine Oil 3. Display the OIL LIFE dealer service department and have
Life System REMAINING on the DIC. If the it repaired before driving the vehicle
display shows 100%, the system further.
Reset the system whenever the is reset.
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next If the vehicle has a CHANGE { Caution
engine oil change. Always reset the ENGINE OIL SOON message and it
comes back on when the vehicle is Use of the incorrect automatic
engine oil life to 100% after every oil
started and/or the OIL LIFE transmission fluid may damage
change. It will not reset itself. To
reset the Engine Oil Life System: REMAINING is near 0%, the engine the vehicle, and the damage may
oil life system has not been reset. not be covered by the vehicle
1. Display the OIL LIFE Repeat the procedure. warranty. Always use the
REMAINING on the DIC. See automatic transmission fluid listed
Driver Information Center (DIC)
(Base Level) on page 5-29 or
Automatic Transmission in Recommended Fluids and
Fluid Lubricants on page 11-12.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
(Uplevel) on page 5-31.
When to Check and Change Change the fluid and filter at the
2. Press and hold the V button on Automatic Transmission Fluid scheduled maintenance intervals
the DIC for more than It is usually not necessary to check listed in Maintenance Schedule on
five seconds. The oil life will the transmission fluid level. The only page 11-3. Be sure to use the
change to 100%. reason for fluid loss is a transmission fluid listed in
The oil life system can also be reset transmission leak or overheated Recommended Fluids and
as follows: transmission. If a small leak is Lubricants on page 11-12.
suspected, then use the following
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
checking procedures to check the
the engine off.
fluid level. However, if there is a
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal large leak, then it may be necessary
slowly three times within to have the vehicle towed to a
five seconds.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-15
How to Check Automatic pausing for about three seconds Cold Check Procedure
Transmission Fluid in each range. Then, move the Use this procedure only as a
shift lever back to P (Park). reference to determine if the
{ Caution 4. Allow the engine to idle (500– transmission has enough fluid to be
800 rpm) for at least one minute. operated safely until a hot check
Too much or too little fluid can Slowly release the brake pedal. procedure can be made. The hot
damage the transmission. Too check procedure is the most
5. Keep the engine running and
much can mean that some of the accurate method to check the fluid
check the transmission fluid
fluid could come out and fall on temperature on the Driver level. Perform the hot check
hot engine parts or exhaust Information Center (DIC). See procedure at the first opportunity.
system parts, starting a fire. Too Driver Information Center (DIC) Use this cold check procedure to
little fluid could cause the (Base Level) on page 5-29 or check fluid level when the
transmission to overheat. Be sure Driver Information Center (DIC) transmission temperature is
to get an accurate reading if (Uplevel) on page 5-31. between 27°C and 32°C (80°F and
checking the transmission fluid. 90°F).
6. Using the transmission fluid
temperature reading, determine
Before checking the fluid level, and perform the appropriate
prepare the vehicle: check procedure. If the
1. Start the engine and park the transmission fluid temperature
vehicle on a level surface. Keep reading is not within the required
the engine running. temperature ranges, allow the
vehicle to cool, or operate the 1. Locate the transmission dipstick
2. Apply the parking brake and vehicle until the appropriate at the rear of the engine
place the shift lever in P (Park). transmission fluid temperature is compartment, on the passenger
3. With your foot on the brake reached. side of the vehicle.
pedal, move the shift lever See Engine Compartment
through each gear range, Overview on page 10-5.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-16 Vehicle Care
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out 6. Perform a hot check at the first
the dipstick and wipe it with a opportunity after the
clean rag or paper towel. transmission reaches a normal
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it operating temperature between
back in all the way; wait 71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).
three seconds, and then pull it 7. If the fluid level is in the
back out again. acceptable range, push the 1. Locate the transmission dipstick
dipstick back in all the way, then at the rear of the engine
4. Check both sides of the dipstick compartment, on the passenger
and read the lower level. Repeat flip the handle down to lock the
dipstick in place. side of the vehicle.
the check procedure to verify the
reading. See Engine Compartment
Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out
transmission fluid level when the
the dipstick and wipe it with a
transmission fluid temperature is
clean rag or paper towel.
between 71°C and 93°C (160°F and
200°F). 3. Install the dipstick by pushing it
back in all the way; wait
The hot check is the most accurate
three seconds, and then pull it
method to check the fluid level. The
5. If the fluid level is below the back out again.
hot check should be performed at
COLD check band, add only the first opportunity in order to verify 4. Check both sides of the dipstick
enough fluid as necessary to the cold check. The fluid level rises and read the lower level. Repeat
bring the level into the COLD as fluid temperature increases, so it the check procedure to verify the
band. It does not take much is important to ensure the reading.
fluid, generally less than 0.5 L transmission temperature is within
(1 pt). Do not overfill. range.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-17
Consistency of Readings on page 11-3. If driving in dusty/dirty

conditions, inspect the filter at each
Always check the fluid level at least
engine oil change.
twice using the procedure described
previously. Consistency (repeatable How to Inspect the Engine Air
readings) is important to maintaining Cleaner/Filter
proper fluid level. If readings are still
5. Safe operating level is within the inconsistent, contact the dealer. To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
HOT cross hatch band on the remove the engine air cleaner/filter
from the vehicle by following
dipstick. If the fluid level is not Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Steps 1−8. When the engine air
within the HOT band, and the
transmission temperature is If the vehicle has a diesel engine, cleaner/filter is removed, lightly
between 71°C and 93°C (160°F see “Pickup Models” under “Engine shake it to release loose dust and
and 200°F), add or drain fluid as Air Cleaner/Filter” in the Duramax dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter
necessary to bring the level into diesel supplement for the correct remains covered with dirt, a new
the HOT band. If the fluid level is inspection and replacement filter is required. Never use
low, add only enough fluid to procedures. compressed air to clean the filter.
bring the level into the HOT See Engine Compartment Overview
band. It does not take much on page 10-5 for the location of the
fluid, generally less than 0.5 L engine air cleaner/filter.
(1 pt). Do not overfill.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
6. If the fluid level is in the Cleaner/Filter
acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
flip the handle down to lock the scheduled maintenance intervals
dipstick in place. and replace it at the first oil change
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
interval. See Maintenance Schedule
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-18 Vehicle Care
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/ 3. Disconnect the electrical

Filter connector (2) and the connector Warning (Continued)
harness from the cover.
helps to stop flames if the engine
4. Remove the four screws (1) on backfires. Use caution when
top of the cover of the housing working on the engine and do not
and lift up the cover. drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
5. Remove the engine air cleaner/
filter from the housing. Take care
to dislodge as little dirt as
possible. { Caution
6. Clean the engine air cleaner/ If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt
filter sealing surfaces and the can easily get into the engine,
housing. which could damage it. Always
7. Inspect or replace the engine air have the air cleaner/filter in place
1. Screws cleaner/filter. when you are driving.
2. Electrical Connector 8. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstall
3. Air Duct Clamp the filter cover housing. Cooling System
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter If the vehicle has the Duramax
assembly. See Engine { Warning diesel engine, see the Duramax
Compartment Overview on diesel supplement.
page 10-5. Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or The cooling system allows the
2. Disconnect the outlet duct by others to be burned. The air engine to maintain the correct
loosening the air duct clamp (3). cleaner not only cleans the air; it working temperature.
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-19
{ Warning { Warning
An electric engine cooling fan can Heater and radiator hoses, and
start even when the engine is not other engine parts, can be very
running. To avoid injury, always hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
keep hands, clothing, and tools you can be burned.
away from any engine Do not run the engine if there is a
cooling fan. leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 4.3L fixed before you drive the vehicle.
V6 Engine and 6.2L V8 Engine
Similar
1. Coolant Surge Tank
Pressure Cap
3. Engine Electric Cooling Fan(s)
6.0L V8 Engine
Pressure Cap
3. Engine Belt-Driven Cooling Fan
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-20 Vehicle Care
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,

{ Caution drinkable water and DEX-COOL
Using coolant other than { Warning coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
DEX-COOL® can cause This mixture:
Adding only plain water or some
premature engine, heater core,
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside
the engine coolant could require
and other liquids, can boil before temperature.
changing sooner. Any repairs
the proper coolant mixture will.
would not be covered by the . Gives boiling protection up to
The coolant warning system is set 129°C (265°F), engine
vehicle warranty. Always use
for the proper coolant mixture. temperature.
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
With plain water or the wrong
in the vehicle. . Protects against rust and
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the corrosion.
Engine Coolant overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts.
could catch fire and you or others . Helps keep the proper engine
The cooling system in the vehicle is
could be burned. Use a 50/
filled with DEX-COOL® engine temperature.
50 mixture of clean, drinkable
coolant. This coolant is designed to
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or { Caution
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first. If improper coolant mixture,
The following explains the cooling inhibitors, or additives are used in
system and how to check and add the vehicle cooling system, the
coolant when it is low. If there is a engine could overheat and be
problem with engine overheating, damaged. Too much water in the
see Engine Overheating on (Continued)
page 10-23.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-21
Checking Coolant
Caution (Continued)
The coolant surge tank is located in
mixture can freeze and crack the engine compartment on the
engine cooling parts. The repairs passenger side of the vehicle. See
would not be covered by the Engine Compartment Overview on
vehicle warranty. Use only the page 10-5.
proper mixture of engine coolant The vehicle must be on a level
for the cooling system. See surface when checking the coolant
Recommended Fluids and level.
Lubricants on page 11-12. Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
Never dispose of engine coolant by inside the coolant surge tank is 5.3L V8 Shown, 4.3L V6, 6.0L V8,
putting it in the trash, pouring it on boiling, wait until it cools down. The and 6.2L V8 Similar
the ground, or into sewers, streams, coolant level should be at or above
or bodies of water. Have the coolant the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, How to Add Coolant to the
changed by an authorized service there may be a leak in the cooling Coolant Surge Tank for
center, familiar with legal system. Gasoline Engines
requirements regarding used If coolant is visible but the coolant If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
coolant disposal. This will help level is not at or above the FULL see “Cooling System” in the
protect the environment and your COLD mark, see “How to Add Duramax diesel supplement for the
health. Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank proper coolant fill procedure.
for Gasoline Engines,” following.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-22 Vehicle Care
1. Remove the coolant surge tank

{ Warning Warning (Continued) pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
You can be burned if you spill the cap when the cooling system, surge tank pressure cap and
coolant on hot engine parts. including the surge tank pressure upper radiator hose, is no
Coolant contains ethylene glycol cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling longer hot.
and it will burn if the engine parts system and surge tank pressure
are hot enough. Do not spill cap to cool. Turn the pressure cap slowly
coolant on a hot engine. counterclockwise about one full
turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for
If no coolant is visible in the surge that to stop. A hiss means there
tank, add coolant: is still some pressure left.
{ Caution 2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly, and remove it.
This vehicle has a specific
coolant fill procedure. Failure to 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
follow this procedure could cause the proper mixture to the FULL
the engine to overheat and be COLD mark.
severely damaged. Light Duty Heavy Duty 4. With the coolant surge tank
Coolant Surge Coolant Surge pressure cap off, start the
Tank Tank engine and let it run until the
Pressure Cap Pressure Cap engine coolant temperature
{ Warning gauge indicates approximately
90°C (195°F).
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out By this time, the coolant level
and burn you badly. Never turn inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
(Continued)
lower, add more of the proper
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-23
mixture to the coolant surge tank If the decision is made not to lift the
until the level reaches the FULL { Caution hood when this warning appears,
COLD mark. get service help right away. See
Running the engine without Roadside Assistance Program on
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly. coolant may cause damage or a page 13-5.
6. Verify coolant level after the fire. Vehicle damage would not be
engine is shut off and the covered by the vehicle warranty. If the decision is made to lift the
coolant is cold. If necessary, hood, make sure the vehicle is
repeat coolant fill procedure parked on a level surface.
The vehicle has several indicators
Steps 1–6. to warn of engine overheating. 4.3L V6, 5.3L V8, and 6.2L
V8 Engines
{ Caution There is a coolant temperature
gauge in the vehicle's instrument Check to see if the engine cooling
cluster. See Engine Coolant fans are running. If the engine is
If the pressure cap is not tightly overheating, the fans should be
installed, coolant loss and Temperature Gauge on page 5-15.
running. If they are not, do not
possible engine damage may In addition, there are ENGINE continue to run the engine and have
occur. Be sure the cap is properly OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE, the vehicle serviced.
and tightly secured. ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE, and ENGINE POWER IS
REDUCED messages in the Driver
Engine Overheating Information Center (DIC). See
If the vehicle has the Duramax Engine Cooling System Messages
diesel engine, see the Duramax on page 5-35 and Engine Power
diesel supplement. Messages on page 5-37.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-24 Vehicle Care
If Steam is Coming from the If No Steam is Coming from 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
Engine Compartment the Engine Compartment temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP necessary.
{ Warning ENGINE or the ENGINE
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE 3. When it is safe to do so, pull off
Steam from an overheated engine message, along with a low coolant the road, shift to P (Park) or
can burn you badly, even if you condition, can indicate a serious N (Neutral) and let the
just open the hood. Stay away problem. engine idle.
from the engine if you see or hear If the temperature overheat gauge is
steam coming from it. Just turn it If there is an engine overheat
warning, but no steam is seen or no longer in the overheat zone or an
off and get everyone away from overheat warning no longer
heard, the problem may not be too
the vehicle until it cools down. displays, the vehicle can be driven.
serious. Sometimes the engine can
Wait until there is no sign of get a little too hot when the vehicle: Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
steam or coolant before you open for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
the hood.
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day. vehicle distance from the vehicle in
If you keep driving when the
. Stops after high-speed driving. front. If the warning does not come
engine is overheated, the liquids back on, continue to drive normally
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
and have the cooling system
in it can catch fire. You or others . Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing checked for proper fill and function.
could be badly burned. Stop the on page 9-78.
engine if it overheats, and get out If the warning continues, pull over,
of the vehicle until the engine If the ENGINE OVERHEATED stop, and park the vehicle
is cool. STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE right away.
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
If there is still no sign of steam and
message appears with no sign of
the vehicle is equipped with an
steam, try this for a minute or so:
engine driven cooling fan, push
1. Turn the air conditioning off. down the accelerator until the
engine speed is about twice as fast
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-25
as normal idle speed for at least distances and/or towing a trailer in fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
five minutes while the vehicle is the overheat protection mode loading, trailer towing, and/or high
parked. If the warning is still there, should be avoided. outside temperatures, the fan speed
turn off the engine and get everyone increases as the clutch more fully
out of the vehicle until it cools down. { Caution engages, so an increase in fan
noise may be heard. This is normal
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine for five minutes while After driving in the overheated and should not be mistaken as the
parked. If the warning is still engine protection operating transmission slipping or making
displayed, turn off the engine until it mode, the engine oil will be extra shifts. It is merely the cooling
cools down. severely degraded. Any repairs system functioning properly. The fan
performed before the engine is will slow down when additional
cooling is not required and the
Overheated Engine cool may cause engine damage.
clutch disengages.
Allow the engine to cool before
Protection Operating attempting any repair. Repair the This fan noise may also be heard
Mode (6.0L cause of coolant loss, change the when starting the engine. It will go
V8 Engine Only) oil, and reset the oil life system. away as the fan clutch partially
See Engine Oil on page 10-10. disengages.
If an overheated engine condition
exists and the ENGINE POWER IS If the vehicle has electric cooling
REDUCED message displays, an fans, the fans may be heard
Engine Fan spinning at low speed during most
overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders If the vehicle has a clutched engine everyday driving. The fans may turn
helps to prevent engine damage. In cooling fan, when the clutch is off if no cooling is required. Under
this mode, a loss in power and engaged, the fan spins faster to heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,
engine performance will be noticed. provide more air to cool the engine. high outside temperatures,
This operating mode allows the In most everyday driving conditions, or operation of the air conditioning
vehicle to be driven to a safe place the fan is spinning slower and the system, the fans may change to
in an emergency. Driving extended clutch is not fully engaged. This high speed and an increase in fan
improves fuel economy and reduces noise may be heard. This is normal
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-26 Vehicle Care
and indicates that the cooling Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering
system is functioning properly. The Fluid
fans will change to low speed when
(6.0L V8 and 6.6L
additional cooling is no longer V8 Engines) To check the power steering fluid:
required. 1. Turn the key off and let the
The electric engine cooling fans engine compartment cool down.
may run after the engine has been 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
turned. off. This is normal and no reservoir clean.
service is required.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment Overview 4. Replace the cap and completely
(4.3L V6, 5.3L V8, and on page 10-5 for reservoir location. tighten it.
6.2L V8 Engines) 5. Remove the cap again and look
When to Check Power Steering
The vehicle has electric power Fluid at the fluid level on the dipstick.
steering and does not use power
It is not necessary to regularly The level should be at the FULL
steering fluid.
check power steering fluid unless COLD mark. If necessary, add only
there is a leak suspected in the enough fluid to bring the level up to
system or an unusual noise is the mark.
heard. A fluid loss in this system What to Use
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired. To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-12. Always
use the proper fluid.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-27
ignition cycle. When the WASHER

{ Caution FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message Caution (Continued)
displays, washer fluid will need to
Use of the incorrect fluid may be added to the windshield washer
. Do not mix water with
damage the vehicle and the fluid reservoir. ready-to-use washer fluid.
damages may not be covered by Water can cause the solution
the vehicle warranty. Always use to freeze and damage the
the correct fluid listed in washer fluid tank and other
Recommended Fluids and parts of the washer system.
Lubricants on page 11-12. . When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer instructions for
Washer Fluid adding water.
Open the cap with the washer
What to Use symbol on it. Add washer fluid until . Fill the washer fluid tank only
the tank is full. See Engine three-quarters full when it is
When windshield washer fluid needs
Compartment Overview on very cold. This allows for fluid
to be added, be sure to read the
page 10-5 for reservoir location. expansion if freezing occurs,
manufacturer's instructions before
use. Use a fluid that has sufficient which could damage the tank
protection against freezing in an { Caution if it is completely full.
area where the temperature may fall
below freezing.
. Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
Adding Washer Fluid washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
The vehicle has a low washer fluid
and paint.
message on the DIC that comes on
when the washer fluid is low. The (Continued)
message is displayed for
15 seconds at the start of each
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-28 Vehicle Care
Brakes pedal travel. This could be a sign

{ Caution that brake service might be
This vehicle has front and rear disc required.
brakes. Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly Brake Adjustment
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
brake repair. Every time the brakes are applied,
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads with or without the vehicle moving,
are worn and new pads are needed. Some driving conditions or climates the brakes adjust for wear.
The sound can come and go or be can cause a brake squeal when the
heard all the time the vehicle is brakes are first applied or lightly
Replacing Brake System Parts
moving, except when applying the applied. This does not mean The braking system on a vehicle is
brake pedal firmly. something is wrong with the brakes. complex. Its many parts have to be
Properly torqued wheel nuts are of top quality and work well together
{ Warning necessary to help prevent brake if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
The brake wear warning sound inspect brake pads for wear and and tested with top-quality brake
means that soon the brakes will evenly tighten wheel nuts in the parts. When parts of the braking
not work well. That could lead to proper sequence to torque system are replaced, be sure to get
a crash. When the brake wear specifications in Capacities and new, approved replacement parts.
warning sound is heard, have the Specifications on page 12-2. If this is not done, the brakes might
vehicle serviced. not work properly. For example,
Brake linings should always be installing disc brake pads that are
replaced as complete axle sets. wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
Brake Pedal Travel rear brakes — for the worse. The
See your dealer if the brake pedal braking performance expected can
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-29
change in many other ways if the

. A fluid leak in the brake When the brake fluid falls to a low
wrong replacement brake parts are hydraulic system can also cause level, the brake warning light comes
installed. a low fluid level. Have the brake on. See Brake System Warning
hydraulic system fixed, since a Light on page 5-23.
Brake Fluid leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine when to check the
Do not top off the brake fluid. brake fluid. See Maintenance
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. Schedule on page 11-3.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid Checking Brake Fluid
when new brake linings are Check brake fluid by looking at the
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, brake fluid reservoir. See Engine
The brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary, only when work is Compartment Overview on
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See done on the brake hydraulic system. page 10-5.
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10-5 for the location of the { Warning
reservoir.
If too much brake fluid is added, it
There are only two reasons why the can spill on the engine and burn,
brake fluid level in the reservoir if the engine is hot enough. You
might go down: or others could be burned, and
. The brake fluid level goes down the vehicle could be damaged.
because of normal brake lining Add brake fluid only when work is
wear. When new linings are done on the brake hydraulic
installed, the fluid level goes system. See “Checking Brake
back up. Fluid” in this section.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-30 Vehicle Care
The fluid level should be above Battery

MIN. If it is not, have the brake { Caution
hydraulic system checked to see if Refer to the replacement number
there is a leak.
. Using the wrong fluid can shown on the original battery label
badly damage brake when a new battery is needed. See
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system parts. For Engine Compartment Overview on
hydraulic system, make sure the example, just a few drops of page 10-5 for battery location.
level is above MIN but not over the mineral-based oil, such as
MAX mark. engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can damage
{ Warning
What to Add
brake hydraulic system parts Battery posts, terminals, and
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid so badly that they will have to related accessories contain lead
from a sealed container. See be replaced. Do not let and lead compounds, chemicals
Recommended Fluids and someone put in the wrong
Lubricants on page 11-12. known to the State of California to
kind of fluid.
cause cancer and reproductive
Always clean the brake fluid . If brake fluid is spilled on the harm. Wash hands after handling.
reservoir cap and the area around vehicle's painted surfaces,
the cap before removing it. This the paint finish can be
helps keep dirt from entering the damaged. Be careful not to
reservoir. spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
{ Warning immediately.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the

brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-31
Vehicle Storage Four-Wheel Drive

{ Warning Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode. Refer to Maintenance Schedule on
You can be badly hurt if you are page 11-3 to determine when to
not careful. See Jump Starting on check the lubricant.
page 10-90 for tips on working How to Check Lubricant
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Manual Transfer Case

Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the 1. Fill Plug
battery to keep the battery from 2. Drain Plug
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
Electronic Transfer Case
1. Fill Plug
2. Drain Plug
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-32 Vehicle Care
When to Change Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-3 to determine how often to
change the lubricant.
What to Use
Refer to Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-12 to
determine what kind of lubricant
to use.
Front Axle
Automatic Transfer Case 1500 Series
When to Check and Change
1. Fill Plug Lubricant 1. Fill Plug
2. Drain Plug It is not necessary to regularly 2. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the check front axle fluid unless a leak
vehicle should be on a level is suspected, or an unusual noise is
surface. heard. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and
If the level is below the bottom of
repaired.
the fill plug (1) hole, located on the
transfer case, some lubricant will How to Check Lubricant
need to be added. Add enough
To get an accurate reading, the
lubricant to raise the level to the
vehicle should be on a level
bottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Use
surface.
care not to overtighten the plug.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-33
What to Use out along the axle tubes and has

Refer to Recommended Fluids and not drained back to the sump area.
Lubricants on page 11-12 to Therefore, a reading taken
determine what kind of lubricant five minutes after the vehicle has
to use. been driven will appear to have a
lower fluid level than a vehicle that
has been stationary for an hour or
Rear Axle two. The rear axle assembly must
When to Check Lubricant be supported on a flat, level surface
to get a true reading.
It is not necessary to regularly
check rear axle fluid unless a leak is
suspected or an unusual noise is
All Except 1500 Series heard. A fluid loss could indicate a
1. Fill Plug problem. Have it inspected and
repaired.
2. Drain Plug
All axle assemblies are filled by
. When the differential is cold, add
volume of fluid during production.
enough lubricant to raise the
They are not filled to reach a certain
level from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm
level. When checking the fluid level
(1/8 in) below the fill
on any axle, variations in the
plug (1) hole.
readings can be caused by factory
. When the differential is at fill differences between the minimum
operating temperature (warm), and the maximum fluid volume.
add enough lubricant to raise the Also, if a vehicle has just been
level to the bottom of the fill driven before checking the fluid
plug (1) hole. level, it may appear lower than
normal because fluid has traveled
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-34 Vehicle Care
How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading, the proper level is from 17 mm to
vehicle should be on a level 21 mm (0.6 in to 0.8 in) below
surface. the bottom of the fill plug hole,
. For all 4.3L and 5.3L 1500 located on the rear axle. Add
Series applications, the proper only enough fluid to reach the
level is 1.0 mm to 19.0 mm proper level.
(0.04 in to 0.7 in) below the What to Use
bottom of the fill hole, located on
the rear axle. Add only enough Refer to Recommended Fluids and
fluid to reach the proper level. Lubricants on page 11-12 to
determine what kind of lubricant
. For 6.2L 1500 Series to use.
applications, the proper level is
from 15 mm to 40 mm (0.6 in to Noise Control System
2500HD with 6.0L 1.6 in) below the bottom of the
fill plug hole, located on the rear The following information relates to
axle. Add only enough fluid to compliance with federal noise
reach the proper level. emission standards for vehicles with
a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
. For all 6.0L 2500HD Series
(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg
applications, the proper level is
(10,000 lb). The noise control
from 0 mm to 13 mm (0 to 0.5 in)
system warranty is given in your
below the bottom of the fill plug
warranty booklet.
hole, located on the rear axle.
Add only enough fluid to reach These standards apply only to
the proper level. vehicles sold in the United States.
. For all 6.6L Duramax Diesel
2500HD Series applications and
All Other Series and Engines all 3500 Series applications, the
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-35
Federal law prohibits the following Engine: Starter Switch Check

acts or the causing thereof: Removal or rendering engine speed
1. The removal or rendering
inoperative by any person, other
governor, if the vehicle has one,
inoperative so as to allow engine
{ Warning
than for purposes of speed to exceed manufacturer When you are doing this
maintenance, repair or specifications. inspection, the vehicle could
replacement, of any device or move suddenly. If the vehicle
element of design incorporated Fan and Drive:
moves, you or others could be
into any new vehicle for the . Removal of fan clutch, if the injured.
purpose of noise control, prior to vehicle has one, or rendering
its sale or delivery to the ultimate clutch inoperative.
purchaser or while it is in use; or 1. Before starting this check, be
. Removal of the fan shroud, if the sure there is enough room
2. The use of the vehicle after such vehicle has one. around the vehicle.
device or element of design has
Air Intake: 2. Firmly apply both the parking
been removed or rendered
inoperative by any person. . Removal of the air cleaner brake and the regular brake.
silencer. See Parking Brake on
Among those acts presumed to page 9-54.
constitute tampering are the acts . Modification of the air cleaner.
listed below. Do not use the accelerator
Exhaust: pedal, and be ready to turn off
Insulation: . Removal of the muffler and/or the engine immediately if it
Removal of the noise shields or any resonator. starts.
underhood insulation. . Removal of the exhaust pipes
and exhaust pipe clamps.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-36 Vehicle Care
3. Try to start the engine in each 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. Contact your dealer if service is
gear. The vehicle should start See Parking Brake on required.
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). page 9-54.
If the vehicle starts in any other Be ready to apply the regular Park Brake and P (Park)
position, contact your dealer for
service.
brake immediately if the vehicle Mechanism Check
begins to move.
Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the { Warning
ignition on, but do not start the
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the When you are doing this check,
Function Check regular brake, try to move the the vehicle could begin to move.
shift lever out of P (Park) with You or others could be injured
{ Warning normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
When you are doing this your dealer for service. of the vehicle in case it begins to
inspection, the vehicle could roll. Be ready to apply the regular
move suddenly. If the vehicle Ignition Transmission brake at once should the vehicle
moves, you or others could be Lock Check begin to move.
injured.
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
1. Before starting this check, be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
sure there is enough room position.
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
. The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
. The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-37
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Replacement blades come in

vehicle facing downhill. Keeping different types and are removed in
your foot on the regular brake, set different ways. For proper
the parking brake. windshield wiper blade length and
. To check the parking brake's type, see Maintenance
holding ability: With the engine Replacement Parts on page 11-14.
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot { Caution
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is Allowing the wiper arm to touch
held by the parking brake only. the windshield when no wiper
blade is installed could damage
. To check the P (Park) the windshield. Any damage that
mechanism's holding ability: 2. Press the button (2) in the
occurs would not be covered by middle of the wiper arm
With the engine running, shift to
your warranty. Do not allow the connector, and pull the wiper
P (Park). Then release the
wiper arm to touch the windshield. blade away from the arm
parking brake followed by the
regular brake. connector (1).
Contact your dealer if service is To replace the windshield wiper 3. Remove the wiper blade.
required. blade:
4. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper
1. Pull the windshield wiper blade replacement.
Wiper Blade Replacement assembly away from the
windshield. Glass Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear or cracking. See If the windshield or front side glass
Maintenance Schedule on must be replaced, see your dealer
page 11-3. to determine the correct
replacement glass.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-38 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn

Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement Signal, Sidemarker, and
should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Parking Lamps
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, page 10-41.
the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulb‐changing procedure
If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact
necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ Warning
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
Driver Side
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package. 1. Front Turn Signal/Sidemarker/
Parking Lamp
LED Lighting 2. High/Low-Beam Headlamp

See your dealer for passenger side
This vehicle has several LED lamps.
replacement.
For replacement of any LED lighting
assembly, contact your dealer.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-39
Headlamp Fog Lamps Taillamps (Chassis Cab

1. Open the hood. To replace the front fog lamp bulb: Models)
2. Remove the headlamp bulb 1. Locate the fog lamp under the
assembly cover by turning it front bumper.
counterclockwise.
2. Disconnect the electrical
3. Turn the bulb socket connector from the fog lamp bulb
counterclockwise to remove it assembly by pressing the
from the headlamp assembly connector release.
and pull it straight out.
3. Remove the bulb from the
4. Unplug the electrical connector housing by squeezing the two
from the old bulb by releasing release tabs and pulling it
the clip on the bulb socket. straight out of the assembly.
Turn Signal/Sidemarker/
Parking Lamp 1. Back-Up Lamp
1. Open the hood. 2. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
2. If replacing a bulb on the Signal Lamp
passenger side, remove the To replace one of these bulbs:
engine air cleaner.
1. Remove the four screws.
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it 2. Lift the lens off the lamp
from the headlamp assembly assembly.
and pull it straight out. 3. Turn the old bulb
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it counterclockwise and pull it
straight out of the bulb socket. straight out from the socket.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-40 Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Center High-Mounted

Stoplamps, and Back-Up Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Lamps Cargo Lamp
2. Remove the two rear lamp

assembly screws and pull
rearward until disengaging the
two outer pins on the taillamp
Single Rear Wheel Lamp Shown, assembly from the vehicle.
Dual Rear Wheel Lamp Similar 1. Cargo Lamps
3. Turn the bulb socket
1. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn counterclockwise to remove it 2. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Signal Lamp from the taillamp assembly. (CHMSL) Bulb
2. Back-Up Lamp 4. Pull the bulb straight out from
the socket.
3. Sidemarker Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the tailgate.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-41
To replace one of these bulbs: 2. Turn the bulb socket Exterior Lamp Bulb
counterclockwise and pull it Number
straight out.
License W5W LL
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
Plate Lamp
socket.
Rear 194
Replacement Bulbs Sidemarker Lamp
Exterior Lamp Bulb Stoplamp/Taillamp/ 7444 LL
Number Turn Signal Lamp
Back-Up Lamp 921 (W16W) Stoplamp/Turn 1157
Signal Lamp/
Back-Up Lamp* 1156 Taillamp*
Cargo Lamp 921 (W16W) * Chassis Cab Models
1. Remove the two screws and lift Center 921LL
off the lamp assembly. High-Mounted For replacement bulbs not listed
2. Turn the bulb socket Stoplamp here, contact your dealer.
counterclockwise and pull it (CHMSL)
straight out. Fog Lamp PS24W
3. Pull the bulb straight out from Front Turn Signal 7443 LL
the socket. Lamp and
Parking Lamp
License Plate Lamp
High/Low-Beam HIR–2
To replace one of these bulbs: Headlamp (9012 LL)
1. Locate the license plate lamp
under the rear bumper.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-42 Vehicle Care
Electrical System headlamp wiring checked right away

if the lamps go on and off or
Look at the silver-colored band
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
remain off. or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
Electrical System you replace a bad fuse with a new
Overload Windshield Wipers one of the identical size and rating.
The vehicle has fuses to protect If the wiper motor overheats due to Fuses of the same amperage can
against an electrical system heavy snow or ice, the windshield be temporarily borrowed from
overload. Fuses also protect power wipers will stop until the motor cools another fuse location, if a fuse goes
devices in the vehicle. and will then restart. out. Replace the fuse as soon as
Although the circuit is protected you can.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating. from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may Engine Compartment
If there is a problem on the road and cause wiper linkage damage.
a fuse needs to be replaced, there Fuse Block
Always clear ice and heavy snow
are some spare fuses and a fuse from the windshield before using the If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
puller in the Instrument Panel Fuse windshield wipers. see the Duramax diesel
Block. The same amperage fuse supplement.
can also be borrowed. Choose If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or The engine compartment fuse block
some feature of the vehicle that is
ice, be sure to get it fixed. is in the engine compartment, on
not needed to use and replace it as
the driver side of the vehicle.
soon as possible.
Fuses
Headlamp Wiring
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
An electrical overload may cause protected from short circuits by
the lamps to go on and off, or in fuses. This greatly reduces the
some cases to remain off. Have the chance of fires caused by electrical
problems.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-43
Lift the cover to access the fuse

block.
{ Caution
Spilling liquid on any electrical
component on the vehicle may
damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical
component.
A fuse puller is available in the left

instrument panel fuse block.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-44 Vehicle Care
Micro Usage J-Case Usage Micro Fuses Usage

J-Case Fuses (2 Pin)
Fuses
12 Cooling Fan 1 21 Fuel Pump Power
1 Trailer Brake Module
13 Cooling Fan 2
2 Trailer Battery 22 Upfitter Switch 1
Mini Fuses Usage 23 Upfitter 2
J-Case Usage (2 Pin)
Fuses 24 Front Wiper
14 Trailer Stop/Turn
3 Antilock Brake Lamps, Left 25 Antilock Brake
System Pump System Valves
15 Trailer Park Lamps
4 Instrument Panel 26 Upfitter SW 2
16 Trailer
BEC 1 27 Upfitter SW 3
Back-up Lamp
5 MSB Passenger 28 Parking Lamps,
17 Trailer Stop/Turn
6 4WD Trec Lamps, Right Right
7 Electric Parking 29 Parking

Brake Micro Fuses Usage Lamps, Left
(2 Pin) 30 Upfitter 3
8 Instrument Panel
BEC 2 18 Fuel Pump 31 Upfitter SW 4
9 MSB Driver 19 Integrated Chassis 32 Upfitter 4
Control Module
10 Rear Window 33 Back-up Lamps
Defogger 20 Electronic
Suspension 34 Engine Control
11 Starter Control Module Module Ignition
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-45
Micro Fuses Usage Micro Fuses Usage Micro Fuses Usage

(2 Pin) (2 Pin) (3 Pin)
35 Air Conditioning 48 Horn 56 Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Compressor
49 Fog Lamp
Module/
36 Heated Mirrors
50 Oxygen Sensor A Battery Pack
37 Upfitter 1
51 Engine Control 57 Transmission
38 Center Module Control Module/
High-Mounted Engine Control
52 Interior Heater
Stoplamp Module
53 Accessory Power
39 Miscellaneous 58 Headlamps
Module/Traction
Ignition
Power Inverter
40 Transmission Module Micro Usage
Ignition Relays
54 Front Washer
41 Fuel Pump 2 59 Fuel Pump
42 Cooling Fan Clutch Micro Fuses Usage 60 Upfitter 2
(3 Pin)
43 Engine 61 Upfitter 3
55 Air Conditioning
44 Fuel Injectors 62 Upfitter 4
Compressor/
A, Odd Battery Regulated 63 Trailer Park Lamps
45 Fuel Injectors Voltage Control
64 Run/Crank
B, Even
65 Upfitter 1
46 Oxygen Sensor B
66 Fuel Pump 2
47 Throttle Control
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-46 Vehicle Care
Micro Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

Relays Block (Left)
67 Air Conditioning
Control
68 Starter
Mini Relays Usage

69 Rear Window
Defogger
70 Engine Control
Module
Solid State Usage

Relay The left instrument panel fuse block
71 Cooling Fan Clutch access door is on the driver side
edge of the instrument panel.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse
block.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-47

5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-48 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped Number Usage Number Usage

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. 11 Accessory Power 24 Spare
Number Usage Outlets
25 Airbag/Info
1 Accessory Power 12 Retained Accessory
26 Passive Entry
Outlet 2 Power/Accessory
Passive Start/Heater,
2 SEO Retained 13 Discrete Logic Ignition Ventilation and Air
Accessory Power Switch Conditioning
3 Universal Garage 14 Switch Backlighting 27 Spare

Door Opener/Inside 17 Body Control 28 Spare
Rearview Mirror Module 1
29 Park Enable/
6 Body Control 19 Spare Electrically Adjustable
Module 3 Pedals
20 Spare
7 Body Control 30 SEO
22 Heater, Ventilation
Module 5
and Air Conditioning/ 31 Accessory/Run Crank
8 Driver Window Auxiliary Heater,
32 Heated Steering
Switch/Mirror Switch Ventilation and Air
Wheel
9 Body Control Conditioning Ignition
33 Spare
Module 7 23 Instrument Cluster
Ignition/Sensing 34 Instrument Cluster
Diagnostic Module 36 Spare
Ignition
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-49
Number Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

37 Spare Block (Right)
40 Left Doors
41 Driver Power Seat
43 Left Front Heated/
Cooled Seat
44 Amplifier
45 Spare
100 Run/Crank
101 Accessory Power
Outlet 1/Cigarette
Lighter
The right instrument panel fuse
block access door is on the
passenger side edge of the
instrument panel.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse
block.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-50 Vehicle Care

5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-51
The vehicle may not be equipped Number Usage Number Usage

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. 26 Export/Power Take 50 Retained Accessory
Number Usage Off/SEO Battery 1 Power/Accessory
1 Accessory Power 27 Obstacle Detection/ 51 Rear Sliding

Outlet 3 USB Ports Window Open
2 Accessory Power 28 Body Control 52 Rear Sliding Window

Outlet 4 Module 2 Close
7 Body Control 32 SEO Battery 2

Module 4 35 AC Inverter
8 Body Control 36 Right Front Heated/
Module 8 Cooled Seat
9 Rear Seat 37 Spare
Entertainment
39 Rear Sliding Window
10 Cargo Lamp
42 Right Door Window
15 Steering Wheel Motor
Controls
43 Front Blower
18 Radio
44 TPIM2/SEO
19 Right Front Window
45 Body Control
Switch
Module 6
20 Sunroof
46 Spare
23 Data Link Connector/
47 Passenger Seat
Driver Seat Module
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-52 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

Tires and a serious crash. See . Worn or old tires can
Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on cause a crash. If the tread
high-quality tires made by a page 9-15. is badly worn,
leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose replace them.
the warranty manual for the same danger as . Replace any tires that
information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The have been damaged by
warranty and where to get resulting crash could impacts with potholes,
service. For additional cause serious injury. curbs, etc.
information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently . Improperly repaired tires
manufacturer. to maintain the can cause a crash. Only
recommended pressure. the dealer or an
{ Warning Tire pressure should be authorized tire service
checked when the tires center should repair,
. Poorly maintained and are cold.
improperly used tires are replace, dismount, and
dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more mount the tires.
likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in
. Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
cause overheating as a excess of 56 km/h
impact — such as when (35 mph) on slippery
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout surfaces such as snow,
tires at the recommended mud, ice, etc. Excessive
(Continued) pressure. spinning may cause the
(Continued) tires to explode.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-53
See Tire Pressure for traction or performance as winter If using winter tires:
High-Speed Operation on tires on snow or ice-covered roads. . Use tires of the same brand and
page 10-62 for inflation pressure See Winter Tires on page 10-53. tread type on all four wheel
adjustment for high-speed positions.
driving. Winter Tires . Use only radial ply tires of the
This vehicle was not originally same size, load range, and
All-Season Tires equipped with winter tires. Winter speed rating as the original
tires are designed for increased equipment tires.
This vehicle may come with
traction on snow and ice-covered
all-season tires. These tires are Winter tires with the same speed
roads. Consider installing winter
designed to provide good overall rating as the original equipment tires
tires on the vehicle if frequent
performance on most road surfaces may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
driving on snow or ice-covered
and weather conditions. Original and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
roads is expected. See your dealer
equipment tires designed to GM's tires with a lower speed rating are
for details regarding winter tire
specific tire performance criteria chosen, never exceed the tire's
availability and proper tire selection.
have a TPC specification code maximum speed capability.
Also, see Buying New Tires on
molded onto the sidewall. Original
page 10-71.
equipment all-season tires can be Low-Profile Tires
identified by the last two characters With winter tires, there may be
of this TPC code, which will decreased dry road traction, If the vehicle has P275/55R20,
be “MS.” increased road noise, and shorter P285/50R20, or P285/45R22
tread life. After changing to winter size tires, they are classified as
Consider installing winter tires on
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle low-profile tires.
the vehicle if frequent driving on
handling and braking.
snow or ice-covered roads is
expected. All-season tires provide
adequate performance for most
winter driving conditions, but they
may not offer the same level of
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-54 Vehicle Care
The tread pattern on these tires may

{ Caution wear more quickly than other tires.
Consider rotating the tires more
Low-profile tires are more frequently than at 12 000 km
susceptible to damage from (7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wear
road hazards or curb impact is noted when the tires are
than standard profile tires. Tire inspected. See Tire Inspection on
and/or wheel assembly damage page 10-67.
can occur when coming into
contact with road hazards like Tire Sidewall Labeling
potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a Useful information about a tire is
curb. The warranty does not molded into the sidewall. The
Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire
cover this type of damage. examples show a typical
Keep tires set to the correct passenger and light truck tire (1) Tire Size: The tire size code
inflation pressure and when sidewall. is a combination of letters and
possible, avoid contact with numbers used to define a
curbs, potholes, and other road particular tire's width, height,
hazards. aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
All-Terrain Tires section for more detail.
This vehicle may have All-Terrain
Tires. These tires provide good
performance on most road surfaces,
weather conditions, and for off-road
driving. See Off-Road Driving on
page 9-6.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-55
(2) TPC Spec (Tire week of the year 2010 would resistance. For more
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date information, see Uniform Tire
Specification): Original of 0310. Quality Grading on page 10-73.
equipment tires designed to (4) Tire Identification Number (7) Maximum Cold Inflation
GM's specific tire performance (TIN): The letters and numbers Load Limit: Maximum load that
criteria have a TPC specification following the DOT code are the can be carried and the
code molded onto the sidewall. Tire Identification Number (TIN). maximum pressure needed to
GM's TPC specifications meet or The TIN shows the support that load. For
exceed all federal safety manufacturer and plant code, information on recommended
guidelines. tire size, and date the tire was tire pressure see Tire Pressure
(3) DOT (Department of manufactured. The TIN is on page 10-61 and Vehicle Load
Transportation): The molded onto both sides of the Limits on page 9-15.
Department of Transportation tire, although only one side may (8) Temporary Use Only: Only
(DOT) code indicates that the have the date of manufacture. use a temporary spare tire until
tire is in compliance with the (5) Tire Ply Material : The type the road tire is repaired and
U.S. Department of of cord and number of plies in replaced. This spare tire should
Transportation Motor Vehicle the sidewall and under the tread. not be driven on over 112 km/h
Safety Standards. (70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph)
(6) Uniform Tire Quality
DOT Tire Date of Grading (UTQG): Tire when pulling a trailer, with the
Manufacture: The last four manufacturers are required to proper inflation pressure. See
digits of the TIN indicate the tire grade tires based on three Full-Size Spare Tire on
manufactured date. The first two performance factors: treadwear, page 10-89.
digits represent the week traction, and temperature
(01-52) and the last two digits,
the year. For example, the third
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-56 Vehicle Care
criteria have a TPC specification DOT Tire Date of

code molded onto the sidewall. Manufacture: The last four
GM's TPC specifications meet or digits of the TIN indicate the tire
exceed all federal safety manufactured date. The first two
guidelines. digits represent the week
(3) Dual Tire Maximum Load: (01-52) and the last two digits,
Maximum load that can be the year. For example, the third
carried and the maximum week of the year 2010 would
pressure needed to support that have a four-digit DOT date
load when used in a dual of 0310.
configuration. For information on (5) Tire Identification Number
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire recommended tire pressure see (TIN): The letters and numbers
(1) Tire Size: The tire size code Tire Pressure on page 10-61 following the DOT code are the
is a combination of letters and and Vehicle Load Limits on Tire Identification Number (TIN).
numbers used to define a page 9-15. The TIN shows the
particular tire's width, height, (4) DOT (Department of manufacturer and plant code,
aspect ratio, construction type, Transportation): The tire size, and date the tire was
and service description. See the Department of Transportation manufactured. The TIN is
“Tire Size” illustration later in this (DOT) code indicates that the molded onto both sides of the
section for more detail. tire is in compliance with the tire, although only one side may
U.S. Department of have the date of manufacture.
(2) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria Transportation Motor Vehicle (6) Tire Ply Material : The type
Specification): Original Safety Standards. of cord and number of plies in
equipment tires designed to the sidewall and under the tread.
GM's specific tire performance
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-57
(7) Single Tire Maximum letter P as the first character in construction; and the letter B
Load: Maximum load that can the tire size means a passenger means belted-bias ply
be carried and the maximum vehicle tire engineered to construction.
pressure needed to support that standards set by the U.S. Tire (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
load when used as a single. For and Rim Association. the wheel in inches.
information on recommended (2) Tire Width: The three-digit
tire pressure see Tire Pressure (6) Service Description: These
number indicates the tire section characters represent the load
on page 10-61 and Vehicle Load width in millimeters from
Limits on page 9-15. index and speed rating of the
sidewall to sidewall. tire. The load index represents
Tire Designations (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit the load carrying capacity a tire
number that indicates the tire is certified to carry. The speed
Tire Size height-to-width measurements. rating is the maximum speed a
The examples show a typical For example, if the tire size tire is certified to carry a load.
passenger vehicle and light aspect ratio is 75, as shown in
truck tire size. item C of the tire illustration, it
would mean that the tire's
sidewall is 75 percent as high as
it is wide.
(4) Construction Code: A letter
code is used to indicate the type Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
of ply construction in the tire. (1) Light Truck (LT-Metric)
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire The letter R means radial ply Tire: The United States version
(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: construction; the letter D means of a metric tire sizing system.
The United States version of a diagonal or bias ply The letters LT as the first two
metric tire sizing system. The characters in the tire size mean
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-58 Vehicle Care
a light truck tire engineered to construction; and the letter B the tire. Air pressure is
standards set by the U.S. Tire means belted-bias ply expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
and Rim Association. construction. or psi (pounds per square inch).
(2) Tire Width: The three-digit (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of Accessory Weight: The
number indicates the tire section the wheel in inches. combined weight of optional
width in millimeters from (6) Load Range: Load Range. accessories. Some examples of
sidewall to sidewall. optional accessories are
(7) Service Description: The automatic transmission, power
(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit service description indicates the
number that indicates the tire windows, power seats, and air
load index and speed rating of a conditioning.
height-to-width measurements. tire. If two numbers are given as
For example, if the tire size in the example, 120/116, then Aspect Ratio: The relationship
aspect ratio is 75, as shown in this represents the load index for of a tire's height to its width.
item 3 of the light truck single versus dual wheel usage Belt: A rubber coated layer of
(LT-Metric) tire illustration, it (single/dual). The speed rating is cords between the plies and the
would mean that the tire's the maximum speed a tire is tread. Cords may be made from
sidewall is 75 percent as high as certified to carry a load. steel or other reinforcing
it is wide. materials.
(4) Construction Code: A letter Tire Terminology and Bead: The tire bead contains
code is used to indicate the type Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel
of ply construction in the tire. cords that hold the tire onto
The letter R means radial ply Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing the rim.
construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply outward on each square inch of
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-59
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire includes the Tire Identification Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A
in which the plies are laid at Number (TIN), an alphanumeric tire used on light duty trucks and
alternate angles less than designator which can also some multipurpose passenger
90 degrees to the centerline of identify the tire manufacturer, vehicles.
the tread. production plant, brand, and Load Index: An assigned
Cold Tire Pressure: The date of production. number ranging from 1 to 279
amount of air pressure in a tire, GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight that corresponds to the load
measured in kPa (kilopascal) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits carrying capacity of a tire.
or psi (pounds per square inch) on page 9-15. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
before a tire has built up heat GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight The maximum air pressure to
from driving. See Tire Pressure Rating for the front axle. See which a cold tire can be inflated.
on page 10-61. Vehicle Load Limits on The maximum air pressure is
Curb Weight: The weight of a page 9-15. molded onto the sidewall.
motor vehicle with standard and GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Load Rating: The
optional equipment including the Rating for the rear axle. See load rating for a tire at the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, Vehicle Load Limits on maximum permissible inflation
and coolant, but without page 9-15. pressure for that tire.
passengers and cargo.
Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle
DOT Markings: A code molded The side of an asymmetrical tire Weight: The sum of curb
into the sidewall of a tire that must always face outward weight, accessory weight,
signifying that the tire is in when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and
compliance with the U.S. production options weight.
Department of Transportation Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety unit for air pressure.
Standards. The DOT code
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-60 Vehicle Care
Normal Occupant Weight: The Recommended Inflation Traction: The friction between
number of occupants a vehicle Pressure: Vehicle the tire and the road surface.
is designed to seat multiplied by manufacturer's recommended The amount of grip provided.
68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load tire inflation pressure as shown Tread: The portion of a tire that
Limits on page 9-15. on the tire placard. See Tire comes into contact with
Occupant Distribution : Pressure on page 10-61 and the road.
Designated seating positions. Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-15. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
Outward Facing Sidewall: The bands, sometimes called wear
side of an asymmetrical tire that Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic bars, that show across the tread
has a particular side that faces tire in which the ply cords that of a tire when only 1.6 mm
outward when mounted on a extend to the beads are laid at (1/16 in) of tread remains. See
vehicle. The side of the tire that 90 degrees to the centerline of When It Is Time for New Tires
contains a whitewall, bears the tread. on page 10-70.
white lettering, or bears Rim: A metal support for a tire UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
manufacturer, brand, and/or and upon which the tire beads Grading Standards): A tire
model name molding that is are seated. information system that provides
higher or deeper than the same Sidewall: The portion of a tire consumers with ratings for a
moldings on the other sidewall between the tread and the bead. tire's traction, temperature, and
of the tire. treadwear. Ratings are
Speed Rating: An
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A alphanumeric code assigned to determined by tire
tire used on passenger cars and a tire indicating the maximum manufacturers using
some light duty trucks and speed at which a tire can government testing procedures.
multipurpose vehicles. operate. The ratings are molded into the
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-61
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Pressure Caution (Continued)

Tire Quality Grading on
page 10-73. Tires need the correct amount of
air pressure to operate . Unusual wear.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The effectively. . Poor handling.
number of designated seating
. Rough ride.
positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated
{ Caution . Needless damage from
cargo load. See Vehicle Load Neither tire underinflation nor road hazards.
Limits on page 9-15. overinflation is good.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Underinflated tires, or tires
The Tire and Loading
Tire: Load on an individual tire that do not have enough air,
Information label on the vehicle
due to curb weight, accessory can result in:
indicates the original equipment
weight, occupant weight, and . Tire overloading and tires and the correct cold tire
cargo weight. overheating which could inflation pressures. The
Vehicle Placard: A label lead to a blowout. recommended pressure is the
permanently attached to a . Premature or minimum air pressure needed to
vehicle showing the vehicle irregular wear. support the vehicle's maximum
capacity weight and the original load carrying capacity.
. Poor handling.
equipment tire size and For additional information
recommended inflation pressure. . Reduced fuel economy. regarding how much weight the
See “Tire and Loading Overinflated tires, or tires that vehicle can carry, and an
Information Label” under Vehicle have too much air, can example of the Tire and Loading
Load Limits on page 9-15. result in: Information label, see Vehicle
(Continued) Load Limits on page 9-15. How
the vehicle is loaded affects
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-62 Vehicle Care
vehicle handling and ride Remove the valve cap from the Tire Pressure for
comfort. Never load the vehicle tire valve stem. Press the tire High-Speed Operation
with more weight than it was gauge firmly onto the valve to
designed to carry. get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
{ Warning
When to Check
matches the recommended Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
Check the tires once a month pressure on the Tire and (100 mph) or higher, puts an
or more. Loading Information label, no additional strain on tires.
Do not forget the spare tire, further adjustment is necessary. Sustained high-speed driving
if the vehicle has one. See If the inflation pressure is low, causes excessive heat buildup
Full-Size Spare Tire on add air until the recommended and can cause sudden tire failure.
pressure is reached. If the You could have a crash and you
page 10-89 for additional
inflation pressure is high, press or others could be killed. Some
information.
on the metal stem in the center high-speed rated tires require
How to Check of the tire valve to release air. inflation pressure adjustment for
high-speed operation. When
Use a good quality pocket-type Re-check the tire pressure with speed limits and road conditions
gauge to check tire pressure. the tire gauge. are such that a vehicle can be
Proper tire inflation cannot be driven at high speeds, make sure
determined by looking at the tire. Return the valve caps on the
valve stems to prevent leaks the tires are rated for high-speed
Check the tire inflation pressure operation, in excellent condition,
when the tires are cold, meaning and keep out dirt and moisture.
and set to the correct cold tire
the vehicle has not been driven inflation pressure for the
for at least three hours or no vehicle load.
more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-63
Vehicles with P265/70R17 or P275/ Each tire, including the spare tread life, and may affect the
55R20 size tires require inflation (if provided), should be checked vehicle's handling and stopping
pressure adjustment when driving monthly when cold and inflated to ability.
the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h the inflation pressure recommended Please note that the TPMS is not a
(100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tire by the vehicle manufacturer on the substitute for proper tire
inflation pressure to 20 kPa (3 psi) vehicle placard or tire inflation maintenance, and it is the driver's
above the recommended cold tire pressure label. (If your vehicle has responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure shown on the Tire and tires of a different size than the size pressure, even if under-inflation has
Loading Information label. indicated on the vehicle placard or not reached the level to trigger
Return the tires to the tire inflation pressure label, you illumination of the TPMS low tire
recommended cold tire inflation should determine the proper tire pressure telltale.
pressure when high-speed driving inflation pressure for those tires.)
Your vehicle has also been
has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits As an added safety feature, your equipped with a TPMS malfunction
on page 9-15 and Tire Pressure on vehicle has been equipped with a indicator to indicate when the
page 10-61. tire pressure monitoring system system is not operating properly.
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire The TPMS malfunction indicator is
Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more combined with the low tire pressure
of your tires is significantly
System under-inflated.
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
Accordingly, when the low tire approximately one minute and then
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
pressure telltale illuminates, you remain continuously illuminated.
technology to check tire pressure
should stop and check your tires as This sequence will continue upon
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
soon as possible, and inflate them subsequent vehicle start-ups as
the air pressure in your tires and
to the proper pressure. Driving on a long as the malfunction exists.
transmit tire pressure readings to a
significantly under-inflated tire When the malfunction indicator is
receiver located in the vehicle.
causes the tire to overheat and can illuminated, the system may not be
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation able to detect or signal low tire
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-64 Vehicle Care
pressure as intended. TPMS Tire Pressure Monitor tires to the recommended pressure
malfunctions may occur for a variety shown on the Tire and Loading
of reasons, including the installation
Operation Information label. See Vehicle Load
of replacement or alternate tires or This vehicle may have a Tire Limits on page 9-15.
wheels on the vehicle that prevent Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). A message to check the pressure in
the TPMS from functioning properly. The TPMS is designed to warn the a specific tire displays in the Driver
Always check the TPMS malfunction driver when a low tire pressure Information Center (DIC). The low
telltale after replacing one or more condition exists. TPMS sensors are tire pressure warning light and the
tires or wheels on your vehicle to mounted onto each tire and wheel DIC warning message come on at
ensure that the replacement or assembly, excluding the spare tire each ignition cycle until the tires are
alternate tires and wheels allow the and wheel assembly. The TPMS inflated to the correct inflation
TPMS to continue to function sensors monitor the air pressure in pressure. If the vehicle has DIC
properly. the tires and transmit the tire buttons, tire pressure levels can be
See Tire Pressure Monitor pressure readings to a receiver viewed. For additional information
Operation on page 10-64. located in the vehicle. and details about the DIC operation
and displays, see Driver Information
Federal Communications Center (DIC) (Base Level) on
Commission (FCC) Rules and page 5-29 or Driver Information
with Industry Canada Center (DIC) (Uplevel) on page 5-31
Standards and Tire Messages on page 5-40.
See Radio Frequency Statement on The low tire pressure warning light
page 13-15. may come on in cool weather when
When a low tire pressure condition the vehicle is first started, and then
is detected, the TPMS illuminates turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
the low tire pressure warning light could be an early indicator that the
located on the instrument cluster. air pressure is getting low and
If the warning light comes on, stop needs to be inflated to the proper
as soon as possible and inflate the pressure.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-65
A Tire and Loading Information label light and the DIC message
shows the size of the original Caution (Continued) should go off after the road tire
equipment tires and the correct is replaced and the sensor
inflation pressure for the tires when the GM-approved tire sealant matching process is performed
they are cold. See Vehicle Load available through your dealer or successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Limits on page 9-15, for an example included in the vehicle. Matching Process" later in this
of the Tire and Loading Information section.
label and its location. Also see Tire TPMS Malfunction Light and . The TPMS sensor matching
Pressure on page 10-61. Message process was not done or not
The TPMS can warn about a low The TPMS will not function properly completed successfully after
tire pressure condition but it does if one or more of the TPMS sensors rotating the tires. The
not replace normal tire are missing or inoperable. When the malfunction light and the DIC
maintenance. See Tire Inspection system detects a malfunction, the message should go off after
on page 10-67, Tire Rotation on low tire pressure warning light successfully completing the
page 10-68 and Tires on flashes for about one minute and sensor matching process. See
page 10-52. then stays on for the remainder of "TPMS Sensor Matching
the ignition cycle. A DIC warning Process" later in this section.
{ Caution message also displays. The . One or more TPMS sensors are
malfunction light and DIC warning missing or damaged. The
Tire sealant materials are not all message come on at each ignition malfunction light and the DIC
the same. A non-approved tire cycle until the problem is corrected. message should go off when the
sealant could damage the TPMS Some of the conditions that can TPMS sensors are installed and
sensors. TPMS sensor damage cause these to come on are: the sensor matching process is
caused by using an incorrect tire . performed successfully. See
One of the road tires has been
sealant is not covered by the your dealer for service.
replaced with the spare tire. The
vehicle warranty. Always use only spare tire does not have a
(Continued) TPMS sensor. The malfunction
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-66 Vehicle Care

. Replacement tires or wheels do should be performed after replacing 3. Uplevel DIC Only: Make sure the
not match the original equipment a spare tire with a road tire Tire Pressure info page option is
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels containing the TPMS sensor. The turned on. The info pages on the
other than those recommended malfunction light and the DIC DIC can be turned on and off
could prevent the TPMS from message should go off at the next through the Settings menu. See
functioning properly. See Buying ignition cycle. The sensors are Driver Information Center (DIC)
New Tires on page 10-71. matched to the tire/wheel positions, (Base Level) on page 5-29 or
. Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire, (Uplevel) on page 5-31.
wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger 4. If the vehicle has an uplevel
TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear. DIC, use the DIC controls on the
sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to right side of the steering wheel
purchase a relearn tool. to scroll to the Tire Pressure
If the TPMS is not functioning
properly, it cannot detect or signal a There are two minutes to match the screen under the DIC info page.
low tire condition. See your dealer first tire/wheel position, and If the vehicle has a base level
for service if the TPMS malfunction five minutes overall to match all four DIC, use the trip odometer reset
light and DIC message come on tire/wheel positions. If it takes stem to scroll to the Tire
and stay on. longer, the matching process stops Pressure screen.
and must be restarted.
TPMS Sensor Matching
The TPMS sensor matching
Process process is:
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
1. Set the parking brake.
identification code. The identification
code needs to be matched to a new 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
tire/wheel position after rotating the the engine off.
vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
more of the TPMS sensors. Also,
the TPMS sensor matching process
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-67
5. If the vehicle has an uplevel 8. Proceed to the passenger side Tire Inspection
DIC, press and hold the V (Set/ front tire, and repeat the
Reset) button located in the procedure in Step 7. We recommend that the tires,
center of the DIC controls. including the spare tire, if the
9. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the vehicle has one, be inspected
If the vehicle has a base level for signs of wear or damage at
DIC, press and hold the trip procedure in Step 7.
least once a month.
odometer reset stem for about 10. Proceed to the driver side rear
five seconds. A message asking tire, and repeat the procedure Replace the tire if:
if the process should begin in Step 7. The horn sounds two
should appear. Select yes and
. The indicators at three or
times to indicate the sensor
press the trip odometer reset identification code has been
more places around the tire
stem to confirm the selection. matched to the driver side rear can be seen.
The horn sounds twice to signal tire, and the TPMS sensor . There is cord or fabric
the receiver is in relearn mode matching process is no longer showing through the tire's
and the TIRE LEARNING active. The TIRE LEARNING rubber.
ACTIVE message displays on ACTIVE message on the DIC
the DIC screen. display screen goes off. . The tread or sidewall is
11. Turn the ignition switch to cracked, cut, or snagged
6. Start with the driver side deep enough to show cord or
front tire. LOCK/OFF.
fabric.
7. Place the relearn tool against 12. Set all four tires to the
the tire sidewall, near the valve recommended air pressure . The tire has a bump, bulge,
stem. Then press the button to level as indicated on the Tire or split.
activate the TPMS sensor. and Loading Information label.
A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-68 Vehicle Care

. The tire has a puncture, cut, See When It Is Time for New
or other damage that cannot Tires on page 10-70 and Wheel
be repaired well because of Replacement on page 10-75.
the size or location of the
damage. If your vehicle has dual rear
wheels, also see Dual Tire
Tire Rotation Rotation on page 10-70.
Tires should be rotated every

12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-3.
Tires are rotated to achieve a Use this rotation pattern when
uniform wear for all tires. The rotating the tires if the vehicle
first rotation is the most has dual rear wheels (except
important. polished forged aluminum
wheels).
Anytime unusual wear is
noticed, rotate the tires as soon Vehicles with polished forged
as possible, check for proper tire aluminum dual wheels have
inflation pressure, and check for Use this rotation pattern when three unique wheels; a front, a
damaged tires or wheels. If the rotating the tires if the vehicle rear outer and a rear inner.
unusual wear continues after the has single rear wheels. These wheels cannot be rotated
rotation, check the wheel to another position, however,
alignment. they can be rotated from left to
right to the same position.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-69
Loading Information label after Lightly coat the center of the

the tires have been rotated. See wheel hub with wheel bearing
Tire Pressure on page 10-61 grease after a wheel change or
and Vehicle Load Limits on tire rotation to prevent corrosion
page 9-15. or rust build-up. Do not get
Check that all wheel nuts are grease on the flat wheel
properly tightened. See “Wheel mounting surface or on the
Nut Torque” under Capacities wheel nuts or bolts.
and Specifications on Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
page 12-2. System (TPMS), if the vehicle
has one. See Tire Pressure
Use this rotation pattern when { Warning Monitor Operation on
rotating the tires if the vehicle page 10-64.
has polished forged aluminum Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can Check that the spare tire, if the
dual rear wheels. The spare vehicle has one, is stored
wheel can be used in any make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come properly. Push, pull, and then try
position and can be rotated with to rotate or turn the tire. If it
off and cause an accident. When
the rear inner wheels. moves, tighten the cable. See
changing a wheel, remove any
When installing dual wheels, rust or dirt from places where the “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
check that the vent holes in the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In Tools” under Tire Changing on
inner and outer wheels on each an emergency, a cloth or a paper page 10-79.
side are lined up. towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
Adjust the front and rear tires to remove all rust or dirt.
the recommended inflation
pressure on the Tire and
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-70 Vehicle Care
Dual Tire Rotation

{ Warning
When the vehicle is new,
or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt, If the vehicle is operated with a
or wheel nut is replaced, check the tire that is underinflated, the tire
wheel nut torque after can overheat. An overheated tire
160, 1 600, and 10 000 km can lose air suddenly or catch
(100, 1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. fire. You or others could be
For proper torque and wheel nut injured. Properly inflate all tires,
tightening information, see including the spare.
“Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire” under Tire
Changing on page 10-79. See Tire Pressure on page 10-61,
for information on proper tire Treadwear indicators are one way to
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup inflation. tell when it is time for new tires.
generally wears faster than the Treadwear indicators appear when
inner tire. Tires last longer and wear When It Is Time for New the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
more evenly if they are rotated. See or less of tread remaining. Some
Tire Inspection on page 10-67 and Tires
commercial truck tires may not have
Tire Rotation on page 10-68. Also Factors, such as maintenance, treadwear indicators. See Tire
see Maintenance Schedule on temperatures, driving speeds, Inspection on page 10-67 and Tire
page 11-3. vehicle loading, and road conditions Rotation on page 10-68 for
affect the wear rate of the tires. additional information.
The rubber in tires ages over time.
This also applies to the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
never used. Multiple factors
including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-71
maintenance affect how fast aging Parking for an extended period can traction control, and tire
takes place. GM recommends that cause flat spots on the tires that pressure monitoring
tires, including the spare if may result in vibrations while performance. GM's TPC Spec
equipped, be replaced after six driving. When storing a vehicle for number is molded onto the tire's
years, regardless of tread wear. The at least a month, remove the tires or
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tire manufacturer date is the last raise the vehicle to reduce the
four digits of the DOT Tire weight from the tires. tires have an all-season tread
Identification Number (TIN) which is design, the TPC Spec number
molded into one side of the tire Buying New Tires will be followed by MS for mud
sidewall. The first two digits and snow. See Tire Sidewall
represent the week (01-52) and the GM has developed and matched Labeling on page 10-54 for
last two digits, the year. For specific tires for the vehicle. The additional information.
example, the third week of the year original equipment tires installed
2010 would have a four-digit DOT were designed to meet General GM recommends replacing worn
date of 0310. Motors Tire Performance Criteria tires in complete sets of four (six
Specification (TPC Spec) for dual rear wheels). Uniform
Vehicle Storage tread depth on all tires will help
system rating. When
Tires age when stored normally replacement tires are needed, to maintain the performance of
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park GM strongly recommends the vehicle. Braking and
a vehicle that will be stored for at handling performance may be
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
buying tires with the same TPC
Spec rating. adversely affected if all the tires
area away from direct sunlight to are not replaced at the same
slow aging. This area should be free GM's exclusive TPC Spec time. If proper rotation and
of grease, gasoline or other system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
substances that can deteriorate critical specifications that impact
rubber. all four tires (six for dual rear
the overall performance of the wheels) should wear out at
vehicle, including brake system about the same time. See Tire
performance, ride and handling, Rotation on page 10-68 for
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-72 Vehicle Care
information on proper tire

rotation. However, if it is { Warning { Warning
necessary to replace only one Mixing tires of different sizes, Using bias-ply tires on the
axle set of worn tires, place the brands, or types may cause vehicle may cause the wheel
new tires on the rear axle (two loss of control of the vehicle, rim flanges to develop cracks
for single rear wheels, four for resulting in a crash or other after many miles of driving.
dual rear wheels). vehicle damage. Use the A tire and/or wheel could fail
correct size, brand, and type suddenly and cause a crash.
{ Warning of tires on all wheels. Use only radial-ply tires with
Tires could explode during This vehicle may have a the wheels on the vehicle.
improper service. Attempting different size spare than the
to mount or dismount a tire road tires originally installed If the vehicle tires must be
could cause injury or death. on the vehicle. When new, the replaced with a tire that does not
Only your dealer or authorized vehicle included a spare tire have a TPC Spec number, make
tire service center should and wheel assembly with a sure they are the same size,
mount or dismount the tires. similar overall diameter as the load range, speed rating, and
road tires and wheels, so it is construction (radial) as the
all right to drive on it. The original tires.
spare tire was developed for Vehicles that have a tire
use on this vehicle and will not pressure monitoring system
affect vehicle handling. could give an inaccurate
low-pressure warning if non-TPC
Spec rated tires are installed.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10-63.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-73
The Tire and Loading Uniform Tire Quality

Information label indicates the { Warning Grading
original equipment tires on the If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits Quality grades can be found
there may not be an acceptable
on page 9-15 for the label level of performance and safety if
where applicable on the tire
location and more information tires not recommended for those sidewall between tread shoulder
about the Tire and Loading wheels are selected. This and maximum section width. For
Information label. increases the chance of a crash example:
and serious injury. Only use GM Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Different Size Tires and specific wheel and tire systems Temperature A
Wheels developed for the vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a The following information relates
If wheels or tires are installed that GM certified technician. to the system developed by the
are a different size than the original United States National Highway
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle Traffic Safety Administration
performance, including its braking, See Buying New Tires on
page 10-71 and Accessories and (NHTSA), which grades tires by
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover Modifications on page 10-3. treadwear, traction, and
may be affected. If the vehicle has temperature performance. This
electronic systems such as antilock applies only to vehicles sold in
brakes, rollover airbags, traction the United States. The grades
control, electronic stability control, are molded on the sidewalls of
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance most passenger car tires. The
of these systems can also be Uniform Tire Quality Grading
affected. (UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter tires,
compact spare tires, tires with
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-74 Vehicle Care
nominal rim diameters of graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include
or to some limited-production the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
tires. graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
While the tires available on performance of tires depends characteristics.
General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of
Temperature
and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A
respect to these grades, they
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C,
must also conform to federal
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance
safety requirements and
differences in road to the generation of heat and its
additional General Motors Tire
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
Performance Criteria (TPC)
tested under controlled
standards. Traction conditions on a specified indoor
All Passenger Car Tires Must The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Conform to Federal Safety highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
Requirements In Addition To and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
These Grades. the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
Treadwear pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade
The treadwear grade is a specified government test C corresponds to a level of
comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and performance which all
wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet
under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety
specified government test Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and
course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-75
performance on the laboratory road, the tires and wheels might

test wheel than the minimum need to be rebalanced. See your { Warning
required by law. Warning: The dealer for proper diagnosis.
Using the wrong replacement
temperature grade for this tire is wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
established for a tire that is Wheel Replacement nuts can be dangerous. It could
properly inflated and not Replace any wheel that is bent, affect the braking and handling of
overloaded. Excessive speed, cracked, or badly rusted or the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
underinflation, or excessive corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming and cause loss of control, causing
loading, either separately or in loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and a crash. Always use the correct
combination, can cause heat wheel nuts should be replaced. wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
buildup and possible tire failure. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. nuts for replacement.
Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
Wheel Alignment and Tire these conditions exist.
Balance Your dealer will know the kind of { Caution
The tires and wheels were aligned wheel that is needed.
The wrong wheel can also cause
and balanced at the factory to Each new wheel should have the
provide the longest tire life and best problems with bearing life, brake
same load-carrying capacity, cooling, speedometer or
overall performance. Adjustments to diameter, width, offset and be
wheel alignment and tire balancing odometer calibration, headlamp
mounted the same way as the one it aim, bumper height, vehicle
will not be necessary on a regular replaces.
basis. However, check the ground clearance, and tire or tire
alignment if there is unusual tire Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel chain clearance to the body and
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor chassis.
one side or the other. If the vehicle System (TPMS) sensors with new
vibrates when driving on a smooth GM original equipment parts.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-76 Vehicle Care
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt, Tire Chains Warning (Continued)

or wheel nut is replaced on a dual
wheel setup, check the wheel nut
torque after 160, 1 600 and { Warning and road conditions. Follow that
10 000 km (100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi) manufacturer's instructions. To
If the vehicle has dual wheels or help avoid damage to the vehicle,
of driving. For proper torque, see
P265/65R18, P275/55R20, drive slowly, readjust, or remove
“Wheel Nut Torque” under
LT265/70R17, LT265/70R18, the device if it is contacting the
page 12-2. LT265/60R20, P285/50R20, vehicle, and do not spin the
P285/45R22 or 285/45R22 size vehicle's wheels.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on tires, do not use tire chains. They
page 10-77 for more information. can damage the vehicle because If you do find traction devices that
there is not enough clearance. will fit, install them on the rear
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire chains used on a vehicle tires.
{ Warning without the proper amount of

clearance can cause damage to
Replacing a wheel with a used the brakes, suspension, or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged
{ Caution
one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been by the tire chains could cause you If the vehicle does not have dual
driven may be unknown. It could to lose control of the vehicle and wheels and has a tire size other
fail suddenly and cause a crash. you or others may be injured in a than P265/65R18, P275/55R20,
When replacing wheels, use a crash. LT265/70R17, LT265/70R18,
new GM original equipment Use another type of traction LT265/60R20, P285/50R20,
wheel. device only if its manufacturer P285/45R22, or 285/45R22, use
recommends it for use on the tire chains only where legal and
vehicle and tire size combination only when you must. Use chains
(Continued) (Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-77
If a Tire Goes Flat

Caution (Continued) { Warning
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
that are the proper size for the while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause
tires. Install them on the tires of are maintained properly. If air goes permanent damage to the tire.
the rear axle. Do not use chains out of a tire, it is much more likely to Re-inflating a tire after it has been
on the tires of the front axle. leak out slowly. But if there ever is a driven on while severely
Tighten them as tightly as blowout, here are a few tips about underinflated or flat may cause a
possible with the ends securely what to expect and what to do: blowout and a serious crash.
fastened. Drive slowly and follow If a front tire fails, the flat tire Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
the chain manufacturer's creates a drag that pulls the vehicle that has been driven on while
instructions. If you can hear the toward that side. Take your foot off severely underinflated or flat.
chains contacting the vehicle, the accelerator pedal and grip the Have your dealer or an authorized
stop and retighten them. If the steering wheel firmly. Steer to tire service center repair or
contact continues, slow down maintain lane position, and then replace the flat tire as soon as
until it stops. Driving too fast or gently brake to a stop, well off the possible.
spinning the wheels with chains road, if possible.
on will damage the vehicle. A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction as
{ Warning
used in a skid. Stop pressing the Lifting a vehicle and getting under
accelerator pedal and steer to it to do maintenance or repairs is
straighten the vehicle. It may be dangerous without the
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake appropriate safety equipment and
to a stop, well off the road, training. If a jack is provided with
if possible.
the vehicle, it is designed only for
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-78 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued) { Warning Warning (Continued)

changing a flat tire. If it is used for Changing a tire can be 6. Place wheel blocks on both
anything else, you or others could dangerous. The vehicle can slip sides of the tire at the
be badly injured or killed if the off the jack and roll over or fall opposite corner of the tire
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack causing injury or death. Find a being changed.
is provided with the vehicle, only level place to change the tire. To
use it for changing a flat tire. help prevent the vehicle from When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
moving: use the following example as a
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 1. Set the parking brake firmly. guide to assist in the placement of
and wheel damage by driving slowly the wheel blocks (1).
2. Put an automatic
to a level place, well off the road, transmission in P (Park) or a
if possible. Turn on the hazard manual transmission in
warning flashers. See Hazard 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
Warning Flashers on page 6-4.
3. For four-wheel-drive
vehicles, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive
gear– not in N (Neutral).
4. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle 1. Wheel Block
is raised.
2. Flat Tire
5. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle. The following information explains
how to use the jack and change
(Continued)
a tire.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-79
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
Regular Cab Extended Cab

1. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel 1. Wheel Blocks
Blocks 2. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit
2. Wheel Blocks 3. Tool Kit
Crew Cab
3. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit 4. Jack
1. Wheel Blocks
4. Tool Kit 5. Jack Knob
2. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit
5. Jack
3. Tool Kit
6. Jack Knob
4. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel
Blocks
5. Jack
6. Jack Knob
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-80 Vehicle Care
For regular cab models, the 1. Open the spare tire lock cover
equipment you will need is behind on the bumper and use the
the passenger seat. For extended ignition key to remove the spare
and crew cab models, the tire lock (10). To remove the
equipment is on the shelf behind the spare tire lock, insert the ignition
passenger side second row seat. key turn and pull straight out.
1. Turn the knob on the jack
counterclockwise to lower the
jack head to release the jack
from its holder.
2. Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise to remove the
1. Spare Tire (Valve Stem
wheel blocks and the wheel
Pointed Down)
block retainer.
2. Tire/Wheel Retainer
3. Turn the wing nut used to retain
the storage bag and tools 3. Hoist Cable 2. Assemble the wheel wrench (7)
counterclockwise to remove it. 4. Hoist Assembly and the two jack handle
extensions (6), as shown.
Use the jack handle extensions and 5. Hoist Shaft
the wheel wrench to remove the
underbody-mounted spare tire. 6. Jack Handle Extensions
7. Wheel Wrench
8. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped)
9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
10. Hoist End of Extension Tool
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-81
5. Pull the spare tire out from under

the vehicle.
3. Insert the hoist end (open

end) (10) of the extension
through the hole (9) in the rear
bumper. 6. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle 1. Jack
Do not use the chiseled end of with some slack in the cable to
2. Wheel Blocks
the wheel wrench. access the tire/wheel retainer.
3. Jack Handle
Be sure the hoist end of the Tilt the retainer and pull it
extension (10) connects to the through the center of the wheel 4. Jack Handle Extension
hoist shaft. The ribbed square along with the cable and spring. 5. Wheel Wrench
end of the extension is used to 7. Put the spare tire near the The tools you will be using include
lower the spare tire. flat tire. the jack (1), the wheel blocks (2),
4. Turn the wheel wrench Removing the Flat Tire and the jack handle (3), the jack handle
counterclockwise to lower the Installing the Spare Tire extensions (4), and the wheel
spare tire to the ground. wrench (5).
Continue to turn the wheel Use the following pictures and
instructions to remove the flat tire 1. Do a safety check before
wrench until the spare tire can proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
be pulled out from under the and raise the vehicle.
Flat on page 10-77 for more
vehicle. information.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-82 Vehicle Care
2. If the vehicle has wheel nut

caps, loosen them by turning the
wheel wrench counterclockwise.
If the vehicle has a center cap
with wheel nut caps, the wheel
nut caps are designed to stay
with the center cap after they are
loosened. Remove the entire
center cap.
3. Use the wheel wrench and turn it

counterclockwise to loosen the
wheel nuts. Do not remove the
wheel nuts yet.
If the wheel has a smooth center

cap, place the chisel end of the
wheel wrench in the slot on the
wheel, and gently pry it out.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-83
4. Position the jack under the

vehicle, as shown. If the flat tire
is on the front of the vehicle
(1500 models), position the jack
under the bracket attached to
the vehicle's frame, behind the
flat tire.
Front Position – 1500 Models Rear Position – 1500 Models

5. If the flat tire is on the rear, for
1500 models position the jack
under the rear axle about 5 cm
(2 in) inboard of the shock
absorber bracket.
Front Position – All Other Models

Position the jack under the
vehicle, as shown. If the flat tire
is on the front of the vehicle (all
other models), position the jack
on the frame behind the flat tire.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-84 Vehicle Care
the ground so there is enough

{ Warning room for the spare tire to fit
under the wheel well.
Getting under a vehicle when it is
lifted on a jack is dangerous.
If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle
when it is supported only by
a jack.
Rear Position – All Other Models { Warning

For all other models, position the
jack under the rear axle between Raising the vehicle with the jack
the spring anchor and the shock improperly positioned can
absorber bracket. damage the vehicle and even 7. Remove all the wheel nuts and
make the vehicle fall. To help take off the flat tire.
If a snow plow has been added
avoid personal injury and vehicle
to the front of the vehicle, lower
the snow plow fully before
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift { Warning
raising the vehicle. head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
Make sure that the jack head is parts to which it is fastened, can
positioned so that the rear axle make wheel nuts become loose
is resting securely between the 6. Turn the wheel wrench
after time. The wheel could come
grooves that are on the clockwise to raise the vehicle.
Raise the vehicle far enough off off and cause an accident. When
jack head.
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-85
Warning (Continued) { Warning Warning (Continued)

changing a wheel, remove any Never use oil or grease on bolts come off and cause a crash.
rust or dirt from places where the or nuts because the nuts might If any stud is damaged because
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In come loose. The vehicle's wheel of a loose-running wheel, it could
an emergency, a cloth or a paper could fall off, causing a crash. be that all of the studs are
towel can be used; however, use damaged. To be sure, replace all
a scraper or wire brush later to 10. Put the wheel nuts back on studs on the wheel. If the stud
remove all rust or dirt. with the rounded end of the holes in a wheel have become
nuts toward the wheel. larger, the wheel could collapse in
operation. Replace any wheel if
11. Tighten each wheel nut by its stud holes have become larger
hand. Then use the wheel or distorted in any way. Inspect
wrench to tighten the nuts until
hubs and hub‐piloted wheels for
the wheel is held against
damage. Because of loose
the hub.
running wheels, piloting pad
12. Turn the wheel wrench damage may occur and require
counterclockwise to lower the replacement of the entire hub, for
vehicle. Lower the jack proper centering of the wheels.
completely. When replacing studs, hubs,
wheel nuts or wheels, be sure to
{ Warning use GM original equipment parts.
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the If wheel studs are damaged, they
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, can break. If all the studs on a
and spare wheel. wheel broke, the wheel could
9. Install the spare tire. (Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-86 Vehicle Care
service whenever you have a tire

{ Warning Caution (Continued) removed or serviced. See
Wheel nuts that are improperly or sequence and to the proper page 12-2.
incorrectly tightened can cause torque specification. See
the wheels to become loose or Capacities and Specifications for When reinstalling the regular wheel
come off. The wheel nuts should the wheel nut torque specification. and tire, also reinstall either the
be tightened with a torque wrench center cap, or bolt-on hub cap,
to the proper torque specification depending on what the vehicle is
equipped with. For center caps,
after replacing. Follow the torque
place the cap on the wheel and tap
specification supplied by the
it into place until it seats flush with
aftermarket manufacturer when the wheel. The cap only goes on
using accessory locking wheel one way. Be sure to line up the tab
nuts. See Capacities and on the center cap with the
Specifications on page 12-2 for indentation on the wheel. For
original equipment wheel nut bolt-on hub caps, align the plastic
torque specifications. nut caps with the wheel nuts and
then tighten by hand. Then use the
13. Tighten the nuts firmly in a wheel wrench to tighten.
crisscross sequence, as
{ Caution shown, by turning the wheel
wrench clockwise.
Improperly tightened wheel nuts
can lead to brake pulsation and For vehicles with dual wheels, have
a technician check the wheel nut
rotor damage. To avoid expensive
tightness of all wheels with a torque
brake repairs, evenly tighten the
wrench after the first 160 km
wheel nuts in the proper (100 mi) and then 1 600 km
(Continued) (1,000 mi) after that. Repeat this
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-87
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire Store the tire under the rear of the 10. Hoist End of Extension Tool
and Tools vehicle in the spare tire carrier. 1. Put the tire on the ground at the
rear of the vehicle with the valve
{ Warning stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
2. Pull the cable and spring
equipment in the passenger
through the center of the wheel.
compartment of the vehicle could
Tilt the wheel retainer plate
cause injury. In a sudden stop or down and through the center
collision, loose equipment could wheel.
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place. Make sure the retainer is fully
seated across the underside of
the wheel.
{ Caution 1. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)
Storing an aluminum wheel with a
2. Tire/Wheel Retainer
flat tire under your vehicle for an
extended period of time or with 3. Hoist Cable
the valve stem pointing up can 4. Hoist Assembly
damage the wheel. Always stow
the wheel with the valve stem 5. Hoist Shaft
pointing down and have the 6. Jack Handle Extensions
wheel/tire repaired as soon as 7. Wheel Wrench 3. Attach the wheel wrench (7) and
possible. extensions (6) together, as
8. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped) shown.
9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-88 Vehicle Care
To store the jack and jack tools:
4. Insert the hoist end (10) through

the hole (9) in the rear bumper
and onto the hoist shaft.
Do not use the chiseled end of 7. Make sure the tire is stored
the wheel wrench. securely. Push, pull, and then try
to turn the tire. If the tire moves, 1. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Blocks
Make sure the retainer is seated use the wheel wrench to tighten
in the wheel opening. the cable. 2. Wheel Blocks
6. Raise the tire fully against the 8. Reinstall the spare tire lock, 3. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit
underside of the vehicle by if the vehicle has one.
4. Wheel Wrench and Extensions
turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until you hear two 5. Tool Bag
clicks or feel it skip twice. You 6. Jack Mounting Bracket
cannot overtighten the cable. 7. Jack
8. Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-89
1. Put the tools (4) in the tool For instructions on how to remove,
bag (5) and place them in the install, or store a spare tire, see Tire Caution (Continued)
retaining bracket (3). Changing on page 10-79.
four-wheel drive when a different
2. Tighten down the wing nut (3). If equipped with a temporary use size spare tire is installed on the
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (2) full-size spare tire, it is indicated on vehicle.
and jack (7) together with the the tire sidewall. See Tire Sidewall
wing nut (1) and retaining Labeling on page 10-54. This spare
tire should not be driven on over The vehicle may have a different
bolt (8). size spare tire than the road tires
112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h
4. Position the jack (7) in the (55 mph) when pulling a trailer, at originally installed on the vehicle.
mounting bracket (6). Position the proper inflation pressure. This spare tire was developed for
the holes in the base of the Repair and replace the road tire as use on this vehicle, so it is all right
jack (7) onto the pin in the soon as it is convenient, and stow to drive on it. If the vehicle has
mounting bracket (6). the spare tire for future use. four-wheel drive and a different size
spare tire is installed, drive only in
5. Return them to their original
two-wheel drive.
location in the vehicle. See { Caution
“Removing the Spare Tire and After installing the spare tire on the
Tools.” If the vehicle has four-wheel drive vehicle, stop as soon as possible
and a different size spare tire is and check that the spare tire is
Full-Size Spare Tire installed, do not drive in correctly inflated.
four-wheel drive until the flat tire
If this vehicle came with a full-size is repaired and/or replaced. The
spare tire, it was fully inflated when vehicle could be damaged and
new, however, it can lose air over
the repairs would not be covered
time. Check the inflation pressure
by the warranty. Never use
regularly. See Tire Pressure on
page 10-61 and Vehicle Load Limits (Continued)
on page 9-15.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-90 Vehicle Care
Have the damaged or flat road tire Jump Starting

repaired or replaced and installed { Caution
back onto the vehicle as soon as For more information about the
possible so the spare tire will be vehicle battery, see Battery on Ignoring these steps could result
available in case it is needed again. page 10-30. in costly damage to the vehicle
that would not be covered by the
Do not mix tires and wheels of If the vehicle's battery (or batteries) vehicle warranty. Trying to start
different sizes, because they will not has run down, you may want to use the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
fit. Keep your spare tire and its another vehicle and some jumper
will not work, and it could damage
wheel together. If the vehicle has a cables to start your vehicle. Be sure
the vehicle.
spare tire that does not match the to use the following steps to do it
original road tires and wheels in size safely.
and type, do not include the spare in 1. Check the other vehicle. It must
the tire rotation. { Warning have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because: { Caution
. They contain acid that can
burn you. If the other vehicle does not have
a 12-volt system with a negative
. They contain gas that can ground, both vehicles can be
explode or ignite. damaged. Only use a vehicle that
. They contain enough has a 12-volt system with a
electricity to burn you. negative ground for jump starting.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-91
2. If you have a vehicle with a procedure. Put the automatic avoid sparks and help save both
diesel engine with two batteries, transmission in P (Park) or a batteries. And it could save the
you should know before you manual transmission in Neutral radio!
begin that, especially in cold before setting the parking brake. 5. Open the hood on the other
weather, you may not be able to If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle and locate the
get enough power from a single vehicle, be sure the transfer positive (+) and negative (−)
battery in another vehicle to start case is in a drive gear, not in terminal locations on that
your diesel engine. If your N (Neutral). vehicle.
vehicle has more than one
battery, using the battery that is
closer to the starter will reduce
{ Caution The positive (+) terminal is under
a red plastic cover at the positive
electrical resistance. This is If any accessories are left on or battery post. To uncover the
located on the passenger side, plugged in during the jump positive (+) terminal, open the
in the rear of the engine starting procedure, they could be red plastic cover.
compartment. damaged. The repairs would not For more information on the
3. Get the vehicles close enough be covered by the vehicle location of the remote
so the jumper cables can reach, warranty. Whenever possible, turn positive (+) and remote negative
but be sure the vehicles are not off or unplug all accessories on (−) terminals, see Engine
touching each other. If they are, either vehicle when jump starting. Compartment Overview on
it could cause an unwanted page 10-5.
ground connection. You would
4. Turn off the ignition on both
not be able to start your vehicle,
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
and the bad grounding could
accessories plugged into the
damage the electrical systems.
accessory power outlets. Turn
To avoid the possibility of the off the radio and all the lamps
vehicles rolling, set the parking that are not needed. This will
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-92 Vehicle Care
6. Check that the jumper cables do

{ Warning Warning (Continued) not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
An electric fan can start up even add water to take care of that get a shock. The vehicles could
when the engine is not running first. If you do not, explosive gas be damaged too.
and can injure you. Keep hands, could be present.
clothing and tools away from any Before you connect the cables,
Battery fluid contains acid that here are some basic things you
underhood electric fan. can burn you. Do not get it on should know. Positive (+) will go
you. If you accidentally get it in to positive (+) or to a remote
your eyes or on your skin, flush positive (+) terminal if the
{ Warning the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
vehicle has one. Negative (−)
will go to a heavy, unpainted
Using an open flame near a metal engine part or to a remote
battery can cause battery gas to negative (−) terminal if the
explode. People have been hurt vehicle has one.
doing this, and some have been { Warning Do not connect positive (+) to
blinded. Use a flashlight if you Fans or other moving engine negative (−) or you will get a
need more light. parts can injure you badly. Keep short that would damage the
Be sure the battery has enough your hands away from moving battery and maybe other parts
water. You do not need to add parts once the engine is running. too. And do not connect the
water to the battery installed in negative (−) cable to the
your new vehicle. But if a battery negative (−) terminal on the
dead battery because this can
has filler caps, be sure the right
cause sparks.
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-93
9. Connect the black negative (−)

cable to the negative (−) terminal
of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step.
10. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable as follows:
5.3L Shown, 4.3L, 6.0L, 6.2L and 6.0L

6.6L Similar ‐ To the generator bracket, on
7. Connect the red positive (+) the vehicle with the dead
cable to the positive (+) terminal battery.
of the vehicle with the dead
battery.
8. Do not let the other end touch
metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote 4.3L Shown, 5.3L and 6.2L Similar
positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one. ‐ To the metal bracket that is
bolted to the engine and
supports the resonator, on
the vehicle with the dead
battery.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-94 Vehicle Care
{ Caution Towing the Vehicle

If the jumper cables are { Caution
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting Incorrectly towing a disabled
may occur and damage the vehicle may cause damage. The
vehicle. The repairs would not be damage would not be covered by
covered by the vehicle warranty. the vehicle warranty. Do not lash
Always connect and remove the or hook to the chassis
jumper cables in the correct order, components — including the front
making sure that the cables do and rear subframes, suspension
6.6L not touch each other or other control arms, and links — during
metal. towing and recovery of a disabled
‐ To the negative (−) post on vehicle, or when securing the
the auxiliary battery, on the vehicle to a flatbed car carrier.
vehicle with the dead battery. Jumper Cable Removal
Use the proper nylon strap
11. Start the vehicle with the good Reverse the sequence exactly when harnesses around the tires to
battery and run the engine for a removing the jumper cables. secure them to the flatbed car
while. carrier.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed
start after a few tries, it car carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.
probably needs service. If a wheel lift tow truck is used, the
drive wheels cannot contact the
road while the vehicle is being
towed. A wheel dolly must be used
to lift all drive wheels off the ground.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-95
Consult your dealer or a Here are some important things to Dinghy Towing
professional towing service if the consider before recreational vehicle
disabled vehicle must be towed. towing: Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
To tow the vehicle behind another . What is the towing capacity of
vehicle for recreational purposes, the towing vehicle? Be sure to
such as behind a motor home, see read the tow vehicle
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” manufacturer's
following. recommendations.
. What is the distance that will be
Recreational Vehicle traveled? Some vehicles have
Towing restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another . Is the proper towing equipment
vehicle, such as a motor home. The going to be used? See your
two most common types of dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly equipment recommendations. { Caution
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the . Is the vehicle ready to be If the vehicle is towed with all four
vehicle with all four wheels on the towed? Just as preparing the wheels on the ground, the
ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure drivetrain components could be
vehicle with two wheels on the the vehicle is prepared to be damaged. The repairs would not
ground and two wheels up on a towed. be covered by the vehicle
device known as a dolly.
warranty. Do not tow the vehicle
with all four wheels on the
ground.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-96 Vehicle Care
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not Front Towing (Front Wheels Off

be towed with all four wheels on the { Caution the Ground) – Four-Wheel-Drive
ground. Two-wheel-drive Vehicles
transmissions have no provisions If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is
towed with the rear wheels on the See your dealer for the procedure to
for internal lubrication while being tow this vehicle.
towed. ground, the transmission could be
damaged. The repairs would not Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles be covered by the vehicle the Ground)
See your dealer for the procedure to warranty. Never tow the vehicle
tow this vehicle. with the rear wheels on the Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
ground.
Dolly Towing
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not
the Ground) – Two-Wheel-Drive be towed with the rear wheels on
Vehicles the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions
for internal lubrication while being
towed.
To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive
vehicle, the vehicle must be towed
with the rear wheels on the dolly.
See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
the Ground)” later in this section for
more information.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-97
Use the following procedure to dolly Appearance Care

tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle from Caution (Continued)
the rear:
Exterior Care products can be obtained from
1. Attach the dolly to the tow your dealer. Follow all
vehicle following the dolly Locks manufacturer directions regarding
manufacturer's instructions. Locks are lubricated at the factory. correct product usage, necessary
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the Use a de-icing agent only when safety precautions, and
dolly. absolutely necessary, and have the appropriate disposal of any
locks greased after using. See vehicle care product.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
Recommended Fluids and
See Parking Brake on
Lubricants on page 11-12.
page 9-54.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park). Washing the Vehicle { Caution
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly To preserve the vehicle's finish,
wash it often and out of direct Avoid using high-pressure
following the manufacturer's washes closer than 30 cm (12 in)
instructions. sunlight.
to the surface of the vehicle. Use
6. Use an adequate clamping of power washers exceeding
device designed for towing to { Caution 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result
ensure that the front wheels are in damage or removal of paint
Do not use petroleum-based,
locked into the straight position. and decals.
acidic, or abrasive cleaning
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. agents as they can damage the
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic This symbol e is on any
parts. If damage occurs, it would underhood compartment electrical
See your dealer for the procedure to not be covered by the vehicle
tow this vehicle. center that should not be power
warranty. Approved cleaning
(Continued)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-98 Vehicle Care
washed. This could cause damage repaired. Foreign materials such as

that would not be covered by the calcium chloride and other salts, ice { Caution
vehicle warranty. melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from Machine compounding or
If using an automatic car wash, aggressive polishing on a
follow with the car wash industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
instructions. The windshield wiper may damage it. Use only
and rear window wiper, if equipped, remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible. non-abrasive waxes and polishes
must be off. Remove any that are made for a basecoat/
accessories that may be damaged If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for clearcoat paint finish on the
or interfere with the car wash
painted surfaces to remove foreign vehicle.
equipment.
matter.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all Occasional hand waxing or mild To keep the paint finish looking new,
cleaning agents completely. If they polishing should be done to remove keep the vehicle garaged or
are allowed to dry on the surface, residue from the paint finish. See covered whenever possible.
they could stain. your dealer for approved cleaning
products. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Dry the finish with a soft, clean Moldings
chamois or an all-cotton towel to Do not apply waxes or polishes to
avoid surface scratches and water uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
{ Caution
spotting.
as damage can occur. Failure to clean and protect the
Finish Care bright metal moldings can result
Application of aftermarket clearcoat in a hazy white finish or pitting.
sealant/wax materials is not This damage would not be
recommended. If painted surfaces covered by the vehicle warranty.
are damaged, see your dealer to
have the damage assessed and
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-99
The bright metal moldings on the rinse the bedliner surface following emblems. Follow instructions under
vehicle are aluminum. To prevent a chemical spill to avoid permanent "Washing the Vehicle" in this
damage always follow these damage. section.
cleaning instructions: Spray-in bedliners can fade from Air Intakes
. Be sure the molding is cool to oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty
the touch before applying any hauling, and hard water stains. Clear debris from the air intakes,
cleaning solution. Clean it periodically by washing off between the hood and windshield,
the loose dirt and using a mild when washing the vehicle.
. Use a cleaning solution
approved for aluminum. Some detergent. To restore the original Windshield and Wiper Blades
cleaners are highly acidic or appearance, apply the bedliner
conditioner available through your Clean the outside of the windshield
contain alkaline substances and with glass cleaner.
can damage the moldings. dealer.
Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
. Always dilute a concentrated
cleaner according to the
{ Caution cloth or paper towel soaked with
windshield washer fluid or a mild
manufacturer’s instructions. Using silicone-based products detergent. Wash the windshield
. Do not use chrome cleaners. may damage the bedliner, reduce thoroughly when cleaning the
the slip-resistant texture, and blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
. Do not use cleaners that are not
attract dirt. a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
intended for automotive use.
treatments may cause wiper
. Use a nonabrasive wax on the streaking.
vehicle after washing to protect Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses and Emblems Replace the wiper blades if they are
and extend the molding finish.
worn or damaged. Damage can be
Spray-In Bedliner Care Use only lukewarm or cold water, a caused by extreme dusty
soft cloth, and a car washing soap conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
A spray-in bedliner is a permanent to clean exterior lamps, lenses, and snow, and ice.
coating that bonds to the truck bed
and cannot be removed. Promptly
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-100 Vehicle Care
Weatherstrips Wheels and Trim — Aluminum

Apply Dielectric silicone grease on or Chrome { Caution
weatherstrips to make them last Use a soft, clean cloth with mild To avoid surface damage, do not
longer, seal better, and not stick or soap and water to clean the wheels. use strong soaps, chemicals,
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips After rinsing thoroughly with clean abrasive polishes, cleaners,
once a year. Hot, dry climates may water, dry with a soft, clean towel. brushes, or cleaners that contain
require more frequent application. A wax may then be applied. acid on aluminum or
Black marks from rubber material on chrome-plated wheels. Use only
painted surfaces can be removed by
rubbing with a clean cloth. See
{ Caution approved cleaners. Also, never
drive a vehicle with aluminum or
Recommended Fluids and Chrome wheels and other chrome chrome-plated wheels through an
Lubricants on page 11-12. trim may be damaged if the automatic car wash that uses
Tires vehicle is not washed after driving silicone carbide tire cleaning
on roads that have been sprayed brushes. Damage could occur
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to with magnesium, calcium,
clean the tires. and the repairs would not be
or sodium chloride. These covered by the vehicle warranty.
chlorides are used on roads for
{ Caution conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the chrome with Steering, Suspension, and
Using petroleum-based tire Chassis Components
soap and water after exposure.
dressing products on the vehicle
may damage the paint finish and/ Visually inspect the front and rear
suspension and steering system for
or tires. When applying a tire
damaged, loose, or missing parts or
dressing, always wipe off any
signs of wear. Inspect hydraulic
overspray from all painted power steering systems for proper
surfaces on the vehicle. hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-101
chafing, etc. Visually check constant material to parts repaired or Interior Care
velocity joints, rubber boots, and replaced to restore corrosion
axle seals for leaks. protection. To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Body Component Lubrication Original manufacturer replacement Immediately remove any soils. Note
parts will provide the corrosion that newspapers or dark garments
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, protection while maintaining the
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the that can transfer color to home
vehicle warranty. furnishings can also permanently
steel fuel door hinge unless the
components are plastic. Applying Finish Damage transfer color to the vehicle's
silicone grease on weatherstrips interior.
Quickly repair minor chips and
with a clean cloth will make them scratches with touch-up materials Use a soft bristle brush to remove
last longer, seal better, and not stick available from your dealer to avoid dust from knobs and crevices on the
or squeak. corrosion. Larger areas of finish instrument cluster. Using a mild
damage can be corrected in your soap solution, immediately remove
Underbody Maintenance hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
dealer's body and paint shop.
At least twice a year, Spring and repellent from all interior surfaces or
Fall, use plain water to flush dirt and Chemical Paint Spotting permanent damage may result.
debris from the vehicle's underbody. Airborne pollutants can fall upon Your dealer may have products for
Your dealer or an underbody car and attack painted vehicle surfaces cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
washing system can do this. If not causing blotchy, ring-shaped specifically designed for the
removed, rust and corrosion can discolorations, and small, irregular surfaces being cleaned to prevent
develop. dark spots etched into the paint permanent damage. Apply all
Sheet Metal Damage surface. cleaners directly to the cleaning
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
If the vehicle is damaged and on any switches or controls.
requires sheet metal repair or Cleaners should be removed
replacement, make sure the body quickly. Never allow cleaners to
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-102 Vehicle Care
remain on the surface being 3.8 L (1 gal) of water. Cleaning the windshield with water
cleaned for extended periods A concentrated soap solution will during the first three to six months
of time. leave a residue that creates of ownership will reduce tendency
Cleaners may contain solvents that streaks and attracts dirt. Do not to fog.
can become concentrated in the use solutions that contain strong
or caustic soap. Speaker Covers
interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions . Do not heavily saturate the Vacuum around a speaker cover
on the label. While cleaning the upholstery when cleaning. gently, so that the speaker will not
interior, maintain adequate be damaged. Clean spots with just
. Do not use solvents or cleaners water and mild soap.
ventilation by opening the doors and containing solvents.
windows. Coated Moldings
To prevent damage, do not clean Interior Glass
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
the interior using the following To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
cleaners or techniques: dampened with water. Wipe droplets
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a
left behind with a clean dry cloth. sponge or soft lint-free cloth
. Never use a razor or any other dampened with water.
sharp object to remove a soil Commercial glass cleaners may be
from any interior surface. used, if necessary, after cleaning . When heavily soiled, use warm
the interior glass with plain water. soapy water.
. Never use a brush with stiff
bristles.
{ Caution
. Never rub any surface
aggressively or with excessive To prevent scratching, never use
pressure. abrasive cleaners on automotive
. Do not use laundry detergents or glass. Abrasive cleaners or
dishwashing soaps with aggressive cleaning may damage
degreasers. For liquid cleaners, the rear window defogger.
use approximately 20 drops per
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-103
Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and
Start by vacuuming the surface
center. Rotate the cleaning cloth Radio Displays
using a soft brush attachment. If a
to a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being For vehicles with high gloss
prevent forcing the soil in to the
used during vacuuming, only use it surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
following techniques: longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners
solution followed only by club or solvents. Periodically hand wash
. For solid soils, remove as much the microfiber cloth separately,
soda or plain water.
as possible prior to vacuuming. using mild soap. Do not use bleach
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to and air dry before next use.
1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
colorfast cloth with water or club cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
soda. Microfiber cloth is hidden area for colorfastness before { Caution
recommended to prevent lint using a commercial upholstery
transfer to the fabric or carpet. Do not attach a device with a
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
formation occurs, clean the entire suction cup to the display. This
2. Remove excess moisture by may cause damage and would
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not be covered by the warranty.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-104 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel, Leather, Care of Safety Belts

Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Caution (Continued)
Keep belts clean and dry.
and Low Gloss Paint Surfaces change the appearance and feel
Use a soft microfiber cloth of leather or soft trim and are not { Warning
dampened with water to remove recommended.
dust and loose dirt. For a more Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
thorough cleaning, use a soft It may severely weaken them. In
Do not use cleaners that increase
microfiber cloth dampened with a a crash, they might not be able to
gloss, especially on the instrument
mild soap solution. provide adequate protection.
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
visibility through the windshield Clean safety belts only with mild
{ Caution under certain conditions. soap and lukewarm water.
Soaking or saturating leather,

especially perforated leather, as { Caution Floor Mats
well as other interior surfaces, Use of air fresheners may cause
may cause permanent damage. permanent damage to plastics { Warning
Wipe excess moisture from these and painted surfaces. If an air
surfaces after cleaning and allow If a floor mat is the wrong size or
freshener comes in contact with is not properly installed, it can
them to dry naturally. Never use any plastic or painted surface in
heat, steam, spot lifters, or spot interfere with the pedals.
the vehicle, blot immediately and Interference with the pedals can
removers. Do not use cleaners clean with a soft cloth dampened
that contain silicone or wax-based cause unintended acceleration
with a mild soap solution. and/or increased stopping
products. Cleaners containing Damage caused by air fresheners
these solvents can permanently distance which can cause a crash
would not be covered by the and injury. Make sure the floor
(Continued) vehicle warranty. mat does not interfere with the
pedals.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care 10-105
Use the following guidelines for Removing and Replacing the

proper floor mat usage: Floor Mats
. The original equipment floor Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
mats were designed for your to unlock each retainer and remove.
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the pedals. Always
check that the floor mats do not
interfere with the pedals.
. Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat
. Use only a single floor mat on
retainer openings over the carpet
the driver side.
retainers and snapping into position.
. Do not place one floor mat on
Make sure the floor mat is properly
top of another.
secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the pedals.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
10-106 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information transportation, and online

scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance This maintenance section applies to
vehicles with a gasoline engine. For
needs.
Your dealer recognizes the
diesel engine vehicles, see the
importance of providing
General Information maintenance schedule section in
competitively priced maintenance
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 the Duramax diesel supplement.
and repair services. With trained
Your vehicle is an important technicians, the dealer is the place
Maintenance Schedule investment. This section describes for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 the required maintenance for the changes and tire rotations and
Special Application Services vehicle. Follow this schedule to help additional maintenance items like
Special Application protect against major repair tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 expenses resulting from neglect or blades.
inadequate maintenance. It may
Additional Maintenance
and Care
also help to maintain the value of
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
{ Caution
Additional Maintenance responsibility of the owner to have Damage caused by improper
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 all required maintenance performed. maintenance can lead to costly
Recommended Fluids, Your dealer has trained technicians repairs and may not be covered
Lubricants, and Parts who can perform required by the vehicle warranty.
Recommended Fluids and maintenance using genuine Maintenance intervals, checks,
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 replacement parts. They have inspections, recommended fluids,
Maintenance Replacement up-to-date tools and equipment for and lubricants are important to
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 fast and accurate diagnostics. Many keep the vehicle in good working
dealers have extended evening and condition.
Maintenance Records Saturday hours, courtesy
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
11-2 Service and Maintenance
The Tire Rotation and Required

. Use the recommended fuel. See
Services are the responsibility of the Recommended Fuel on { Warning
vehicle owner. It is recommended to page 9-70.
have your dealer perform these Performing maintenance work can
Severe Service be dangerous and can cause
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to In addition to the normal service serious injury. Perform
keep the vehicle in good working schedule, some vehicles require maintenance work only if the
condition, improves fuel economy, service more often. Severe service required information, proper tools,
and reduces vehicle emissions. is for vehicles that are: and equipment are available.
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic If they are not, see your dealer to
Because of the way people use
in hot weather. have a trained technician do the
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
There may need to be more work. See Doing Your Own
. Mainly driven in hilly or Service Work on page 10-3.
frequent checks and services. mountainous terrain.
Normal Service . Frequently towing a trailer.
All maintenance services, including . Used for high-speed or
those listed under Additional competitive driving.
Required Services, are for . Used for taxi, police, or delivery
vehicles that:
service.
. Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-15.
. Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Maintenance for more than a year. The engine oil

and filter must be changed at least
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Schedule once a year and the oil life system Replacement may also be needed if
must be reset. Your trained dealer there is a reduction in air flow,
Owner Checks and Services technician can perform this work. excessive window fogging, or odors.
At Each Fuel Stop If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle Tire Rotation and Required
. Check the engine oil level. See within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the Services Every 12 000 km/
Engine Oil on page 10-10. last service. Reset the oil life 7,500 mi
Once a Month system when the oil is changed. Rotate the tires, if recommended for
See Engine Oil Life System on the vehicle, and perform the
. Check the tire inflation page 10-13.
pressures. See Tire Pressure on following services. See Tire
page 10-61. Passenger Compartment Air Rotation on page 10-68.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See Filter . Check engine oil level and oil
Tire Inspection on page 10-67. life percentage. If needed,
The passenger compartment air
change engine oil and filter, and
. Check the windshield washer filter removes dust, pollen, and
reset oil life system. See Engine
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on other airborne irritants from outside
Oil on page 10-10 and Engine
page 10-27. air that is pulled into the vehicle.
Oil Life System on page 10-13.
The filter should be replaced as part
Engine Oil Change of routine scheduled maintenance. . Check engine coolant level. See
Inspect the passenger compartment Engine Coolant on page 10-20.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message displays, have the air filter every 36 000 km/ . Check windshield washer fluid
engine oil and filter changed within 22,500 miles or two years, level. See Washer Fluid on
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven whichever comes first. Replace if page 10-27.
under the best conditions, the necessary. More frequent
engine oil life system might not replacement may be needed if the
indicate the need for vehicle service vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. Visually inspect windshield wiper . Visually inspect fuel system for . Visually inspect gas strut for
blades for wear, cracking, damage or leaks. signs of wear, cracks, or other
or contamination. See Exterior . Visually inspect exhaust system damage. Check the hold open
Care on page 10-97. Replace and nearby heat shields for ability of the strut. See your
worn or damaged wiper blades. loose or damaged parts. dealer if service is required.
See Wiper Blade Replacement . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
on page 10-37. . Lubricate body components. See
Exterior Care on page 10-97. if equipped. See Sunroof on
. Check tire inflation pressures. page 2-22.
See Tire Pressure on . Check starter switch. See Starter
Switch Check on page 10-35.
. Verify spare tire key lock
page 10-61. operation and lubricate as
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire . Check automatic transmission needed. See Tire Changing on
Inspection on page 10-67. shift lock control function. See page 10-79.
Automatic Transmission Shift
. Visually check for fluid leaks. Lock Control Function Check on
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. page 10-36.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on . Check ignition transmission lock.
page 10-17. See Ignition Transmission Lock
. Inspect brake system. Check on page 10-36.
. Visually inspect steering, . Check parking brake and
suspension, and chassis automatic transmission park
components for damaged, loose, mechanism. See Park Brake and
or missing parts or signs of P (Park) Mechanism Check on
wear. See Exterior Care on page 10-36.
page 10-97. . Check accelerator pedal for
. Check restraint system damage, high effort, or binding.
components. See Safety System Replace if needed.
Check on page 3-20.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
4WD. (4)
@
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Footnotes — Maintenance (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (5) Or every five years, whichever
Schedule Additional Required and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first. See Cooling System on
Services — Normal routing, and condition. page 10-18.
(1) Or every two years, whichever (3) Or every four years, whichever (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. More frequent comes first. comes first. Inspect for fraying,
replacement may be needed if the excessive cracking, or damage;
(4) Do not directly power wash the
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy transfer case output seals. High replace, if needed.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, pressure water can overcome the (7) Or every 10 years, whichever
seals and contaminate the transfer comes first.
Replacement may also be needed if
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
there is a reduction in air flow, decrease the life of the transfer
excessive window fogging, or odors. case and should be replaced.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@ @ @
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
4WD. (4)
@ @ @
Extreme Service: Change transfer case fluid,
if equipped with 4WD. (5)
@ @ @ @ @ @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (6) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (7) @
Replace brake fluid. (8) @
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Footnotes — Maintenance (4) Extreme service. For vehicles Special Application

Schedule Additional Required mainly driven off-road in four-wheel
Services — Severe drive or used in farming, mining, Services
(1) Or every two years, whichever forestry, Department of Natural . Vehicles with Dual Wheels:
comes first. More frequent Resources (DNR), or snow plowing.
Check dual wheel nut torque at
replacement may be needed if the (5) Or every five years, whichever 160 km/100 mi, 1 600 km/
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy comes first. See Cooling System on 1,000 mi and 9 700 km/6,000 mi.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, page 10-18. . Severe Commercial Use
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
Replacement may also be needed if
comes first. Inspect for fraying, components every 5 000 km/
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive cracking, or damage; 3,000 mi.
excessive window fogging, or odors.
replace, if needed. . Have underbody flushing service
(1) Check all fuel and vapor lines
(7) Or every 10 years, whichever performed once a year.
and hoses for proper hook-up,
comes first.
routing, and condition.
(2) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(3) Do not directly power wash the
transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the
seals and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
It is recommended that your dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
perform these services — their corrosion-free.
trained dealer technicians know Fluids
your vehicle best. Your dealer can Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
also perform a thorough . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
assessment with a multi-point squeak or show signs of and components. See
inspection to recommend when your cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
vehicle may need attention. Lubricants on page 11-12 for GM
. Trained dealer technicians have
The following list is intended to access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
explain the services and conditions to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
to look for that may indicate recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be
services are required. replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Hoses Shocks and Struts Tires

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control Tires need to be properly inflated,
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include the tires can save money and fuel,
With a multi-point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ and can reduce the risk of tire
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer failure.
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven . Signs that the tires need to be
Lamps tire wear. replaced include three or more
. As part of the multi-point visible treadwear indicators; cord
Properly working headlamps, or fabric showing through the
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer
technicians can visually inspect rubber; cracks or cuts in the
important to see and be seen on tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
the road. the shocks and struts for signs
of leaking, blown seals, split in the tire.
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise . Trained dealer technicians can
attention include dimming, failure when service is needed. inspect and recommend the right
to light, cracking, or damage. tires. Your dealer can also
The brake lamps need to be provide tire/wheel balancing
checked periodically to ensure services to ensure smooth
that they light when braking. vehicle operation at all speeds.
. With a multi-point inspection, Your dealer sells and services
your dealer can check the lamps name brand tires.
and note any concerns.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Care Windshield

To help keep the vehicle looking like For safety, appearance, and the
new, vehicle care products are best viewing, keep the windshield
available from your dealer. For clean and clear.
information on how to clean and . Signs of damage include
protect the vehicle’s interior and scratches, cracks, and chips.
exterior, see Interior Care on
. Trained dealer technicians can
page 10-101 and Exterior Care on
page 10-97. inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
Wheel Alignment if needed.
Wheel alignment is critical for Wiper Blades
ensuring that the tires deliver
optimal wear and performance. Wiper blades need to be cleaned
and kept in good condition to
. Signs that the alignment may provide a clear view.
need to be adjusted include
pulling, improper vehicle . Signs of wear include streaking,
handling, or unusual tire wear. skipping across the windshield,
and worn or split rubber.
. Your dealer has the required
equipment to ensure proper . Trained dealer technicians can
wheel alignment. check the wiper blades and
replace them when needed.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or an
Allison Transmission, see the maintenance schedule section in the Duramax diesel supplement.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE
viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See
Engine Oil on page 10-10.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-20.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in
Canada 19299819).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021185, in Canada 89021186).
(HD Only)
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Floor Shift Linkage Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Front Axle (1500 Series) – SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021671, in
Four-Wheel Drive Canada 89021672).
Front Axle (2500/3500) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, in
Canada 89021678).
Rear Axle (1500) SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, in
Canada 19300458).
Rear Axle (2500/3500) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, in
Canada 89021678).
Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Driveshaft Splines (All Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 19257121, in
1500/2500/3500 Series) and Rear Canada 19257122).
Axle Driveshaft Splines (All 1500
Series with Automatic Transmission)
Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hinge and Linkage, and Fuel Door Canada 10953474).
Hinge
Tailgate Handle Pivot Points, Hinges, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Latch Bolt, and Linkage Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in
Canada 10953437).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15908915 A3085C
Oil Filter
4.3L V6 89017525 PF63
5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 89017525 PF63
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

6.0L V8 89017524 PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 22808781 CF188
Spark Plugs
4.3L V6 12622441 41–114
5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 12622441 41–114
6.0L V8 12621258 41–110
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22754397 -
Passenger Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22754398 -
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Odometer
Reading
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Odometer
Reading
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Odometer
Reading
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2 NOTES
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-5 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-12.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
4.3L V6 1500 Series 15.1 L 15.9 qt
5.3L V8 1500 Series 15.7 L 16.6 qt
6.0L V8 2500 Series and 3500 Series 16.1 L 17.0 qt
6.2L V8 1500 Series 15.7 L 16.6 qt
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6 5.7 L 6.0 qt
5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 8.0 L 8.5 qt
6.0L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
1500 Series Standard and Short Box 98.4 L 26.0 gal
1500 Series Long Box 128.7 L 34.0 gal
2500 Series and 3500 Series Standard Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal
2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal
3500 Series Chassis Cab 240.4 L 63.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab – Front Tank 89.0 L 23.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab – Rear Tank (if equipped) 151.4 L 40.0 gal
Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Nm 140 ft lb
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap
4.3L V6 (LV3) H 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
4.3L V6 (LV1) P 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
5.3L V8 (L83) C 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
6.0L V8 (L96) G 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
6.2L V8 (L86) J 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Technical Data 12-5
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6.0L V8 Engines
V6 Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
see the Duramax diesel
supplement.
5.3L and 6.2L V8 Engines

5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
12-6 Technical Data
2 NOTES
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to GMC. Normally, any concerns with
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Radio Frequency with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting GMC, remember 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, that your concern will likely be decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without why we suggest following Step One other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call first. to you.
1-800-462-8782. In Canada, call STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
General Motors of Canada Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Customer Care Centre at dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
1-800-263-3777 (English) or sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-7854 (French). with the new vehicle. However, BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business Bureaus,
toll-free number in order to give your after following the procedure Inc.
inquiry prompt attention. Have the outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
following information available to can file with the Better Business Suite 800
give the Customer Assistance Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
representative: to enforce your rights.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
Number (VIN). This is available out-of-court program administered
from the vehicle registration or by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
title, or the plate at the top left of Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
the instrument panel and visible disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
through the windshield. the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
. Dealership name and location. the right to change eligibility
be required to resort to this informal
. Vehicle delivery date and dispute resolution program prior to limitations and/or discontinue its
present mileage. filling out a court action, use of the participation in this program.
program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call GMC encourages customers to call
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care the toll-free number for assistance.
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), However, if a customer wishes to
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French), write or e-mail GMC, the letter
participation in a no-charge or write to: should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited United States and Puerto Rico
c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited GMC Customer Assistance Center
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 P.O. Box 33172
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Detroit, MI 48232-5172
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
the review of the facts involved by www.GMC.com
an impartial third party arbiter, and The inquiry should be accompanied 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification 1-800-462-8583 (For Text
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). Telephone Devices (TTYs))
designed so that the entire dispute Roadside Assistance:
settlement process, from the time 1-888-881-3302
you file your complaint to the final From U.S. Virgin Islands:
decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe 1-800-496-9994
our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Canada Center. Any TTY user can I (Service History): View

communicate with GMC by dialing: printable dealer-recorded service
General Motors of Canada Limited
1-800-462-8583. TTY users in records and self-recorded service
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. records.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Online Owner Center D (Preferred Dealer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Information): Select a preferred
www.gmc.ca Online Owner Experience dealer and view dealer location,
1-800-263-3777 (English) (U.S.) my.gmc.com maps, phone numbers, and hours.
1-800-263-7854 (French)
The GMC online owner experience J (Warranty Tracking
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Information): Track the vehicle’s
is a one-stop resource that allows
Telephone Devices (TTYs)) warranty information.
interaction with GMC and keeps
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
important vehicle-specific J (Recall Information): View
information in one place. active recalls or search by Vehicle
All Overseas Locations Identification Number (VIN). See
Membership Benefits
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Please contact the local General E (Vehicle Information): on page 12-1.
Motors Business Unit. Download owner manuals and view
vehicle-specific how-to videos.
H (Other Account Information):
Customer Assistance for View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
G (Maintenance Information): radio, and OnStar account
Text Telephone (TTY) View maintenance schedules, information.
Users required alerts, OnStar onboard
F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
vehicle diagnostic information, and
To assist customers who are deaf, with online help representatives.
schedule service appointments.
hard of hearing, or speech impaired Visit my.gmc.com to register your
and who use Text Telephones
vehicle.
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
GMC Owner Centre (Canada) GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has
gmcowner.ca a Mobility Program. Call
Reimbursement Program 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
Take a trip to the GMC Owner details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. This program is available to 1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone
. Locate owner resources such as qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
lease-end, financing, and reimbursement of eligible For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
warranty information. aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800.
. required for the vehicle, such as
Retrieve your favorite articles, Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/
quizzes, tips and multimedia 365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
Sections. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information
. Download the owner manual for
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready:
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Find the GMC-recommended 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and
maintenance services for your home telephone number
vehicle. . Telephone number of your
location
. Location of the vehicle
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13

. Model, year, color, and license claims are made too often, or the
. Flat Tire Change: Service to
plate number of the vehicle same type of claim is made many change a flat tire with the spare
. Odometer reading, Vehicle times. tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
Identification Number (VIN), and must be in good condition and
Services Provided properly inflated. It is the owner's
delivery date of the vehicle
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: responsibility for the repair or
. Description of the problem replacement of the tire if it is not
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest covered by the warranty.
Coverage
service station. . Battery Jump Start: Service to
Services are provided up to 5 years/
. Lock-Out Service: Service to jump start a dead battery.
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first. unlock the vehicle if you are . Trip Interruption Benefits and
locked out. A remote unlock may Assistance: If your trip is
In the U.S., anyone driving the be available if you have interrupted due to a warranty
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a OnStar®. For security reasons, failure, incidental expenses may
person driving the vehicle without the driver must present be reimbursed during the
permission from the owner is not identification before this service 5 years/(160 000 km) 100,000 mi
covered. is given. Powertrain warranty period.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of . Emergency Tow From a Public Items considered are hotel,
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Road or Highway: Tow to the meals, and rental car.
GMC and General Motors of nearest GMC dealer for warranty
Canada Limited reserve the right to service, or if the vehicle was in a
make any changes or discontinue crash and cannot be driven.
the Roadside Assistance program at Assistance is also given when
any time without notification. the vehicle is stuck in the sand,
GMC and General Motors of mud, or snow.
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Services Not Included in General Motors of Canada Scheduling Service

Roadside Assistance Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
Appointments
. Impound towing caused by detailed receipts, and a copy of When the vehicle requires warranty
violation of any laws. the repair orders. Once service, contact your dealer and
. Legal fines. authorization has been received, request an appointment. By
the Roadside Assistance advisor scheduling a service appointment
. Mounting, dismounting,
will help to make arrangements and advising the service consultant
or changing of snow tires,
and explain how to receive of your transportation needs, your
chains, or other traction devices.
payment. dealer can help minimize your
. Towing or services for vehicles . Alternative Service: If inconvenience.
driven on a non-public road or
assistance cannot be provided If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
highway.
right away, the Roadside into the service department
Services Specific to Assistance advisor may give immediately, keep driving it until it
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles permission to get local can be scheduled for service,
emergency road service. You will unless, of course, the problem is
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement receive payment, up to $100, safety related. If it is, please call
is approximately $5 Canadian. after sending the original receipt your dealership, let them know this,
Diesel fuel delivery may be to Roadside Assistance. and ask for instructions.
restricted. Propane and other Mechanical failures may be
fuels are not provided through If your dealer requests you to bring
covered, however any cost for
this service. the vehicle for service, you are
parts and labor for repairs not
urged to do so as early in the work
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle covered by the warranty are the
day as possible to allow for
registration is required. owner responsibility.
same-day repair.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
250 kilometres from where your
trip was started to qualify.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options original receipts and can only be up

to the maximum amount allowed by
Program Warranty service can generally be
GM for shuttle service. In addition,
completed while you wait. However,
To enhance your ownership for U.S. customers, should you
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
experience, we and our participating arrange transportation through a
to minimize inconvenience by
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy friend or relative, limited
providing several transportation
Transportation, a customer support reimbursement for reasonable fuel
options. Depending on the
program for vehicles with the expenses may be available. Claim
circumstances, your dealer can offer
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty amounts should reflect actual costs
one of the following:
Coverage period in Canada), and be supported by original
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle Service receipts. See your dealer for
hybrid-specific warranties in both information regarding the allowance
Shuttle service is the preferred
the U.S. and Canada. amounts for reimbursement of fuel
means of offering Courtesy
or other transportation costs.
Several Courtesy Transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide
options are available to assist in shuttle service to get you to your Courtesy Rental Vehicle
reducing inconvenience when destination with minimal interruption
Your dealer may arrange to provide
warranty repairs are required. of your daily schedule. This includes
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
Courtesy Transportation is not a one-way or round-trip shuttle service
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
part of the New Vehicle Limited within reasonable time and distance
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
Warranty. A separate booklet parameters of your dealer's area.
for an overnight warranty repair.
entitled “Limited Warranty and Public Transportation or Fuel Rental reimbursement will be limited
Owner Assistance Information” Reimbursement and must be supported by original
furnished with each new vehicle receipts. This requires that you sign
provides detailed warranty coverage If the vehicle requires overnight
and complete a rental agreement
information. warranty repairs, and public
and meet state/provincial, local, and
transportation is used instead of
rental vehicle provider requirements.
your dealer's shuttle service, the
Requirements vary and may include
expense must be supported by
minimum age requirements,
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Collision Damage Repair vehicles that were total losses in
You are responsible for fuel usage prior crashes. In most cases, the
charges and may also be If the vehicle is involved in a parts being recycled are from
responsible for taxes, levies, usage collision and it is damaged, have the undamaged sections of the vehicle.
fees, excessive mileage, or rental damage repaired by a qualified A recycled original equipment GM
usage beyond the completion of the technician using the proper part may be an acceptable choice to
repair. equipment and quality replacement maintain the vehicle's originally
parts. Poorly performed collision designed appearance and safety
It may not be possible to provide a repairs diminish the vehicle resale
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. performance; however, the history of
value, and safety performance can these parts is not known. Such parts
Additional Program be compromised in subsequent are not covered by the GM New
Information collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
Collision Parts related failures are not covered by
All program options, such as shuttle that warranty.
service, may not be available at Genuine GM Collision parts are new
every dealer. Please contact your parts made with the same materials Aftermarket collision parts are also
dealer for specific information about and construction methods as the available. These are made by
availability. All Courtesy parts with which the vehicle was companies other than GM and may
Transportation arrangements will be originally built. Genuine GM not have been tested for the vehicle.
administered by appropriate dealer Collision parts are the best choice to As a result, these parts may fit
personnel. ensure that the vehicle's designed poorly, exhibit premature durability/
appearance, durability, and safety corrosion problems, and may not
General Motors reserves the right to perform properly in subsequent
unilaterally modify, change, are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
or discontinue Courtesy covered by the GM New Vehicle
Transportation at any time and to New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
resolve all questions of claim Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not
eligibility pursuant to the terms and may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty.
conditions described herein at its parts are typically removed from
sole discretion.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the Give only the necessary information
vehicle will be repaired with GM to police and other parties involved
GM also recommends that you
original equipment collision parts. in the crash.
choose a collision repair facility that
If such insurance coverage is not For emergency towing see
meets your needs before you ever
available from your current Roadside Assistance Program on
need collision repairs. Your dealer
insurance carrier, consider switching page 13-5.
may have a collision repair center
to another insurance carrier.
with GM-trained technicians and Gather the following information:
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
able to recommend a collision repair company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and
center that has GM-trained insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
technicians and comparable Genuine GM Original Equipment . Driver license number.
equipment. Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
. Owner name, address, and
Insuring the Vehicle parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
Protect your investment in the GM you may be charged at the end of . Vehicle license plate number.
vehicle with comprehensive and the lease for poor quality repairs. . Vehicle make, model, and
collision insurance coverage. There If a Crash Occurs model year.
are significant differences in the
. Vehicle Identification
quality of coverage afforded by If there has been an injury, call
various insurance policy terms. emergency services for help. Do not Number (VIN).
Many insurance policies provide leave the scene of a crash until all . Insurance company and policy
reduced protection to the GM matters have been taken care of. number.
vehicle by limiting compensation for Move the vehicle only if its position
damage repairs through the use of puts you in danger, or you are
. General description of the
aftermarket collision parts. Some instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle.
insurance companies will not officer.
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Choose a reputable repair facility aftermarket parts. Discuss this with Service Publications
that uses quality replacement parts. the repair professional, and insist on
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Ordering Information
section. if the vehicle is leased, you may be Service Manuals
If the airbag has inflated, see What obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts, Service Manuals have the diagnosis
Will You See after an Airbag and repair information on the
Inflates? on page 3-27. even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost. engines, transmission, axle,
Managing the Vehicle Damage suspension, brakes, electrical,
If another party's insurance steering, body, etc.
Repair Process company is paying for the repairs,
In the event that the vehicle requires you are not obligated to accept a Service Bulletins
damage repairs, GM recommends repair valuation based on that Service Bulletins give additional
that you take an active role in its insurance company's collision policy technical service information
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair limits, as you have no needed to knowledgeably service
repair facility of choice, take the contractual limits with that company. General Motors cars and trucks.
vehicle there, or have it towed there. In such cases, you can have control Each bulletin contains instructions
Specify to the facility that any of the repair and parts choices as to assist in the diagnosis and
required replacement collision parts long as the cost stays within service of the vehicle.
be original equipment parts, either reasonable limits.
new Genuine GM parts or recycled Owner Information
original GM parts. Remember, Owner publications are written
recycled parts will not be covered by specifically for owners and intended
the GM vehicle warranty. to provide basic operational
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, information about the vehicle. The
but you must live with the repair. Owner Manual includes the
Depending on your policy limits, Maintenance Schedule for all
your insurance company may models.
initially value the repair using
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Or write to: Reporting Safety

Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Manual. Attention: Customer Service
Defects
RETAIL SELL PRICE: 47911 Halyard Drive
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Plymouth, MI 48170 Reporting Safety Defects
shipping fees. Prices are subject to change without to the United States
Without Portfolio: Owner notice and without incurring Government
Manual only. obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery. If you believe that your vehicle
RETAIL SELL PRICE: has a defect which could cause
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and All listed prices are quoted in U.S. a crash or could cause injury or
shipping fees. funds. Make checks payable in U.S. death, you should immediately
funds.
Current and Past Models inform the National Highway
Technical Service Bulletins and
Traffic Safety Administration
Manuals are available for current (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
and past model GM vehicles. General Motors.
ORDER TOLL FREE: If NHTSA receives similar
1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday complaints, it may open an
8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time investigation, and if it finds that
For Credit Card Orders Only a safety defect exists in a group
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see of vehicles, it may order a recall
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com. and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
To contact NHTSA, you may call Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects
the Vehicle Safety Hotline to the Canadian to General Motors
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
http://www.safercar.gov; or If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
write to: believe that the vehicle has a safety this, please notify General Motors.
defect, notify Transport Canada Call 1-800-GMC-8782
Administrator, NHTSA immediately, and notify General (1-800-462-8782), or write:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Washington, D.C. 20590 GMC Customer Assistance Center
Transport Canada at
P.O. Box 33172
You can also obtain other 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
information about motor Transport Canada
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
vehicle safety from Road Safety Branch
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
http://www.safercar.gov. 80 rue Noel
(French), or write:
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a
better understanding of the
Recording and This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
Privacy main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a
The vehicle has a number of record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
computers that record information crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under
about the vehicle’s performance and bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no
how it is driven. For example, the obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender,
vehicle uses computer modules to understanding how a vehicle’s age, and crash location) are
monitor and control engine and systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties,
transmission performance, to designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could
monitor the conditions for airbag vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type
deployment and deploy them in a systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data
crash, and, if equipped, to provide typically 30 seconds or less. The routinely acquired during a crash
antilock braking to help the driver EDR in this vehicle is designed to investigation.
control the vehicle. These modules record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR,
may store data to help the dealer . How various systems in your special equipment is required, and
technician service the vehicle. vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is
Some modules may also store data needed. In addition to the vehicle
about how the vehicle is operated,
. Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as
such as rate of fuel consumption or law enforcement, that have the
average speed. These modules may buckled/fastened;
.
special equipment, can read the
retain personal preferences, such as How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
radio presets, seat positions, and depressing the accelerator and/ the vehicle or the EDR.
temperature settings. or brake pedal; and,
GM will not access this data or
. How fast the vehicle was share it with others except: with the
traveling. consent of the vehicle owner or,
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
if the vehicle is leased, with the OnStar Terms and Conditions and GM vehicles does not use or record
consent of the lessee; in response Privacy Statement on the OnStar personal information or link with any
to an official request by police or website. other GM system containing
similar government office; as part of personal information.
GM's defense of litigation through Infotainment System
the discovery process; or, as
If the vehicle is equipped with a
Radio Frequency
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be navigation system as part of the Statement
used for GM research needs or may infotainment system, use of the This vehicle has systems that
be made available to others for system may result in the storage of operate on a radio frequency that
research purposes, where a need is destinations, addresses, telephone comply with Part 15 of the Federal
shown and the data is not tied to a numbers, and other trip information. Communications Commission (FCC)
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. See the infotainment manual for rules and with Industry Canada
information on stored data and for Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
deletion instructions.
OnStar® Operation is subject to the following
If the vehicle is equipped with Radio Frequency two conditions:
OnStar® and has an active 1. The device may not cause
subscription, additional data may be
Identification (RFID)
harmful interference.
collected through the OnStar RFID technology is used in some
system. This includes information vehicles for functions such as tire 2. The device must accept any
about the vehicle’s operation; about pressure monitoring and ignition interference received, including
collisions involving the vehicle; the system security, as well as in interference that may cause
use of the vehicle and its features; connection with conveniences such undesired operation of the
and, in certain situations, the as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) device.
location and approximate GPS transmitters for remote door locking/ Changes or modifications to any of
speed of the vehicle. Refer to the unlocking and starting, and these systems by other than an
in-vehicle transmitters for garage authorized service facility could void
door openers. RFID technology in authorization to use this equipment.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
2 NOTES
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Press = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Press Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicle’s key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
14-2 OnStar
Press the OnStar Emergency button OnStar Services Navigation

> to get a priority connection to an
Emergency Advisor available OnStar navigation requires the
24/7 to: Emergency Directions and Connections
With Automatic Crash Response, service plan.
. Get help for an emergency.
the built-in system can automatically Press Q to receive directions or
. Be a Good Samaritan or connect to help in most crashes,
respond to an AMBER Alert. have them sent to the vehicle
even if help cannot be requested. navigation screen, if equipped.
. Get assistance in severe Destinations can also be forwarded
Press > to connect to an
weather or other crisis and to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
evacuation routes. Emergency Advisor. GPS
technology is used to identify the The OnStar mapping database is
vehicle location and can provide continuously updated. For coverage
critical information to emergency maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)
personnel. The Advisor is also www.onstar.ca (Canada).
trained to offer critical assistance in Turn-by-Turn Navigation
emergency situations.
1. Press Q to connect to a live
Security Advisor.
OnStar provides services like Stolen 2. Request directions.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition 3. Directions are downloaded to the
Block, and Roadside Assistance, vehicle.
if equipped. OnStar can unlock the
vehicle doors remotely, if equipped 4. Follow the voice-guided
with automatic door locks, and can commands.
help police locate the vehicle if it is
stolen.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds After the call ends, press the “Go”
During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then button on the navigation screen to
responds with “OnStar ready,” begin driving directions.
Cancel Route then a tone. If directions are downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: Get My Destination navigation system, the route can
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say only be canceled through the
“Cancel route.” System 1. Press =. System responds: navigation system.
responds: “Do you want to “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
Destinations can also be
cancel directions?” 2. Say “Get my destination.” downloaded on the go. For
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: System responds with address information about eNav, Destination
“OK, request completed, thank and the distance to the Download, and coverage maps see
you, goodbye.” destination, then responds with www.onstar.com (U.S.),
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Route Preview
Other Navigation Services
1. Press =. System responds: Available from OnStar Connections
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
2. Say “Route preview.” System to send destinations from calls to be made and received from
responds with the next three MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
maneuvers. Navigation or screen-based controlled through the OnStar
navigation system. When ready, the RemoteLink® mobile app. For
Repeat coverage maps, see
directions will be downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: vehicle. www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Destination Download: Press Q,
then request the Advisor to
download directions to the
navigation system in the vehicle.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
14-4 OnStar
OnStar Mobile App Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed
Download the OnStar RemoteLink Dialing
1. Press =. System responds:
mobile app to select Apple®, “OnStar Ready,” followed by 1. Press =. System responds:
Android™, and BlackBerry® devices a tone. “OnStar ready.”
to check vehicle fuel level, oil life,
or tire pressure; to start the vehicle 2. Say “Call.” System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
(if equipped) or unlock it; or to “Please say the name or number “Please say the number you
connect to an OnStar Advisor. For to call.” would like to store.”
OnStar RemoteLink information and 3. Say “911” without pausing. 3. Say the entire number without
compatibility, see www.onstar.com System responds: “911.” pausing. System responds:
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada). “Please say the name tag.”
4. Say “Call.” System responds:
Hands-Free Calling “OK, dialing 911.” 4. Pick a name tag. System
responds: “About to store <name
1. Press =. System responds: Retrieve My Number tag>. Does that sound OK?”
“OnStar ready.”
1. Press =. System responds: 5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
2. Say “Call.” System responds: “OnStar ready.” again. System responds: “OK,
“Please say the name or number storing <name tag>.”
to call.” 2. Say “My number.” System
responds: “Your OnStar Place a Call Using a Stored
3. Say the entire number without Hands-Free Calling number is,”
pausing, including a “1” and the Number
then says the number.
area code. System responds: 1. Press =. System responds:
“OK calling.” End a Call
“OnStar ready.”
Press =. System responds: “Call 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
ended.” responds: “OK, calling
<name tag>.”
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
OnStar 14-5
Verify Minutes and Expiration OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works
Press = and say “Minutes” then Information Automatic Crash Response,
“Verify” to check how many minutes Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
remain and their expiration date. Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
Diagnostics eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
perform a vehicle check every account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
month. It will check the engine, receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
transmission, antilock brakes, and ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
major vehicle systems. It also may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
checks the tire pressures, if the vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
vehicle is equipped with the Tire information. conditions:
Pressure Monitoring System. If an
Reactivation for Subsequent . Call 888-4-ONSTAR
On-Demand Diagnostics check is
Owners (888-466-7827).
needed between e-mails, press Q,
. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
and an Advisor can run a check. Press Q and follow the prompts to
. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible after acquiring the vehicle. . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
The Advisor will update vehicle
records and will explain the OnStar . Press Q to speak with an
service offers and options available. Advisor.
OnStar services require a vehicle
electrical system, wireless service,
and GPS satellite technologies to be
available and operating for features
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
14-6 OnStar
to function properly. These systems vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a system can provide in-vehicle
may not operate if the battery is crash, or wireless phone network access to all of the OnStar services,
discharged or disconnected. congestion or jamming. except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement on Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
your vehicle is in a place where page 13-15. OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca
OnStar has an agreement with a (Canada)
wireless service provider for service Services for People with
in that area, and the wireless Disabilities The website provides access to
service provider has coverage, Advisors provide services to help account information, allows
network capacity, reception, and subscribers with physical disabilities management of the OnStar
technology compatible with OnStar and medical conditions. subscription, and viewing of videos
service. Service involving location of each service. Get subscription
information about the vehicle cannot Press Q for help with: plan pricing and sign up for OnStar
work unless GPS signals are .
Vehicle Diagnostics. Click on the
Locating a gas station with an “My Account” tab on the home
available, unobstructed, and attendant to pump gas.
compatible with the OnStar page. The website navigation and
hardware. OnStar service may not
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., services provided may vary by
work if the OnStar equipment is not that meets accessibility needs. country.
properly installed or it has not been . Providing directions to the OnStar Personal Identification
properly maintained. If equipment or closest hospital or pharmacy in
software is added, connected,
Number (PIN)
urgent situations.
or modified, OnStar service may not A PIN is needed to access some of
work. Other problems beyond the TTY Users the OnStar services, like Remote
control of OnStar may prevent OnStar has the ability to Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
service such as hills, tall buildings, communicate to the deaf, Assistance. You will be prompted to
tunnels, weather, electrical system hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired change the PIN the first time when
design and architecture of the customers while in the vehicle. The speaking with an Advisor. To
available dealer-installed TTY
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
OnStar 14-7
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar Roadside Assistance and a route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the locksmith to help gain access to the after the vehicle is driven into an
current number. vehicle. open area.
Warranty Global Positioning Cellular and GPS Antennas
OnStar equipment may be System (GPS) Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the New . Obstruction of the GPS can antenna to prevent blocking cellular
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The occur in a large city with tall and GPS signal reception. Cellular
manufacturer of the vehicle buildings; in parking garages; reception is required for OnStar to
furnishes detailed warranty around airports; in tunnels, send remote signals to the vehicle.
information. underpasses, or parking
garages; or in an area with very
Unable to Connect to OnStar
Languages dense trees. If GPS signals are Message
The vehicle can be programmed to not available, the OnStar system If there is limited cellular coverage
respond in multiple languages. should still operate to call or the cellular network has reached
Press Q and ask an Advisor. OnStar. However, OnStar could maximum capacity, this message
Advisors are available in English, have difficulty identifying the may come on. Press Q to try the
Spanish and French. Available exact location. call again or try again after driving a
languages may vary by country. . In emergency situations, OnStar few miles into another cellular area.
can use the last stored GPS
Potential Issues location to send to emergency Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar cannot perform Remote responders. OnStar services require a vehicle
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle electrical system, wireless service,
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Assistance after the vehicle has and GPS satellite technologies to be
cause loss of the ability to send
been off continuously for five days. available and operating for features
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
After five days, OnStar can contact to function properly. These systems
The Advisor may give a verbal
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
14-8 OnStar
Add-on Electrical Equipment OnStar - libcurl and unzip FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
acknowledgments AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
The OnStar system is integrated
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
into the electrical architecture of the Certain OnStar components include EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
vehicle. Do not add any electrical libcurl and unzip software. Below COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
equipment. See Add-On Electrical are the notices and licenses LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
Equipment on page 9-102. Added associated with this software: DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
electrical equipment may interfere
libcurl: WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
with the operation of the OnStar
CONTRACT, TORT OR
system and cause it to not operate. COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
NOTICE OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
Privacy
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
The complete OnStar Privacy Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
Statement may be found at THE SOFTWARE.
www.onstar.com (U.S.), All rights reserved.
or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Except as contained in this notice,
Permission to use, copy, modify,
Privacy-sensitive users of wireless the name of a copyright holder shall
and distribute this software for any
communications are cautioned that not be used in advertising or
purpose with or without fee is
the privacy of any information sent otherwise to promote the sale, use
hereby granted, provided that the
via wireless cellular communications or other dealings in this Software
above copyright notice and this
cannot be assured. Third parties without prior written authorization of
permission notice appear in all
may unlawfully intercept or access the copyright holder.
copies.
transmissions and private
communications without consent. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
OnStar 14-9
unzip: Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, 2. Redistributions in binary form

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, (compiled executables) must
Info-ZIP copyright and license. The Rich Wales, Mike White reproduce the above copyright
definitive version of this document This software is provided “as is,” notice, definition, disclaimer, and
should be available at ftp:// without warranty of any kind, this list of conditions in
ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ express or implied. In no event shall documentation and/or other
license.html indefinitely. Info-ZIP or its contributors be held materials provided with the
liable for any direct, indirect, distribution. The sole exception
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All to this condition is redistribution
rights reserved. incidental, special or consequential
damages arising out of the use of or of a standard UnZipSFX binary
For the purposes of this copyright inability to use this software. (including SFXWiz) as part of a
and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as self-extracting archive; that is
the following set of individuals: Permission is granted to anyone to permitted without inclusion of
use this software for any purpose, this license, as long as the
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, including commercial applications, normal SFX banner has not
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, and to alter it and redistribute it been removed from the binary or
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed freely, subject to the following disabled.
Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris restrictions:
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, 1. Redistributions of source code
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, must retain the above copyright
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, notice, definition, disclaimer, and
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, this list of conditions.
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
14-10 OnStar
3. Altered versions–including, but 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use

not limited to, ports to new the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
operating systems, existing ports “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
with new graphical interfaces, “Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
and dynamic, shared, or static and “MacZip” for its own source
library versions–must be plainly and binary releases.
marked as such and must not be
misrepresented as being the
original source. Such altered
versions also must not be
misrepresented as being
Info-ZIP releases–including, but
not limited to, labeling of the
altered versions with the names
“Info-ZIP” (or any variation
thereof, including, but not limited
to, different capitalizations),
“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
“MacZip” without the explicit
permission of Info-ZIP. Such
altered versions are further
prohibited from
misrepresentative use of the
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Antilock Brake

What Makes an Airbag System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Accessories and
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
What Will You See after an Appearance Care
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-32
When Should an Airbag Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Add-On Electrical
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Assistance Program,
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-23 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Adding a Snow Plow or
Airbags Assistance Systems for
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102
Adding Equipment to the Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Additional Information
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Assistance Systems for
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Adjustable Throttle and
On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Audio
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Adjustments
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-19 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-17
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio System
Air Filter, Passenger
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Alarm Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Airbag System
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Automatic
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
How Does an Airbag
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Antenna Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Passenger Sensing
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-14
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
i-2 INDEX
Automatic Transmission Brake Bulb Replacement (cont'd)

Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 Pedal and Adjustable License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-41
Shift Lock Control Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-23 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Auxiliary Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Stoplamps, and
Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54 C
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
B Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 California
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-71
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Perchlorate Materials
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Center High-Mounted Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Voltage and Charging Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39, 6-5 Capacities and
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-37 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Carbon Monoxide
Bluetooth Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Overview . . . . . . . . 7-29, 7-31, 7-35, Headlamps, Front Turn Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
7-40, 7-45 Signal, Sidemarker, and Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Card Reader
SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Cargo
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
INDEX i-3
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Climate Control Systems . . . 8-1, 8-3 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Cautions, Danger, and Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Center High-Mounted Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Text Telephone (TTY)
Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Compartments Customer Information
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Service Publications
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Customer Satisfaction
Check Connections Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Ignition Control D
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-36 Traction and Electronic Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9
Child Restraints Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56 Danger, Warnings, and
Infants and Young Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14
Lower Anchors and Coolant Daytime Running
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-45 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Engine Temperature Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-64 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Diagnostics
Cleaning Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97 Courtesy Transportation Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
i-4 INDEX
Door Dual Automatic Climate Engine (cont'd)

Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Coolant Temperature
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Dual Tire Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Cooling System Messages . . .5-35
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-5 E Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-62 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Driver Information Electrical Equipment, Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29, 5-31 Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Driving Electrical System Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-65 Engine Compartment Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Characteristics and Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Overheated Protection
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-76 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Instrument Panel Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-46, 10-49 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-29 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-33
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-12 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-14 Engine Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Check and Service Engine Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-15 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
INDEX i-5
F Forward Collision Alert Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65 Engine Compartment
Fan
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-31, 9-39 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-24 Instrument Panel
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-46, 10-49
Features
Front Fog Lamp
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Filter,
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 G
Front Seats Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Heated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Gasoline
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72 Gauges
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29 Engine Coolant
FlexFuel
Filling a Portable Fuel Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
E85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-75 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-104
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Fluid
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-71 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-14
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-27 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Four-Wheel Drive
Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70 Warning Lights and
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Requirements, California . . . . .9-71 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Fog Lamps
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 10-39, 6-5
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
i-6 INDEX
General Information Heated I

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Idle System
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-75 Heated and Cooled Front
Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Ignition Transmission Lock
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Heater
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
GM Mobility Reimbursement Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Heating and Air
Indicator
Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3
Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
H High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Infants and Young Children,
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-62
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-12
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Headlamps Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . 9-58
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Hill Descent Control Light . . . . . . 5-25
Instrument Panel
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-18
Daytime Running Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Internet Radio
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Pandora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 How to Wear Safety Belts
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Headlamps, Front Turn Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-28
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-28
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
INDEX i-7
J Lamps (cont'd) Lights

On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Jack
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Antilock Brake System
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Lane Departure (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-23
K Lane Departure Warning Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-37 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Keyless Entry Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 LATCH System Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Replacing Parts after a High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
L Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-54 LATCH, Lower Anchors and Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-25
Lamps Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Auxiliary Roof LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16
Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Light Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Hill Decent Control . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3 Lighting Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Traction Control System
Exterior Lamps Off Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-20
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
i-8 INDEX
Locks Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-20 Messages (cont'd)

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Mirrors
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Messages Automatic Dimming
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-27 Battery Voltage and Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Lower Anchors and Tethers Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
for Children (LATCH Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-35 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
M Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Maintenance Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-18
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Monitor System, Tire
Maintenance Schedule Object Detection System . . . . .5-38 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Recommended Fluids Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
INDEX i-9
N OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Parking

OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Navigation
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Brake and P (Park)
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-32
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-34
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Parking or Backing
Ordering Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-63
O Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11 Passenger Airbag Status
Object Detection System Outlets Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Passenger Compartment Air
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Overheated Engine Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Protection Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-30
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Perchlorate Materials
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Overview, Infotainment Personalization
Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Phone
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13
Engine Oil Pressure
P Bluetooth . . . . . . . . 7-29, 7-31, 7-35,
7-40, 7-45
Pandora Internet Radio . . . . . . . . 7-11
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Pickup Conversion to
Park
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-106
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-37 Port
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
OnStar® Power
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
OnStar® Additional Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
i-10 INDEX
Power (cont'd) Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Replacement Parts

Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-29 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10, 3-11 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-36
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Replacing LATCH System
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Pregnancy, Using Safety Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Replacing Safety Belt
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-21
Privacy Recommended Reporting Safety Defects
Radio Frequency Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15 Recommended Fluids and General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Program Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8 Records Restraints
Proposition 65 Warning, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Recreational Vehicle Retained Accessory
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
R Reimbursement Program, Ride Control Systems
Radio Frequency GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roads
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Radios Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Roadside Assistance
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Replacement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
INDEX i-11
Roof SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Service (cont'd)

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Seats Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Publications Ordering
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-5 Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Running the Vehicle While Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Shift Lock Control Function
S Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Check, Automatic
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10, 3-11 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Shifting
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Securing Child Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
How to Wear Safety Belts Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-64 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Security Signals, Turn and
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-21 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Specifications and
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-19 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Safety Defects Reporting Service Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Accessories and StabiliTrak
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Maintenance, General Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
i-12 INDEX
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 System Tires (cont'd)

Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Forward Collision Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15, 7-1 Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-64
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps Systems Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Driver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Storage Areas Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 T Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-63
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Terminology and
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13 Uniform Tire Quality
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Switches Tires Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-75
Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 When It Is Time for New
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
INDEX i-13
Towing Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 V

Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-76 Truck-Camper Loading
Vehicle
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-92 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-75 Turn and Lane-Change
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-95 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-78 Turn Signal
Identification
Trailer Sway Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94 U Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Traction Uniform Tire Quality Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Control System (TCS)/ Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-42
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-47 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Traction Control/Electronic Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47 Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 Updates Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Trailer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-25
Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . 9-101 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Vehicle Care
Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-78
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Transmission
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
5853626) - 2014 - 1st crc - 3/7/13
i-14 INDEX
W Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-43

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Warning
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-68
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Windshield
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Winter
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-37
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

2014 Sierra1500 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 Sierra1500 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GMC Sierra Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.

/Canada/Mexico- Black plate (1,1)

2014 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2014 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

Danger, Warnings, and Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart j : LATCH System Child

In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)

Uplevel Shown, Base similar

See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote Canceling a Remote Start

Door Locks Power Door Locks

Windows ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, Power Sliding Rear Window

Seat Adjustment Power Seats Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

To adjust a manual seat:

Power Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features Heated and Cooled Front

Crew/Extended Cab Shown, Other

Press A to cool the driver or Safety Belts Passenger Sensing

Exterior Mirrors 2. Press one of the four arrows on

Canada and Mexico

2. Press the arrows on the control Interior Mirror Steering Wheel

To adjust the tilt and telescope

To change the dome lamp settings, Exterior Lighting

1. Fan Control 4. Defrost

Climate Control System (with Air Conditioning)

1. Fan Control 5. TEMP (Temperature Control)

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

The Range Selection Mode switch,

Automatic Transfer Case 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use Vehicle Features

Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices

See Bluetooth (Infotainment Steering Wheel Controls

The favorite and volume switches

V : Press to open a menu or select Lane Departure Ultrasonic Parking Assist

the sunroof reaches the desired

Engine Oil Life System 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Programming Keys Programming without a

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Pressing Q arms the content Pressing K on the RKE transmitter

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

RUN or 7 is pressed again. The

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Pressing the power lock switch Lockout Protection

Delayed Locking To unlock the doors:

If equipped, when locking the doors

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Safety Locks Doors To shut the tailgate, firmly push it

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Exterior Mirrors Using hood-mounted air deflectors

The passenger side mirror is convex

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows